Vedantu’s

Vedantu’s Tatva
Vedantu’s Tatva Practice
TatvaPractice
Practice Book| Biology
Book Book- Vol.
| Physics - Vol.
2 !

Physics
Genetics and
Evolution
Class 12 CBSE
Class 11 JEE

TESLA

SCAN
SCAN CODE
CODE
to know
know how
how to
to explore to
use
use this
this Book
Vedantu Book
 Academic Progress for every Student

Regular tests &

assignments

VEDANTU
IMPROVEMENT Report card with
PROMISE detailed analysis

VIP

Parent-teacher
meetings

Our Extraordinary Results 2022

5.2X
HIGHER

1414 869
CBSE 10 scored above
3.8X
Vedantu students
90% JEE Main
Vedantu students
scored above 99%ile
HIGHER
6.6X
HIGHER

1000+ 1500+
Vedantu students Vedantu students aced
NEET cleared NEET 2022 JEE Adv. JEE Advanced 2022

student scoring above 90%

SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Pvt. Ltd.
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
Notice: Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best resources and knowledge.
Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book from sources regarded
as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this book. However, as authors and
publishers, we are not to be held responsible for unintentional mistakes that might have crept
in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged
and rectified in upcoming editions.

Printed by
Sanjay Printers, U.P.
[email protected]
Tatva Practice Book
Features

1
Solve all types of
exercise questions
based on the latest
CBSE exam pattern.

2Scan the QR code in the

Answers Section to view
detailed solutions for all
exercise questions.
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,

I am delighted to present to you a comprehensive Ready Reckoner with amazing content that will guide
you through your exams—‘TATVA’. Tatva means ‘Core’ and the word is fully aligned with the culture,
mission, and vision of Vedantu, which is why it gives me immense pleasure and joy to share this book
with you. Vedantu has always aimed to revolutionize the teaching and learning process and we have
speedily progressed towards bringing a superior quality of educational content to your table. Tatva is a
step forward in this direction. This book is your guide, your practice guru, and your companion in
moving towards your dreams. The final product that you now have in the form of Tatva is the result of
consistent effort, diligence, and research by our experienced team of subject experts and teachers.
This book has summarised points of each chapter in the form of “Chapter at a Glance” to suit the needs
of Grades 11-12 students.
Here are a few guiding points to optimally use Tatva with a planned approach:
• Practice relevant questions daily after finishing Vedantu lectures and session assignments. We
believe that a daily dose of Tatva will keep all your exam blues at bay.
• Use the Tatva booklet to mark notes so that it always comes in handy for last-minute revisions
before your exams. Notes should include key points along with questions which you couldn't solve
in the first attempt.
• Exercise 1 of the book includes subjective board pattern questions and Exercise 2 includes SCQs,
assertion reasoning questions, and case-based questions. Exercise 3 consists of previous year
board questions.

Before wrapping up, remember the practice mantra: “Practice what you know, and it will help to make
clear what now you do not know.” – Rembrandt
We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself because success is only one step
away. We wish that your talent shines bright. All the very best!

Anand Prakash
Founder and Academic Head, Vedantu

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE/NEET
and Olympiads. He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6, 7 (JEE
Advanced), AIR-1, 7, 9(AIIMS), and thousands of more students who have
successfully cleared these competitive exams in the last few years.
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Franklin D. Roosevelt

Tatva is the brainchild of a group of creative Vedans who have strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you.
We extend our heartfelt gratitude to the superb team of Vedans who give wings to the vision of Vedantu,
starting with our leaders who have been guiding and encouraging us at every step of the way:
Vamsi Krishna Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Jain Sir

We thank our leaders for their insight and mentorship. They steered the project in the right direction and were
instrumental in making Tatva a reality:
Sahil Bhatia, Sudhanshu Jain, Shubam Gupta, Ajay Mittal, Arshad Shahid, Jaideep Sontakke

The managers who embodied every aspect of what Tatva aimed to accomplish and brought their ideas and
diligence to the table to execute this vision immaculately:
Harish Rao, Neha Surana, Charubak Chakrabarti, Prashant Palande

Physics Team
We truly appreciate all the Master Teachers of Vedantu whose relentless efforts helped us translate this vision
into reality. Our heartfelt gratitude to our creative content developers and the typesetting team, who have put
in their hard work, insight, and eagerness to nurture and execute Tatva into ‘your ready handbook’ and bring a
positive learning experience to you.
Teachers Subject Matter Experts
Gaurang Shah Atul Singh (Team Lead)
Kanchan Kumari Pukhraj Singh

Typesetting Team Graphic Designers

Nikhil Arora Virender Kumar Kinjal Sojitra

We cannot thank the creative team enough. Their creative minds and contagious energy have added a visual
flair, truly making Tatva the treasure trove of knowledge that it is.
Nilanjan Chowdhury Rabin Jacob Jayamol Joseph Mohit Kamboj

We thank and appreciate the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, and Savin Khandelwal.

The journey of bringing Tatva to life, from an idea to the book you are holding, would not have been possible
without the extensive support of our diligent Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated
team of Teachers, and our talented Tech Team.
6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Electric Charges and Fields

Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 10

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 13

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 18

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 20

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 25

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..276

Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance

Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 29

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 32

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 39

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 41

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 46

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..277

Current Electricity
Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 52

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 54

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 60

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 62

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 66

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..278
 7

Moving Charges and Magnetism

Chapter at a Glance ………………………………………………………………………………………… 78

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 81

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 88

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 90

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 95

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..280

Magnetism and Matter

Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 100

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 102

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 108

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 110

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 116

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..282

Electromagnetic Induction
Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 118

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 121

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 128

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 130

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 134

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..283

Alternating Current and Electromagnetic Waves

Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 141

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 144

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 149

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 151

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 155

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..284
8

Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 162

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 165

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 172

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 174

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 178

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..286

Wave Optics
Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 182

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 185

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 192

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 194

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 198

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..287

Dual Nature of Matter and Radiation

Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 202

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 205

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 210

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 212

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 216

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..288

Atoms
Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 220

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 223

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 229

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 231

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 235

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..289
 9

Nuclei
Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 239

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 243

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 248

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 250

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 254

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..290

Semiconductor Devices & Communication System

Chapter at a Glance........................................................................................................................................ 257

Solved Examples........................................................................................................................................ 260

Exercise - 1: Basic Subjective Questions.................................................................................................... 266

Exercise - 2: Basic Objective Questions....................................................................................................... 268

Exercise - 3: Previous Year Questions............................................................................................................. 272

Answer Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………..291
 01
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 11

where the electric field is weak. In regions of constant

Chapter at a Glance electric field, the field lines are uniformly spaced
parallel straight lines.
1. From simple experiments on frictional electricity, one
can infer that there are two types of charges in nature;
and that like charges repel and unlike charges attract.
By convention, the charge on a glass rod rubbed with
silk is positive; that on a plastic rod rubbed with fur is
7. Some of the important properties of field lines are: (i)
then negative.
Field lines are continuous curves without any breaks.
2. Charge is not only a scalar (or invariant) under rotation; (ii) Two field lines cannot cross each other. (iii)
it is also invariant for frames of reference in relative Electrostatic field lines start at positive charges and end
motion. This is not always true for every scalar. For at negative charges (iv) They cannot form closed loops.
Example-, kinetic energy is a scalar under rotation, but
is not invariant for frames of reference in relative
motion.
3. Conductors allow movement of electric charge through
them, insulators do not. In metals, the mobile charges
are electrons; in electrolytes both positive and negative
ions are mobile.
8. Electric flux is the measure of the field lines crossing a
4. Coulomb’s Law: The mutual electrostatic force N
between two point charges q1 and q2 is proportional to surface. It is scalar quantity, with SI unit -m2 or V-
C
the product q1q2 and inversely proportional to the m. “The number of field lines passing through
square of the distance r21 separating them. perpendicular unit area will be proportional to the
k(q1q 2 )  magnitude of Electric Field there”
F21 = force on q2 due to q1 = 2
r 21
r21 9. Gauss’s law: The flux of electric field through any
closed surface S is 1/ε0 times the total charge enclosed
where r 21 is a unit vector in the direction from q1 to q2 by S. The law is especially useful in determining
1 electric field E, when the source distribution has simple
and k = is the constant of proportionality.
4πε0 symmetry.
In SI units, the unit of charge is coulomb. The 10. An electric dipole is a pair of equal and opposite
experimental value of the constant ε0 is charges q and –q separated by some distance 2a. Its
dipole moment vector p has magnitude 2qa and is in the
ε0 8.854 × 10−12 C2 N − m −2
= direction of the dipole axis from –q to q.
The approximate value of k is 9 × 109 N m2 C–2 11. Field of an electric dipole in its equatorial plane (i.e.,
5. Superposition Principle: The principle is based on the the plane perpendicular to its axis and passing through
property that the forces with which two charges attract its centre) at a distance r from the centre:
or repel each other are not affected by the presence of −P 1 −P
a third (or more) additional charge(s). For an assembly =E ≅ . for r >> α
4πε0 (α 2 + r 2 )3/2 4πεo r 3
of charges Q1, Q2, Q3..., the force on any charge, say
Q1, is the vector sum of the force on Q1 due to Q2, the
force on Q1 due to Q3, and so on. For each pair, the
force is given by Coulomb's law for two charges stated
earlier.
6. An electric field line is a curve drawn in such a way
that the tangent at each point on the curve gives the
direction of the electric field at that point. The relative
closeness of field lines indicates the relative strength of
electric field at different points; they crowd near each
other in regions of strong electric field and are far apart
12 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

Dipole electric field on the axis at a distance r from the (iii) At a point on the axis of
centre: disc
 
2pr 2kQ  x 
E= =E 1−
R 2  
( )
3/2
4πε 0 (r 2 − α 2 )3 R + x2
2

 
2p
≅ for r >> α
4πε 0 r 3
(iv) Hollow sphere For x < R: E = 0
kQ
For x ≥ R: E =
x2

The 1/r3 dependence of dipole electric fields should be

noted in contrast to the 1/r2 dependence of electric field
due to a point charge.
12. In a uniform electric field E, a dipole experiences a
torque τ given by: τ=p×E
kQx
For x < R: E =
but experiences no net force. R3
(v) Non conducting solid
sphere kQ
For x ≥ R: E =
x2

13. Electric Field Due to Various Uniform Charge

Distribution
(i) At the centre of circular arc
(vi) Infinite thin sheet
kQ sin ( θ / 2 )
E= σ
R2 θ / 2 E=
2ε0

kQx (vii) Infinite wire

(ii) At a point on the axis of E=
ring (R 2
+x )
2 3/2

2kλ
E=
x
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 13

Solved Examples
Example-1 Example-7
If a body contains n1 electrons and n2 protons then Write coulomb’s law in vector notation and explain it.
what is the total charge on the body?  qq
Sol. (n2 - n1) e Sol. F12 = k 1 2 2 rˆ12
r12
Example-2 Where F12 is the force on 1 due to 2.
  
Write the expression for quantization of charge and r12= r1 − r2
explain the terms in it. Where r1 and r2 are the position vectors of q1 and q2.
Sol. q = ne: n is an integer and e is the basic unit of charge And the unit vector is in the direction of r12.
i.e. charge on an electron.
Example-8
Example-3 Does Coulomb’s law of electric force obey Newton’s
Repulsion is the sure test of electrification rather than third law of motion?
attraction. Why? Sol. Yes, it obeys. Forces exerted by two charges on each
Sol. A charged body can attract an oppositely charged body other are always (1). Equal and Opposite, (2). Equal in
and also a neutral body. But it can repel only a charged Magnitude, (3). Applied on two different Charges, (4).
body. Nature of the forces are the same.

Example-4 Example-9
Mention three properties of electric charge. What is the advantage of introducing the concept of
Sol. (i) Charges are additive in nature. electric field?
(ii) Charges are Conservative. Sol. By knowing the electric field at a point, the force on
(iii) Charge is quantized. i.e., q = ne, Where n is any the charge placed at that point can easily be calculated.
integer, positive or negative. This basic unit of charge
is the charge that an electron or proton carries. Example-10
• By convention, the charge on an electron is taken A positively charged particle is free to move in an
to be negative; Therefore charge on an electron is electric field, will it always move along the electric
field?
written as -e, charge on a proton is positive, written
Sol. The tangent at any point to the line of force gives the
as +e.
direction of electric field and hence of force on a
• The value of the basic unit of charge is e = 1.6 х charge at that point. If a positively charged particle
10-19C starts from rest, it will move along the line of force. If
it is in motion and moves initially at an angle with the
Example-5 line of force, then the resultant path is not along the
Define one coulomb of charge. line of force.
Sol. 1C is the charge that when placed at a distance of 1m
from another charge of the same magnitude, in Example-11
vacuum, experiences an electrical force of magnitude The magnitude of electrostatic force experienced by a
9 x 109 N charge of 1 × 10–6 C is 1.5 × 10–3 N.
Find the magnitude of the electric field at the position
Example-6 of the charge.
 
A charged metallic sphere A having charge qA is Sol. F = qE
brought in contact with an uncharged metallic sphere
of same radius and then separated by a distance d. ⇒F=
qE
What is the electrostatic force between them?
Sol. Charge on both the spheres will become qA/2. So, the (
⇒ 1.5 × 10−3 = 1× 10−6 E)
electrostatic force between them becomes F 1.5 × 10−3
⇒E= = N/C
kq 2 q 1× 10−6
F = A2
4d
⇒ E = 1.5 × 103 N / C
14 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

Example-12 Example-15
A small sphere of mass 1 g carries a charge of +6μC. A cylinder of radius R and length L is placed in a
The sphere is suspended by a string in an electric field uniform electric field E parallel to the cylinder axis.
of 400 NC–1 acting downwards. Calculate tension in Find the total flux for all the surfaces of the cylinder.
the string. Sol. Flux through surface A
Sol. Here
m =1g =10−3 kg, q =+6µC =+6 × 10−6 C
E = 400NC−1 (in download direction)
From figure:

φA = E × πR 2 and φB = − E × πR 2
Flux through curved surface
=φC ∫ Eds
= cos 90° 0
Total flux through cylinder
T =Fe + mg =qE + mg = φ A + φ B + φC = 0
6 10−6 × 400 + 10−3 × 9.8
=×
122 × 10−4 N =
= 1.22 × 10−2 N Example-16
The electrostatic force on a small sphere of charge 0.4
Example-13 µC due to another small sphere of charge –0.8 µC in
Sketch the electric field lines in the case of two equal air is 0.2 N. (a) What is the distance between the two
and opposite charges separated by a short distance. spheres? (b) What is the force on the second sphere
Sol. due to the first (NCERT)
Sol. (a) Charge of the first sphere is, q1 = 0.4 µC = 0.4 ×
10-6C
Charge of the second sphere is, q2 = -0.8µC
= -0.8 × 10-6C
We have the electrostatic force given by Coulomb’s
law as,
1 q1q 2
F=
4πε0 r 2
Example 14 q1q 2
⇒r=
Find out the electric flux linked to a coil present in the 4πε 0 F
electric field E0 as shown in the diagram.
Substituting the given values in the above equation, we
get,
0.4 × 10−6 × 8 × 10−6 × 9 × 109
⇒r=
0.2
r
⇒= 144× 10−4
∴ r = 0.12 m
Sol. We know Therefore, we found the distance between charged
  sphere to be r = 0.12 m.
= φ E A cos θ
(b) From Newton’s third law of motion, we know that
θ= 53° (Angle between E0 and A) every action has an equal and opposite reaction.
=φ E 0 A cos 53° Thus, we could say that the given two spheres would
3 attract each other with the same force.
φ = E0 A So, the force on the second sphere due to the first
5
sphere will be 0.2N
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 15

Example-17 cancel out each other. Similarly, (3) and (4) are of the
(a) Explain the meaning of the statement ‘electric same magnitude but in the opposite direction and
charge of a body is quantised’. hence they cancel out each other too. Hence, the net
(b) Why can one ignore quantisation of electric charge force on charge at centre O is found to be zero.
when dealing with macroscopic i.e., large scale
charges? (NCERT) Example-19
Sol. The given statement ‘Electric charge of a body is Two point charges qA = 3 µC and qB = - 3 µC are
quantized’ means that only integral number (1, 2,3,..., located 20 cm apart in vacuum.
n) of electrons can be transferred from one body to (a) What is the electric field at the midpoint O of the
another. That is, charges cannot be transferred from line AB joining the two charges ?
one body to another in fraction. (b) If a negative test charge of magnitude 1.5 × 10-9 C
(b) On a macroscopic scale or large-scale, the is placed at this point, what is the force experienced by
number of charges is as large asthe magnitude of an the test charge? (NCERT)
electric charge. Sol. The situation could be represented in the following
So, quantization is considered insignificant at a figure. Let O be the midpoint of line AB.
macroscopic scale for anelectric charge and electric
charges are considered continuous.

Example-18
Four point charges qA = 2 µC, qB = –5 µC, qC = 2 µC, We are given :
and qD = –5 µC are located at the corners of a square AB = 20 cm
ABCD of side 10 cm. What is the force on a charge of AO = OB = 10 cm
1 µC placed at the centre of the square? (NCERT) Take E to be the electric field at point O, then,
Sol. Consider the square of side length 10cm given below The electric field at point O due to charge +3µC would
with four charges at its corners and let O be its centre. be,
3 × 10−6 3 × 10−6
=E1 = NC−1 along OB
4πε0 (AO) 2 4πε0 (10 × 10−2 ) 2
The electric field at point O due to charge – 3 µC
would be,
3 × 10−6 3 × 10−6
=E2 = 2
NC −1 along OB
4πε 0 (OB) 4πε 0 (10 × 10−2 ) 2
The net electric field,
From the figure we find the diagonals to be, ⇒ E = E1 + E2
AC = BD = 10 2 cm 9 × 109 × 3 × 10−6
⇒E=2×
⇒ AO = OC = DO = OB = 5 2 cm (10 × 10−2 ) 2
Now the repulsive force at O due to charge at A. ⇒ E = 5.4 × 106 NC-1
qA q0 (+2µC)(1µC) Therefore, the electric field at mid-point O is E =
FAO k=
= k ...(1)
OA 2
( )
2
5 2 5.4×106 NC-1 along OB.
(b) We have a test charge of magnitude 1.5 × 10-9 C
And the repulsive force at O due to charge at D,
placed at midpoint O and we found the electric field at
qBq0 (−5µC)(1µC)
FBO k=
= k ...(3) this point to be E = 5.4 × 106 NC-1. So, the force
OB 2
( )
2
5 2 experienced by the test charge would be F,
And the attractive force of O due to charge at C, ⇒F = qE
⇒ F = 1.5 × 10-9 × 5.4 × 106
qCq0 (−5µC)(1µC)
=FCO k= k ...(4) ⇒ F = 8.1 × 10-3 N
OC 2
( )
2
5 2 This force will be directed along OA since like charges
We find that (1) and (2) are of same magnitude but repel and unlike charges attract.
they act in the opposite direction and hence they
16 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

Example-20 Example-22
An electric dipole with dipole moment 4 × 10–9 C m is A point charge +10 µC is a distance 5 cm directly
aligned at 30° with the direction of a uniform electric above the centre of a square of side 10 cm, as shown in
field of magnitude 5 × 104 NC–1. Calculate the Fig. What is the magnitude of the electric flux through
magnitude of the torque acting on the dipole. the square? (Hint: Think of the square as one face of a
(NCERT) cube with edge 10 cm.)
Sol. We are given the following: (NCERT)
→
Electric dipole moment, p = 4 × 10-9 Cm
→
Angle made by p with uniform electric fields, θ = 30o
→
Electric field, E = 5 × 104 NC-1
Torque acting on the dipole is given by
τ = pE sinθ
Substituting the given values we get,
⇒ τ = 4 × 10-9 × 5 × 104 × sin 30o
1
⇒ τ = 20 × 10-5 × Sol. Consider the square as one face of a cube of edge
2
length 10cm with a charge q at its centre,
∴ τ = 10-4 Nm
according to Gauss's theorem for a cube, total
Thus, the magnitude of the torque acting on the dipole
electric flux is through all its six faces.
is found to be 10-4 Nm.
q
φtotal =
ε0
Example-21
Figure shows tracks of three charged particles in a The electric flux through one face of the cube
uniform electrostatic field. Give the signs of the three φ
could be now given by, φ = total .
charges. Which particle has the highest charge to mass 6
ratio? (NCERT) 1 q
φ=
6 ε0
ε0 = 8.854 × 10-12N-1C2m-2 = Permittivity of free
space
The net charge enclosed would be, q = 10µC = 10
× 10-6 C
Sol. From the known properties of charges, we know that Substituting the values given in the question, we
the unlike charges attract and like charges repel each get,
other.
1 10 × 10−6
So, the particles 1 and 2 that move towards the φ= ×
6 8.854 × 10−12
positively charged plate while repelling away from
the negatively charged plate would be negatively ∴φ = 1.88 × 105 Nm2C-1
charged and the particle 3 that moves towards the
Example-23
negatively charged plate while repellingaway from
A point charge causes an electric flux of –1.0 × 103
the positively charged plate would be positively
Nm2/C to pass through a spherical Gaussian surface of
charged.
10.0 cm radius centred on the charge. (a) If the radius
Now, we know that the charge to mass ratio
of the Gaussian surface were doubled, how much flux
(which is generally known as emf) is directly
would pass through the surface? (b) What is the value
proportional to the displacement or the amount of
of the point charge? (NCERT)
deflection for a givenvelocity.
Sol. We are given:
Since the deflection of particle 3 is found to be
Electric flux due to the given point charge, φ = - 1.0 ×
maximum among the three, it would have the
103 Nm2/C
highest charge to mass ratio.
Radius of the Gaussian surface enclosing the point
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 17

charge, r =10.0cm Therefore, the net charge on the sphere is found to be

Electric flux piercing out through a surface depends 6.67 nC.
on the net charge enclosed by the surface according
to Gauss’s law and is independent of the dimensions Example-25
ofthe arbitrary surface assumed to enclose this A uniformly charged conducting sphere of 2.4 m
charge. diameter has a surface charge density of 80.0 µC/m2.
Hence, if the radius of the Gaussian surface is doubled, (a) Find the charge on the sphere. (b) What is the total
then the flux passing through the surface remains the electric flux leaving the surface of the sphere?
same i.e., -103 Nm2/C. (NCERT)
(b) Electric flux could be given by the relation, Sol.
q
φtotal =
ε0
Where, q = net charge enclosed by the spherical
surface ε0 = 8.854 × 10-12N-1C2m-2 = Permittivity of
free space ⇒ q = φε0
Substituting the given values,
⇒ q = -1.0 × 103 × 8.854 × 10-12 = -8.854 × 10-9 C
⇒ q = -8.854 nC
(a) Given that,
Example-24
Diameter of the sphere, d = 2.4 m.
A conducting sphere of radius 10 cm has an unknown
Radius of the sphere, r = 1.2 m.
charge. If the electric field 20 cm from the centre of
Surface charge density,
the sphere is 1.5 × 103 N/C and points radially inward,
σ = 80.0µC/m2 = 80 × 10-6/m2
what is the net charge on the sphere? (NCERT)
Total charge on the surface of the sphere,
Sol. We have the relation for electric field intensity E at
⇒ Q = σ × 4πr2 = 80 × 10-6 × 4 × 3.14 × (1.2)2
a distance ( d ) from the centre of a sphere containing
⇒ Q = 1.447 × 10-3 C
net charge q is given by,
Therefore, the charge on the sphere is found to be
q
E= ....(1) 1.447 × 10-3C.
4πε0 d 2
(b) Total electric flux (φtotal) leaving out the surface
Where, containing net charge is given by Gauss’s law as,
Net Charge, q = 1.5 × 103 N/C
Q
Distance from the centre, d = 20 cm = 0.2 m φtotal =............(1)
ε0
ε0 = 8.884 × 10-12 N-1 C2m-2 = Permittivity of free
space Where, permittivity of free space,
1 ε0 = 8.854 × 10-12 N-1C2m-2.
= 9 × 109 Nm 2 C−2 We found the charge on the sphere to be,
4πε0
Q = 1.447 × 10-3C
From (1), the unknown charge would be,
Substituting these in (1), we get,
q = E(4πε0)d2
1.447 × 10−3
Substituting the given values we get, φtotal =
8.8854 × 10−12
1.5 × 103 × (0.2) 2
⇒ q= = 6.67 × 10−9 C ⇒ φtotal = 1.63 × 10-8 NC-1m2
9 × 109
Therefore, the total electric flux leaving the surface of
⇒ q = 6.67 nC
the sphere is found to be 1.63 × 10-8 NC-1 m2
18 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section–A (1 Mark Questions) Section–C (3 Marks Questions)
1. Which orientation of an electric dipole in a uniform 11. A small metal sphere carrying charge +Q is located at
electric field would correspond to stable equilibrium? the centre of a spherical cavity in a large uncharged
2. If the radius of the Gaussian surface enclosing a metallic spherical shell. Write the charges on the
charge is halved, how does the electric flux through inner and outer surfaces of the shell. Write the
the Gaussian surface change? expression for the electric field at the point P1
3. Figure shows three point charges, +2q, -q and + 3q.
Two charges +2q and -q are enclosed within a surface
‘S’. What is the electric flux due to this configuration
through the surface ‘S’

12. Define electric flux. Write its S.I. unit. A charge q is

enclosed by a spherical surface of radius R. If the
radius is reduced to half, how would the electric flux
4. What is the electric flux through a cube of side 1cm through the surface change?
which encloses an electric dipole? 13. Write the expression for the work done on an electric
5. How does the electric flux due to a point charge dipole of dipole moment p in turning it from its
enclosed by a spherical Gaussian surface get affected position of stable equilibrium to a position of unstable
when its radius is increased? equilibrium in a uniform electric field E.

14. What is the flux due to electric field E= 3 × 103 ˆi N/C
Section–B (2 Marks Questions)
through a square of side 10 cm, when it is held
6. Differentiate between uniform electric field and non- normal to it?
uniform electric field. 15. Two-point charges + q and -2q are placed at the
7. Is the electric field due to a charge configuration with vertices ‘B’ and ‘C’ of an equilateral triangle ABC of
total charge zero, necessarily zero? Justify. side as given in the figure. Obtain the expression for
8. Define the term electric dipole moment of a dipole. (i) the magnitude and (ii) the direction of the resultant
State its S.I. unit electric field at the vertex A due to these two charges.
9. In which orientation, a dipole placed in a uniform
electric field is in
(a) stable,
(b) unstable
equilibrium?

10. Define one coulomb. What is the SI unit of a charge?

16. What are different types of charge distributions?

17. Using Gauss’ law, derive an expression for the
electric field intensity at any point outside a
uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius R and
charge density a C/m2. Draw the field lines when the
charge density of the sphere is
(i) positive, (ii) negative.
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 19

18. A uniformly charged conducting sphere of 2.5 m in Section–D (4 Marks Questions)

diameter has a surface charge density of 100 µC/m2.
Calculate the 23. A thin straight infinitely long conducting wire having
(i) charge on the sphere charge density X is enclosed by a cylindrical surface
(ii) total electric flux passing through the sphere of radius r and length l, its axis coinciding with the
19. How is the field directed if length of the wire. Find the expression for the electric
(i) the sheet is positively charged, flux through the surface of the cylinder.
(ii) negatively charged?
20. What are different properties of charge? Section–E (5 Marks Questions)
21. What is the force between two small charged spheres
24. State Gauss’s theorem in electrostatics. Apply this
having charges of 2 × 10−7 C and 3 × 10−7 C placed 30 theorem to derive an expression for the electric field
cm apart in air? intensity at a point outside a uniformly charged thin
22. A point charge of 2.0 µC is at the centre of a cubic spherical shell.
Gaussian surface 9.0 cm on edge. What is the net 25. Derive an expression for the torque experienced by an
electric flux through the surface? electric dipole kept in a uniform electric field.
20 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section – A (Single Choice Questions) 10. Two spheres A and B of exactly the same mass are
given equal positive and negative charges
1. Charge is respectively. Their masses after charging
(a) transferable (b) associated with mass (a) remains unaffected (b) mass of A > mass of B
(c) conserved (d) all of these (c) mass of A < mass of B (d) Nothing can be said
2. A body is positively charged, it implies that 11. The SI unit of electric flux is
(a) there is only positive charge in the body. (a) Vm −1 (b) Vm 2
(b) there is positive as well as negative charge in the
(c) NC −1m −2 (d) NC −1m 2
body but the positive charge is more than negative
charge. 12. Consider a uniform electric field E= 3 × 103 ˆiNC −1 .
(c) there is equal positive and negative charge in the What is the flux through a square of 10 cm whose
body but the positive charge lies in the outer plane is parallel to the y-z plane?
regions. (a) 30NC −1m 2 (b) 20NC −1m 2
(d) negative charge is displaced from its position. (c) 10NC−1m 2 (d) Zero
3. On rubbing, when one body gets positively charged 13. Gauss theorem in electrostatics states that electric
and other negatively charged, the electrons flux Where S is the Gaussian surface. The electric
transferred from positively charged body to field E is due to all the charges.
negatively charged body are (a) Both side the surface S (b) Outside the surface S
(a) valence electrons only (c) Inside the surface S (d) On the surface S
(b) electrons of inner shells 14. The ratio of the electric force between two electrons
(c) both valence electrons and electrons of inner shell to the gravitational force between them is of the order
(d) yet to be established of
4. Which of the following is the best insulator? (a) 1042 (b) 1040
(a) Carbon (b) Paper (c) 10 36
(d) 1032
(c) Graphite (d) Ebonite 15. The total flux through the faces of the cube with side
5. SI unit of permittivity of free space is of length a if a charge q is placed at corner A of the
(a) Farad (b) Weber cube is
(c) C N m
2 -1 -2
(d) C2N1 m-2
6. When a body is charged by induction, then the body
(a) becomes neutral
(b) does not lose any charge
(c) loses whole of the charge on it
(d) loses part of the charge on it
7. On charging by conduction, mass of a body may
(a) increase (b) decreases q q
(a) (b)
(c) increase or decrease (d) None of these 8ε0 4ε0
8. The force per unit charge is known as q q
(a) electric flux (b) electric field (c) (d)
2ε0 ε0
(c) electric potential (d) electric current
9. If an object possesses an electric charge, it is said to 16. A charge Q is placed at the centre of the line joining
be electrified or … A …, when it has no charge, it is two point charges +q and +q as shown in the figure.
said to be … B … Here, A and B refer to The whole system is in equilibrium, then the ratio of
(a) charged, neutral (b) neutral, charged charges Q and q is
(c) discharged, charged (d) active, reactive

(a) 4 (b) ¼
(c) – 4 (d) – ¼
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 21

17. Which of the following figures represent the electric 22. Assertion: When we rub a glass rod with silk, the rod
field lines due to a single negative charge? gets negatively charged and the slk gets positively
charged.
Reason: On rubbing, electrons from silk cloth move
to the glass rod.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
18. Which of the following statements is not true about
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
Gauss’s law?
23. Assertion: Electric field lines move from positive
(a) Gauss’s law is true for any closed surface.
charge to negative charge.
(b) The term q on the right side of Gauss’s law
Reason: Electric field forms closed loop.
includes the sum of all charges enclosed by the
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
surface.
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(c) Gauss’s law is not much useful in calculating
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
electrostatic fields when the system has some
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
symmetry.
Assertion.
(d) Gauss’s law is based on the inverse square
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
dependence on distance contained in the
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
coulomb’s law
24. Assertion: If the electric field lines are equidistant
19. The unit of electric dipole moment is
and parallel straight lines then the field is uniform.
(a) newton (b) coulomb
Reason: Density of electric field lines gives
(c) farad (d) debye
magnitude of electric field.
20. Consider a region inside which there are various
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
types of charges but the total charge is zero. At points
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
outside the region
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(a) the electric field is necessarily zero.
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(b) the electric field is due to the dipole moment of
Assertion.
the charge distribution only.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(c) the dominant electric field is inversely
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
proportional to r3, for large r (distance from
25. Assertion: If a proton and an electron are placed in
origin).
the same uniform electric field. They experience
(d) the work done to move a charged particle along a
different accelerations.
closed path, away from the region will not be
Reason: Electric force on a test charge is
zero.
independent of its mass.
Section –B (Assertion & Reason Questions) (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
21. Assertion: The Coulomb force is the dominating (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
force in the universe. Reason is not the correct explanation of the
Reason: The Coulomb force is weaker than the Assertion.
gravitational force. (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
22 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

26. Assertion: Gauss’s law shows dverson when the Section – C (Case Study Questions)
inverse square law is not obeyed.
Reason: Gauss’s law is the consequence of Case Study – 1
conservation of charges. The method to measure the charge of an electron was
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the realized by Robert Millikan. A horizontal pair of
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. oppositely charged plates kept at a small distance
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the apart was used to create an electric field. Tiny oil
Reason is not the correct explanation of the drops were sprayed into this electric field. A fine
Assertion. magnifying eyepiece was used to observe these drops.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. The electric field could be adjusted so that the
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. upward force on negatively charged oil droplets
27. Assertion: When charges are shared between any balanced their weights. When no net force acts on the
two bodies, no charge is really lost, but some loss of tiny oil particles, qE = mg. Millikan could measure
energy does occur. that the charge on the oil droplets appear as the
Reason: Some energy disappears in the form of heat, integral multiples of certain fundamental value of
sparking etc. charge with magnitude 1.6 × 10−19 C . This amounts to
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the the magnitude of the charge of an electron (because
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. charge arises due to transfer of electrons and the least
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the number of electrons that can be transferred is one and
Reason is not the correct explanation of the also, only integer values are possible).
Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
28. Assertion: Three equal charges are situated on a
circle of radius r such that they form an equilateral
triangle, then the electric field intensity at the centre
is zero.
Reason: The forces on unit positive charge at the
centre, due to three equal charges, are represented by 29. Which of the following values is not possible as the
the three sides of a triangle taken in the same order. charge on an oil drop?
Therefore, the electric field intensity at the centre is (a) 3.2 × 10−19 C (b) 1.12 × 10−18 C
zero. (c) 2.4 × 10−19 C (d) 8.0 × 10−18 C
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the 30. If the electrons were positively charged, the
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. suspension of oil drop will be possible if:
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the (a) the polarity of the plates is interchanged
Reason is not the correct explanation of the (b) oil is changed
Assertion. (c) the plates are made vertical
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. (d) all of these
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. 31. For a heavier oil drop, the desired result (suspension
of oil drop) will be obtained if:
(a) the charge on the oil drop is more
(b) the electric field strength is increased
(c) the electric field strength is decreased
(d) (a) or (b) or both
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 23

32. If a tiny oil droplet of mass 1.96 × 10−14 kg is Case Study – 3

suspended between the plates when the electric field Gauss law states that the total electric flux over a
1
applied is 105 N / C , the magnitude of charge on the closed surface is times the net charge enclosed by
ε0
oil droplet is (take g = 9.8m / s 2 ):
q net
(a) 1.44 × 10−18 C (b) 1.92 × 10−18 C the surface. φ =
ε0
(c) 1.12 × 10−18 C (d) 1.08 × 10−18 C

Case Study – 2
When a charged body is placed near a neutral
conductor, redistribution of charges takes place inside
the neutral conductor. The part of the conductor
nearer to the charge will get induced by an equal
amount of opposite charge. The part away from the
charged body will get the same type of equal charge
as the external body. Charge given to a conductor will To calculate flux, we will not consider the charge
reside on the surface only. Irrespective of the outside the closed surface.
redistribution of charges, the conductor will remain In another statement, the surface integral of the
electrically neutral. electric field over the closed surface is taken into
account.
  q net
∫S E ⋅ ds =ε0
Here, the LHS will consider the field due to all the
charges inside and outside the closed surface, but the
RHS considers the net charge inside the closed
surface only.
Based on the above, answer the following questions.
Consider a neutral conducting spherical shell
mounted on an insulating stand. A charged rod of 37. If three charges, q1 , q 2 and q 3 are outside the sphere
charge + q is brought near it as shown. No part of the
and two charges q 4 and q 5 are inside, then the flux
shell is in contact with the rod or earth.
Based on the above, answer the following questions. over the spherical surface will be:
q + q 2 + q3 + q 4 + q5 q1 + q 2 + q 3 − q 4 − q 5
(a) . 1 . (b)
33. The charge on the near surface of the shell is: ε0 ε0
(a) + q (b) – q q 4 + q5 q1 − q 2 + q 3 − q 4 + q 5
(c) 0 (d) +2 q (c) (d)
ε0 ε0
34. The charge on the far surface of the shell is:
38. If three charges, q1 , q 2 and q 3 are outside the sphere
(a) +q (b) – q
(c) 0 (d) +2 q and two charges q 4 and q 5 are inside and if we use
35. The net charge on the shell is:   q net 
(a) + q (b) – q the formula, ∫S ⋅ ds =ε0 , then the electric field E
E
(c) 0 (d) +2 q
is due to:
36. The rod is now moved closer to the shell, but still not
(a) q1 , q 2 and q 3 only
touching the shell. Then, the charge on the near
surface of the shell is: (b) q 4 and q 5 only
(a) + q (b) – q (c) average of all the charges given
(c) 0 (d) +2 q (d) all the charges given
24 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

39. If the sphere completely encloses 3 dipoles of 40. If a thin charged rod, of length a and with uniform
moments p1 , p 2 and p3 and lengths 2a1 , 2a 2 and 2a 3 , linear charge density λ throughout its length, pierces
then the net flux through the surface is the sphere as shown, then the net flux through the
p + p 2 + p3 sphere is:
(a) 1
ε0
( p1 / 2a1 ) + ( p 2 / 2a 2 ) + ( p3 / 2a 3 )
(b)
ε0
(c) 0
(d) depends on the orientation of dipole

(O is the centre of the sphere and take r as its radius)

λr 2λr
(a) (b)
ε0 ε0
λa λa
(c) (d)
ε0 2ε0
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 25

EXERCISE – 3 : Previous Year Questions

1. Write an expression for the flux ∆φ , of the electric 8. Using Gauss's law, we obtain the expression for the
  electric field due to a uniformly charged thin
field E through an area element ∆S .
spherical shell of radius R at a point outside the shell.
(Delhi 2010C)
Draw a graph showing the variation of electric field
2. Figure shows three point charges, +2 q, - q, +3 q.
with r, for r>R and r<R
Two charges +2q and -q are enclosed within a surface
(Delhi 2011)
S. What is the electric flux due to this configuration
9. A charge 'q' is placed at the centre of a cube of side l.
through the surface 'S'?
What is the electric flux passing through each face of
(Delhi 2010)
the cube?
(AI 2012)
10. An electric dipole is kept in a uniform electric field.
Derive an expression for the net torque acting on it
and write its direction. State the conditions under
which the dipole is in (i) stable equilibrium and (ii)
unstable equilibrium.
(Delhi 2012C)
3. A charge QµC is placed at the centre of a cube.
11. State Gauss's law in electrostatic. A cube with each
What is the electric flux coming out from any one 
side 'a' is kept in an electric field given by E = Cxiˆ ,
surface?
(as is shown in the figure) where C is a positive
(AI 2010)
 dimensional constant. Find out
4. Deduce the expression for the electric field E due to
a system of two charges q1 and q 2 with position
  
vectors r1 and r2 at a point r with respect to the
common origin O.
(Delhi 2010C)
5. Show that the electric field at the surface of a charged
 σ
conductor is given by E = nˆ where σ is the
ε0
surface charge density and n̂ is a unit vector normal
(i) the electric flux through the cube
to the surface in the outward direction.
(ii) the net charge inside the cube.
(AI 2010)
(Foreign 2012)
6. A spherical conducting shell of inner radius r1 and
12. (i) State Gauss's law.
outer radius r2 has a charge Q. A charge q is placed
(ii) A thin straight infinitely long conducting wire of
at the centre of the shell.
(a) What is the surface charge density on the (i) inner linear charge density ' λ ' is enclosed by a cylindrical
surface, (ii) outer surface of the shell? surface of radius 'r' and length'. Its axis coinciding
(b) Write the expression for the electric field at a with the length of the wire. Obtain the expression for
point x > r2 from the centre of the shell. the electric field, indicating its direction, at a point on
the surface of the cylinder.
(AI 2010)
(Delhi 2012C)
7. Plot a graph showing the variation of coulomb force
1
(F) versus  2  , where r is the distance between the
r 
two charges of each pair of charges: (1µC, 2µC ) and
( 2µC, −3µC ) interpret the graphs obtained.
(AI 2011)
26 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

13. (i) Define electric flux. Write its S.I. unit. 19. Define electric dipole moment. Is it a scalar or a
(ii) A small metal sphere carrying charge +Q is vector quantity? Derive the expression for the electric
located at the centre of a spherical cavity inside a field of a dipole at a point on the equatorial plane of
large uncharged metallic spherical shell as shown in the dipole.
the figure. Use Gauss's law to find the expressions for (3/5, A I 2013)
the electric field at points P1 and P2. 20. Using Gauss' law deduces the expression for the
electric field due to a uniformly charged spherical
conducting shell of radius R at a point (i) outside and
(ii) inside the shell. Plot a graph showing variation of
electric field as a function of r>R and r<R. (r being
the distance from the centre of the shell).
(AI 2013)
21. Using Gauss's law, derive the expression for the
electric field at a point
(iii) Draw the pattern of electric field lines in this (i) outside and (ii) inside a uniformly charged thin
arrangement. spherical shell. Draw a graph showing electric field
(AI 2012C) 
E as a function of distance from the centre.
14. Define the term electric dipole moment of a dipole. (AI 2013 C)
State its S.I. unit, 22. Two equal balls having equal positive charge ' q '
(Foreign 2013, AI 2011) coulombs are suspended by two insulating strings of
15. Two charges of magnitudes – 2Q and + Q are located equal length. What would be the effect on the force
at points (a, 0) and (4 a, 0) respectively. What is the when a plastic sheet is inserted between the two?
electric flux due to these charges through a sphere of (AI 2014)
radius '3a' with its centre at the origin? 23. Why do the electrostatic field lines not form closed
(AI 2013) loops?
16. Two concentric metallic spherical shells of radii R (AI 2014 & AI 2012C)
and 2 R are given charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. 24. Why do the electric field lines never cross each
The surface charge densities on the outer surfaces of other?
the shells are equal. Determine the ratio Q1 : Q 2 . (AI 2014)

(Foreign 2013) 25. 3ˆ
Given a uniform electric field E= 5 × 10 iN / C .

17. Consider a uniform electric field E= 3 × 103 ˆi N / C . Find the flux of this field through a square of 10 cm
Calculate the flux of this field through a square on a side whose plane is parallel to the y-z plane.
surface of area 10 cm2 when What would be the flux through the same square if
(i) its plane is parallel to the y - z plane the plane makes a 30o angle with the x-axis?
(ii) the normal to its plane makes a 60o angle with the (Delhi 2014)
x-axis. 26. A point charge (+Q) is kept in the vicinity of an
(Delhi 2013C) uncharged conducting plate. Sketch the electric field
 lines between the charge and the plate.
18. Given the electric field in the region E = 2xiˆ , find
the electric flux through the cube and the charge (Foreign 2014)
enclosed by it. 27. Deduce the expression for the torque acting on a

(Delhi 2013) dipole of dipole moment p in the presence of a

uniform electric field E .
(AI 2014)

28. Write the expression for the torque τ acting on a

dipole of dipole moment p placed in an electric field

E.
(Foreign 2015)
29. What is the electric flux through a cube of 1 cm
which encloses an electric dipole? (Delhi 2015)
ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS 27

30. (i) Define the term 'electric flux'. Write its SI unit. 38. How does the electric flux due to a point charge
(ii) What is the flux due to electric field enclosed by a spherical Gaussian surface get affected

E= 3 × 103 ˆiN / C through a square of side 10 cm, when its radius is increased?
 (Delhi 2016)
when it is held normal to E ?
39. (a) Define torque acting on a dipole of dipole moment
(AI 2015 C)  
 p placed in a uniform electric field E . Express it in
31. An electric dipole of dipole moment p is placed in a
 the vector form and point out the direction along
uniform electric field E . Obtain the expression for
 which it acts.
the torque τ experienced by the dipole. Identify two (b) What happens if the field is nonuniform?
pairs of perpendicular vectors in the expression. 
(c) What would happen if the external field E is
(Delhi 2015C)  
increasing (i) parallel to p and (ii) anti-parallel to p ?
32. Define electric flux. Write its S.I. unit. "Gauss's law
in electrostatics is true for any closed surface, no (Foreign 2016)
matter what its shape or size is". Justify this statement 40. Use Gauss's law to find the electric field due to a
with the help of a suitable Example-. uniformly charged infinite plane sheet. What is the
(AI 2015) direction of the field for positive and negative charge
33. Consider a system of n charges q1 , q 2 ,...q n with densities?
    (AI 2016)
position vectors r1 , r2 , r3 ...rn relative to some origin ' O
41. Does the charge given to a metallic sphere depend on

'. Deduce the expression for the net electric field E at whether it is hollow or solid. Give reason for your
 answer.
a point P with position vector rp due to this system of
(Delhi 2017)
charges.
42. Derive the expression for electric field at a point on
(3/5, Foreign 2015)
 the equatorial line of an electric dipole.
34. An electric dipole of dipole moment p consists of
(Delhi 2017)
point charges + and -q separated by a distance 2 a 43. Depict the orientation of the dipole in (a) stable, (b)

apart. Deduce the expression for the electric field E unstable equilibrium in a uniform electric field.
due to the dipole at a distance x from the centre of the (Delhi 2017 )
dipole on its axial line in terms of the dipole moment 
44. (i) Obtain the expression for the torque τ

p . Hence show that in the limit experienced by an electric dipole of dipole moment
   
x >> a, E → 2p / ( 4πε 0 x 3 ) . p in a uniform electric field, E
(Delhi 2015) (ii) What will happen if the field were not uniform?
35. Find the resultant electric field due to an electric (Delhi 2017)
dipole of dipole moment 2 a q ( 2 a being the 45. (a) Derive an expression for the electric field E due to
separation between the charges pm q) at a point a dipole of length ' 2 a ' at a point distant r from the
distance x on its equator. centre of the dipole on the axial line.
(2/5, Foreign 2015) (b) Draw a graph of E versus r for r>>a.
36. Use Gauss's law to prove that the electric field inside (AI 2017)
a uniformly charged spherical shell is zero. 46. If dipole were kept in a uniform external electric field
(AI 2015) E 0 diagrammatically represent the position of the
37. A small conducting sphere of radius ' r ' carrying a dipole in stable and unstable equilibrium and write
charge +q is surrounded by a large concentric the expressions for the torque acting on the dipole in
conducting shell of radius R on which a charge +Q is both the cases.
placed. Using Gauss's law derive the expressions for (AI 2017)
the electric field at a point ‘x’ 47. Use Gauss's theorem to find the electric field due to a
(i) between the sphere and the shell (r<x<R) uniformly charged infinitely large plane thin sheet
(ii) outside the spherical shell.
with surface charge density σ .
(Foreign 2015)
(AI 2017)
28 ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

48. (a) Define electric flux. Is it a scalar or a vector (Delhi 2019)

quantity? 51. A metallic spherical shell has an inner radius R1 and
A point charge q is at a distance of d/2 directly above outer radius R 2 . A charge Q is placed at the centre
the centre of a square of side d , as shown in the
of the shell. What will be the surface charge density
figure. Use Gauss's law to obtain the expression for
on the
the electric flux through the square.
(i) inner surface, and
(ii) outer surface of the shell?
(AI 2019)
52. Apply Gauss's law to show that for a charged
spherical shell, the electric field outside the shell is,
as if the entire charge were concentrated at the centre.
(AI 2019)
53. Derive an expression for the electric field due to

dipole of dipole moment p at a point on its
perpendicular bisector.
(b) If the point charge is now moved to a distance 'd' (Delhi 2019)
from the centre of the square and the side of the 54. Two identical point charges, q each, are kept 2m
square is doubled, explain how the electric flux will apart in air. A third point charge Q of unknown
be affected. magnitude and sign is placed on the line joining the
(AI 2018) charges such that the system remains in equilibrium.
49. Two identical conducting balls A and B have charges Find the position and nature of Q.
-Q and +3 Q respectively. They are brought in contact (3/5, Delhi 2019)
with each other and then separated by a distance d
apart. Find the nature of the Coulomb force between 55. Derive an expression for the electric field at any point
them. on the equatorial line of an electric dipole.
(AI 2019) (Delhi 2019)
50. Draw the pattern of electric field lines when a point
charge +q is kept near an uncharged conducting plate.

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS

 02
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND
CAPACITANCE
30 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

Chapter at a Glance
1. Electric Potential: Electric potential at a point in a 1 q1q 2
U=
electric field is the amount of work done in bringing a 4πε 0 r12
unit positive charge from infinity to the point.
where r12 is distance between q1 and q2.
(i) Electric potential is a scalar quantity.
8. The potential energy of a charge q in an external
(ii) S.I. unit: Volt(V).
potential V(r) is qV(r). The potential energy of a
(iii) A positive charge in a field moves from higher dipole moment p in a uniform electric field E is –p.E.
potential to lower potential whereas electron moves
from lower potential to higher potential when left free.
9. Electrostatics field E is zero in the interior of a
(iv) Work done in moving a charge q through a
conductor; just outside the surface of a charged
potential difference V is W = qV joule.
conductor, E is normal to the surface given by
σ
E = n where n is the unit vector along the
2. If potential at infinity is chosen to be zero; potential at ε0
a point with position vector r due to a point charge Q outward normal to the surface and σ is the surface
placed at the origin is given is given by charge density. Charges in a conductor can reside only
1 Q at its surface. Potential is constant within and on the
V (r) =
4πε0 r surface of a conductor. In a cavity within a conductor
(with no charges), the electric field is zero.
3. For a charge configuration q1, q2, ..., qn with position
vectors r1 , r2 , ... rn, the potential at a point P is given
by the superposition principle 10. A capacitor is a system of two conductors separated
by an insulator. Its capacitance is defined by C = Q/V,
1  q1 q 2 q  where Q and –Q are the charges on the two
=V  + + ... + n 
4πε0  r1P r2P rnP  conductors and V is the potential difference between
where r1P is the distance between q1 and P, and so on. them. C is determined purely geometrically, by the
shapes, sizes and relative positions of the two
4. Relation between electric field and potential:
  conductors. The unit of capacitance is farad:, 1 F = 1
V = − ∫ E .dr C V–1. For a parallel plate capacitor (with vacuum
dV between the plates),
⇒E=−
dr A
C = ε0
5. An equipotential surface is a surface over which d
potential has a constant value. For a point charge, where A is the area of each plate and d the separation
concentric spheres centred at a location of the charge between them.
are equipotential surfaces. The electric field E at a 11. If the medium between the plates of a capacitor is
point is perpendicular to the equipotential surface filled with an insulating substance (dielectric), the
through the point. E is in the direction of the steepest electric field due to the charged plates induces a net
decrease of potential. dipole moment in the dielectric. This effect, called
6. Electric potential at any point due to an electric dipole polarisation, gives rise to a field in the opposite
kp cos θ   direction. The net electric field inside the dielectric
V≡ 2
; θ is the angle between p and r. and hence the potential difference between the plates
r
is thus reduced. Consequently, the capacitance C
7. Potential energy stored in a system of charges is the increases from its value C0 when there is no medium
work done (by an external agency) in assembling the (vacuum),
charges at their locations. Potential energy of two
C = KC0
charges q1, q2 at r1, r2 is given by
where K is the dielectric constant of the insulating
substance.
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 31

12. For capacitors in the series combination, the total 13. The energy U stored in a capacitor of capacitance C,
capacitance C is given by with charge Q and voltage V is
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Q2
= + + + ... =U = QV CV 2
=
C C1 C 2 C 3 2 2 2 C
In the parallel combination, the total capacitance C is: The electric energy density (energy per unit volume)
C = C1 + C2 + C3 + ... in a region with electric field is (1/2)ε0E2.

where C1, C2, C3 ... are individual capacitances.

32 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

Solved Examples
Example–1 Example–4
The potential at a point is 0.15 V. Find the charge that Obtain the relation between the electric field and
can be brought from infinity to that point by doing a potential.
work of 4.5 mJ. Sol. Consider two equi-potential surfaces A and B with the
Sol. We know that, potential difference dV between them as shown in
W W figure. Let dl be the perpendicular distance between
V= ⇒ Q= 
Q V them and E be the electric field normal to these
4.5 × 10−3 J surfaces.
=Q = 0.03C
0.15V

Example–2
Two charges +10µC and +20µC are placed at a
distance of 2 cm. Find electric potential at center of
the line joining the charges.
Sol. Step 1: Potential due to each charge at midpoint (O)
Potential due to q1 at O:
1 q1 9 × 109 × 10 × 10−6 C The work done to move a unit positive charge from B
V1 = = 9 × 106 V =
= 9 MV
4π ∈0 r1 (1 × 10 −2
m ) 
to A against the field E through a displacement dr is


Potential due to q2 at O:  
dW = E.dr = E dr cos θ = − E dr
1 q 2 9 × 109 × 20 × 10−6 C This is equal to the potential difference, therefore
V2 = = 18 106 V =
=× 18 MV
4π ∈0 r2 (1×10 m )
−2
dV = −E dr
Step 2: Net potential at the middle point dV
E= −
Net potential: V
= V1 + V2 =9MV + 18MV =27MV dr

This gives the required relation.

Example–3 Example–5
Give the condition for equipotential surface in terms of Derive the expression for potential energy of two-point
the direction of the electric field. charges in the absence of external electric field.
Sol. The electric field is always perpendicular to the Sol. Consider a system of two-point charges q1, q2
equipotential surface. If the Equipotential surface is separated by a distance r12 as shown in figure.
not normal to the direction of the electric field at a
point, then electric field will have a non- zero
components along the surface and due to this work
must be done to move a unit positive charge against The work done to move q1 from infinity to A is,W1 =
this field component. This means that there is potential 0
difference between two points on the surface. This ( there is no initial electric field)
contradicts the definition of equipotential surface. The work done to move q2 from infinity to B is,
W2 = V1B q 2
Where V1B is the electric potential at B due to q1, it is
given by
1  q1 
V1B = ±  
4πε0  r12 
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 33

1  q1  Sol. As the electric field inside the conductor is zero, no

⇒ W2= V1Bq2=   q2 work is done to move a charge against field and there
4πε0  r12 
is no potential difference between any two points. This
1 q q  means electrostatic potential is constant throughout the
∴W2 =  1 2 
4πε0  r12  volume of the conductor
The potential energy of this system of charge is equal
to total work done to build this configuration. Example–10
Therefore What are polar and non-polar dielectric, give one
example of each? Define dielectric constant.
1  q1 
U=W1 + W2 =+
0   q2 Sol. Dielectrics: Dielectrics are electrical insulators that get
4πε0  r12  polarized in the presence of an electric field. Since it is
1 q q  an insulator, it does not allow charge to follow through
∴U =  1 2 
4πε0  r12  but will produce charge separation, so positive is
shifted towards the direction of the electric field, while
the negative charges will align themselves opposite to
Example–6
the direction of the electric field. This creates an
What is meant by the electric potential energy of a
internal electric field inside the dielectric which
single charged particle in an external field?
opposes the external electric field.
Sol. Electric potential energy of a single charged particle at
a point in an external field is the work done in shifting
Polar Dielectrics: Polar dielectrics are materials which
that charge from infinity to that point.
have an inherent dipole moment. So the positive and
negative charges are separated by a small distance in
Example–7
the absence of an electric field. If an external electric
Mention the expression for potential energy of an
field is applied, the dipoles reorient themselves along
electric dipole placed in an uniform electric field.
the direction of the field. Ammonia and water is a
Discuss its maximum and minimum values.
good example of polar dielectrics.
Sol. The potential energy of an electric dipole placed in an
uniform electric field is
 Non-Polar Dielectrics: Non-Polar dielectrics are
U = − pE cos θ = − p.E
materials which do not have an inherent dipole
Where p = dipole moment. moment. So the positive and negative charges are not
E= electric field. separated by a small distance in the absence of an
θ = angle between dipole moment and electric field. electric field. Usually, the positive and negative are
When the dipole moment is perpendicular to the field close to each other and the distance between them is
θ = 90°; U = 0 (minimum) approximately zero. So, when an electric field is
PE is minimum. applied the charges are separated and the positive
When the dipole moment is parallel to the field, charges will be concentrated on the left side and
θ = 0° , U= pE (maximum) negative charges on the right side when an electric
PE is maximum. field is applied from right to left. Benzene and
methane are good examples of non-polar dielectrics.
Example–8
What is electrostatic shielding? Mention any one use Note: Dielectrics are used for energy storage since
of it. they can store electrical energy inside them.
Sol. The field inside the cavity of a conductor is always Capacitors can be made from dielectrics.
zero and it remains shielded from outside electric Dielectrics are an important concept to explain various
influence. This is known as electrostatic shielding. phenomena in physics mainly in the field of
This property is used in protecting sensitive electronics, optics, solid-state physics etc.
instruments from outside electrical influence.
Example–9 Example–11
Explain why electrostatic potential is constant Define capacitance of a capacitor. What is the SI unit
throughout the volume of a conductor. of capacitance?
34 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

Sol. Capacitance of a capacitor is defined as ratio of the Therefore, the capacitance of the parallel plate
charge Q on it to the potential difference V across its εA
Q capacitor is ∴C =0
plates. C = d
V
SI unit of capacitance is farad (F).
Example–13
13. Two capacitors of capacitances 6μF and 12μF are
Example–12
connected in series with a battery. The voltage across
Derive the expression for capacitance of a Parallel
6μF capacitor is 2 V. Compute the total supply
plate capacitor without any dielectric medium between
voltage.
the plates.
1 1 1
Sol. Consider a parallel plate capacitor without any Sol. = +
dielectric medium between the plates. CS 6 12
i.e. Cs= 4 µF
Charge across 6µF capacitor
Q = CV = 6 × 2 = 12µC.
It is equal to total charge in the circuit as both are
connected in series.
Now Voltage across 12µF capacitor
q 12
V
= = = 1V
C 12
Total supply voltage = 2 + 1 = 3 V.

Let A be the area of the plates and d be the plate

Example–14
separation.
Derive the expression for effective capacitance of two
We know that the electric field due to uniformly
capacitors connected in parallel.
σ
charged plate is E = Sol. Consider two capacitors of capacitance C1 and C2
2ε 0 connected in parallel.
where σ is the surface charge density of the plates.
The electric field in outer region I is
σ σ
E = E1 − E 2 = − =0
2ε 0 2ε 0
The electric field in outer region II is
σ σ
E = E1 − E 2 = − =0
2ε 0 2ε 0
In parallel combination potential V is same across each
The electric field between the plates is
capacitor and Charge Q on the combination is equal to
σ σ sum of the charges on each.
E = E1 − E 2 = − =0
2ε0 2ε0 Therefore Q = Q1 + Q 2
Q σ Q Q
But, σ = E =
, therefore = But C1 = ⇒ Q1 = VC1 , similarly Q 2 = VC2
A ε0 Aε 0 V1
V Q = Q1 + Q 2 = VC1 + VC2
We have, E = therefore,
d
If CP is the effective capacitance of the parallel
V Q Qd
= ⇒ V= combination, then
d Aε0 Aε0
Q
CP = ⇒ Q = VC P
Q Q V
The capacitance is C
= =
V  Qd  Therefore,
 
 Aε0  VC
= P VC1 + VC2
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 35

∴ C P =C1 + C 2 6 × 9 × 109 × 5 × 10−6

⇒V=
0.1
Example 15 ⇒ V = 2.7 × 106 V
Two capacitors of unknown capacitances C1 and C2 Clearly, the potential at the hexagon’s center is
are connected first in series and then in parallel across
2.7 × 106 V.
a 100 V battery. If the energy stored in the two
combinations is 0.045J and 0.25 J respectively, then
Example–17
determine the value of C1 and C2. Also calculate the
Two charges 2µC and –2µC are placed at points A and
charge on each capacitor in parallel combination.
B, 6 cm apart.
Sol. Energy stored in series combination
(NCERT)
1 1 C1C 2
= US = CS V 2 = V 2 0.045J ... (1) (a) Identify an equipotential surface of the system.
2 2 C1 + C2 (b) What is the direction of the electric field at every
Energy stored in parallel combination point on this surface?
1 1 Sol. The given figure represents two charges.
U P = C P V 2 = ( C1 + C 2 ) V 2 =0.25J ... ( 2 )
2 2
On solving equations 1 and 2 we get
C=
1 35µF and C2= 15µF
(a) An equipotential surface is defined as that plane on
In parallel connection voltage across both capacitor
which electric potential is equal at every point. One
will be same i.e. 100 V.
such plane is normal to line AB. The plane is placed at
So, Q= 35 × 10−4 C and Q= 15 × 10−4 C
1 2 the mid-point of line AB because the magnitude of
charges is equal.
Example–16 (b) The electric field’s direction is always
A regular hexagon of side 10 cm has a charge 5µC at perpendicular to the equipotential plane, So it will be
each of its vertices. Calculate the potential at the center in the AB direction at every location on this
of the hexagon. equipotential surface.
(NCERT)
Sol. The given figure represents six equal charges, Example–18
q= 5 × 10−6 C, at hexagon’s vertices. A 12 pF capacitor is connected to a 50 V battery. How
much electrostatic energy is stored in the capacitor?
(NCERT)
Sol. It is provided that,
Capacitance of the capacitor, C= 12 × 10−12 F
Potential difference, V = 50 V
The formula for stored electrostatic energy in the
capacitor is given by,
1
Sides of the hexagon, E = CV 2
2
AB
= BC
= CD
= DE
= EF
= FA
= 10 cm
1
The distance of O from each vertex, d = 10 cm Electric ⇒ E = × 12 × 10−12 × 502
2
potential at point O, ⇒ E = 1.5 × 10−8 J
q Therefore, the stored electrostatic energy in the
V= 6 ×
4πε o d −8
capacitor is 1.5 × 10 J.
Where, εo is the Permittivity of free space Value of
1
= 9 × 109 NC−2 m −2
4πεo
36 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

Example–19 Sol. It is provided that,

A charge of 8 mC is located at the origin. Calculate the Capacitance of a parallel capacitor, C = 2 F
work done in taking a small charge of −2 × 10−9 C Distance separating the two plates,
from a point P ( 0, 0, 3 cm ) to a point Q ( 0, 4 cm, 0 ) , = 0.5 × 10−2 m. The formula for parallel
d 0.5 cm
=
via a point R ( 0, 6 cm, 9 cm ) . plate capacitor’s capacitance is given by,
(NCERT) ε A
C= o
Sol. Charge located at the origin, q= 8 mC= 8 × 10−3 C A d

small charge q1 =−2 × 10−9 C. is moved from a point P Where, εo is the Permittivity of free space

to point R to point Q, The figure given below εo 8.854 × 10−12 C2 N −1m −2

=
represents all points. We get,
Cd
A=
εo
2 × 0.5 × 10−2
=A = −12
1130km 2
8.854 × 10

Example–21
A spherical conductor of radius 12 cm has a charge of
1.6 × 10−7 C distributed uniformly on its surface. What
q is the electric field,
Potential at point P, V1 = (NCERT)
4πεo d1
(a) inside the sphere?
d1 3=
Where= cm 0.03 m (b) just outside the sphere?
q (c) at a point 18 cm from the center of the sphere?
Potential at point Q, V2 =
4πε o d 2 Sol. (a) It is provided that, Spherical conductor’s radius,
d 2 4=
Where= cm 0.04 m =r 12
= cm 0.12 m
Work done by the electrostatic force does not depend The charge is evenly distributed across the conductor.
on the path. The electric field within a spherical conductor is zero
because the total net charge within a conductor is zero.
W q1 [ V2 − V1 ]
=
(b) Just outside the conductor, Electric field E is given
 q q  by
⇒ W q1 
= − 
 4 πε d 4 πε o d1  q
o 2
E=
4πεo r 2
q1q 1 1
⇒
= W  − 
4πεo Where, εo is the Permittivity of free space
 d 2 d1 
1 1
Value of = 9 × 109 NC−2 m −2 Value of = 9 × 109 NC−2 m −2
4πεo 4πεo

 1 1  1.6 × 10−7 × 9 × 109

⇒ W = 9 × 10 × 8 × 10 × ( −2 × 10 ) 
9 −3 −9
− ⇒E=
( 0.12 )
2

 0.04 0.03 
⇒W= 1.27J 105 NC−1
⇒E=
Clearly, work done during the process is 1.27J. Clearly, the electric field just outside the sphere is
105 NC−1 .
Example–20
(c) Let electric field at a given point which is 18 cm
What is the area of the plates of a 2 F parallel plate
from the sphere centre = E1 .
capacitor, given that the separation between the plates
is 0.5 cm?
(NCERT)
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 37

Distance of the given point from the centre, (b) Determine the charge on each capacitor if the
=d 18
= cm 0.18 m. The formula for electric field is combination is connected to a 100 V supply.
given by, Sol. (a) Provided that,
Capacitances of the given capacitors are,
q
E1 = =C1 2pF;
= C2 3pF;
= C3 4pF
4πεo d 2
The formula for equivalent capacitance (C’) of the
1.6 × 10−7 × 9 × 109
⇒ E1 = capacitors’ parallel combination is given by
( 0.18)
2
C′ = C1 + C2 + C3
4 −1
⇒ E1 = 4.4 × 10 NC ⇒ C′ = 2 + 3 + 4 = 9pF
Therefore, the electric field at a given point 18 cm Therefore, total capacitance of the combination is 9pF.
4
from the sphere centre is 4.4 × 10 NC .−1 (b) We have,
Supply voltage, V = 100 V
Example–22 Charge on a capacitor with capacitance C and potential
Three capacitors each of capacitance 9 pF are difference V is given by,
connected in series. q = CV ... ( i )
(NCERT)
For C = 2pF,
(a) What is the total capacitance of the combination?
(b) What is the potential difference across each Charge = VC= 100 × 2= 200pF
capacitor if the combination is connected to a 120 V For C = 3pF,
supply?
Charge = VC= 100 × 3= 300pF
Sol. (a) It is provided that,
Capacitance of each three capacitance, C = 9pF For C = 4pF,
The formula for equivalent capacitance (C’) of the Charge = VC= 100 × 4= 400pF
capacitors series combination is given by
1 1 1 1 Example–24
= + +
C′ C C C In a parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates,
−3 2
1 1 1 1 each plate has an area of 6 × 10 m and the distance
⇒ = + +
C′ 9 9 9 between the plates is 3 mm. Calculate the capacitance
1 3 of the capacitor. If this capacitor is connected to a 100
⇒ =
C′ 9 V supply, what is the charge on each plate of the
⇒ C′ =
3pF capacitor?
(NCERT)
Clearly, total capacitance of the combination of the
Sol. It is provided that,
capacitors is 3pF.
Area of parallel plate capacitor’s each plate,
(b) Provided that,
A= 6 × 10−3 m 2
Supply voltage, V = 120 V
−3
Potential difference (V’) across each capacitor will be Distance separating the plates, d= 3 mm= 3 × 10 m
one-third of the supply voltage. Supply voltage, V = 100 V
120 The formula for parallel plate capacitor’s Capacitance
V ′ = 40V
=
3 is given by,
Clearly, the potential difference across each ε A
C= o
capacitance is 40 V. d
Where, εo is the Permittivity of free space
Example–23
Three capacitors of capacitance 2pF, 3pF and 4pF are εo 8.854 × 10−12 C2 N −1m −2
=
connected in parallel. 8.854 × 10−12 × 6 × 10−3
(NCERT) ⇒C=
3 × 10−3
(a) What is the total capacitance of the combination?
⇒ C= 17.71× 10−12 F
38 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

⇒C=
17.71pF =
Initial capacitance, C 17.71× 10−12 F
The formula for Potential V is related with charge q New capacitance, C′ =
kC =
6 × 17.71× 10 −12
106pF
=
and capacitance C is given by,
Supply voltage, V = 100 V
q
V=
New charge, q ′ =
C′V′ = −8
C 106 × 100pC =
1.06 × 10 C
⇒ q = CV = 100 × 17.71× 10−12 Potential across the plates will remain 100 V.
(b) It is provided that,
q 1.771× 10−9 C
⇒=
Mica sheet’s Dielectric constant, k = 6
Clearly, capacitor’s capacitance is 17.71 pF and charge
−9
=
Initial capacitance, C 17.71× 10−12 F
on each plate is 1.771× 10 C.
New capacitance, C′ =
−12
kC =
6 × 17.71× 10 106pF
=
Example–25 If supply voltage is disconnected, then there will be no
Explain what would happen if in the capacitor given in influence on the charge amount on the plates.
previous example, A 3 mm thick mica sheet (of The formula for potential across the plates is given by,
dielectric constant = 6) were inserted between the q
V′ =
plates, C′
(NCERT) 1.771× 10−9
(a) while the voltage supply remained connected. =V′ = 16.7 V
106 × 10−12
(b) after the supply was disconnected.
The potential across the plates will decrease to 16.7V.
Sol. (a) It is provided that,
Mica sheet’s Dielectric constant, k = 6
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 39

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section-A (1 Mark Questions) 13. What is an equipotential surface? Write its three
1. A 500 µC charge is at the centre of a square of side properties Sketch equipotential surfaces of
10 cm. Find the work done in moving a charge of 10 (i) Isolated point charge
µC between two diagonally opposite points on the (ii) Uniform electric field
square. (iii) Dipole
2. What is the electrostatic potential due to an electric 14. Explain why charge given to a hollow conductor is
dipole at an equatorial point? transferred immediately to the outer surface of the
3. What is the work done in moving a test charge q conductor.
through a distance of 1 cm along the equatorial axis 15. Derive an expression for the energy density of a
of an electric dipole? parallel plate capacitor.
4. Define the term ‘potential energy’ of charge ‘q’ at a 16. Net capacitance of three identical capacitors in series
distance V in an external electric field. is 1 pF. What will be their net capacitance if
5. What happens to the capacitance of a capacitor when connected in parallel?
a dielectric slab is placed between its plates? Find the ratio of energy stored in the two
configurations if they are both connected to the same
Section-B (2 Marks Questions) source.
17. Find the equivalent capacitance of the three
6. Why does the electric field inside a dielectric
capacitors shown in fig between points X and Y.
decrease when it is placed in an external electric
field?
7. The electric potential V at any point in space is given
V = 20x 3 volt, where x is in meter. Calculate the
electric intensity at point P (1, 0, 2 ) .
8. With the help of an example, show that farad is a
very large unit of capacitance.
9. The potential at a point A is –500V and that at 18. Derive the expression for the electric potential at any
another point B is +500V. What is the work done by point along the axial line of an electric dipole?
an external agent to take 2 units (S.I.) of negative 19. Obtain the expression for the capacitance of a parallel
charge from B to A. plate capacitor
10. A Can two equipotential surfaces intersect each Three capacitors of capacitances C1, C2 and C3 are
other? Give reasons. Two charges –q and +q are connected (i) in series, (ii) in parallel. show that the
located at points A ( 0, 0, − a ) and B ( 0, 0, + a ) energy stored in the series combination is the same as
respectively. How much work is done in moving a that in the parallel combination.
20. What do you mean by potential energy of the
test charge from point P ( 7, 0, 0 ) to Q ( −3, 0, 0 ) ?
configuration of two electric charges? Derive
(zero) expression for a system of two point changes lying at
distance r.
Section-C (3 Marks Questions) 21. A Two point charges 20 × 10−6 C and −4 × 10−6 C are
11. Three capacitors are connected first in series and then separated by a distance of 50 cm in air.
in parallel. Find the equivalent capacitance for each (i) Find the point on the line joining the charges,
type of combination. where the electric potential is zero.
12. If a dielectric slab is introduced between the plates of (ii) Also find the electrostatic potential energy of the
a parallel plate capacitor after the battery is system.
disconnected, then how do the following quantities 22. Why must the electrostatic field be normal to the
change. surface at every point of a charged conductor?
(i) Charge (ii) Potential
(iii) Capacitance (iv) Energy.
40 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

Section-D (4 Marks Questions) Section -E (5 Marks Questions)

23. Find the value of C if the equivalent capacitance 24. Write five to six important results regarding
between the points A and B in the given figure is 1µF electrostatics of conductors.
25. A capacitor of unknown capacitance is connected
across a battery of V volts. The charge stored in it is
360 µC. When potential across the capacitor is
reduced by 120 V, the charge stored in it becomes
120 µC.
Calculate:
(i) The potential V and the unknown capacitance C.
(ii) What would be the charge stored in the capacitor,
if the voltage applied had increased by 120 µV?
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 41

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section - A (Single Choice Questions) (a) 6 m (b) 12 m
1. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged so (c) 36 m (d) 144 m
that the potential on its surface is 10 V. The potential
at the centre of the sphere is 7. A metallic solid sphere is placed in a uniform electric
(a) 0 V field. The lines of force follow the path(s) shown in
(b) 10 V figure as
(c) Same as at point 5 cm away from the surface
(d) Same as at point 25 cm away from the surface

2. If a unit positive charge is taken from one point to

another over an equipotential surface, then
(a) Work is done on the charge
(b) Work is done by the charge (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) Work done is constant (c) 3 (d) 4
(d) No work is done
8. Two equal charges q are placed at a distance of 2a
3. Three charges 2q, − q, − q are located at the vertices and a third charge −2q is placed at the midpoint. The
of an equilateral triangle. At the centre of the triangle potential energy of the system is
(a) The field is zero but potential is non-zero q2 6q 2
(b) The field is non-zero but potential is zero (a) (b)
8πε0 a 8πε0 a
(c) Both field and potential are zero
(d) Both field and potential are non-zero 7q 2 9q 2
(c) − (d)
8πε0 a 8πε0 a
4. In the electric field of a point charge q , a certain
charge is carried from point A to B, C, D and E. Then 9. Two unlike charges of magnitude q are separated by
the work done
a distance 2d . The potential at a point midway
between them is
1
(a) Zero (b)
4πε0
1 q 1 2q
(c) . (d) .
4πε0 d 4πε0 d 2

(a) Is least along the path AB

10. What is the potential energy of the equal positive
(b) Is least along the path AD
(c) Is zero along all the paths AB, AC, AD and AE point charges of 1µC each held 1 m apart in air
−3 −3
(d) Is least along AE (a) 9 × 10 J (b) 9 × 10 eV
(c) 2eV / m (d) Zero
5. Two plates are 2 cm apart, a potential difference of
10 volt is applied between them, the electric field 11. Two metal spheres of radii R1 and R 2 are charged to
between the plates is the same potential. The ratio of charges on the
(a) 20 N / C (b) 500 N / C spheres is

(c) 5 N / C (d) 250 N / C

(a) R1 : R 2 (b) R1 : R 2
6. At a certain distance from a point charge the electric
field is 500 V / m and the potential is 3000 V . What (c) R : R
2
1
2
2 (d) R13: R 32

is this distance
42 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

12. The potential at a point due to an electric dipole will 18. Four plates of equal area A are separated by equal
be maximum and minimum when the angles between distances d and are arranged as shown in the figure.
the axis of the dipole and the line joining the point to The equivalent capacity is
the dipole are respectively
(a) 90o and180o (b) 0o and 90o
(c) 90o and 0o (d) 0o and180o

13. A condenser of capacity 50 µF is charged to 10 volts . 2ε 0 A 3ε0 A

(a) (b)
Its energy is equal to d d
(a) 2.5 × 10−3 joule (b) 2.5 × 10−4 joule 3ε0 A ε0 A
(c) (d)
d d
(c) 5 × 10−2 joule (d) 1.2 × 10−8 joule
19. Three capacitors of capacitances 3µF, 9µF and 18µF

14. A parallel plate condenser has a capacitance 50µF in are connected once in series and another time in
parallel. The ratio of equivalent capacitance in the
air and 110µF when immersed in oil. The dielectric
C 
constant ' k ' of the oil is two cases  s  will be
C
 p 
(a) 0.45 (b) 0.55
(c) 1.10 (d) 2.20 (a) 1 : 15 (b) 15 : 1
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 3
15. The distance between the plates of a parallel plate
condenser is 4mm and potential difference is 20. Two capacitors of 10 µ F and 20 µ F are connected in
60 volts . If the distance between the plates is series with a 30V battery. The charge on the
capacitors will be, respectively
increased to 12mm, then
(a) 100 µC, 200µC (b) 200 µC, 100µC
(a) The potential difference of the condenser will
(c) 100 µC, 100µC (d) 200 µC, 200µC
become 180 volts
(b) The P.D. will become 20 volts
Section-B (Assertion & Reason Type
(c) The P.D. will remain unchanged
(d) The charge on condenser will reduce to one third Questions)

16. A parallel plate capacitor is charged and the charging 21. Assertion: At every point in the electric field, a
battery is then disconnected. If the plates of the particle with charge q possesses a certain electrostatic
capacitor are moved further apart by means of potential energy.
insulating handles, then Reason: Work done by external force in bringing a
(a) The charge on the capacitor increases charge from infinity to a point in an electric field is
(b) The voltage across the plates decreases stored as potential energy of the charge.
(c) The capacitance increases (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
(d) The electrostatic energy stored in the capacitor reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
increases (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
17. What is the area of the plates of a 3F parallel plate (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
capacitor, if the separation between the plates is (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
5mm
22. Assertion: The potential in the equatorial plane of a
9 2 9 2 dipole is zero.
(a) 1.694 × 10 m (b) 4.529 × 10 m
Reason: Electrical potential is a vector quantity.
(c) 9.281× 109 m 2 (d) 12.981× 109 m 2 (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 43

(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is 28. Assertion: Capacitance of a capacitor does not
not the correct explanation of the assertion. change when a dielectric medium is inserted between
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. the capacitor plates.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. Reason: The capacitance C only depends on the
geometrical configuration (shape, size, separation) of
23. Assertion: Work done by electric field while a the system of two conductors.
charge moves on an equipotential surface is zero. (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
Reason: Electric field is parallel to equipotential reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
surface at every point of surface. (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the not the correct explanation of the assertion.
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. 28. Assertion: Charge always flows from capacitor of
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. high capacitance to capacitor of lower capacitance.
Reason: Charge always flows from low to high
24. Assertion: Electrostatic field is zero inside a potential.
conductor. (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
Reason: The free electrons of conductors arrange reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
themselves in a way that the electric field is zero (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
everywhere inside. not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion. Section-C (Case Study Questions)
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. Case Study-1
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. When a conductor is charged its potential increases. It
is found that for an isolated conductor (conductor
25. Assertion: Electric field is reduced in a dielectric should be of finite dimension, so that potential of
medium. infinity can be assumed to be zero) potential of the
Reason: External field induces dipole moment by conductor is proportional to charge given to it.
stretching or re-orienting molecules of the dielectric.
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
q = charge on conductor
26. Assertion: Capacitors with large capacitance can V = potential of conductor Isolated conductor
hold a large amount of charge Q at a relatively small q∝V
V. ⇒q=CV
Reason: Capacitance C = Q/V. Where C is proportionality constant called
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the capacitance of the conductor.
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. Definition of capacitance: Capacitance of conductor
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is is defined as charge required to increase the potential
not the correct explanation of the assertion. of conductor by one unit.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. Important points about the capacitance of an
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. isolated conductor: Capacitance of conductor is
44 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

defined as charge required to increase the potential of (c) Both (d) None of these
conductor by one unit. 35. Find the Ceq for the given circuit.
(i) It is a scalar quantity.
(ii) Unit of capacitance is farad in SI units and its
dimensional formula is M −1L−2 I 2 T 4
(iii) 1 Farad: 1 Farad is the capacitance of a
conductor for which 1 coulomb charge increases
potential by 1 volt. 5 2
(a) C μF (b) C μF
1Coulomb 2 5
1Farad =
1Volt 3 5
(c) C μF (d) C μF
=1μF 10
= −6
F,1nF 10 = −9
F or 1pF 10 −12
F 5 3
29. For an isolated conductor potential of the conductor 36. Find the Ceq for the given circuit.
is proportional to
(a) Charge (b) Capacitance
(c) Electric field (d) None of these
30. Capacitance is a ……… quantity.
(a) Scalar
(b) May be scalar or may be vector
(c) Vector
C
(d) None of these (a) μF (b) 2CμF
2
31. Which one is the dimensions of capacitance?1
(c) 3CμF (d) 4CμF
(a) M −1L−2 I 2 T 4 (b) M −1L−2 IT 4
(c) ML2 I3 T −4 (d) ML2 IT −4
Case Study -3
32. If we given 1C charge to a conductor and its potential
Let us now find electrostatic potential at a point P due
is increased by 1 volt then capacitance will be
(a) 1 Farad (b) 3 Farad to a group of point charges q1 , q 2 , q 3 ...q n lying at
(c) 2 Farad (d) 4 Farad distances r1 , r2 , r3 ...rn from point P (fig.). The
electrostatic potential at point P due to these charges
Case Study -2 is found by calculating electrostatic potential P due to
If capacitors are in series, then charge flow in each each individual charge, considering the other charges
capacitor will be same and potential drop across all to be absent and then adding up these electrostatic
the capacitors will be different and capacitance will potentials algebraically.
be given by the formula
The electrostatic potential at point P due to charge q1 ,
1 1 1 1
= + + + ...... when other charges are considered absent,
Ceq C1 C2 C3
1 q1
If capacitors are in parallel combination the potential V1
= ⋅
4πε0 r1
drop across each capacitor will be same and charge
Similarly, electrostatic potentials at point P due to the
flowing through each capacitor will be different and
capacitance will be given by individual charges q 2 ,q 3 ......q n (when other charges
Ceq = C1 + C 2 + C3 + ...... are absent) are given by
33. If capacitors are in parallel then which quantity will 1 q2 1 q3 1 qn
V2 = ⋅ ; V3 = ⋅ ;......Vn = ⋅
remain the same across all the capacitors. 4πε0 r2 4πε0 r3 4πε0 rn
Hence, electrostatic potential at point P due to the
(a) Charge (b) Potential group of n point charges,
(c) Both (d) None of these V = V1 + V2 + V3 + ...... + Vn
34. If capacitors are in series then which quantity will
1 q1 1 q2 1 q3 1 qn
remain the same across all the capacitors = ⋅ + ⋅ + ⋅ + ...... + ⋅
(a) Charge (b) Potential
4πε0 r1 4πε0 r2 4πε0 r3 4πε0 rn
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 45

1  q1 q 2 q 3 qn  39. Two point charges 2µC and −4µC are situated at

=  + + + ...... + 
4πε 0  r1 r2 r3 rn  points (-2m, 0m) and (2m, 0m) respectively. Find out

1 n
qi (
potential at point D 0 m, 5 m .)
V=
4πε0
∑r
i =1 i

37. Four point charges are placed at the corners of a

square of side  calculate potential at the centre of
the square.

(a) 6000 V (b) – 6000 V

(c) 5000 V (d) – 5000 V

40. Potential due to system of charges can be

(a) 0 Volt (b) 5 Volt (a) + ve (b) – ve
(c) 3 Volt (d) 8 Volt (c) zero (d) All of the above
38. Two point charges 2µC and −4µC are situated at
points ( −2 m,0 m ) and ( 2 m,0 m ) respectively. Find
out potential at point C.

(a) 15000 V (b) – 150000 V

(c) 10000 V (d) –10000 V
46 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. Name the physical quantity whose S.I. unit is J C−1 . Is between the plates. Find the expression for the
it a scalar or a vector quantity? capacitance when the slab is inserted between the
(AI 2010) plates.
2. Plot a graph comparing the variation of potential ' V (Foreign 2010)
and electric field ' E due to a point charge ' Q ' as a 11. A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery.
function of distance ' R ' from the point charge. After sometime the battery is disconnected and a
(Foreign 2010) dielectric slab with its thickness equal to the plate
3. What is the geometrical shape of equipotential separation is inserted between the plates. How will (i)
surfaces due to a single isolated charge? the capacitance of the capacitor, (ii) potential
(Delhi 2013, AI 2010) difference between the plates and (iii) the energy
4. Depict the equipotential surfaces for a system of two stored in the capacitor be affected? Justify your
identical positive point charges placed a distance ' d ' answer in each case.
apart. (Delhi 2011 & 2010)
(Delhi 2010) 12. Find the ratio of the potential difference that must be
5. Find out the expression for the potential energy of a applied across the parallel and the series combination
of two identical capacitors so that the energy stored
system of three charges q1 , q 2 and q 3 located
   in the two cases, becomes the same.
respectively at r1 , r2 and r3 with respect to the (Foreign 2010)
common origin O. 13. A point charge +Q is placed at point O as shown in
(Delhi 2010) the figure. Is the potential difference VA − VB
6. A dipole, with its charges, -q and +q, located at the positive, negative or zero?
points (0,-b, 0) and (0,+b, 0), is present in a uniform (Delhi 2016 & 2011, Foreign 2016)

electric field E The equipotential surfaces of this
field, are planes parallel to the y-z planes.

(i) What is the direction of the electric field E ?
(ii) How much torque would the dipole experience in
this field?
(Delhi 2010)
7. Deduce the expression for the potential energy of a 14. Two uniformly large parallel thin plates having
system of two point charges q1 and q 2 brought from densities +σ and −σ are kept in the X-Z plane at a
  distance d apart. Sketch an equipotential surface due
infinity to the points r1 and r2 respectively in the
 to electric field between the plates. If a particle of
presence of external electric field E mass m and charge -q remains stationary between the
(Delhi 2010) plates, what is the magnitude and direction of this
8. Show that the capacitance of a spherical conductor is field?
4πε0 times the radius of the spherical conductor. (Delhi 2011)
(Delhi 2010) 15. (a) Draw equipotential surfaces due to point Q > 0
9. Distinguish between polar and non-polar dielectric. (b) Are these surfaces equidistant from each other? If
(AI 2010) no, explain why?
10. (a) How is the electric field due to a charged parallel (Delhi 2011)
plate capacitor affected when a dielectric slab is 16. Can two equipotential surfaces intersect each other?
inserted between the plates fully occupying the Give reasons.
intervening region? (Delhi 2011)
(b) A slab of material of dielectric constant K has the 17. Two charges -q and +q are located at point A(0,0,-a)
same area as the plates of a parallel plate capacitor and B(0,0,+a) respectively. How much work is done
1 in moving a test charge from point P(7,0,0) to Q(-
but has thickness d , where d is the separation 3,0,0) ?
2
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 47

(Delhi 2011) distance between the equipotential surface and the

18. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged such source charge decreases?
that the potential on its surface is 10 V. What is the (AI 2012)
potential at the centre of the sphere? 25. Distinguish between a dielectric and a conductor?
(AI 2011) (Delhi 2012)
19. What is the area of the plates of 2F parallel plate 26. Explain, using suitable diagrams, the difference in the
capacitor having separation between the plates is behaviour of a (i) conductor and (ii) dielectric in the
presence of external electric field. Define the terms
0.5 cm ?
polarization of a dielectric and write its relation with
(AI 2011)
susceptibility.
20. Two identical parallel plate (air) capacitor C1 and C 2 (Delhi 2012)
have capacitances C each. The area between their 27. Determine the potential difference across the plates of
plates in now filled with dielectrics as shown. the capacitor 'C1 ' of the network shown in the figure.

[ Assume E 2 > E1 ]
(Delhi 2012)

If the two capacitors still have equal capacitance,

obtained the relation between dielectric constants
K, K1 and K 2 . 28. Deduce the expression for the electrostatic energy
(Foreign 2011) stored in a capacitor of capacitance ' C ' and having
21. Net capacitance of three identical capacitors in series charge ' Q '. How will the (i) energy stored and (ii)
is 1µF. What will be their net capacitance if the electric field inside the capacitor be affected when
it is completely filled with a dielectric material of
connected in parallel?
dielectric constant ' K’?
Find the ratio of energy stored in the two
(AI 2012)
configurations if they are both connected to the same
29. A capacitor of 20 pF is charged by a 300 V battery.
source.
The battery is then disconnected and the charged
(AI 2011)
capacitor is connected to another uncharged capacitor
22. Draw a plot showing the variation of (i) electric field
of 100 pF. Calculate the difference between the final
(E) and (ii) electric potential (V) with distance r due
energy stored in the combined system and the initial
to a point charge Q.
energy stored in the single capacitor.
(Delhi 2012)
(Foreign 2012)
23. A test charge ' q ' is moved without acceleration from
30. Obtain the expression for the potential due to an
A to C along the path from A to B and then from B to
electric dipole of dipole moment p at a point ' x ' on
C in electric field E as shown in the figure. (i)
the axial line.
Calculate the potential difference between A and C.
(AI 2013)
(ii) At which point (of the two) is the electric
31. Two charges 2µ C and − 2µC are placed at points A
potential more and why?
(AI 2012) and B, 5 cm apart. Depict an equipotential surface of
the system.
(Delhi 2013)
32. What is the amount of work done in moving a point
charge around a circular arc of radius r at the centre
of which another point charge is located?
(AI 2013)
24. Write two properties of equipotential surfaces. Depict 33. Draw the equipotential surfaces due to an electric
equipotential surfaces due to an isolated point charge. dipole. Locate the points where the potential due to
Why do the equipotential surfaces get closer as the the dipole is zero.
48 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

(AI 2013) 40. "For any charge configuration, equipotential surface

34. Calculate the amount of work done to dissociate a through a point is normal to the electric field."
system of three charges 1µC,1µC and −4µCq 2 placed Justify.
(Delhi 2014)
on the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side 10 cm.
41. Two closely spaced equipotential surfaces A and B
(AI 2013)
with potentials V and V + δV, (where δV is the
35. A slab of material of dielectric constant K has the
same area as that of the plates of a parallel plate change in V ), are kept δ l distance apart as shown in
capacitor but has the thickness d / 2, where d is the the figure. Deduce the relation between the electric
separation between the plates. Find out the expression field and the potential gradient between them. Write
for its capacitance when the slab is inserted between the two important conclusions concerning the relation
the plates of the capacitor. between the electric field and electric potentials.
(AI 2013) (Delhi 2014)
36. Two identical capacitors of plate dimensions l × b and
plate separation d have dielectric slabs filled in
between the space of the plates as shown in the
figures.

42. The given graph shows variation of charge ' q ' versus
potential difference ' V′ for two capacitors C1 and C 2
. Both the capacitors have same plate separation but
plate area of C 2 is greater than that of C1 . Which line
(A or B ) corresponds to C1 and why?
(AI 2014)

Obtain the relation between the dielectric constants

K, K1 and K 2 .
(AI 2013)
37. A parallel plate capacitor, each of plate area A and
separation ' d ' between the two plates, is charged 43. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is charged
with charges +Q and -Q on the two plates. Deduce to a potential V. It is then connected to another
the expression for the energy stored in capacitor. uncharged capacitor having the same capacitance.
(Foreign 2013) Find out the ratio of the energy stored in the
38. A capacitor of unknown capacitance is connected combined system to that stored initially in the single
across a battery of V volts. The charge stored in it is capacitor.
360µC. When potential across the capacitor is (AI 2014)
reduced by 120 V, the charge stored in it becomes 44. (a) Obtain the expression for the energy stored per
120µC. Calculate: unit volume in a charged parallel plate capacitor.

(i) The potential V and the unknown capacitance C.

(ii) What will be the charge stored in the capacitor, if
the voltage applied had increased by 120 V ?
(Delhi 2013)
39. Two point charges q and -2 q are kept ' d, distance
apart. Find the location of point relative to charge ' q '
at which potential due to this system of charges is (b) The electric field inside a parallel plate capacitor
zero. is E. Find the amount of work done in moving a
(AI 2014) charge q over a closed rectangular loop a b c d a.
(Delhi 2014)
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 49

45. In a parallel plate capacitor with air between the 51. If two similar large plates, each of area A having
−3 2
plates, each plate has an area of 6 × 10 m and the surface charge densities +σ and −σ are separated by
separation between the plates is 3 mm. a distance d in air, find the expressions for
(i) Calculate the capacitance of the capacitor. (a) field at points between the two plates and on outer
(ii) If this capacitor is connected to 100 V supply, side of the plates. Specify the direction of the field in
each case.
what would be the charge on each plate?
(b) the potential difference between the plates.
(iii) How would charge on the plates be affected, if a
(c) the capacitance of the capacitor so formed.
3 mm a thick mica sheet of K = 6 is inserted between
(AI 2016)
the plates while the voltage supply remains 52. Two parallel plate capacitors X and Y have the same
connected? area of plates and same separation between them. X
(Foreign 2014)
has air between the plates while Y contains a
46. Figure shows the field lines on a positive charge. Is
dielectric of ε r =4 .
the work done by the field in moving a small positive
charge from Q to P positive or negative? Give reason.

(i) Calculate capacitance of each capacitor if

equivalent capacitance of the combination is 4µF.
47. Why are electric field lines perpendicular at a point (ii) Calculate the potential difference between the
on an equipotential surface of a conductor? plates of X and Y.
(AI 2015) (iii) Estimate the ratio of electrostatic energy stored
48. Two capacitors of unknown capacitances C1 and C 2 in X and Y.
(Delhi 2016)
are connected first in series and then in parallel across
53. In the following arrangement of capacitors, the
a battery of 100 V. If the energy stored in the two
energy stored in the 6µF capacitor is E. Find the
combinations is 0.045 J and 0.25 J respectively,
value of the following
determine the value of C1 and C 2 . Also calculate the
(i) Energy stored in 12µF capacitor
charge on each capacitor in parallel combination.
(Delhi 2015) (ii) Energy stored in 3µF capacitor
49. (a) Derive the expression for the energy stored in a (iii) Total energy drawn from the battery
parallel plate capacitor. Hence obtain the expression (Foreign 2016)
for the energy density of the electric field.
(b) A fully charged parallel plate capacitor is
connected across an uncharged identical capacitor.
Show that the energy stored in the combination is less
than that stored initially in the single capacitor.
(AI 2015)
50. Define an equipotential surface. Draw equipotential
surfaces: 54. Find the ratio of the potential differences that must
(i) in the case of a single point charge and be applied across the parallel and series combination
(ii) in a constant electric field in Z-direction. Why the of two capacitors C1 and C 2 with their capacitances
equipotential surface about a single charge are not
in the ratio 1: 2 so that the energy stored in the two
equidistant?
cases becomes the same.
(iii) Can electric field exist tangential to an
(AI 2016)
equipotential surface? Give reason.
(AI 2016)
50 ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

55. Depict the equipotential surfaces due to an electric

dipole.
(Delhi 2017)
56. Derive the expression for the electric potential due to
an electric dipole at a point on its axial line.
(Delhi 2017) 62. Four point charges Q, q, Q and q are placed at the
57. An infinitely large thin plane sheet has a uniform corners of a square of side ' a ' as shown in the figure.
surface charge density +σ. Obtain the expression for Find the
the amount of work done in bringing a point charge q (a) resultant electric force on a charge Q, and
from infinity to a point, distant r, in front of the (b) potential energy of this system.
charged plane sheet. (2018)
(AI 2017)
58. (i) Find the equivalent capacitance between A and B
in the combination given below. Each capacitor is of
2µF capacitance.

63. (a) Three point charges q, -4 q and 2 q are placed at

the vertices of an equilateral triangle A B C of side ' P
(ii) If a dc source of 7 V is connected across A B, as shown in the figure. Obtain the expression for the
how much charge is drawn from the source and what magnitude of the resultant electric force acting on the
is the energy stored in the network? charge q.
(Delhi 2017) (b) Find out the amount of the work done to separate
59. A 12pF capacitor is connected to a 50 V battery. the charges at infinite distance.
(2018)
How much electrostatic energy is stored in the
capacitor? If another capacitor of 6pF is connected in
series with it with the same battery connected across
the combination, find the charge stored and potential
difference across each capacitor.
(Delhi 2017)
60. Two identical capacitors of 12pF each are connected
in series across a battery of 50 V. How much 64. Draw the equipotential surface due to an electric
electrostatic energy is stored in the combination? If dipole.
these were connected in parallel across the same (Delhi 2019)
battery, how much energy will be stored in the 65. The electric potential as a function of distance ' x ' is
combination now? shown in the figure. Draw a graph of the electric field
Also find the charge drawn from the battery in each E as a function of x.
case. (AI 2019)
(Delhi 2017)
61. Two identical parallel plate capacitors A and B are
connected to a battery of V volt with the switch S
closed. The switch is now opened and the free space
between the plates of the capacitors is filled with a 66. Is the electrostatic potential necessarily zero at a
dielectric of dielectric constant K. Find the ratio of point where the electric field is zero? Give an
the total electrostatic energy stored in both capacitors example to support your answer.
before and after the introduction of the dielectric. (AI 2019)
(AI 2017) 67. Derive an expression for the potential energy of an
electric dipole in a uniform electric field. Explain
conditions for stable and unstable equilibrium.
(AI 2019)
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 51

68. Why is the potential inside a hollow spherical 70. (a) Briefly describe the process of transferring the
charged conductor constant and has the same value as charge between the two plates of a parallel plate
on its surface? capacitor when connected to a battery. Derive an
expression for the energy stored in a capacitor.
69. When a parallel plate capacitor is connected across a (b) A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery
d c battery, explain briefly how the capacitor gets to a potential difference V. It is disconnected from
charged. (AI 2019) battery and then connected to another uncharged
capacitor of the same capacitance. Calculate the ratio
of the energy stored in the combination to the initial
energy on the single capacitor.
(Delhi 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL &

CAPACITANCE
 03
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 53

vd = aτ = eEτ/m
Chapter at a Glance where a is the acceleration of the electron. This gives
1. Current through a given area of a conductor is the net m
ρ= 2
charge passing per unit time through the area. ne τ
2. Motion of conduction electrons in electric field E is 9. When a source of emf ε is connected to an external
the sum of (i) motion due to random collisions and (ii) resistance R, the voltage Vext across R is given by
that due to E. The motion due to random collisions ε
Vext
= IR = R
averages to zero and does not contribute to vd. R+r
3. Current is a scalar although we represent current with 10. (a) Total resistance R of n resistors connected in
an arrow. Currents do not obey the law of vector series is given by R = R1 + R2 +..... + Rn
addition. That current is a scalar also follows from it’s (b) Total resistance R of n resistors connected in
definition. The current I through an area of cross- 1 1 1 1
parallel is given by = + + ......
section is given by the scalar product of two vectors: R R1 R2 Rn
I = j. ∆S, where j and ∆S are vectors. 11. Kirchhoff’s Rules
4. The resistance R of a conductor depends on its length l (a) Junction Rule: At any junction of circuit elements,
and cross-sectional area A through the relation, the sum of currents entering the junction must equal
ρl the sum of currents leaving it. Kirchhoff’s junction
R=
A rule is based on conservation of charge.
where ρ, called resistivity is a property of the material (b) Loop Rule: The algebraic sum of changes in
and depends on temperature and pressure. potential around any closed loop must be zero.
5. Electrical resistivity of substances varies over a very 12. The Wheatstone bridge is an arrangement of four
wide range. Metals have low resistivity, in the range of resistances – R1, R2, R3, R4 as shown in the text. The
10–8 Ω m to 10–6 Ω m. Insulators like glass and rubber null-point condition is given by
have 1022 to 1024 times greater resistivity. R1 R3
= using which the value of one resistance can
Semiconductors like Si and Ge lie roughly in the R2 R4
middle range of resistivity on a logarithmic scale.
be determined, knowing the other three resistances.
6. In most substances, the carriers of current are
13. The measurement of resistance by Wheatstone bridge
electrons; in some cases, for example, ionic crystals
is not affected by the internal resistance of the cell.
and electrolytic liquids, positive and negative ions
carry the electric current.
14. If a skeleton cube is made with 12 equal resistance
7. Current density j gives the amount of charge flowing
each having resistance R then the net resistance
per second per unit area normal to the flow, j = nq vd
across.
where n is the number density (number per unit
5
volume) of charge carriers each of charge q, and vd is (a)The longest diagonal (EC or AG) = R
the drift velocity of the charge carriers. For electrons 6
q = – e. If j is normal to a cross-sectional area A and 3
(b)The diagonal of face (e.g. AC, ED, ....) = R
is constant over the area, the magnitude of the current 4
I through the area is nevd A. 7
(c)A side (e.g. AB, BC.....) = R
8. Using E = V/l, I = nevd A, and Ohm’s law, one 12
eE ne 2
obtains =ρ υd 15. The potentiometer is a device to compare potential
m m
The proportionality between the force eE on the differences. Since the method involves a condition of
electrons in a metal due to the external field E and the no current flow, the device can be used to measure
drift velocity vd (not acceleration) can be understood, potential difference; internal resistance of a cell and
if we assume that the electrons suffer collisions with compare emf’s of two sources.
ions in the metal, which deflect them randomly. If
such collisions occur on an average at a time interval
τ,
54 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

Solved Examples
Example–1 4 ρ 2 l2
For the second wire, R2 =
Explain the convention used for electric current with π d 22
respect to the flow of charges. 2 2
Sol. The convention is as follows: R1 ρ1 l1 d  1 1 3
∴ = × ×  2  = × ×   = 1 Or R1 = R2
(a) If the moving charges are positive, the current is in R2 ρ 2 l2  d1  3 3 1
the direction of motion. The diameter of the first wire is less. So it is thin.
(b) If the moving charges are negative, the current is ∴ R1 = 20Ω; so R2 = 20Ω
opposite to the direction of m
Example–5
Example–2 Derive the relation between drift velocity and current
What are the different types of conductors? Mention density.
the difference between them. Sol. Relation between drift velocity and current density.
Sol. The conductors can be classified into two main groups: The number of free electrons in this portion is nAVd dt.
Solid (metallic) conductors.
(Where ‘n’ are the number of free electrons per unit
Electrolytic conductors.
volume) the charge crossing this area in time ∆t is,
In solid conductors the charge carriers are
electrons(free) whereas in electrolytic solutions the
charge carriers are positive and negative ions.

Example–3
Considering a steady current 4.8A flowing through a ∆Q= nAvd ∆te
wire. Estimate the total number of electrons flowing ∆Q
=i = nAvd e
through the wire in 10 seconds. ∆t
Sol. We know that, i
j = nevd
=
Q A
i=
t
or, Q =it =×
10 4.8C = 48C Example–6
Define mobility. Show that it is inversely proportional
Again, the number of electrons(n) can be related to
to the mass.
charge
Sol. Electrical mobility is the ability of charged particles
Q = ne, where e is the charge of the electron
(such as electrons and protons) to move through a
48
or, n = medium in response to an electric field that is pulling
1.6 × 10−19
them.
or, n = 3 × 1020
It is denoted by µ.
v
Example–4 µ= d
E
The length, radius and resistivity of two wires are each
v
in the ratio 1: 3. The resistance of the comparatively By definition µ = d
E
thin wire is 20Ω . Determine the resistance of the
other wire. eEτ
We know that, v d =
m
1 l ρl 4ρl
Sol. =R ρ= ρ= = [d = diameter of the eEτ
A A πd2 πd2 ∴µ =
4 mE
wire] eτ
Or, µ =
4ρ l m
For the first wire R1 = 1 21
π d1 1
Hence, µ ∝
m
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 55

20
Or R
= Ω
Example–7 19
Using colour code determine the resistance of the
carbon resistor given below.

Sol.

Green Blue Red Gold

5 6 10 2
±5%
2 (b) Given voltage across the parallel Combination V =
R= 56 × 10 Ω ± 5%
20 volt
Or,=
R 5600Ω ± 5%
Let the current through resistance 2Ω, 4Ω and 5Ω are
R 5.6kΩ ± 5%
Or, =
I1 , I 2 and I3 respectively.
V 20
Example–8 Now, =
I1 = = 10A
R1 2
If the resistance of a conductor is 5Ω at 50°C and
7Ω at 100°C then the mean temperature coefficient of V 20
I2
= = = 5A
resistance of the material is R2 4
R T2 R T1 1 + α ( T2 − T1 ) 
Sol. Using = I3
=
V 20
= = 4A
R3 5
R100 R 50 1 + α (100 − 50 ) 
⇒=
Total current, I = I1 + I 2 + I3 = 10 + 5 + 4 = 19A
( 7 − 5)
7 5 1 + ( α × 50 )  ⇒ =
⇒= α = 0.008 / °C
250 Example–11
Two similar wires of same length and same area of
Example–9 cross-section but of different material having
Explain how does the resistivity increase with increase resistivity ρ1 and ρ2 are connected in parallel.
in temperature for a metallic conductor? Calculate the effective resistivity of their combination.
Sol. We know, 1 1
1 m ρ1 .ρ 2
R1 R2 A= A ρl
ρ= = Sol.
= R =
σ ne 2 τ R1 + R2 ( ρ1 + ρ 2 ) l / A 2 A
With increase in temperature in a metallic conductor, ρ ρρ
the collision increases, the relaxation time decreases. ⇒ =1 2
2 ρ1 + ρ 2
2ρ ρ
Example–10 ⇒ρ= 1 2
ρ1 + ρ 2
The number of free electrons remains constant for a
metallic conductor. As a result resistivity increases.
(a) Three resistors and are combined in parallel. What Example–12
is the total resistance of the combination? A cell of emf E is connected with an external
(b) If the combination is connected to a battery of emf resistance R, then potential difference across cell is V.
20 V and negligible internal resistance, determine the What will be the internal resistance of the cell?
current through each resistor, and the total current V
Sol. Let the current in the circuit = i =
drawn from the battery? R
Sol. (a) Total resistance of parallel combination, Across the cell,
1 1 1 1 E−V E−V E−V
= + + or = E V + ir ⇒ = r = =  R
R R1 R 2 R 3 i V/R  V 
1 1 1 1 10 + 5 + 4 19
= + + = = Ω
R 2 4 5 20 20
56 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

Example–13 −4 + 2I 2 − 0.5 × 2 + 3 =0
Find the current i in the following circuit. 2I 2 − 2 =0
I 2 = 1A
The current in arm EF = 1A

Example–15
What is sensitivity of a potentiometer? Mention ways
to increase the sensitivity of a potentiometer.
Sol. Sensitivity of potentiometer: A potentiometer is said to
Sol. According to Kirchhoff’s first law be more sensitive, if it measures a small potential
At junction A, i AB = 2 + 2 = 4A difference more accurately. The sensitivity is inversely
proportional to the potential gradient. In order to
At junction B, i AB = i BC − 1= 3A
increase the sensitivity of potentiometer:
(a) The resistance in primary circuit will have to be
decreased.
(b) The length of potentiometer wire will have to be
increased so that the length may be measured more
accuracy.
At junction C, i =i BC − 1.3 =3 − 1.3 =1.7amp
Example–16
The storage battery of a car has an emf of 12 V. If the
Example–14 internal resistance of the battery is 0.4 Ω , what is the
Using Kirchhoff’s rules in the given circuit, determine maximum current that can be drawn from the battery?
(i) The voltage drop across the unknown resistor R and [NCERT]
(ii) The current I 2 in the arm EF Sol. Emf of the battery, E = 12 V
Internal resistance of the battery, =r 0.4Ω
Maximum current drawn from the battery = I
According to Ohm's law,
E = Ir
E 12
I
= = = 30A
r 0.4
Sol. (i) Applying Kirchhoff’s second rule in the closed The maximum current drawn from the given battery is
mesh ABFEA 30 A.
VB − 0.5 × 2 + 3 =VA ⇒ VB − VA =−2
V=
VA − VB =
+2V Example–17
Potential drop across R is 1V as R, EF and upper row A storage battery of emf 8.0 V and internal resistance
are in parallel. 0.5 Ω is being charged by a 120 V dc supply using a
Or series resistor of 15.5 Ω . What is the terminal voltage
Potential across AB = Potential across EF of the battery during charging? What is the purpose of
having a series resistor in the charging circuit?
3 − 2 × 0.5 = 4 − 2I 2
[NCERT]
2I 2 = 2I 2 A
Sol. Emf of the storage battery, E = 8.0 V
Potential across R = potential across Internal resistance of the battery, r = 0.5 Ω
AB = Potential across EF = 3 − 2 × 0.5 = 2V DC supply voltage, V =120V
(ii) Applying Kirchhoff’s frist rule at E 0.5 + I 2 =
I Resistance of the resistor, R =15.5 Ω
Where, I is curtent through R. Effective voltage in the circuit = V′
Now, Kirchhoff’s second rule in closed mesh AEFB, V=′ V − E
∑ E + ∑ IR = 0 V ′= 120 − 8= 112V
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 57

Current flowing in the circuit = I, which is given by Where,

the relation, e = Electric charge
= 1.6 × 10−19 C
R is connected to the storage battery in series. Length of the wire ( l )
Hence, it can be written as Vd = Drift velocity =
Time taken to cover ( t )
V′ 112 112
=I = = = 7A l
R + r 15.5 + 0.5 16 I = nAe
Voltage across resistor R given by the product, t
nAel
IR =
7 × 15.5 =
108.5V t=
I
DC supply voltage = Terminal voltage of battery +
3 × 8.5 × 1028 × 2 × 10−6 × 1.6 × 10−19
Voltage drop across R =
Terminal voltage of battery =120 – 108.5 = 11.5V 3.0
4
A series resistor in a charging circuit limits the current = 2.7 × 10 s
drawn from the external source. The current will be Therefore, the time taken by an electron to drift from
extremely high in its absence. This is very dangerous. one end of the wire to the other is 2.7 × 104 s .

Example–18 Example–20
In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25 V Determine the current drawn from a 12 V supply with
gives a balance point at 35.0 cm length of the wire. If internal resistance 0.5Ω by the infinite network shown
the cell is replaced by another cell and the balance in Figure. Each resistor has 1Ω resistance.
point shifts to 63.0 cm, what is the emf of the second [NCERT]
cell?
[NCERT]
Sol. Emf of the cell, E1 = 1.25V
Balance point of the potentiometer, I1 = 35cm
The cell is replaced by another cell of emf E 2 .
Sol. The resistance of each resistor connected in the given
New balance point of the potentiometer, I 2 = 63cm
circuit, R = 1Ω
The balance condition is given by the relation,
Equivalent resistance of the given circuit = R ′
E1 l1
= The network is infinite.
E 2 l2
Hence, equivalent resistance is given by the relation,
l2 63 R′
E 2 = E1 × = 1.25 × = 2.25V ∴ R ′ =2 +
l1 35 ( R ′ + 1)
Therefore, emf of the second cell is 2.25 V.
( R ′)
2
− 2R ′ − 2 =0
Example–19 2 ± 4 + 8 2 ± 12
R ′= = = 1± 3
The number density of free electrons in a copper 2 2
conductor estimated in Example 3.1 is 8.5 × 1028 m −3 . Negative value of R ′ cannot be accepted.
How long does an electron take to drift from one end Hence, equivalent resistance
of a wire 3.0 m long to its other end? The area of
cross-section of the wire is 2.0 × 10−6 m 2 and it is
R ′ =+ (
1 3 =
1 + 1.73 =)
2.73Ω

carrying a current of 3.0 A. Internal resistance of the circuit, =

r 0.5Ω
[NCERT] Hence, total resistance of the given circuit
Sol. Number density of free electrons in a copper = 2.73 + 0.5 = 3.23Ω
conductor, =n 8.5 × 1028 m −3 Supply voltage, V = 12 V
Length of the copper wire, l = 3.0m According to Ohm’s law, current drawn from the
Area of cross-section of the wire, =
A 2.0 × 10−6 m 2 12
source is given by ratio, = 3.72A .
Current carried by the wire, I = 3.0A , which is given
3.23
by the relation, I = nAeVd
Example–21
58 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

Figure shows a 2.0 V potentiometer used for the R 33.7

Sol. From the first balance point, we get = … (1)
determination of internal resistance of a 1.5 V cell. S 66.3
The balance point of the cell in open circuit is 76.3 cm. After S is connected in parallel with a resistance of 12
When a resistor of 9.5 Ω is used in the external circuit Ω, the resistance across the gap changes from S to Seq,
of the cell, the balance point shifts to 64.8 cm length of where,
the potentiometer wire. Determine the internal 12S
resistance of the cell. Seq =
S + 12
[NCERT]
and hence the new balance condition now gives
51.9 R R ( S + 12 )
= = … (2)
48.1 Seq 12S
Substituting the value of R/S from Eq. (1), we get
51.9 S + 12 33.7
= ⋅
48.1 12 66.3
Which gives= S 13.5 Ω . Using the value of R/S
above, we get=
R 6.86 Ω.

Example–23
Sol. Resistance of the standard resistor, =R 10.0Ω At room temperature (27.0 °C) the resistance of a
Balance point for this resistance, l1 = 58.3cm heating element is 100 Ω . What is the temperature of
Current in the potentiometer wire = i the element if the resistance is found to be 117Ω
Hence, potential drop across R, E1 = iR given that the temperature coefficient of the material
Resistance of the unknown resistor = X of the resistor is 1.70 × 10−4 °C −1 .
Balance point for this resistor, l2 = 68.5 cm [NCERT]
Hence, potential drop across X, E 2 = iX Sol. Room temperature, T = 27°C
Resistance of the heating element at T, R= 100 Ω
The relation connecting emf and balance point is,
Let T1 is the increased temperature of the filament.
E1 l1
= Resistance of the heating element at T1 , R= 117Ω
E 2 l2 1

iR l1 α 1.70 × 10−4 °C −1
=
=
iX l2 α is given by the relation,
l1 68.5 Temperature co-efficient of the material of the
X= ×R = × 10 = 11.749Ω filament,
l2 58.3
R −R
Therefore, the value of the unknown resistance, α= 1
X,11.75Ω . R ( T1 − T )
If we fail to find a balance point with the given cell of R −R
T1 − T =1
emf, ε , then the potential drop across R and X must Rα
117 − 100
be reduced by putting a resistance in series with it. T1 − 27 =
Only if the potential drop across R or X is smaller than 100 (1.7 × 10−4 )
the potential drop across the potentiometer wire AB, a T1 − 27 =
1000
balance point is obtained.
T1 1027°C
=

Example–22 Therefore, at 1027°C, the resistance of the element is

In a metre bridge, the null point is found at a distance 1170Ω.
of 33.7 cm from A. If now a resistance of 12Ω is
connected in parallel with S, the null point occurs at Example–24
51.9 cm. Determine the values of R and S. A negligibly small current is passed through a wire of
[NCERT] length 15 m and uniform cross-section 6.0 × 10−7 m 2 ,
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 59

and its resistance is measured to be 5.0Ω . What is the Example–25

resistivity of the material at the temperature of the A silver wire has a resistance of 2.1Ω at 27.5°C , and
experiment? a resistance of 2.7Ω at 100°C . Determine the
[NCERT] temperature coefficient of resistivity of silver.
Sol. Length of the wire, l = 15 m [NCERT]
Area of cross-section of the wire, =
a 6.0 × 10−7 m 2 Sol. Temperature, = T1 27.5°C
Resistance of the material of the wire, R= 5.0Ω Resistance of the silver wire at T1 , R=
1 2.1Ω
Resistivity of the material of the wire = ρ Temperature, T
= 100°C
2

Resistance is related with the resistivity as Resistance of the silver wire at T2 , R= 2.7Ω
2
l
R =ρ Temperature coefficient of silver = α
A
It is related with temperature and resistance as
RA
ρ= R 2 − R1
l α=
R 1 ( T2 − T1 )
5 × 6 × 10−7
= =×2 10−7 Ωm 2.7 − 2.1
15 = = 0.0039°C−1
2.1(100 − 27.5 )
Therefore, the resistivity of the material is 2 × 10−7 Ωm
60 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section-A (1 Mark Questions) across each wire in turn, what will be the ratio of
1. What is the direction of the flow of current through current flowing in A & B?
electric circuit? 15. Calculate the equivalent resistance between points A
2. A meter bridge is balanced with known resistance in and B in the figure given below.
the right gap and a metal wire in the left gap. If the
metal wire is heated the balance point will shift to
which side?
3. The potential difference across the terminals of a
battery is 10V when there is a current of 3A in the 16. Under what conditions is heat produced in an electric
battery from the negative to the positive terminal. circuit:
When the current is 2A in the reverse direction, the (i) directly proportional
potential difference becomes 15 V. Find the internal (ii) inversely proportional to the resistance of the
resistance of the battery. circuit
4. A wire of resistivity ρ is stretched to double its
length. What will be its new resistivity?
5. What will happen to the relaxation time of electrons
Section-C (3 Marks Questions)
in a metal, if the temperature is changed? 17. In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25 V
6. Which physical quantity does the slope of voltage gives a balance point at 35.0 cm length of the wire. If
versus current graph for a metallic conductor the cell is replaced by another cell and the balance
represent? Give its SI unit. point shifts to 63.0 cm, what is the emf of the second
7. Define drift velocity of electrons. cell?
8. A resistance R is connected across a cell of emf ε and 18. For a Wheatstone bridge shown in the figure, use
internal resistance r. A potentiometer now measures Kirchhoff's laws to obtain its balance condition.
the potential difference between the terminals, of the 19. Calculate the value of the resistance R in the circuit
cell as V. Write the expression for ‘r’ in terms of ε, V shown in the figure, so that the current in the circuit
and R. is 0.2A. What would be the potential difference
9. A carbon resistor is marked in red, yellow, and between points A and B?
orange bands. What is the approximate resistance of
the resistor?
10. Draw the graph showing the variation of conductivity
with temperature for a metallic conductor?

Section-B (2 Marks Questions)

11. If potential difference V applied across a conductor is 20. (a) Why do we prefer potentiometer to measure the
increased to 2V, how will the drift velocity of the emf of cell than a voltmeter?
electron change? (b) With suitable circuit diagram, show how emfs of
12. Resistivities of copper, silver and manganin are 2 cells can be compared using a potentiometer?
1.7 × 10−8 m,1.0 × 10−8 m and 44 × 10 m .
−8
21. The potentiometer circuit shown, the balance (null)
Respectively which of these is the best conductor? point is at X. State with reason, where the balance
13. Name any one material having a small value of point will be shifted when
temperature coefficient of resistance. Write one use
of this material?
14. Two wires A and B are of the same metal and of
same length have their areas of cross section in the
ratio 2:1 if the same potential difference is applied
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 61

Section-E (5 Marks Questions)

23. In the figure a long uniform potentiometer wire AB is
having a constant potential gradient along its length.

(1) Resistance R is increased, keeping all parameters

unchanged.
(2) Resistance S is increased, keeping R constant.
(3) Cell P is replaced by another cell whose emf is
lower than that of cell Q.
The null points for the two primary cells of emfs ε1
Section-D (4 Marks Questions) and ε 2 connected in the manner shown are obtained
22. The variation of resistance of a metallic conductor at a distance of 120 cm and 300 cm from the end A.
with temperature is given in figure. Find (i) ε1 / ε 2
(ii) Position of null point for the cell ε1
How is the sensitivity of a potentiometer increased?
24. Define relaxation time of the free electrons drifting in
a conductor. How is it related to the drift velocity of
free electrons? Use this relation to reduce the
expression for the electrical resistivity of the material.
25. The potential difference applied across a given
resistor is altered so that the heat produced per second
increases by a factor of 9.
(a) Calculate the temperature coefficient of resistance
(a) By what factor does the applied potential
from the graph.
difference change?
(b) State why the resistance of the conductor
(b) In the figure shown, an ammeter A and a resistor
increases with the rise in temperature.
of 40 are connected to the terminals of the source.
The emf of the source is 12 V having an internal
resistance of 2 O. Calculate the voltmeter and
ammeter readings.
62 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section - A (Single Choice Questions) 5. The potential difference between point A & B is

1. The resistivity of iron is 1× 10−7 ohm − m . The

resistance of a iron wire of particular length and
thickness is 1 ohm. If the length and the diameter of
wire both are doubled, then the resistivity in
ohm − m will be
(a) 1× 10−7 (b) 2 × 10−7
(c) 4 × 10−7 (d) 8 × 10−7
2. Express which of the following setups can be used to 20 40
(a) V (b) V
verify Ohm’s law 7 7
10
(c) V (d) 0
7
6. The e.m.f. of a cell is E volts and internal resistance
(a) is r ohm. The resistance in external circuit is also r
ohm. The p.d. across the cell will be
(a) E/2 (b) 2E
(c) 4E (d) E/4
7. Kirchhoff's first law i.e. Σi = 0 at a junction is based
on the law of conservation of
(b) (a) Charge (b) Energy
(c) Momentum (d) Angular momentum
8. Kirchhoff's second law is based on the law of
conservation of
(a) Charge
(b) Energy
(c)
(c) Momentum
(d) Sum of mass and energy
9. In the given current distribution what is the value of I

(d)
3. Two resistors of resistance R1 and R 2 having
R 1 > R 2 are connected in parallel. For equivalent

resistance R , the correct statement is

(a) R > R1 + R 2 (b) R1 < R < R 2
(c) R 2 < R < (R1 + R 2 ) (d) R < R1 (a) 3A (b) 8 A
4. Three resistances of magnitude 2, 3 and 5 ohm are (c) 2A (d) 5A
connected in parallel to a battery of 10 volts and of 10. A current of 2.0 ampere passes through a cell of
negligible resistance. The potential difference across e.m.f. 1.5 volts having internal resistance of 0.15
3Ω resistance will be ohm. The potential difference measured, in volts,
across both the ends of the cell will be
(a) 2 volts (b) 3 volts
(c) 5 volts (d) 10 volts
(a) 1.35 (b) 1.50
(c) 1.00 (d) 1.20
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 63

11. In an experiment of meter bridge, a null point is (c) Internal resistance is less than external resistance
obtained at the centre of the bridge wire. When a (d) None of these
resistance of 10 ohm is connected in one gap, the 18. A meter bridge is balanced with known resistance in
value of resistance in other gap is the right gap and a metal wire in the left gap. If the
(a) 10 Ω (b) 5Ω metal wire is heated the balance point.
1 (a) Shifts towards left
(c) Ω (d) 500 Ω (b) Shifts towards right
5
(c) Does not change
12. In potentiometer a balance point is obtained, when
(d) May shift towards left or right depending on the
(a) The e.m.f. of the battery becomes equal to the
nature of the metal
e.m.f. of the experimental cell
19. A steady current flows in a metallic conductor of
(b)The p.d. of the wire between the +ve end to jockey
non-uniform cross-section. The quantity/quantities
becomes equal to the e.m.f. of the experimental cell
constant along the length of the conductor is/are
(c) The p.d. of the wire between +ve point and jockey
(a) Current, electric field and drift speed
becomes equal to the e.m.f. of the battery
(b) Drift speed only
(d) The p.d. across the potentiometer wire becomes
(c) Current and drift speed
equal to the e.m.f. of the battery
(d) Current only
13. Which of the following statement is wrong
20. When cells are connected in parallel, then
(a) Voltmeter should have high resistance
(a) The current decreases (b) The current increases
(b) Ammeter should have low resistance
(c) The e.m.f. increases (d)The e.m.f. decreases
(c) Ammeter is placed in parallel across the
conductor in a circuit
(d) Voltmeter is placed in parallel across the Section-B (Assertion & Reason Type
conductor in a circuit Questions)
14. All of the following statements are true except 21. Assertion: V = iR is Ohm's law.
(a) Conductance is the reciprocal of resistance and is Reason: V- i graph is always a straight line passing
measured in Siemens through origin.
(b) Ohm's law is not applicable at very low and very (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
high temperatures reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) Ohm's law is applicable to semiconductors (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
(d) Ohm's law is not applicable to electron tubes, not the correct explanation of the assertion.
discharge tubes and electrolytes (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
15. The resistivity of a wire depends on its (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(a) Length (b)Area of cross-section 22. Assertion: If a current flows through a wire of non-
(c) Shape (d)Material uniform cross-section, potential difference per unit
16. In the figure a carbon resistor has bands of different length of wire is same throughout the length of wire.
colors on its body as mentioned in the figure. The Reason: Current through the wire is not same at all
value of the resistance is cross-sections.
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(a) 2.2 kΩ (b) 3.3 kΩ 23. Assertion: A resistance wire is broken into four
pieces and all are connected in parallel. Then, net
(c) 5.6 kΩ (d) 9.1 kΩ
resistance becomes 1/16 times.
17. Current provided by a battery is maximum when
Reason: In parallel net resistance is less than the
(a) Internal resistance equal to external resistance
smallest value of individual resistance.
(b) Internal resistance is greater than external
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
resistance
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
64 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is

not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
24. Assertion: Inside a conductor, electrons have no reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
motion in the absence of some potential difference (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
across it. not the correct explanation of the assertion.
Reason: In the absence of potential difference no (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
electrostatic force will act on the electrons inside the (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
conductor. 28. Assertion: Voltmeter is much better than a
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the potentiometer for measuring emf of cell.
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. Reason: A Voltmeter draws no current while
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is measuring emf of a cell.
not the correct explanation of the assertion. (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
25. Assertion: In the circuit shown in figure, battery is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
ideal. If a resistance kR 0 is connected in parallel (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
with R, then power across R will remain same. (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
Reason: Current drawn from the battery will
increase. Section-C (Case Study Questions)
Case Study-1
A Wheatstone bridge is an electrical circuit used to
measure an unknown electrical resistance by
balancing two legs of a bridge circuit. One leg of
which includes the unknown component. The primary
benefit of the circuit is its ability to provide extremely
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
accurate measurements.
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
26. Assertion: Two 60 W bulbs are first connected in
series and then in parallel with same battery. Total The resistance is adjusted until the bridge is
power produced in second case will become four “balanced” and no current flows through the
times. Rated voltage is same for two bulbs. galvanometer. At the point. The voltage between the
Reason: In series total power produced will be 30 W two midpoints (B and D) will be zero. Therefore the
and in parallel 120 W. ratio of the two resistances in the known leg is equal
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the to the ratio of the two resistances in the unknown leg.
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. 29. In balanced wheat stone bridge
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is (a) Potential at points B and D remain same
not the correct explanation of the assertion. (b) Large current flows through the circuit
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. (c) Battery becomes over heated
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. (d) Resistances become small
27. Assertion: Two resistance wires shown in figure are 30. Wheat stone bridge is used to measure unknown
of same material. They have equal length. More heat (a) Unknown current
is generated in wire A. (b) Unknown voltage
(c) Unknown charge
Reason: In series H ∝ R and resistance of wire A is
(d) Unknown resistance
more.
31. Which instrument is used in wheat stone bridge
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 65

(a) Ammeter (b) Voltmeter (d) None will glow brighter

(c) Meter Bridge (d) Potentiometer 36. A rigid container with thermally insulated wall
32. Condition for balanced wheat stone bridge contains a coil of resistance 100Ω , carrying current 1
(a) R1/R2 = R3/Rx A. change in its internal energy after 5 min will be
(b) R3 = R1 ∗ Rx (a) 0 KJ (b) 10 KJ
(c) R1 = R3 ∗ Rx (c) 20 KJ (d) 30 KJ
(d) None of the above
Case Study -3
Case Study -2 According to Ohm’s law, the current flowing through
whenever an electric current is passed through a a conductor is directly proportional to the potential
conductor. It becomes hot after some time. The difference across the ends of the ends of the
phenomenon of the production of heat in a resistor by V
the flow of an electric current through it is called conductor i.e. I ∝ V ⇒ = R , where R is resistance
I
heating effect of current or Joule heating. Thus, the of the conductor. Electrical resistance of a conductor
electrical energy supplied by the source of emf is is the obstruction posed by the conductor to the flow
converted into heat. But if the circuit has an active of electric current through it. It depends upon length,
element like a motor, then a part of the energy area of cross-section, nature of material and
supplied by the source goes to do useful work and the temperature of the conductor. We can write,
rest appears as heat. Joule’s law of heating from the  
basis of various electrical appliances such as electric R∝ = R or R = ρ , where ρ is electrical
A A
bulb, electric furnace, electric press etc. resistivity of the material of the conductor.
37. Dimensions of electric resistance is
(a) [ML2 T 2 A −2 ]

(b) [ML2 T3 A −2 ]
33. Which of the following is a correct statement?
(a) Heat produced in a conductor is independent of (c) [M −1L−2 T −1A]
the current flowing. (d) [M −1L2 T 2 A −1 ]
(b) Heat produced in a conductor varies inversely as
38. If µA current flows through a conductor when
the current flowing.
potential difference of 2 volt is across its ends, them
(c) Heat produced in a conductor varies directly as
the resistance of the conductor is
the square of the current flowing.
(d) Heat produced in a conductor varies inversely as (a) 2 × 106 Ω (b) 3 × 105 Ω
the square of the current flowing. (c) 1.5 × 105 Ω (d) 5 × 107 Ω
34. If the coil of a heater is cut to half, what would 39. Specific resistance of a wire depends upon
happen to heat produced? (a) Length
(a) Doubled (b) Halved (b) Cross-sectional area
(c) Remains same (d) Becomes for times (c) Mass
(d) None of these
35. A 25 W bulb and 100 W bulb are joined in series
40. The slope of the graph between potential difference
connected to the mains. Which bulbs will glow
and current through a conductor is
brighter?
(a) A straight line
(a) 100 W
(b) Curve
(b) 25 W
(c) First curve then straight line
(c) Both bulbs will glow brighter
(d) First straight line then curve
66 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. Two conducting wires X and Y of same diameter the expression for the equivalent emf and the internal
but different materials are joined in series across a resistance of the combination.
battery. If the number density of electrons in X is (AI 2010)
twice that in Y, find the ratio of drift velocity of 7. Define drift velocity. Write its relationship with
electrons in the two wires. 
relaxation time in terms of the electric field E
(AI 2010) applied to a conductor. A potential difference V is
2. A wire of resistance 8R is bent in the form of a circle. applied to a conductor of length l. How is the drift
What is the effective resistance between the ends of a velocity affected when V is doubled and l is halved?
diameter AB? (Foreign 2010)
(Delhi 2010) 8. Define ionic mobility. Write its relationship with
relaxation time. How does one understand the
temperature dependence of resistivity of a
semiconductor?
(Foreign 2010)
9. The sequence of colored bands in two carbon
resistors R1 and R 2 is
3. Two identical slabs, of a given metal, are joined
(i) brown, green, blue
together, in two different ways, as shown in figures
(ii) orange, black, green
(i) and (ii). What is the ratio of the resistances of
Find the ratio of their resistances.
these two combinations?
(AI 2010)
(Delhi 2010)
10. A network of resistors is connected to a 16 V battery
of internal resistance of 1Ω as shown in the figure.
(Foreign 2010)

(i) (ii)

4. Three cells of emf ε, 2ε and 5ε having internal

resistances r, 2r and 3r respectively are connected
across a variable resistance R as shown in the figure. (a) Compute the equivalent resistance of the network.
Find the expression for the current. Plot a graph for (b) Obtain the voltage drops VAB and VCD .
variation of current with R. 11. Write any two factors on which internal resistance of
(AI 2010) a cell depends. The reading on a high resistance
voltmeter, when a cell is connected across it, is 2.2 V.
When the terminals of the cell are also connected to a
resistance of 5Ω as shown in the circuit, the
voltmeter reading drops to 1.8 V. Find the internal
resistance of the cell.
(AI 2010)
5. In a meter bridge, two unknown resistances R and S
when connected in the gaps, give a null point at 40
cm from one end. What is the ratio of R and S?
(Delhi 2010)
6. Two cells, of emf 2ε and ε , and internal resistance 2r
and r respectively, are connected in parallel. Obtain
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 67

12. (a) State Kirchhoff’s rules. 18. (a) Write the underlying principle of a potentiometer.
(b) Use these rules to write the expressions for the (b) Draw the circuit diagram of the experimental set-
currents I1 , I 2 and I3 in the circuit diagram shown. up used for determining the internal resistance of a
(AI 2010) cell by potentiometer. Write the necessary formula
used.
(Delhi 2010)
19. Draw a circuit diagram for determining the unknown
resistance R using meter bridge. Explain briefly its
working giving the necessary formula used.
(Delhi 2010)
20. Carbon and silicon both have four valence electrons
13. (a) State Kirchhoff’s rules. each. How then are they distinguished?
(b) A battery of 10 V and negligible internal (Delhi 2011)
resistance is connected across the diagonally opposite 21. Define resistivity of a conductor. Write its S.I. unit.
corners of a cubical network consisting of 12 resistors (AI 2011)
each of 1Ω resistance. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to 22. In an experiment on meter bridge, if the balancing
determine (i) the equivalent resistance of the network, length AC is ‘x’, what would be its value, when the
and (ii) the total current in the network. radius of the meter bridge wire AB is doubled?
(AI 2010) Justify your answer.
14. In a meter bridge, the null points is found at a (AI 2011)
distance of 40 cm from A. If a resistance of 12 Ω is
connected in parallel with S, the null point occurs at
50.0 cm from A. Determine the values of R and S.
(Delhi 2010)

23. A resistance R is connected across a cell of emf ε and

internal resistance r. A potentiometer now measures
the potential difference between the terminals of the
15. Write the principle of working of a potentiometer. cell as V. Write the expression for r in terms of ε , V
Describe briefly, with the help of a circuit diagram, and R.
how a potentiometer is used to determine the internal (Delhi 2011)
resistance of a given cell. 24. (a) You are required to select a carbon resistor of
(Delhi 2010)
resistance 47 kΩ ± 10% from a large collection. What
16. A cell, with a finite internal resistance r, is connected
should be the sequence of colour bands used to code
across two external resistances R1 and R 2
it?
( R1 > R 2 ) , one by one. In which case would the (b) Write the characteristics of manganin which make
terminal potential difference of the cell be more? it suitable for making standard resistance.
(Delhi 2010) (Foreign 2011)
17. (a) State Kirchhoff’s rules for an electric network. 25. Plot a graph showing temperature dependence of
(b) Using Kirchhoff’s rules, obtain the balance resistivity for a typical semiconductor. How is this
condition in terms of the resistances of four arms of behavior explained”
Wheatstone bridge. (Foreign 2011)
(Delhi 2013, 2010)
68 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

26. A straight line plot showing the terminal potential

difference (V) of a cell as a function of current (I)
drawn from its shown in the figure. Using this plot,
determine
(Delhi 2011)
(i) the emf and
(ii) internal resistance of the cell. 31. Two cells of emf E1 and E 2 and internal resistance r1
and r2 respectively are connected in parallel. Obtain
the expression for the emf and internal resistance of a
single equivalent cell that can replace this
combination?
(Foreign 2011)
32. Two cells of emf ε1 and ε 2 having internal
27. In the given circuit, assuming point A to be at zero resistances r1 and r2 respectively are connected in
potential, use Kirchhoff’s rules to determine the parallel as shown. Deduce the expressions of the
potential at point B. equivalent emf a cell which can replace the
(AI 2011) combination between the points B1 and B2 .
(AI 2011)

28. Using Kirchhoff’s rules in the given circuit,

determine (i) the voltage drop across the unknown 33. In the meter bridge experiment, balance point was
resistor R and (ii) the current I in the arm EF. observed at J with AJ = l.
(AI 2011) (i) The value of R and X were doubled and then
interchanged. What would be the new position of
balance point?
(ii) If the galvanometer and battery are interchanged
at the balance position, how will the balance point get
affected?
(AI 2011)

29. A conductor of through L is connected to a dc source

of emf ε . If this conductor is replaced by another
conductor of same material and same area of cross-
section but of length 3L, how will the drift velocity
change? 34. (a) State the underlying principle of potentiometer.
(Delhi 2011) (b) Describe briefly, giving the necessary circuit
30. In the circuit shown, R1 = diagram, how a potentiometer is used to measure the
4Ω, R 2 = R3 = 15Ω,
internal resistance of a given cell.
R= 30Ω and E = 10 V. Calculate the equivalent
4
(Foreign 2011)
resistance of the circuit and the current in each 35. (a) State with the help of circuit diagram, the working
resistor. principle of a meter bridge. Obtain the expression
(Delhi 2011) used for determining the unknown resistance.
(b) What happens if the galvanometer and cell are
interchanged at the balance point of the bridge?
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 69

(c) Why is it considered important to obtain the resistance. A milliammeter of 20 Ω resistance is

balance point near the mid-point of the wire? connected between P and R. Calculate the reading in
(Delhi 2011) the millimeter.
36. (a) State the working principle of a potentiometer. (AI 2012)
Draw a circuit diagram to compare emf of two
primary cells. Derive the formula used.
(b) Which material is used for potentiometer wire and
why?
(c) How can the sensitivity of a potentiometer be
increased?
(Delhi 2011)
37. When electrons drift in a metal from lower to higher
potential, does it mean that all the free electrons of
the metal are moving in the same direction?
(Delhi 2012) 44. Two students ‘X’ and ‘Y’ perform an experiment on
38. Two wires of equal length, one of copper and the potentiometer separately using the circuit given:
other of manganin have the same resistance. Which Keeping other parameters unchanged, how will the
wire is thicker? position of the null point be affected if
(AI 2012)
39. Show on a graph, the variation of resistivity with
temperature for a typical semiconductor.
(Delhi 2012)
40. A conductor of length ‘l’ is connected to a dc source
of potential ‘V’. If the length of the conductor is
tripled by gradually stretching it keeping ‘V’
constant, how will (i) drift speed of electrons and (ii)
(i) ‘X’ increases the value of resistance R in the set-
resistance of the conductor be affected. Justify your
up by keeping the key K1 closed and the key K 2
answer.
(Foreign 2012) open?
41. A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected (ii) ‘Y’ decreases the value of resistance S in the set-
to two external resistances R1 and R 2 a perfect up, while the key K 2 remains open and the key K1
ammeter. The current in the circuit is measured in closed?
four different situations: (Foreign 2012)
(i) Without any external resistance in the circuit. 45. Define relaxation time of the free electrons drifting in
(ii) With resistance R1 only a conductor. How is it related to the drift velocity of
free electrons? Use this relation to deduce the
(iii) With R1 and R 2 in series combination
expression for the electrical resistivity of the material.
(iv) With R1 and R 2 in parallel combination (AI 2012)
The currents measured in the four cases are 0.42 A, 46. Calculate the value of the resistance R in the circuit
1.05 A, 1.4 A and 4.2 A, but not necessarily in that shown in the figure so that the current in the circuit is
order. Identify the currents corresponding to the four 0.2 A. What would be the potential difference
cases mentioned above. between points B and E?
(Delhi 2012) (AI 2012)
42. A battery of emf 10 V and internal resistance 3Ω is
connected to a resistor. If the current in the circuit is
0.5 A, find
(Delhi 2012)
(i) The resistance of the resistor:
(ii) The terminal voltage of the battery
43. The network PQRS, shown in the circuit diagram, has
the batteries of 4 V and 5 V and negligible internal
70 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

47. Two cells of emf E1 , E 2 and internal resistance r1 and

r2 respectively are connected in parallel as shown in
the figure.


51. (a) Density the relation between current density ' j '
and potential difference ‘V’ across a current carrying
conductor of length ‘l’, area of cross-section ‘A’ and
Deduce the expression for the number density ‘n’ of free electrons.(b) Estimate
(i) The equivalent emf of the combination the average drift speed of conduction electrons in a
(ii) The equivalent resistance of the combination copper wire of cross-sectional area 1.0 × 10−7 m 2
(iii) The potential difference between the points A
carrying a current of 1.5 A. [Assume that the number
and B.
density of conduction electron is 9 × 1028 m −3 .]
(Foreign 2012)
(Delhi 2012)
48. Using Kirchhoff’s rules determine the value of
unknown resistance R in the circuit so that no current
52. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to obtain the balance condition
flows through 4 Ω resistance. Also find the potential
in a Wheatstone bridge. Calculate the value of R in
difference between A and D. the balance condition of the Wheatstone bridge, if the
(Delhi 2012) carbon resistor connected across the arm CD has the
colour sequence red, red and orange, as shown in the
figure. If now the resistances of the arms BC and CD
are interchanged, to obtain the balance condition,
another carbon resistor is connected in place of R.
What would now be the sequence of colour bands of
the carbon resistor?
(Delhi 2012)
49. Write the principle on which the working of a meter
bridge is based. In an experiment of meter bridge, a
student obtains the balance point at the point J such
that AJ = 40 cm as shown in the figure. The values of
‘R’ and ‘X’ are both doubled and then interchanged.
Find the new position of the balance point. If the
galvanometer and battery are also interchanged, how
will the position of balance point be affected?
(AI 2012) 53. Plot a graph showing the variation of resistance of a
50. In the figure a long uniform potentiometer wire AB is conducting wire as a function of its radius. Keeping
having a constant potential gradient along its length. the length of the wire and its temperature as constant
The null points for the two primary cells of emfs ε1 (Foreign 2013)
and ε 2 connected in the manner shown are obtained 54. Two materials Si and Cu, are cooled from 300 K to
60 K. What will be the effect on their resistivity?
at a distance of 120 cm and 300 cm from the end A.
(Foreign 2013)
Find (i) ε1 / ε 2 and (ii) position of null point for the
55. The emf of a cell is always greater than its terminal
cell ε1 . How is the sensitivity of a potentiometer voltage. Why? Give reason.
increased? (Delhi 2013)
(Delhi 2012) 56. Why is the terminal voltage of a cell less than its
emf?
(AI 2013)
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 71

57. A 10 V battery of negligible internal resistance is 64. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to determine the value of the
connected across a 200 V battery and a resistance of current I1 flowing in the circuit shown in the figure.
38 Ω as shown in the figure. Find the value of the (Delhi 2013)
current in circuit.
(Delhi 2013)

58. Two identical cells, each of emf E, having negligible

65. A battery of emf E and internal resistance r when
internal resistance, are connected in parallel with
connected across an external resistance of 12 Ω ,
each other across an external resistance R. What is
the current through this resistance? produces a current of 0.5 A. When connected across a
(AI 2013) resistance 25 Ω , it produces a current of 0.25 A.
59. Explain the term ‘drift velocity’ of electrons in a Determine (i) the emf and (ii) the internal resistance
conductor. Hence obtain the expression for the of the cell.
current through a conductor in terms of ‘drift (AI 2013)
velocity’. 66. Calculate the value of current drawn form a 5 V
(AI 2013) battery in the circuit as shown.
60. Write a relation between current and drift velocity of (Foreign 2013)
electrons in a conductor. Use this relation to explain
how the resistance of a conductor changes with the
rise in temperature.
(Delhi 2013)
61. Define mobility of a charge carrier. Write the relation
expressing mobility in terms of relaxation time. Give
its SI unit.
(AI 2013)
67. Describe briefly, with the help of a circuit diagram,
62. Draw a graph showing variation of resistivity with
how a potentiometer is used to determine the internal
temperature for nichrome. Which property of
resistance of a cell.
nichrome is used to make standard resistance coils?
(AI 2013)
(AI 2013)
68. State the underlying principle of a potentiometer.
63. An ammeter of resistance 0.80 Ω can measure
Write two factors on which the sensitivity of a
current up to 1.0 A. potentiometer depends.
(i) What must be the value of shunt resistance to
enable the ammeter to measure current up to 5.0 A?
(ii) What is the combined resistance of the ammeter
and the shunt?
(Delhi 2013)

In the potentiometer circuit shown in the figure, the

balance point is at X. State, giving reason, how the
balance point is shifted when
(i) Resistance R is increased?
(ii) Resistance S is increased, keeping R constant?
(Delhi 2013)
72 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

69. In the meter bridge experimental set up, shown in the 79. Estimate the average drift speed of conduction
figure, the null point ‘D’ is obtained at a distance of electrons in a copper wire of cross-sectional area
40 cm from end A of the meter bridge wire. 1.0 × 10−7 m 2 carrying a current of 1.5 A. Assume the
density of conduction electrons to be 9 × 1028 m −3 .
(AI 2014)
80. A cello of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘r’ is
connected across a variable resistor ‘R’. Plot a graph
showing variation of terminal voltage ‘V’ of the cell
versus the current ‘I’. Using the plot, show how the
emf of the cell and its internal resistance can be
determined.
(AI 2014)
If a resistance of 10 Ω is connected in series with R1 , 81. (a) Distinguish between emf (ε) and terminal voltage
null point is obtained at AD = 60 cm. Calculate the (V) of a cell having internal resistance ‘r’.
values of R1 and R 2 . (b) Draw a plot showing the variation of terminal
(Delhi 2013) voltage (V) vs the current (I) drawn from the cell.
70. (a) State the working principle of a potentiometer. Using this plot, how does one determine the internal
With the help of the circuit diagram, explain how a resistance of the cell?
potentiometer is used to compare the emf’s of two (AI 2014)
primary cells. Obtain the required expression used for 82. State Kirchhoff’s rules. Explains briefly how these
comparing the emfs. rules are justified.
(b) Write two possible causes for one sided deflection (Delhi 2014)
in a potentiometer experiment. 83. In the electric network shown in the figure, use
(Delhi 2013) Kirchhoff’s rules to calculate the power consumed by
71. How does the random motion of free electrons in a the resistance R= 4 Ω .
conductor get affected when a potential difference is (Delhi 2014)
applied across its ends?
(Delhi 2014)
72. Define the term ‘electrical conductivity’ of a metallic
wire. Write S.I. unit
(AI 2017, Delhi 2014)
73. Define the term drift velocity of charge carriers in a
conductor and write its relationship with the current
flowing through it.
(Delhi 2014) 84. Answer the following:
74. Write the expression for the drift velocity of charge (a) Why are connections between the resistors in a
carriers in a conductor of length ‘l’ across which a meter bridge made of thick copper strips?
potential difference ‘V’ is applied. (b) Why is generally preferred to obtain the balance
(AI 2014) point in the middle of the metre bridge wire?
75. Show variation of resistivity of copper as a function (c) Which material is used for the meter bridge wire
of temperature in a graph. and why?
(Delhi 2014) (AI 2014)
76. Plot a graph showing variation of current versus
voltage for the material GaAs.
(Delhi 2014)
77. How does one explain increase in resistivity of a
metal with increase of temperature?
(AI 2014)
78. State the underlying principle of a potentiometer.
(Delhi 2014)
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 73

85. A potentiometer wire of length 1 m has a resistance Determine (i) ε1 / ε 2 and (ii) position of null point for
of 10 Ω . It is connected to a 6 V battery in series with the cell of ε1 only.
a resistance of 5 Ω . Determine the emf of the primary (Foreign 2014)
cell which gives a balance point at 40 cm.
(Delhi 2014)
86. A potentiometer wire of length 1.0 m has a resistance
of 15 Ω . It is connected to a 5 V battery in series with
a resistance of 5 Ω . Determine the emf of the primary
cell which gives a balance point at 60 cm.
(Delhi 2014)
87. (a) State the underlying principle of a potentiometer.
91. Graph showing the variation of current versus voltage
Why is necessary to (i) use a long wire, (ii) have
for a material Gas is shown in the figure. Identify the
uniform area of cross-section of the wire and (iii) use
region of
a driving cell whose emf is taken to be greater than
the emfs of the primary cells?
(b) In a potentiometer experiment, if the area of the
cross-section of the wire increases uniformly from
one end to the other, draw a graph showing how
potential gradient would vary as the length of the
wire increases from one end.
(AI 2014) (i) negative resistance
88. Define the term ‘drift velocity’ of charge carriers in a (ii) where Ohm’s law is obeyed.
conductor. Obtain the expression for the current (Delhi 2015)
density in terms of relaxation time. 92. I-V graph for a metallic wire at two different
(Foreign 2014) temperatures, T1 and T2 is as shown in the figure.
89. A 100 V battery is connected to the electric network
Which of the two temperatures is lower and why?
as shown. If the power consumed in the 2 Ω resistor
(AI 2015)
is 200 W, determine the power dissipated in the 5Ω
resistor.
(Foreign 2014)

93. Plot a graph showing the variation of resistivity of a

conductor with temperature.
(Foreign 2015)
’
94. using the concept of drift velocity of charge carriers
90. (a) State the principle of a potentiometer. Define
in a conductor, deduce the relationship between
potential gradient. Obtain an expression of potential
current density and resistivity of the conductor.
gradient in terms of resistivity of the potentiometer
(Delhi 2015)
wire.
95. Given the resistances of 1Ω, 2Ω and 3Ω , how will
(b) Figure shows a long potentiometer wire AB
you combine them to get an equivalent resistance of
having a constant potential gradient. The null points
for the two primary cells of emfs ε1 and ε 2 connected 11 11
(i) Ω and Ω
3 5
in the manner shown are obtained at a distance of
(Foreign 2015)
l1 = 120 cm and l 2 = 300 cm from the end A.
74 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

96. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to determine the potential 102. (a) Deduce the relation between current I flowing
difference between the points A and D when no through a conductor and drift velocity v d of the
current flows in the BE of the electric network shown electrons.
in the figure. (b) Figure shows a plot of current ‘I’ flowing through
(AI 2015) the cross-section of a wire versus the time ‘t’. Use the
plot to find the charge flowing in 10 sec through the
wire.
(AI 2015)

97. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to obtain conditions for the

balance condition in a Wheatstone bridge.
(Delhi 2015)
98. Calculate the current drawn from a 5 V battery by the
103. In the circuit shown in the figure. Find the current
network of resistors shown in the figure.
through each resistor.
(AI 2015)
(Delhi 2015)

99. In the two electric circuits shown in the figure, 104. A cell of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘r’ is
determine the readings of ideal ammeter (A) and the connected across a variable load resistance ‘r’ is
ideal voltmeter (V). connected across a variable load resistor R. Draw the
(Delhi 2015) plots of the terminal voltage V versus (i) R and (ii)
the current I. It is found that when R= 4 Ω , the
current is 1 A and when R is increased to 9 Ω , the
current reduces to 0.5 A. Find the values of the emf E
and internal resistance r.
(Delhi 2015)
105. With the help of the circuit diagram, explain the
working principle of meter-bridge. How is it used to
100. (a) Find the relation between drift velocity and determine the unknown resistance of a given wire?
relaxation time of charge carriers in a conductor. Write the necessary precautions to minimize error in
(b) A conductor of length L is connected to a.d.c. the result.
source of e.m.f. V. if the length of the conductor is (AI 2015)
tripled by stretching it, keeping V constant. Explain 106. Draw a circuit diagram of a potentiometer state its
how drift velocity would be affected. working principle. Drive the necessary formula to
(AI 2015) describe how it is used to compare the emfs of the
101. A steady current flows in a metallic conductor of two cells.
non-uniform cross-section. Which of these quantities (AI 2015)
in constant along the conductor: current, current
density, electric field, drift speed?
(Delhi 2015)
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 75

107. The plot of the variation of potential difference across

a combination of three identical cells in series versus
current is shown in the figure. What is the emf and
internal resistance of each cell?
(AI 2016)

(ii) Why is potentiometer preferred over a voltmeter

for comparison of emf of cells?
(iii) Draw a circuit diagram to determine to determine
internal resistance of a cell in the laboratory.
(Foreign 2016)
108. A metal rod of square cross-sectional area A having 112. Nichrome and copper wires of same length and same
length l has current I flowing through it when a radius are connected in series. Current I is passed
potential difference of V volt is applied across its through them. Which wire gets heated up more?
ends (figure I). Now the rod is cut parallel to its Justify your answer.
length into two identical pieces and joined as shown (AI 2017)
in figure II. What potential difference must be 113. (a) The potential difference applied across a given
maintained across the length of 2l so that the current resistor is altered so that the heat produced per
in the rod is still I? second increases by a factor of 9. By what factor does
(Foreign 2016) the applied potential difference change?
(b) In the figure shown, an ammeter A and a resistor
of 4 Ω are connected to the terminals of the source.
The emf of the source is 12 V having an internal
resistance of 2 Ω . Calculate the voltmeter and
109. Two cells of emfs 1.5 V and 2.0 V having internal ammeter readings.
resistances 0.2 Ω and 0.3Ω respectively are (AI 2017)
connected in parallel. Calculate the emf and internal
resistance of the equivalent cell.
(Delhi 2016)
110. (i) State the principle of working of a potentiometer.
(ii) In the following potentiometer circuit AB is a
uniform wire of length 1 m and resistance 10 Ω .
Calculate the potential gradient along the wire and 114. A resistance of R draws current from a potentiometer.
balance length AO = (l) . The potentiometer wire AB, has a total resistance of
(Delhi 2016) R o . A voltage V is supplied to the potentiometer.
Derive an expression for the voltage across R when
the sliding contact is in the middle of the
potentiometer wire.
(Delhi 2017)

111. (i) In the circuit diagram given below, AB is a

uniform wire of resistance 15 Ω and length 1 m. It is
connected to cell E1 of emf 2V and negligible
internal resistance and a resistance R. The balance
point with another cell E 2 of emf 75 mV is found at
30 cm from end A. Calculate the value of R.
76 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

115. (a) Write the principle of working of a metre bridge. 119. A 10 V cell of negligible internal resistance is
(b) In a metre bridge, the balance point is found at a connected in parallel across a battery of emf 200 v
distance l1 with resistance R and S as shown in the and internal resistance 38 Ω as shown in the figure.
figure. Find the value of current in the circuit.
(2018)

An unknown resistance X is now connected in

parallel to the resistance S and the balance point is
found at a distance l2 . Obtain a formula for X in
120. In a potentiometer arrangement for determining the
terms of l1 , l2 and S. emf of a cell, the balance point of the cell in open
(AI 2017) circuit is 350 cm. When a resistance of 9 Ω is used in
116. (i) Derive an expression for drift velocity of electrons the external circuit of the cell, the balance point shifts
in a conductor. Hence deduce ohm’s law. to 300 cm. Determine the internal resistance of the
(ii) A wire whose cross-sectional area is increasing cell.
linearly from its one end to the other, is connected (2018)
across a battery of V volts. Which of the following 121. (a) Define the term ‘conductivity’ of a metallic wire.
quantities remain constant in the wire? Write its SI unit.
(a) Drift speed (b) Using the concept of free electrons in a conductor,
(b) Current density derive the expression for the conductivity of a wire in
(c) Electric current terms of number density and relaxation time. Hence
(d) Electric field obtain the relation between current density and the
Justify your answer. applied electric field E.
(Delhi 2017) (2018)
117. (i) State the two Kirchhoff’s laws. Explain briefly 122. How is the draft velocity in a conductor affected with
how these rules justified. the rise in temperature?
(ii) The current is drawn from a cell of emf E and (Delhi 2019)
internal resistance r connected to the network of 123. Under what condition will the current in a wire be the
resistors each of resistance r as shown in the figure. same when connected in series and in parallel of n
Obtain the expression for (a) the current drawn from identical cells each having internal resistance r and
the cell and (b) the power consumed in the network. external resistance R?
(Delhi 2017) (AI 2019)
124. Two bulbs are rated ( P1 , V ) and ( P2 , V ) . If they are
connected (i) in series and (ii) in parallel across a
supply V, find the power dissipated in the two
combinations in terms of P1 and P2 .
(Delhi 2019)

118. Two electric bulbs P and Q have their resistances in

the ratio of 1:2. They are connected in series across a
battery. Find the ratio of the power dissipation in
these bulbs.
(2018)
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 77

125. (i) The graph between resistance (R) and temperature 128. What is end error in a meter bridge? How is it
(T) for Hg is shown in the figure. Explain the overcome? The resistances in the two arms of the
behavior of Hg near 4 K. meter bridge are R= 5 Ω and S respectively.
When the resistance S is shunted with an equal
resistance, the new balance length found to be 1.5 l1 ,
where l1 is the initial balancing length. Calculate the
value of S.
(Delhi 2019)

(ii) In which region of the graph shown in the figure

is the resistance negative and why?
(AI 2019)

129. State the underlying principle of meter-bridge. Draw

the circuit diagram and explain how the unknown
resistance of a conductor can be determined by this
method.
126. Draw a graph showing the variation of current versus (AI 2019)
voltage in an electrolyte when an external resistance 130. (For the circuit shown in the figure, how would the
is also connected. balancing length be affected, if
(AI 2019)
127. Using Kirchhoff’s rules, calculate the current through
the 40 Ω and 20 Ω resistors in the following
circuit.
(Delhi 2019)

(i) R1 is decreased,
(ii) R 2 is increased, the other factors remaining the
same in the circuit? Justify your answer in each case.
(b) Why is a potentiometer preferred over a
voltmeter? Give reason.
(AI 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

CURRENT ELECTRICITY
8 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

04
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 79

To obtain the total field at P, we must integrate this

Chapter at a Glance vector expression over the entire length of the
conductor.
1. The total force on a charge q moving with velocity v
in the presence of magnetic and electric fields B and
E, respectively is called the Lorentz force. It is given
by the expression: F = q (v × B + E). The magnetic
force q (v × B) is normal to v and work done by it is
zero.
2. A straight conductor of length l and carrying a steady
current I experiences a force F in a uniform external
  Magnetic Field at Centre O in different conditions
magnetic field B, = (
F I l× B )
Where |l| = l and the direction of l is given by the Condition Figure Magnetic Field
direction of the current.
3. In a uniform magnetic field B, a charge q executes a
circular orbit in a plane normal to B. Its frequency of
uniform circular motion is called the cyclotron Are subtends angle µ0 θi
frequency and is given by: B
= ⋅
θ at the centre 4π r
qB
vc =
2πm
4. This frequency is independent of the particle’s speed Are subtends angle
µ 0 ( 2π − θ ) i
and radius. This fact is exploited in a machine, the (2 π - θ ) at the B=
cyclotron, which is used to accelerate charged 4π r
centre
particles.
Magnetic force does not work when the charged
particle is displaced while electric force does work
µ0 πi µ0 i
in displacing the charged particle. Semi – circular are B= ⋅ =
4π r 4r

Three quarter semi  π

2π −  i
circular current µ0  2
B
= ⋅
carrying are 4π r

Circular current µ0 2πi µ0 i

=B =
carrying are 4π r 2r

● Cyclotrons cannot accelerate electrons because

they have very small mass.
5. The Biot-Savart law asserts that the magnetic field Concentric co –
dB due to an element dl carrying a steady current I at planer circular 1 1
µ0
loops carries B1 = 2πi  +
a point P at a distance r from the current element is: 4π
current in the same  r1 r2 
 
µ0 dl × r direction
dB
= Ι
4π r 3
80 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

µ0 NΙ
Concentric co- B= , where N is the total number of turns and
2πR
planer circular r is the average radius.
µ0 1 1 
loops carries B2 = 2πi  −
4π  r1 r2 
current in the
opposite direction

Concentric loops B
= B12 + B22
but their planes are
perpendicular to µ0 2 2 8. If a current carrying circular loop (n = 1) is turned
each other = i1 + i 2 into a coil having n identical turns then magnetic
2r
field at the centre of the coil becomes n2 times the
previous field i.e. B(n turn) = n2 B(single turn).
Concentric loops 9. Parallel currents attract and anti-parallel currents
but their planes are B12 + B22 repel.
B=
at an angle θ with +2B1B2 cos θ 10. A planar loop carrying a current I, having N closely
each other wound turns, and an area A possesses a magnetic
moment M where, M = N I A and the direction of M
is given by the right-hand thumb rule.

Distribution of When this loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field

current across the B=0 B, the force F on it is: F = 0
diameter And the torque on it is: τ = M × B
In a moving coil galvanometer, this torque is
balanced by a counter- torque due to a spring,
Distribution of yielding: k ϕ = NI AB
current between
B=0 11. An electron moving around the central nucleus has a
any two points on
magnetic moment M given by:
the circumference
e
M= L
2m

6. Ampere’s Circuital Law: Let an open surface S be where L is the magnitude of the angular momentum
bounded by a loop C. Then the Ampere’s law states of the circulating electron about the central nucleus
and m is the mass. The smallest value of M is called
that ∫ N / dΙ = µ0Ι where Ι refers to the current the Bohr magneton MB and it is MB = 9.27×10–24
C
J/T.
passing through S. The sign of I is determined from
the right-hand rule. If B is directed along the tangent
to every point on the perimeter L of a closed curve
and is constant in magnitude along perimeter then:
BL = µ 0Ie , where Ie is the net current enclosed by
the closed circuit
7. The magnitude of the field B inside a long solenoid
carrying a current I is: B = µ 0nl

where n is the number of turns per unit length. For a

toroid one obtains,
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 81

Solved Examples
r1 v1
or, =
r2 v 2

Example-1
A charged particle moves in a uniform magnetic Example-4
field. The velocity of the particle at some instant
A beam of protons, projected along + x-axis,
makes an acute angle with the magnetic field. What
experiences a force due to a magnetic field along the
will be the path of the particle?
– y-axis. What is the direction of the magnetic field?
Sol. A helix with uniform pitch since the field is uniform.

Example-2
Write the features of Lorentz Force.
Sol. Features of Lorentz Force
  
Fmagnetic
= q v×B ( )
• Force on a negative charge is opposite to that on a
positive charge. Sol. The direction of the magnetic field is towards the
• The force acts in a direction perpendicular to both positive direction of the z-axis.
the velocity and the magnetic field. Its direction is
given by the screw rule or right-hand rule for Example-5
vector (or cross) product.
Depict the trajectory of a charged particle moving
• The magnetic force is zero if charge is not
with velocity v as it enters a uniform magnetic field
moving. Only a moving charge feels the magnetic
perpendicular to the direction of its motion.
force.
Sol.

Example-3
If two identical charged particles are projected
perpendicular to the uniform magnetic field with
velocities v1 and v2. Find the ratio of their radius.
Sol. Let the charge on the two particle be q
for charged particle 1, The force acting on the charge particle will be
perpendicular to both v and B and therefore will
mv12 describe a circular path.
= qv1B
r1

mv1 Example-6
or, r1 = ... (1)
qB Define one tesla using the expression for the
For charged particle 2. magnetic force acting on a particle of charge q
moving with velocity v in a magnetic field B.
mv12
= qv 2 B Sol. One tesla is the magnetic field in which a charge of 1
r2
C moving with a velocity of 1 m/s normal to the
mv 2 magnetic field, experiences a force of 1 N.
or r2 = ... ( 2 )
qB

From eq (1).and (2).

r1 mv1 qB
=
r2 qB mv 2
82 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

Example-7 So, the particle will accelerate and decelerate

A solenoid of length 0.5 m has a radius of 1 cm and alternatively. So, the radius of path in the dees will
is made up of 500 turns. It carries a current of 5 A. remain the same.
What is the magnitude of the magnetic field inside
the solenoid? Example-10
Sol. The number of turns per unit length is, An ammeter of resistance 0.80 Ω can measure
500 current upto 1.0 A.
n
= = 1000 turns/m
0.5 (i) What must be the value of shunt resistance to
The length l = 0.5 m and radius r = 0.01 m. enable the ammeter to measure current upto 5.0A?

Thus, l/a = 50 i.e., l >> a. (ii) What is the combined resistance of the ammeter
and the shunt?
Hence, we can use the long solenoid formula,
namely, Eq. (4.20) Sol. (i) R g = 0.80Ω, ig = 1.0A, i = 5A

B = µ0 nI  ig   1 
Shunt, S =
= R 0.80
 i − ig  g  5 − 1 
= 4π× 10−7 × 103 × 5  
= 6.28 × 10−3 T 1
=× 0.80 =
0.20 Ω
4

Example-8 (ii) Combined resistance of ammeter and shunt,

Why are cyclotrons not suitable for accelerating 1 1 1 1 1

= + = +
electrons? R combined R g S 0.80 0.20
Sol. Since the mass of an electron is 2000 times smaller 1+ 4 5 50
than the protons, it reaches very high speed (almost = = =
0.80 0.80 8
equal to the speed of light) in a very short interval of
time. Hence, a cyclotron cannot be used to accelerate 8
∴ R combined = 0.16 Ω
=
electrons. 50

Example-9 Example-11
In a cyclotron, if the frequency of the RF oscillator is A particle of mass 2 x 10-3 kg and charge 2 µC enters
doubled, what will be the effect on the radius of the into a uniform electric field of 5 × 105 NC-1, moving
charged particle? with a velocity of 10 ms-1 in a direction opposite to
Sol. The frequency a of the applied voltage (radio that of the field. Calculate the distance it would
frequency) is adjusted so that the polarity of the dees travel before coming to rest.
is reversed in the same time that it takes the ions to Sol. Force applied on the charged particle, f= qE
complete one half of the revolution.
= 2 × 10−6 × 5 × 105 = 1N
The requirement νa = νc is called the resonance
condition. Acceleration exerted on the charged particle will be,

When the frequency of the radio frequency (RF) field f 1N

a
= = = 500 m / sec 2
−3
is doubled, then the resonance condition is violated m 2 × 10
and the time period of the radio frequency (RF) field Distance traveled by charged particle before coming
is halved. Therefore, the duration in which particle to rest will be,
completes half revolution inside the dees, radio
2
frequency completes the Cycle. v= u 2 − 2aS

Where= u 10 m / sec 2=
v 0,= , a 500 m / sec 2
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 83

Current in the power line, I = 90A

2 2 2
u −v u 10 × 10 Distance of the mentioned point below the power
⇒ Distance, S = ∴ S= = = 0.1 m
2a 2a 2 × 500 line, r = 1.5 m
Example-12 Now, we have the expression for magnetic field as,
A circular coil of closely wound N turns and radius r 2µ0 Ι
B=
carries a current I. Write the expressions for the 4πr
following:
Where, µ0 = 4π × 10-4 TmA-1 is the permeability of
(i) the magnetic field at its centre free space. On substituting the given values, we get,
(ii) the magnetic moment of this coil
4π× 10−7 × 2 × 90
Sol. (i) The magnetic field at the centre of a circular coil B=
4π× 1.5
of N turns and radius r carrying a current, I is
⇒ B = 1.2 × 10-5 T
µ NI
B= 0 We found the magnitude of the magnetic field to be
2 r
1.2 × 10-5 T and it will be directed towards south as
= NIπr 2
(iii) Magnetic moment, M= NIA per Maxwell’s right hand thumb rule.

Example-13 Example-15
A circular coil of wire consisting of 100 turns, each What is the magnitude of magnetic force per unit
of radius 8.0 cm carries a current of 0.40 A. What is length on a wire carrying a current of 8 A and
the magnitude of the magnetic field B at the centre of making an angle of 30º with the direction of a
the coil? (NCERT) uniform magnetic field of 0.15 T? (NCERT)
Sol. We are given : Sol. Given that,
Number of turns on the circular coil, n = 100 Current in the wire, I = 8A
Radius of each turn, r = 0.8 cm = 0.08 m Magnitude of the uniform magnetic field, B = 0.15 T
Current flowing in the coil is given to be, I = 0.4 A Angle between the wire and magnetic field, θ = 30o
We know the expression for magnetic field at the We have the expression for magnetic force per unit
µ 2πnΙ length on the wire as,
centre of the coil as, | B |= 0
4π r F/l = BΙ sinθ
Where, µ = 4π × 10 TmA is the permeability of
-4 -1
Substituting the given values, we get,
free space.
F/l = 0.15 × 8 × 1 × sin 30o
On substituting the given values we get,
⇒ F/l = 0.6 Nm-1
4π× 10−7 × 2π× 100 × 0.4 Thus, the magnetic force per unit length on the wire
| B |=
4π× 0.08 is found to be 0.6 Nm-1.
⇒| B |= 3.14 × 10−4 T
Clearly, the magnitude of the magnetic field is found Example-16
to be 3.14 × 10-4 T. A 3.0 cm wire carrying a current of 10 A is placed
inside a solenoid perpendicular to its axis. The
Example-14 magnetic field inside the solenoid is given to be 0.27
T. What is the magnetic force on the wire?
A horizontal overhead power line carries a current of
90 A in east to west direction. What is the magnitude (NCERT)
and direction of the magnetic field due to the current Sol. We are given the following,
1.5 m below the line? (NCERT) Current flowing int eh wire, I = 10A
Sol. We are given the following: Magnetic field, B = 0.27T
84 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

Angle between the current and magnetic field, θ = Example-18

90o A closely wound solenoid 80 cm long has 5 layers of
(Since the magnetic field produced by a solenoid is windings of 400 turns each. The diameter of the
along its axis and current carrying wire is kept solenoid is 1.8 cm. If the current carried is 8.0 A,
perpendicular to the axis) estimate the magnitude of B inside the solenoid near
The magnetic force exerted on the wire is given as, its centre. (NCERT)
Sol. We are given the following:
F = BIl sin θ
Length of the solenoid, l = 80 cm = 0.8 m
Substituting the given values,
Since there are five layers of windings of 400 turns
F = 0.27 × 10 × 0.03 sin 90o
each on the solenoid.
⇒ F = 8.1 × 10-2 N
Total number of turns on the solenoid would be, N =
Clearly, the magnetic force on the wire is found to be 5 × 400 = 2000
8.1 × 10-2 N. The direction of the force can be
Diameter of the solenoid, D = 1.8 cm = 0.018 m
obtained from Fleming’s left -hand rule.
Current carried by the solenoid, I = 8.0 A
We have the magnitude of the magnetic field inside
Example-17
the solenoid near its centre given by the relation,
Two long and parallel straight wires A and B
µ0 NΙ
carrying currents of 8.0 A and 5.0 A in the same B=
direction are separated by a distance of 4.0 cm. Ι
Estimate the force on a 10 cm section of wire A. Where, µ0 = 4π × 10-4 TmA-1 is the permeability of
(NCERT) free space.

Sol. We are given: On substituting the given values we get,

Current flowing in wire A, ΙA = 8.0 A 4π× 10−7 × 2000 × 8

B=
Current flowing in wire B, IB = 5.0 A 0.8

Distance between the two wires, r = 4,.0 cm = 0.04 m ⇒ B = 2.512 × 10-2 T

Length of a section of wire A,  = 10cm = 0.1 m Clearly, the magnitude of the magnetic field inside
the solenoid near its centre is found to be 2.512 × 10-
Force exerted on length q due to the magnetic field is 2
T
given as,
2µo Ι A Ι B 
B= Example-19
4πr
A square coil of side 10 cm consists of 20 turns and
Where, µo = 4π × 10-4 TmA-1 is the permeability of
carries a current of 12 A. The coil is suspended
free space. On substituting the given values, we get, vertically and the normal to the plane of the coil
4π× 10−7 × 2 × 8 × 5 × 0.1 makes an angle of 30º with the direction of a uniform
B= horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 0.80 T. What
4π× 0.04
is the magnitude of torque experienced by the coil?
⇒ B = 2 × 10-5 N
(NCERT)
The magnitude of force is 2 × 10-5 N. This is an
Sol. e are given the following:
attractive force that is normal to A towards B
Length of a side of the square coil,
because the direction of the currents in the wires is
the same. a = 10cm = 0.1m

Area of the square, A = a2 = (0.1)2 = 0.01 m2

Current flowing in the coil, I = 12A

Number of turns on the coil, n = 20

MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 85

Angle made by the plane of the coil with magnetic N B A

ΙS2 =2 2 2
field, θ = 30o K2
Strength of magnetic field, B = 0.80 T On taking the ratio, we get,

Magnitude of the magnetic torque experienced by the N 2 B2 A 2

coil in the magnetic field is given by the relation, ΙS2 K2
⇒ =
Ιs1 N 1B1A1
τ = nΙAB sin θ K1
Substituting the given values, we get, Substituting the values we get,
τ = 20 × 0.8 × 12 × 0.01 × sin 30o ΙS2 42 × 0.5 × 1.8 × 10−3 × 10 × K
⇒ =
Ιs1 14 × 30 × 0.25 × 3.6 × 10−3 × K
⇒ τ = 0.96 Nm
ΙS2
Thus, the magnitude of the torque experienced by the ⇒ = 1.4
Ιs1
coil is 0.96 N m.
Therefore, the ratio of current sensitivity of M2 and
M1 is 1.4.
Example-20
(b) Voltage sensitivity for M2 is given is :
Two moving coil meters, M1 and M2 have the
N 2 B2 A 2
following particulars: R1 = 10 Ω, N1 = 30, VS2 =
K2R 2
A1 = 3.6 × 10–3 m2, B1 = 0.25 T
And, voltage sensitivity for M1 is given as :
R2 = 14 Ω, N2 = 42.
A2 = 1.8 × 10–3 m2, B2 = 0.50 T
N1B1A1
VS1 =
K1R1
(The spring constants are identical for the two
meters). Determine the ratio of On taking the ratio we get,
(a) current sensitivity and V 42 × 0.5 × 1.8 × 10−3 × 10 × K
= ⇒ S2 = 1
(b) voltage sensitivity of M2 and M1. (NCERT) Vs1 K × 14 × 30 × 0.25 × 3.6 × 10−3
Sol. We are given : Thus, the ratio of voltage sensitivity of M2 and M1 is
For moving coil meter M1, 1.
Resistance, R1 = 10Ω
Number of turns, N1 = 30 Example-21
Area of cross – section, A1 = 3.6 × 10-3 m2 In a chamber, a uniform magnetic field of 6.5 G (1 G
= 10–4 T) is maintained. An electron is shot into the
Magnetic field strength, B1 = 0.25 T
field with a speed of 4.8 × 10-4 ms–1 normal to the
Spring constant, K1 = K field. Explain why the path of the electron is a circle.
For moving coil meter M2: Determine the radius of the circular orbit.
Number of turns, N2 = 42 (e = 1.5 × 10–19C, me = 9.1×10–31 kg) (NCERT)
Area of cross – section, A2 = 1.8 × 10-3 m2 Sol. Magnetic field strength, B = 6.5G = 6.5×10-4T
Magnetic field strength, B2 = 0.50T Speed of the electron, V = 4.8 × 106 m/s
Spring constant, K2 = K Charge on the electron, e = 1.6 × 10-19C
Current sensitivity of M1 is given as : Mass of the electron, me = 9.1 × 10-31 kg
NBA Angle between the shot electron and magnetic field,
ΙSI = 1 1 1
K1 θ = 90o
And, current sensitivity of M2 is given as : Magnetic force exerted on the electron in the
magnetic field could be given as:
86 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

F = evBsinθ The coil will turn when it experiences a torque

in the magnetic field. Thecounter torque
This force provides centripetal force to the moving applied to prevent the coil from turning is
electron and hence, theelectron starts moving in a
given by the relation, τ = nΙABsinθ
circular path of radius r.
⇒ τ = 30× 6×1× 0.0201×sin 60°
Hence, centripetal force exerted on the electron
mv 2 ⇒ τ = 3.133Nm
would be, However, we know that in
r
(b) From the part(a) we could infer that the
equilibrium, the centripetal force exerted on the magnitude of the applied torque is not
electron is equal to the magnetic force i.e., dependent on the shape of the coil.
FC = F On the other hand, it is dependent on the area of
2
mv the coil.
⇒ = evBsin θ
r
Thus, we could say that the answer would not
mv
⇒r= change if the circular coil in the above case is
Be sin θ
replaced by a planar coil of some irregular
Substituting the given values we get, shape that encloses the same area.

9.1× 10−31 × 4.8 × 106

⇒
6.5 × 10−4 × 1.6 × 10−19 × sin 90o Example-23
⇒r= 4.2cm A neutron, a proton an electron and an a-particle
enter a region of constant magnetic field with equal
velocities. The magnetic field is along the inward
Example-22 normal to the plane of paper. The tracks of the
(a) A circular coil of 30 turns and radius 8.0 cm particles are shown in figure. Relate the tracks to the
carrying a current of 6.0 A is suspended particles.
vertically in a uniform horizontal magnetic field
of magnitude 1.0 T. The field lines make an
angle of 60° with the normal of the coil.
Calculate the magnitude of the counter torque
that must be applied to prevent the coil from
turning.
(b) Would your answer change, if the circular coil in
(a) were replaced by a planar coil of some
irregular shape that encloses the same area? (All
other particulars are also unaltered.) Sol. We know that force on a charged particle in the
  
(NCERT) magnetic field is F =q v × B or F = qvBsin θ, so
Sol. (a) Number of turns on the circular coil, n = 30
(i) For neutral particle i.e. neutron, q = 0, hence F =
Radius of the coil, r = 8.0cm = 0.08m 0. It means neutron will go undeflected i.e. track
C corresponds to neutron.
Area of the coil, A = πr2 = π(0.08)2 = 0.0201 m2
(ii) For negatively charged particle i.e. electron, the
Current flowing in the coil is given to be, direction of force, according to Fleming’s Left
hand rule will be towards right. So track D
I = 6.0A Magnetic field strength, B =1T corresponds to electron.
Angle between the field lines and normal with the (iii) For positively charged particle, the direction of
coil surface, θ =60o force, according to Fleming’s left-hand rule will
be towards left. So both tracks A and B
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 87

correspond to positively charged particles (i.e. Example-25

protons and a-particles). An electron is passing through a field but no force is
When a moving charged particle is subjected to a acting on it. Under what conditions is it possible, if
perpendicular magnetic field, it describes a the motion of the electron be in the (i) electric field
circular path of radius r given by (ii) magnetic field ?
Sol. (i) In electric field, there is always a force on the
mv m moving electron opposite to the direction of field.
=r or r ∝
Bq q Thus the force will be zero only if electric field is zero.
rp mp (ii) In magnetic field, the force acting on a moving
q α  m   2e  1
= × =  ×  = electron is
rα mα q p  4m   e  2
F = qv B sin q, it is zero if q = 0º or 180º.
or . rα 2 rp i.e. rα > rp
=

i.e. track B corresponds to a-particle and track

A corresponds to proton.

Example-24
An electron and proton enter perpendicularly in a
uniform magnetic field with the same speed. How
many times larger will be the radius of proton’s path
than the electron’s ? Proton is 1840 times heavier
than electron. i.e. the electron is moving parallel or antiparallel to the
direction of magnetic field.
Sol. The charged particle while moving perpendicular to
magnetic field experiences a force which provides the
centripetal force for its circular motion. The radius r of
the circular path traced by the particle in magnetic
field B, is given by
Bqv = mv2/r or r = mv/Bq
Since the value of charge on electron and proton is the
same but mass of proton is 1840 times mass of
rp m p 1840me
electron, hence = = = 1840
re me me
or rp = 1840 re.
88 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section – A (1 Mark Questions) 13. Two identical circular loops, P and Q, each of radius
a and carrying current I and 2I respectively are lying
1. Is any work done on a moving charge by a magnetic in parallel planes such that they have a common axis.
field? The direction of current in both the loops is clockwise
2. What is the gyromagnetic ratio? as seen from O which is equidistant from both the
3. If the magnetic field is parallel to the positive y-axis loops. Find the magnitude of the net magnetic field at
and the charged particle is moving along the positive point O.
x-axis, which way would the Magnetic force be for :
(a) an electron (negative charge),
(b) a proton (positive charge)?
4. Why should the spring/suspension wire in a moving
coil galvanometer have a low torsional constant?
5. State one limitation of Ampere’s Circuital Law.

Section – B (2 Marks Questions) 14. Write the expression for Lorentz magnetic force on a
particle of charge ‘q’ moving with velocity v in a
6. State two properties of the material of the wire used magnetic field B. Show that no work is done by this
for suspension of the coil in a moving coil force on the charged particle.
galvanometer? 15. (a) In what respect is a toroid different from a
7. Two wires of equal lengths are bent in the form of solenoid? Draw and compare the pattern of the
two loops. One of the loops is square shaped whereas magnetic field lines in the two cases.
the other loop is circular. These are suspended in a (b) How is the magnetic field inside a given’
uniform magnetic field and the same current is passed solenoid' made strong?
through them. Which loop will experience greater 16. A charge ‘q’ moving along the X-axis with a velocity
torque? Give reasons? v is subjected to a uniform magnetic field B acting
8. A cyclotron is not suitable to accelerate electrons. along the Z-axis as it crosses the origin O.
Why? (i) Trace its trajectory.
9. Write the two measures that can be taken to increase (ii) Does the charge gain kinetic energy as it enters
the sensitivity of a galvanometer. the magnetic field? Justify your answer.
10. Write the condition under which an electron will
move undeflected in the presence of crossed electric
and magnetic fields.

Section – C (3 Marks Questions)

11. What is a radial magnetic field? How is it obtained in
a moving coil galvanometer? 17. A particle of mass 10-3 kg and charge 5 pC enters into
12. Describe the path of a charged particle moving in a a uniform electric field of 2 × 105 NC−1 , moving with
uniform magnetic field with initial velocity. a velocity of 20 ms-1 in a direction opposite to that of
(i) perpendicular to the field. the field. Calculate the distance it would travel before
(ii) at an arbitrary angle θ. coming to rest.

18. An ammeter of resistance 0.6 Ω can measure current

upto 1.0 A. Calculate
(i) The shunt resistance required to enable the
ammeter to measure current upto 5.0 A
(ii) The combined resistance of the ammeter and the
shunt.
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 89

19. (a) How is a toroid different from a solenoid? Section – E (5 Marks Questions)
(b) Use Ampere’s circuital law to obtain the magnetic
field inside a toroid. 24. State Biot-Savart law. Use it to obtain the magnetic
20. Write briefly how this machine is used to accelerate field at an axial point, distance d from the centre of a
charged particles to high energies. circular coil of radius ‘a’ and carrying current l. Also
21. A square loop of side 20 cm carrying current of 1A is compare the magnitudes of the magnetic field of this
kept near an infinite long straight wire carrying a coil at its centre and at an axial point for which the
current of 2A in the same plane as shown in the value of d is 3a
figure. 25. Write the principle, working of moving coil
galvanometer with the help of neat labelled diagram.
What is the importance of radial field and phosphor
bronze used in the construction of a moving coil
galvanometer?

Calculate the magnitude and direction of the net force

exerted on the loop due to the current carrying
conductor.
22. A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 15Ω and the
metre shows full scale deflection for a current of 4
mA. How will you convert the metre into an ammeter
of range 0 to 6 A?

Section – D (4 Marks Questions)

23. Derive an expression for the force acting on a current
carrying conductor placed in a uniform magnetic
field. Write the condition for which this force will
have
(1) maximum value (2) minimum value?
90 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section – A (Single Choice Questions) 5. Two identical current carrying coaxial loops, carry
current I in opposite sense. A simple amperian loop
1. A charged particle is moving in a cyclotron, what passes through both of them at once. Calling the loop
effect on the radius of path of this charged particle as C, then which statement is correct?
will occur when the frequency of the ratio frequency  
field is doubled? ∫
(a) B.dl =±2µ0 I
c
(a) It will also be doubled.  
(b) It will be halved. (b) the value of ∫ B.dl is independent of sense of C
c
(c) It will be increased by four times.
(d) It will remain unchanged. (c) there may be a point on C where B and dl are
2. Which of the following is not correct about parallel.
cyclotrons? (d) none of these
(a) It is a machine to accelerate charged particles or
ions to high energies. 6. The correct plot of the magnitude of magnetic field B
(b) Cyclotron uses both electric and magnetic fields vs distance r from centre of the wire is, if the radius
in combination to increase the energy of charged of wire is R
particles.
(c) The operation of the cyclotron is based on the fact
that the time for one revolution of an ion is
independent of its speed or radius of its orbit.
(d) The charged particles and ions in a cyclotron can
move on any arbitrary path.
3. Current flows through uniform, square frames as
shown in the figure. In which case is the magnetic
field at the centre of the frame not zero?

4. Ampere’s circuital law is given by

   
∫
(a) H.dl = µ0 Ienc ∫
(b) B.dl = µ0 Ienc
   
∫
(c) B.dl = µ0 J ∫
(d) H.dl = µ0 J
7. The nature of parallel and antiparallel currents are
(a) parallel currents repel and antiparallel currents
attract.
(b) parallel currents attract and antiparallel currents
repel.
(c) both currents attract.
(d) both currents repel.
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 91

8. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform 15. A charged particle is moving on circular path with
magnetic field. The torque acting on it does not velocity v in a uniform magnetic field B, if the
depend upon velocity of the charged particle is doubled and
(a) area of loop (b) value of current strength of magnetic field is halved, then radius
(c) magnetic field (d) None of these becomes
9. In a moving coil galvanometer the deflection (Φ) on (a) 8 times (b) 4 times
the scale by a pointer attached to the spring is (c) 2 times (d) 16 times
 NA   NA  16. Two a-particles have the ratio of their velocities as 3 :
(a)  I (b)  I 2 on entering the field. If they move in different
 kB   kAB 
circular paths, then the ratio of the radii of their paths
 NAB   NAB 
(c)  I (d)   is
 k   kI  (a) 2 : 3 (b) 3 : 2
10. A moving coil galvanometer can be converted into an (c) 9 : 4 (d) 4 : 9
ammeter by 17. Biot-Savart law indicates that the moving electrons
(a) introducing a shunt resistance of large value in (velocity v) produce a magnetic field B such that
series. (a) B ⊥ v.
(b) introducing a shunt resistance of small value in (b) B || v.
parallel. (c) it obeys inverse cube law.
(c) introducing a resistance of small value in series. (d) it is along the line joining the electron and point
(d) introducing a resistance of large value in parallel. of observation.
11. The conversion of a moving coil galvanometer into a 18. A circular coil of radius 4 cm and of 20 turns carries a
voltmeter is done by current of 3 amperes. It is placed in a magnetic field
(a) introducing a resistance of large value in series. of intensity of 0.5 weber/m². The magnetic dipole
(b) introducing a resistance of small value in parallel. moment of the coil is
(c) introducing a resistance of large value in parallel. (a) 0.15 ampere-m² (b) 0.3 ampere-m²
(d) introducing a resistance of small value in series. (c) 0.45 ampere-m² (d) 0.6 ampere-m²
12. When a magnetic compass needle is carried nearby to 19. An electron is projected with uniform velocity along
a straight wire carrying current, then the axis of a current carrying long solenoid. Which of
(I) the straight wire causes a noticeable deflection in the following is true?
the compass needle. (a) The electron will be accelerated along the axis.
(II) the alignment of the needle is tangential to an (b) The electron path will be circular about the axis.
imaginary circle with straight wire as its centre and (c) The electron will experience a force at 45° to the
has a plane perpendicular to the wire axis and hence execute a helical path.
(a) (I) is correct (d) The electron will continue to move with uniform
(b) (II) is correct velocity along the axis of the solenoid.
(c) both (I) and (II) are correct 20. A rectangular loop carrying a current i is situated near
(d) neither (I) nor (II) is correct a long straight wire such that the wire is parallel to
13. A strong magnetic field is applied on a stationary the one of the sides of the loop and is in the plane of
electron. Then the electron the loop. If a steady current I is established in wire as
(a) moves in the direction of the field. shown in figure, the loop will
(b) remained stationary.
(c) moves perpendicular to the direction of the field.
(d) moves opposite to the direction
14. Which one of the following is the correct statement
about magnetic forces?
(a) Magnetic forces always obey Newton’s third law.
(b) Magnetic forces do not obey Newton’s third law.
(c) For very high current, magnetic forces obey (a) rotate about an axis parallel to the wire.
Newton’s third law. (b) move away from the wire or towards the right.
(d) Inside a low magnetic field, magnetic forces obey (c) move towards the wire.
Newton’s third law. (d) remain stationary.
92 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

Section – B (Assertion & Reason Questions) 25. Assertion: If the charge particle enters in a magnetic
field its kinetic energy will not change
21. Assertion: Moving charges or current produces a Reason: The work done by the magnetic force will be
magnetic field in the surrounding space. zero on the charge particle moving in the magnetic
Reason: Stationary charge only produces electrostatic field.
fields in the surrounding space. (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the is the correct explanation of the assertion.
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
22. Assertion: When a charged particles enters a 26. Assertion: The time period of the charge particle
magnetic field at an angle θ= 90°. It will move in a enters a magnetic field depends on the magnetic field
strength
circular path.
Reason: Time period also depends on the mass of the
Reason: The Magnetic Force is given by
   charge particle.
= (
F q v×B ) (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
is the correct explanation of the assertion. (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
not the correct explanation of the assertion. (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. 27. Assertion: If an electron and positron enter in a
23. Assertion: If the charge particle enters a magnetic magnetic field of strength B with the same speed v.
field at an angle θ, ( 0 < θ < 90° ) it will follow a Then the Sense of rotation of both the particle will be
same
helical path. Reason: The radius of curvature is given by
Reason: The stationary charge produces an
mv 2
electrostatic field. R=
qB
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason
is the correct explanation of the assertion. (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is is the correct explanation of the assertion.
not the correct explanation of the assertion. (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
24. Assertion: Two parallel wires are placed adjacent to (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
each other, and the current is flowing the same 28. Assertion: The deflection of the pointer is
direction then they will repel each other. proportional to the current carrying by the moving
Reason: Like charges attract each other coil galvanometer.
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason Reason: This can be possible if we use radial
is the correct explanation of the assertion. magnetic field in the moving coil galvanometer.

(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason
not the correct explanation of the assertion. is the correct explanation of the assertion.

(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 93

Section – C (Case Study Questions) Case Study – 2

Biot Savart’s Law
Case Study – 1
A finite conductor XY carrying current I. Consider an
Conversion of Galvanometer to Ammeter
infinitesimal element dl of the conductor. The
A galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter by
magnetic field dB due to this element is to be
connecting a small resistance known as shunt in
determined at a point P which is at a distance r from
parallel with the galvanometer.
it. Let q be the angle between dl and the displacement
vector r. According to Biot-Savart’s law, the

magnitude of the magnetic field dB is proportional
ig : full scale deflection current of galvanometer to the current I, the element length dl , and inversely
R g g : Resistance of galvanometer proportional to the square of the distance r. Its

direction is perpendicular to the plane containing dl

and r. Thus, in vector notation,

Ammeter of range i ampere.

ig R g
The value of shunt R s =
i − ig
In general ig  i
Rs  Rg
 
 Idl × r
Ammeter has a very small resistance, so it is dB ∝ 3
connected in series with the circuit. r
 
 µ0 Idl × r
29. A Galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter by dB =
4 r3
connecting.
(a) a small resistance in series
33. Magnetic field at a point P shown below is:
(b) a high resistance in parallel
(c) a small resistance in parallel
(d) a high resistance in series (a) Zero
30. A Galvanometer with and is to be converted into an (b) Non-zero and into the plane
ammeter of range 1A. Then value of shunt resistance (c) Non-zero and out of plane
is: (d) Can’t be said
(a) 0.01Ω (b) 0.1Ω 34. Magnetic field at a point due to a small current
(c) 1Ω (d) 0.05Ω element is:
31. The resistance of an ideal ammeter is

(a) along the direction of r
(a) Zero (b) Infinity 
(b) perpendicular only to dl
(c) High (d) Low 
32. Three ammeters A, B and C have same range but (c) perpendicular to only r
 
resistance 2mΩ, 1mΩ and 0.5mΩ respectively. Then (d) perpendicular to both dl and r
which ammeter is most suitable?
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) All are equally suitable
94 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

35. For the point shown below, the magnitude of 37. Inside the metallic dee the charged particle
magnetic field is proportional to experiences
(a) Only magnetic force
(b) Only electric force
(c) Both electric and magnetic force
(d) No net force
38. Which of the following forces is responsible for the
1 1 increase in kinetic energy of charge particles?
(a) (b) (a) Only magnetic force
r r2
(b) Only electric force
1
(c) r (d) (c) Both electric and magnetic force
r3 (d) None
36. In the above question the direction of magnetic field 39. If a particle of mass = m and charge = q is accelerated
at point p is: in a cyclotron by an applying magnetic field B and
(a) Into the plane (b) Out of the plane electric field E. The frequency of applied voltage is:
(c) Towards right (d) Towards left 2πm πm
(a) (b)
Bq Bq
Case Study – 3
Cyclotron πm 2πm
(c) (d)
Cyclotron uses the fact that the frequency of 2Bq qE
revolution of the charged particle in a magnetic field 40. If the radius of the dee is R, then kinetic energy of
is Independent of its energy. The particles move most particle at exit is:
of the time inside two semicircular disc-like metal
B2 q 2 R 2 B2 q 2 R 2
containers, D1 and D2. Inside the metal boxes the (a) (b)
2m m
particle is shielded and is not acted on by the electric
field. The magnetic field, however, acts on the 2B2 q 2 R 2 Bq 2 R 2
(c) (d)
particle and makes it go round in a circular path m m
inside a dee. Every time the particle moves from one
dee to another it is acted upon by the electric field.
The sign of the electric field is changed alternately in
tune with the circular motion of the particle. The
frequency f a of the applied voltage is adjusted so
that. the polarity of the dees is reversed in the same
time that it takes ions to complete one half of the
revolution. The requirement f a = f c where [ f c :
frequency of cyclotron] is called the resonance
condition. This ensures that the particle is always
accelerated by the electric field. Each time the
acceleration increases the energy of the particle.
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 95

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

  
1. ( )
F q v × B , to define the SI
Use the expression:= 7. Deduce the expression for the frequency of
revolution of a charged particle in a magnetic field
unit of magnetic field. and show that this is independent of the velocity or
(AI 2010C) energy of the particle.
2. A beam of α− particles projected along + x-axis, (Al 2010 C)
experiences a force due to a magnetic field along the 8. Draw a schematic sketch of a cyclotron. Explain,
+ y-axis. What is the direction of the magnetic field? giving the essential details of its construction, how it
(AI 2010) is used to accelerate the charged particles.
(AI 2010C)
9. Figure shows a long straight wire of a circular cross-
section of radius 'a' carrying steady current I. The
current I is uniformly distributed across this cross-
section. Derive the expressions for the magnetic field
in the region r < a and r > a.
(Delhi 2010)
10. A narrow beam of protons and deuterons, each
3. An α− particle and proton moving with the same
having the same momentum, enters a region of
speed enter the same magnetic field region at right
uniform magnetic field directed perpendicular to their
angles to the direction of the field. Show the
direction of momentum. What would be the ratio of
trajectories followed by the two particles in the region
the circular paths described by them?
of the magnetic field. Find the ratio of the radii of the
(Foreign 2011)
circular paths which the two particles may describe.
11. Two particles A and B of masses m and 2m have
(Foreign 2010)
charges q and 2q respectively. Both these particles
moving with velocities v1 and v2 respectively in the
same direction enter the same magnetic field B acting
normally to their direction of motion. If the two
forces FA and FB acting on them are in the ratio of 1 :
2, find the ratio of their velocities.
(Delhi 2011C)
12. Write the expression for Lorentz magnetic force on a
4. Deduce the expression for the magnetic dipole
moment of an electron orbiting around the central particle of charge ‘q’ moving with velocity v in a

nucleus. magnetic field B. Show that no work is done by this
(AI 2010) force on the charged particle.
5. State the underlying principle of working of a moving (AI 2011)
coil galvanometer. Write two reasons why a 13. Draw a schematic sketch of a cyclotron, explain its
galvanometer cannot be used as such to measure working principle and deduce the expression for the
current in a given circuit. Name any two factors on kinetic energy of the ions accelerated.
which the current sensitivity of a galvanometer (Foreign 2011)
depends. 14. (a) Show that a planar loop carrying a current I,
(Delhi 2010) having N closely wound turns and area of cross-
6. A moving coil galvanometer of resistance G, gives its  
section A, possesses a magnetic moment m = NIA
full scale deflection when a current IG flows through 
(b) When this loop is placed in a magnetic field B,
its coil. It can be converted into an ammeter of range
(0 to I) (I > IG) when a shunt of resistance S is find out the expression for the torque acting on it.
connected across its coil. If this galvanometer is (Foreign 2011)
converted into an ammeter of range 0 to 2I, find the
expression for the shunt required in terms of S and G.
(Delhi 2010 C)
96 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

15. A galvanometer coil of 50Ω resistance shows full 24. Using Biot-Savart law, derive the expression for the
scale deflection for a current of 5 mA. How will you magnetic field in the vector form at a point on the
convert this galvanometer into a voltmeter of range 0 axis of a circular current loop.
to 15 V? (Delhi 2011, Al 2013)
(Foreign 2011) 25. A rectangular loop of size l × b carrying a steady
16. Depict the trajectory of a charged particle moving 
current I is placed in a uniform magnetic field B.
with velocity v as it enters in a uniform magnetic
Prove that the torque acting on the loop is given by
field perpendicular to the direction of its motion.    
τ= m × B, where m is the magnetic moment of the
(AI 2012C)
17. Depict the direction of the magnetic field lines due to loop.
a circular current carrying loop. (AI 2012, Delhi 2013)
(Delhi 2012C) 26. (a) State using a suitable diagram, the working
18. A particle of charge ‘q’ and mass ‘m’ is moving with principle of a moving coil galvanometer. What is the
function of a radial magnetic field and the soft iron
velocity v. It is subjected to a uniform magnetic field
 core used in it?
B directed perpendicular to its velocity. Show that it (b) For converting a galvanometer into an ammeter, a
describes a circular path. Write the expression for its shunt resistance of small value is used in parallel,
radius. whereas in the case of a voltmeter a resistance of
(Foreign 2012) large value is used in series. Explain why.
19. A proton and a deuteron, each moving with velocity (Foreign 2012, 4/5, Delhi 2013C)
v enter simultaneously in the region of magnetic 27. A long straight wire carries a steady current 1 along

field B acting normal to the direction of velocity. the positive y-axis in a coordinate system. A particle
Trace their trajectories establishing the relationship of charge + Q is moving with a velocity i; along the
between the two. (Delhi 2012C) x-axis. In which direction will the particle experience
20. Circular coil of N turns and radius R carries a current a force?
I. It is unwound and rewound to make another coil of (Foreign 2013)
radius R/2, current I remaining the same. Calculate 28. (a) Define the current sensitivity of a galvanometer.
the ratio of the magnetic moments of the new coil and (b) The coil area of a galvanometer is 16 × 10−4 m 2 . It
the original coil. (AI 2012) consists of 200 turns of a wire and is in a magnetic
21. A short bar magnet of magnetic moment 0.9 J/T is field of 0.2 T. The restoring torque constant of the
placed with its axis at 30o to a uniform magnetic suspension fibre is 10-6 Nm per degree. Assuming the
field. It experiences a torque of 0.063 J. magnetic field to be radial, calculate the maximum
(i) Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic field. current that can be measured by the galvanometer if
(ii) In which orientation will the bar magnet be in the scale can accommodate 30° deflection.
stable equilibrium in the magnetic field? (AI 2013C)
(Foreign 2012) 29. Draw the magnetic field lines due to a current passing
22. A rectangular loop of wire of size 2.5 cm × 4 cm through a long solenoid. Use Ampere's circuital law,
carries a steady current of 1 A. A straight wire to obtain the expression for the magnetic field due to
carrying 2 A current is kept near the loop as shown. If the current I in a long solenoid having n number of
the loop and the wire are coplanar, find the the turns per unit length.
magnitude and direction of the force on the loop due (AI 2011 C, Delhi 2014C)
to the current carrying wire. 30. Write the expression, in a vector form, for the

(Delhi 2012) Lorentz magnetic force F due to a charge moving
23. Two long straight parallel conductors carrying steady 
with velocity v in a magnetic field B. What is the
currents I1 and I2 are separated by a distance ‘d’.
direction of the magnetic force?
Explain briefly with the help of a suitable diagram,
(Delhi 2014)
how the magnetic field due to one conductor acts on
31. Define one tesla using the expression for the
the other. Hence deduce the expression for the force
magnetic force acting on a particle of charge ‘q’
acting between the two conductors. Mention the 
moving with velocity v in a magnetic field B.
nature of this force. (AI 2012)
(Foreign 2014A)
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 97

32. Write the condition under which an electron will 40. A square shaped plane coil of area 100 cm2 of 200
move undeflected in the presence of crossed electric turns carries a steady current of 5A. If it is placed in a
and magnetic fields. uniform magnetic field of 0.2 T acting perpendicular
(Al 2014C) to the plane of the coil. Calculate the torque on the
33. Using the concept of force between two infinitely coil when its plane makes an angle of 60o with the
long parallel current carrying conductors, define one direction of the field. In which orientation will the
ampere of current. coil be in stable equilibrium?
(Al 2014) (AI 2015C)

34. State Biot - Savart law in vector form expressing the 41. A uniform magnetic field B is set up along the
magnetic field due to an element di carrying current I positive x-axis. A particle of charge ‘q’ and mass ‘m’
at a distance F from the element. moving with a velocity enters the field at the origin in
(Al 2014C) X-Y plane such that it has velocity components both
35. (a) How is a toroid different from a solenoid? (b) Use along and perpendicular to the magnetic field B.
Ampere's circuital law to obtain the magnetic field Trace, giving reason, the trajectory followed by the
inside a toroid. (c) Show that in an ideal toroid, the particle. Find out the expression for the distance
magnetic field (i) inside the toroid and (ii) outside the moved by the particle along the magnetic field in one
toroid at any point in the open space rotation.
(AI 2014C) (AI 2015)
36. State Ampere's circuital law, expressing it in the 42. An electron moving horizontally with a velocity of
integral form.
4 × 104 m / s enters a region of uniform magnetic field
(Delhi 2014)
of 10-5 T acting vertically upward as shown in the
37. (a) Explain using a labeled diagram, the principle and
figure. Draw its trajectory and find out the time it
working of a moving coil galvanometer. What is the
takes to come out of the region of magnetic field.
function of (i) uniform radial magnetic field, (ii) soft
iron core?
(b) Define the terms (i) current sensitivity and (ii)
voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer. Why does
increasing the current sensitivity not necessarily
increase voltage sensitivity?
(AI 2015, 2014 & 2012)
38. A particle of mass 'm' and charge 'q' moving with (Foreign 2015)
velocity 'v' enters the region of uniform magnetic 43. A straight wire of mass 200 g and length 1.5 m
field at right angle to the direction of its motion. How carries a current of 2 A. It is suspended in mid air by
does its kinetic energy get affected? a uniform magnetic field B. What is the magnitude of
(Delhi 2015C) the magnetic field?
39. A square loop of side 20 cm carrying current of 1 A is (Foreign 2015)
kept near an infinite long straight wire carrying a 44. A closely wound solenoid of 2000 turns and cross
current of 2 A in the same plane as shown in the sectional area 1.6 × 10−4 m 2 carrying a current of 4.0
figure. 2A
A is suspended through its centre allowing it to turn
in a horizontal plane.
Find (i) the magnetic moment associated with the
solenoid,
(ii) the torque on the solenoid if a horizontal magnetic
field of 7.5 × 10−2 T is set up at an angle of 30° with
the axis of the solenoid.
Calculate the magnitude and direction of the net force (AI 2015 C)
exerted on the loop due to the current carrying
conductor.
(Al 2015C)
98 MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

45. State the principle of working of a galvanometer. A 50. (a) Write the expression for the magnetic force acting
galvanometer of resistance G is converted into a on a charged particle moving with velocity v in the
voltmeter to measure upto V volts by connecting a presence of magnetic field B.
resistance R1 in series with the coil. If a resistance R2 (b) A neutron, an electron and an alpha particle
is connected in series with it, then it can measure upto moving with equal velocities, enter a uniform
V/2 volts. Find the resistance, in terms of R1 and R2, magnetic field going into the plane of the paper as
required to be connected to convert it into a voltmeter shown. Trace their paths in the field and justify your
that can read upto 2 V. Also find the resistance G of answer.
the galvanometer in terms of R1 and R2.
(Delhi 2015)
46. (a) Why is the magnetic field radial in a moving coil
galvanometer? Explain how it is achieved. (b) A
galvanometer of resistance 'G' can be converted into a
voltmeter of range (0-V) volts by connecting a
resistance ‘R’ in series with it. How much resistance
will be required to change its range from 0 to V/2? (Delhi 2016)
(AI 2015C),
47. Explain how Biot-Savart's law enables one to express 51. Use Biot-Savart law to derive the expression for the
the Ampere's circuital law in the integral form, viz. magnetic field on the axis of a current carrying
fa• = go/ where / is the total current passing through circular loop of radius R. Draw the magnetic field
the surface. lines due to circular wire carrying current I.
(2/5, Al 2015) (AI 2016)
48. (a) State ampere's circuital law. Use this law to obtain 52 Two identical coils P and Q each of radius R are
the expression for the magnetic field inside an air lying in perpendicular planes such that they have a
cored toroid of average radius'', having 'n' turns per common centre. Find the magnitude and direction of
unit length and carrying steady current L (b) An the magnetic field at the common centre of the two
observer to the left of a solenoid of N turns each of coils, if they carry currents equal to I and 43/
cross section area 'A' observes that a steady current I respectively.
in it flows in the clockwise direction. Depict the (Foreign 2016)
magnetic field lines due to the solenoid specifying its 53. (i) With the help of a neat and labeled diagram.
polarity and show that it acts as a bar magnet of explain the principle and working of a moving coil
magnetic moment m = NIA. galvanometer.
(Delhi 2015) (ii) What is the function of a uniform radial field and
how is it produced?
(iii) Define current sensitivity of a galvanometer.
How is current sensitivity increased?
(Foreign 2016)
49. Write the underlying principle of a moving coil 54. Find the condition under which the charged particles
galvanometer. moving with different speeds in the presence of
(Delhi 2016) electric and magnetic field vectors can be used to
select charged particles of a particular speed.
(AI 2017)
55. Two identical loops P and Q each of radius 5 cm are
lying in perpendicular planes such that they have a
common centre as shown in the figure. Find the
magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field at
the common centre of the two coils, if they carry
currents equal to 3 A and 4 A respectively.
(Al 2017)
MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM 99

56. (a) State Blot - Savart's law and express this law in 61. A long straight wire AB carries a current of 9 4 A. A
the vector form. proton P travels at 4 × 106 ms −1 parallel to the wire
(b) Two identical circular coils, P and Q each of 0.2 m from it and in a direction opposite to the
radius R, carrying currents 1 A and 3A current as shown in the figure. Calculate the force
respectively, are placed concentrically and which the magnetic field due to the current carrying
perpendicular to each other lying in the XY and YZ wire exerts on the proton. Also specify its direction.
planes. (AI 2019)
Find the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic 62. Two infinitely long straight wires Al and A2 carrying
field at the centre of the coils. currents I and 2 I flowing in the same directions are
(AI 2017) kept `c, distance apart. Where should a third straight
57. Describe the working principle of a moving coil wire A3 carrying current 1.5 I be placed between Al
galvanometer. Why is it necessary to use : and A2 so that it experiences no net force due to AI
(i) a radial magnetic field and and A2? Does the net force acting on A3 depend on
(ii) a cylindrical soft iron core in a galvanometer? the current flowing through it? (Delhi 2019)
Write the expression for current sensitivity of the 63. A proton, a deuteron and an alpha particle, are
galvanometer. accelerated through the same potential difference and

Can a galvanometer as such be used for measuring then subjected to a uniform magnetic field B,
the current? Explain. perpendicular to the direction of their motions.
(Delhi 2017) Compare
58. A proton and an electron traveling along parallel (i) their kinetic energies, and
paths enter a region of uniform magnetic field, acting (ii) if the radius of the circular path described by the
perpendicular to their paths. Which of them will proton is 5 cm, determine the radii of the path
move in a circular path with higher frequency? described by the deuteron and alpha particle.
(AI 2018) (AI 2019)
59. A charged particle q is moving in the presence of a 64. (a) Briefly explain how a galvanometer is converted
magnetic field B which is inclined to an angle 30° into an ammeter.
with the direction of the motion of the particle. Draw (b) A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 15Ω and it
the trajectory followed by the particle in the presence shows full scale deflection for a current of 4 mA.
of the field and explain how the particle describes this Convert it into an ammeter of range 0 to 6 A.
path. (Delhi 2019) (AI 2019)
60. A proton and a deuteron having equal momenta enter 65. (a) Briefly explain how a galvanometer is converted
in a region of a uniform magnetic field at right angle into a voltmeter.
to the direction of the field. Depict their trajectories in (b) A voltmeter of a certain range is constructed by
the field. connecting a resistance of 980Ω in series with a
(AI 2010, Delhi 2013 & 2019) galvanometer. When the resistance of 470Ω is
connected in series, the range gets halved. Find the
resistance of the galvanometer. (AI 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM

68 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

05
MAGNETISM AND MATTER
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 101

Chapter at a Glance
1. When a bar magnet of dipole moment m is placed Substance χm µr µ
in a uniform magnetic field B,
(a) the force on it is zero, 1. Diamagnetic -1 δ χ m < 0 0 ≤ µr < µ < µ0
(b) the torque on it is m × B,
1
(c) its potential energy is –m - B, where we choose
the zero of energy at the orientation when m is 2. Paramagnetic 0 < χm < ∈ * 0 < χ m <∈ * µ > µ0
perpendicular to B.
3. Ferromagnetic χm > > 1 χ m >> 1 µ >> µ0
2. Consider a bar magnet of size l and magnetic
moment m, at a distance r from its mid-point,
where r >>l, the magnetic field B due to this bar is, 7. Magnetic materials are broadly classified as:
µm diamagnetic, paramagnetic, and ferromagnetic. For
B = 0 3 (along axis) diamagnetic materials χ is negative and small and
2πr
for paramagnetic materials it is positive and small.
µm
= − 0 3 (along equation) Ferromagnetic materials have large χ and are
4πr characterized by non-linear relation between B and
3. Gauss’s law for magnetism states that the net H. They show the property of hysteresis.
magnetic flux through any closed surface is zero 8. The hysteresis curve represents the relation

=φn ∑ B.∆S 0
= between magnetic induction B (or intensity of
all area
elements ∆S

magnetization I ) of a ferromagnetic material with

magnetizing force or magnetic intensity H . The
shape of the hysteresis curve is shown in figure. It
represents the behavior of the material as it is taken
through a cycle of magnetization.

4. Three quantities are needed to specify the magnetic

field of the earth on its surface – the horizontal
component, the magnetic declination, and the
magnetic dip. These are known as the elements of
the earth’s magnetic field.
5. Consider a material placed in an external magnetic
field B0. The magnetic intensity is defined as,
B0
H=
µ0
The magnetization M of the material is its dipole
moment per unit volume. The magnetic field B in 9. Diamagnetism is universal. It is present in all
the material is, materials. But it is weak and hard to detect if the
substance is para- or ferromagnetic.
B = µ0 (H + M)
10. According to Curie law, Intensity of magnetization
6. For a linear material M = χ H. So that B = µ H and
(I) of a magnetic material is (i) directly
χ is called the magnetic susceptibility of the
proportional to magnetic induction (B), and (ii)
material. The three quantities, χ, the relative
inversely proportional to the temperature (T) of the
magnetic permeability µr, and the magnetic
material.
permeability µ are related as follows:
µ = µ 0µ r 1 C
∴χ m ∝ or χ m =
µr = 1 + χ T T
where C is a constant of proportionality and is
called Curie constant.
102 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

Solved Examples
Example-1 R
N 2 2πR= N 2 2π  
In what way is the behavior of a diamagnetic 2
material different from that of a paramagnetic,
N 2 = 2N1
when kept in an external magnetic field?
Sol. When a bar of diamagnetic material is placed in an R
When radius of another coil =
external magnetic field, the field lines are repelled 2
or expelled and the field inside the material is Then magnetic moment of new coil
reduced. Whereas when a paramagnetic material is 2 2
R R
placed in an external magnetic field, the field lines = N2I × π  =
 N2I × π
2 4
are attracted towards it.
Magnetic moment of new coil
∴
Example-2 Magnetic moment of original coil
Draw magnetic field lines when a 2N1I × πR 2 / 4 1
= =
(i) diamagnetic, N1I × πR 2 2
(ii) paramagnetic substances are placed in an
Ratio = 1: 2
external magnetic field.
Which magnetic property distinguishes this
Example-4
behavior of the field lines due to the two
Write two characteristic properties each to select
substances?
materials suitable for
Sol. When a diamagnetic material is placed in an
(i) permanent magnets and
external magnetic field.
(ii) electromagnets.
Sol. Properties of a material -
(a) For making a permanent magnet:
High retentivity
High coercivity
High permeability
(b) For making an electromagnet:
(ii) When a paramagnetic material is placed in an High permeability.
external magnetic field. Low retentivity
Low coercivity

Example-5
If magnetic monopoles existed, how would Gauss's
law of magnetism be modified?
Sol. Gauss’s law of magnetism states that the flux of B
through any closed surface is always zero
Magnetic susceptibility distinguishes this behavior
of the field lines due to the two substances.
∫ B ⋅ ds =
0
If the monopole existed, then Gauss’s law would
Example-3 have been ∫ B ⋅ ds =
µ0 q m
A circular coil of N turns and radius R carries a
Where qm is magnetic charge (monopole) enclosed
current I. It is unwound and rewound to make
by the surface.
another coil of radius R/2, current I remaining the
same. Calculate the ratio of the magnetic moments
of the new coil and the original coil.
Sol. Magnetic moment
= N1Iπr 2
= NIA
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 103

Example-6 1
The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic
Sol. ( a ) As χm =
H
field at a place is B and angle of dip is 60°. What is • Slope of the line gives magnetic susceptibilities.
the value of the vertical component of earth’s • For magnetic material B, it is giving higher +ve
magnetic field at the equator? value. So the material is ‘ferromagnetic’.
Sol. BH = B cos δ • For magnetic material A, it is giving a lesser
BV = BH tan δ = B tan 60° = B × √3 = √3B +ve value than ‘B’. So the material is
∴ At equator, BV = 0 (zero). ‘paramagnetic’.
(b) Larger susceptibility is due to characteristic
Example-7 ‘domain structure’. More magnetic moments get
The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 1.9 × aligned in the direction of the magnetizing field in
10-5. Name the type of magnetic materials it comparison to that for paramagnetic materials for
represents. the same value of the magnetizing field.
Sol. It represents a Paramagnetic substance.
Example-10
Example-8 (i) Write two characteristics of a material used for
Define magnetic susceptibility of a material. Name making permanent magnets.
two elements, one having positive susceptibility (ii) Why is the core of an electromagnet made of
and the other having negative susceptibility. What ferromagnetic materials?
does negative susceptibility signify? Sol. (i) Two characteristics of a material used for
Sol. (i) Magnetic susceptibility (χm) : It is the property making permanent magnets are :
of a material which determines how easily it can be (a) High retentivity so that it produces a strong
magnetized when kept in a magnetizing field. magnetic field.
Also, it is the ratio of intensity of magnetisation (I) (b) High coercivity so that its magnetisation is not
produced in the material to the intensity of destroyed by strong magnetic fields, temperature
magnetizing field (H) variations or minor mechanical damage.
1 (ii) The core of electromagnet is made of
χm =
H ferromagnetic materials because they have high
(ii) Positive susceptibility : paramagnetic material initial permeability so that magnetization is large
Example: Al, Ca. even for a small magnetizing field and low
Negative susceptibility : diamagnetic material resistivity to reduce losses due to eddy currents.
Example: Bi, Cu.
(iii) Negative susceptibility signifies that the Example-11
material is diamagnetic in nature. (a) How does a diamagnetic material behave when
it is cooled to very low temperatures?
Example-9 (b) Why does a paramagnetic sample display
The figure shows the variation of intensity of greater magnetization when cooled? Explain.
magnetization versus the applied magnetic field Sol. (a) When diamagnetic material is cooled to very
intensity, H, for two magnetic materials A and B : low temperature then it exhibits both perfect
conductivity and perfect diamagnetism.
(b) This is because at lower temperature, the
tendency to disrupt the alignment of dipoles (due to
magnetizing field) decreases on account of reduced
random thermal motion.

(a) Identify the materials A and B.

(b) Why does the material B, have a larger
susceptibility than A, for a given field at constant
temperature?
104 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

Example-12 M
= ( B − µ0 H ) / µ0
The earth’s magnetic field at the equator is
approximately 0.4 G. Estimate the earth’s dipole
= ( µ r µ0 H − µ0 H ) / µ0 = ( µr − 1) H = 399 × H
moment. (NCERT) ≅ 8 × 105 A / m .
µ0 m (d) The magnetizing current IM is the additional
Sol. The equatorial magnetic field is, BE =
4πr 3 current that needs to be passed through the
We are given that BE  0.4G= 4 × 10−5 T . windings of the solenoid in the absence of the core
which would give a B value as in the presence of
For r, we take the radius of the earth 6.4 × 106 m. . the core.
Hence, Thus B = µr n ( I + IM )
( )
3
4 × 10−5 × 6.4 × 106 Using I = 2A, B = 1 T, we get IM = 794 A.
m=
µ 0 / 4π
Example-15
( ) (µ )
3
= 4 × 102 × 6.4 × 106 0 / 4π = 10−7
A magnetic needle free to rotate in a vertical plane
= 1.05 × 1023 Am 2 parallel to the magnetic meridian has its north tip
pointing down at 22° with the horizontal. The
This is close to the value 8 × 1022 Am 2 quoted in
horizontal component of the earth's magnetic field
geomagnetic texts.
at the place is known to be 0.35 G. Determine the
magnitude of the earth's magnetic field at the place.
Example-13
(NCERT)
In the magnetic meridian of a certain place, the
Sol. Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field,
horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field
BH = 0.35G
is 0.26G and the dip angle is 60°. What is the
magnetic field of the earth at this location? Angle made by the needle with the horizontal plane
(NCERT) = Angle of dip = δ = 22°
Sol. It is given that H E = 0.26G Earth’s magnetic field strength = B
HE We can relate B and BH as: = BH Bcos δ
cos 60° =
BE B
∴B = H
HE cos δ
BE = 0.35
cos 60° = = 0.377G
cos 22°
0.26
= = 0.52G Hence, the strength of earth’s magnetic field at the
(1/ 2 )
given location is 0.377 G.

Example-14
A solenoid has a core of a material with relative
permeability 400. The windings of the solenoid are
insulated from the core and carry a current of 2A. If
the number of turns is 1000 per metre, calculate (a)
H, (b) M, (c) B and (d) the magnetizing current Im.
(NCERT)
Sol. (a) The field H is dependent of the material of the
core, and is
H= nI = 2 103 A / m
1000 × 2.0 =×
(b) The magnetic field B is given by
B = µ r µ0 H

( )
= 400 × 4π× 10−7 N / A 2 × 2 × 103 ( A / m )

= 1.0T .
(c) Magnetization is given by
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 105

Example-16 Example-18
At a certain location in Africa, a compass points A short bar magnet of magnetic moment m = 0.32
12° west of the geographic north. The north tip of JT–1 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.15
the magnetic needle of a dip circle placed in the T. If the bar is free to rotate in the plane of the
plane of magnetic meridian points 60° above the field, which orientation would correspond to its (a)
horizontal. The horizontal component of the earth's stable, and (b) unstable equilibrium? What is the
field is measured to be 0.16 G. Specify the potential energy of the magnet in each case?
direction and magnitude of the earth's field at the (NCERT)
location. (NCERT) Sol. It is provided that moment of the bar magnet,
Sol. M = 0.32J/T. External magnetic field, B = 0.15 T
Angle of declination, θ= 12° It is considered as being in stable equilibrium,
Angle of dip, δ= 60° when the bar magnet is aligned along the magnetic
Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field, field. Therefore, the angle θ, between the bar
magnet and the magnetic field is 0o.
BH = 0.16G
Potential energy of the system = - MB cos (θ)
Earth’s magnetic field at the given location = B
⇒ MB cos (θ) = - 0.32 × 0.15 × cos (0)
We can relate B and BH as:
= - 4.8 × 10-2 J. Hence the potential energy is
BH Bcos δ
= = - 4.8 × 10-2 J
B (a) It is provided that moment of the bar magnet,
∴B = H
cos δ M = 0.32 J/T
0.16 External magnetic field, B = 0.15 T
= = 0.35G When the bar magnet is aligned opposite to the
cos 60°
magnetic field, it is considered as being in unstable
Earth’s magnetic field lies in the vertical plane,
equilibrium, θ = 180o
12° West of the geographic meridian, making an
Potential energy of the system is hence
angle of 60° (upward) with the horizontal = MB cos (θ)
direction. Its magnitude is 0.32 G. ⇒ - MB cos (θ) = - 0.32 × 0.15 × cos(180o)
= 4.8 × 10-2 J
Example-17
Hence the potential energy is = 4.8 × 10-2 J
A short bar magnet placed with its axis at 30° with
a uniform external magnetic field of 0.25 T
Example-19
experiences a torque of magnitude equal to
A closely wound solenoid of 800 turns and area of
4.5 × 10–2 J. What is the magnitude of magnetic
cross section 2.5 × 10–4 m2 carries a current of 3.0
moment of the magnet? (NCERT)
A. Explain the sense in which the solenoid acts like
Sol. Provided in the question,
a bar magnet. What is its associated magnetic
Magnetic field strength b = 0.25 T
moment? (NCERT)
Torque on the bar magnet, T = 4.5 × 10-2 J
Sol. It is provided that number of turns in the solenoid,
Angle between the given bar magnet and the n = 800.
external magnetic field, θ = 30o Area of cross – section, A = 2.5 × 10-4 m2
Torque is related to magnetic moment (M) as: Current I the solenoid, I = 3.0A
T = MB sin (θ) A current – carrying solenoid is analogous to a bar
4.5 × 10−2 magnet because a magnetic field develops along its
⇒M
= = 0.36J / T
0.25 × sin 30o axis, i.e., along its length joining the north and
Clearly, the moment of the magnet is 0.36 J/T. south poles.
The magnetic moment due to the given current –
carrying solenoid is calculated as :
M = nIA = 800 × 3 × 2.5 × 10-4 = 0.6 J/T
Thus, the associated magnetic moment = 0.6 J/T
106 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

Example-20 Example-21
A bar magnet of magnetic moment 1.5 J T–1 lies A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment of 0.48
aligned with the direction of a uniform magnetic J/ T. Give the direction and magnitude of the
field of 0.22 T. magnetic field produced by the magnet at a
(a) What is the amount of work required by an distance of 10 cm from the centre of the magnet on
external torque to turn the magnet so as to align its (a) the axis, (b) the equatorial lines (normal
magnetic moment: (i) normal to the field direction, bisector) of the magnet.
(ii) opposite to the field direction? (NCERT)
(b) What is the torque on the magnet in cases (i) Sol. (a) The magnetic moment of the given bar magnet,
and (ii)? (NCERT) M is 0.48 J/T
Sol. Provided that, Given distance, d = 10cm = 0.1 m
Magnetic moment, M = 1.5 J/T The magnetic field at d – distance, from the centre of
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.22T the magnet on the axis is given by the relation:
(i) Initial angle between the magnetic field and µ 2M
B= 0 3
the axis is, θ1 = 0o 4π d
Final angle between the magnetic field and the here,
axis is, θ2 = 90o µ0 = Permeability of free space = 4π × 10-7 Tm/A
The work that would be required to make the Substituting these values, B becomes as follows:
magnetic moment perpendicular to the 4π× 10−7 2 × 0.48
direction of magnetic field would be: ⇒B=
4π 0.13
W = -MB (cos θ2 – cos θ1)
⇒ B = 0.96 × 10-4 T = 0.96G
⇒ W = -1.5 × 0.22 (cos 90o – cos 0o)
The magnetic field is 0.96G along the South-North
⇒ W = -0.33 (0 - 1) direction.
⇒ W = 0.33 J (b) The magnetic field at a point which d = 10 cm =
(ii) Initial angle between the magnetic field and 0.1 m away on the equatorial of the magnet is given
the axis, θ1 = 0o as:
Final angle between the magnetic field and the µ M
axis, θ2 = 180o B= 0 3
4π d
The work that would be required to make the
4π × 10−7 0.48
magnetic moment opposite (180 degrees) to ⇒B=
4π 0.13
the direction of magnetic field is given as:
W = - MB (cos θ2 – cos θ1) ⇒ B = 0.48 × 10-4 T = 0.48 G
⇒ W = 1.5 × 0.22 (cos 180o – cos 0o) The magnetic field is 0.48 G along the North – South
direction.
⇒ W = - 0.33 (- 1 - 1)
⇒ W = 0.66 J
(b) For the first (i) case, θ = θ1 = 90o
→ → →
Hence the Torque, τ= M × B
And its magnitude is : τ = MB sin(θ)
⇒ τ = 1.5 × 0.22 sin (90o)
⇒ τ = 0.33 Nm
Hence the torque involved is = 0.33 Nm
For the second – (ii) case: θ = θ1 = 180o
And its magnitude of the torque is : τ = MB
sin( θ)
⇒ τ = 1.5 × 0.22 sin (180o)
⇒ τ = 0 Nm
Hence the torque is zero.
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 107

Example-22 core, which would produce a B value as in the

The core of a toroid having 3000 turns has inner and presence of the core. Thus,
outer radii 11 cm and 12 cm respectively. Calculate B = µ0 n (I’ + Im)
relative permeability of its core, given that a current
1.0 = 4π × 10–7 × 1000 (2 + Im)
of 0.7 amp. produces a magnetic field of intensity
2.5 T in the core 1.0
I m= − 2= 796 − 2= 794 A
Sol. Here, total number of turns = 3000 4π× 10−4
11 + 12
=
Average radius, r = 11.5 cm Example - 24
2
A paramagnetic material has 1028 atoms/m3. Its
= 11.5 × 10–2 m ; i = 0.7 amp. and B = 2.5 T
magnetic susceptibility at temperature 350 K is
No. of turns/length,
2.8 × 10-4. Its susceptibility at 300 K is
3000 3000 3 × 105
=n = = (a) 3.267 × 10-4 (b) 3.262 × 10-4
2πr 2π × 11.5 × 10−2 23π
(c) 2.672 × 10-4 (d) 3.726 × 10-4
As B = µ n i
Sol. For a paramagnetic material, magnetic
B = µ0 µr n i susceptibility × ∝ 1/T
B 2.5 × 23π x2 = x1 (T1/T2) = 2.8 × 10-4 × (350/300)
⸫ µ
= r = = 684.5
µ0 ni 4π × 10−7 × 3 × 105 × 0.7
= 3.267 × 10-4
Example-23 Example-25
A solenoid has a core of a material with relative A ship is to reach a place 10º south of west. In
permeability 400. The windings of the solenoid are what direction should it be steered if declination at
insulated from the core and carry a current of 2 A. If the place is 17º west ?
the number of turns is 1000 per metre, calculate (i) H Sol. As the ship is to reach a place 10º south of west i.e.
(ii) B (iii) Intensity of magnetization I (iv) along OA, in the figure, therefore, it should be
magnetizing current. steered west of (magnetic) north at an angle of (90
Sol. Here, µr = 400, I’ = 2A, n = 1000 per metre – 17 + 10) = 83º.
(i) H = nI’ = 1000 × 2 = 2 × 103 Am-1
(ii) B = µH = µ0 µr H = 4π × 10-7 × 400 (2×103) = 1.0
T
(iii) From B = µ0 (H + I), where I is intensity of
magnetization,
B 1.0
I= − H= − 2 × 103
µ0 4π × 10−7
= 7.95 × 105 – 0.02 × 105
= 7.93 × 105 Am–1.
(iv) The magnetizing current Im is the additional
current that needs to be passed through the
windings of the solenoid in the absence of the
108 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section – A (1 Mark Questions) 12. Diagrams (a) and (b) given show magnetic field lines
(thick lines in the figure) wrongly. Point out what is
1. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 1.9 × 10-5. wrong with them.
Name the type of magnetic materials it represents. (a)
2. Where on the surface of Earth is the angle of dip zero?
3. Where on the surface of Earth is the horizontal
component of Earth’s magnetic field zero?
4. What is the magnetic dipole moment associated with
an electron due to its orbital motion in the first orbit of
H-atom known as?
5. What type of magnetic material is used in making
permanent magnets?

Section – B (2 Marks Questions)

6. Magnetic field arises due to charges in motion. Can a
system have magnetic moments even though its net
charge is zero? (b)
7. How does the (i) pole strength and (ii) magnetic
moment of each part of a bar magnet change if it is cut
into two equal pieces along its length?
8. What is the angle of dip at a place? What is the angle
of dip at a place where the horizontal and vertical
components of the earth’s magnetic field are equal? 13. A domain in ferromagnetic iron is in the form of a
9. Which physical quantity has the unit Wb/m2? Is it a cube of side length 1µm. Estimate the number of iron
scalar or a vector quantity? atoms in the domain and the maximum possible dipole
10. Derive an expression for the potential energy of a moment and magnetisation of the domain. The atomic
magnetic dipole in a uniform magnetic field. mass of iron is 55 g/mole and its density is 7.9 g / cm3 .
Assume that each iron atom has a dipole moment of
Section – C (3 Marks Questions) 9.27 × 10−24 Am 2 .
11. A small compass needle of magnetic moment ‘m’ is 14. A magnetic dipole is under the influence of two
free to turn about an axis perpendicular to the direction magnetic fields. The angle between the field directions
of uniform magnetic field ‘B’. The moment of inertia is 60°, and one of the fields has a magnitude of
of the needle about the axis is ‘I’. The needle is 1.2 × 10−2 T . If the dipole comes to stable equilibrium
slightly disturbed from its stable position and then at an angle of 15° with this field, what is the
released. Prove that it executes simple harmonic magnitude of the other field?
motion. Hence deduce the expression for its time 15. A Rowland ring of mean radius 15 cm 3500 turns of
period. wire wound on a ferromagnetic core of relative
permeability 800. What is the magnetic field B in the
core for a magnetizing current of 1.2 A?
16. The relative magnetic permeability of a magnetic
material is 8. Identify the nature of magnetic material
and state its two properties.
17. If magnetic monopoles existed, how would Gauss's
law of magnetism be modified?
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 109

18. It is considered that the earth consists of a huge bar Section – D (4 Marks Questions)
magnet of magnetic moment. What is the magnitude of
the earth’s magnetization? (Radius of earth = 6400 23. A compass needle free to turn in a horizontal plane is
km) placed at the centre of a circular coil of 30 turns and
19. Does a bar magnet exert a torque on itself due to its radius 12 cm. The coil is in a vertical plane making an
own field? Does one element of a current-carrying angle of 45° with the magnetic meridian. When the
wire exert a force on another element of the same current in the coil is 0.35 A, the needle points west to
wire? east.
20. (a). Define Magnetic declination. (a) Determine the horizontal component of the earth's
(b) The earth’s magnetic field at the equator is magnetic field at the location.
approximately 0.4 G. Estimate the earth’s dipole (b) The current in the coil is reversed, and the coil is
moment. rotated about its vertical axis by an angle of 90° in the
21. (a) Define Magnetization. Give its dimension and SI anticlockwise sense looking from above. Predict the
units. direction of the needle. Take the magnetic declination
(b) In the magnetic meridian of a certain place, the at the places to be zero.
horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field is
0.26G and the dip angle is 60º. What is the magnetic Section – E (5 Marks Questions)
field of the earth at this location?
24. Mention the properties of Magnetic field lines. State
22. In what way is the behavior of a diamagnetic material
the reason why can’t two magnetic field lines cannot
different from that of a paramagnetic, when kept in an
intersect?
external magnetic field?
25. Write the mathematical statement of Curie’s Law.
What is the importance of Curie Temperature?
b) A domain in ferromagnetic iron is in the form of a
cube of side length 1μm. Estimate the number of iron
atoms in the domain and the maximum possible dipole
moment and magnetisation of the domain. The
molecular mass of iron is 55 g/mole and its density is
7.9 g/cm3 . Assume that each iron atom has a dipole
moment of 9.27×10-24 A m2.
110 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section – A (Single Choice Questions) 9. A bar magnet of magnetic moment M is cut into two
equal parts along its length. The magnetic moment of
1. The universal property among all substances is either part is
(a) Diamagnetism (b) Para magnetism (a) 2M (b) M
(c) Ferromagnetism (d) Non – magnetism (c) M/2 (d) Zero
2. For which of the following substances, the magnetic 10. How many neutral points will be obtained when a bar
susceptibility is independent of temperature? magnet is kept with magnetic moment parallel to
(a) Diamagnetic only earth’s magnetic field?
(b) Paramagnetic only (a) One (b) Two
(c) ferromagnetism only (c) Four (d) Infinite
(d) diamagnetic and paramagnetic both 11. Soft iron is used in many parts of electrical machines
3. The hysteresis loss is caused by for
(a) Structural non- homogeneity (a) Low hysteresis loss and low permeability
(b) Work required for the magnetizing the material (b) Low hysteresis loss high permeability
(c) Potential work function (c) High hysteresis loss and low permeability
(d) None of the above (d) High hysteresis loss and high permeability
4. A sensitive magnetic instrument can be shielded very 12. The value of horizontal component of earth’s magnetic
effectively from outside magnetic field by placing it fields at a place is 0.35 × 10−4 T . If the angle of dip is
inside a box of
60° , the value of vertical component of earth’s
(a) Teak wood
magnetic field nearly
(b) Plastic material
(c) A metal of low magnetic permeability (a) 0.1× 10−4 T (b) 0.2 × 10−4 T
(d) A metal of high magnetic permeability (c) 0.4 × 10−4 T (d) 0.61× 10−4 T
5. The magnetic induction along the axis of an air cored 13. The variation of magnetic susceptibility ( χ ) with
solenoid is 0.03 T. On placing an iron core inside the
absolute temperature (T) for ferromagnetic material is
solenoid the magnetic induction becomes 1.5T. The
relative permeability of iron core will be
(a) 12 (b) 40
(c) 50 (d) 300
6. Magnetic susceptibility for a diamagnetic substance is
(a)
(a) Large and positive (b) Large and negative
(c) Small and positive (d) Small and negative
7. A dip needle free to move in a vertical plane
perpendicular to the magnetic meridian will remain
(a) Horizontal
(b)
(b) Vertical
(c) At an angle of 60° to the vertical
(d) At an angle of 45° to the horizontal
8. Potential energy of a bar magnet of magnetic M placed
in magnetic field of induction B such that it makes an (c)
angle θ with the direction of B is (take θ= 90° as
datum)
(a) −MBsin θ (b) −MBcos θ
(c) MB (1 − cos θ ) (d) MB (1 + cos θ )
(d)
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 111

14. A magnetizing field of 2 × 103 amp/m produces a 18. A curve between magnetic moment and temperature
magnetic flux density of 8p tesla in an iron rod. The for a magnet is
relative permeability of the rod will be
(a) 102 (b) 100
(c) 103 (d) 104
15. At which place, earth’s magnetism becomes
horizontal.
(a) Magnetic pole (b) Geographical pole
(c) Magnetic meridian (d) Magnetic equator (a)
16. The magnetic dipoles in a diamagnetic material are
represented, for three situations. The three situations
differ in the magnitude of a magnetic field applied to
the material. In which situation the magnetization of
the material is the greatest:

(b)

(a) A (b) B (c)

(c) C (d) equal in A, B and C.
17. If the angle of dip at two places are places are 30° and
45° respectively, then the ratio of horizontal
component of earth’s magnetic field at two places will
be
(a) 3: 2 (b) 1: 2
(c) 1: 3 (d) 1 : 2 (d)
112 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

19. The variation of magnetic susceptibility with 22. Assertion: The magnetic susceptibility is smaller than
magnetizing field for a paramagnetic substance is 1 for ferromagnetic substances
Reason: The net magnetic field inside the
ferromagnetic substance is less than the external
magnetic field
(a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
the correct explanation of assertion
(b) Both Assertion and reason are correct and reason is
(a) not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false
(d) Both assertion and reason are incorrect
23. Assertion: Torque on a magnetic dipole placed in a
uniform magnetic field is maximum when direction of
dipole is parallel to the direction of magnetic field
Reason: Torque depends on the magnitude of dipole
moment strength of magnetic field and angle between
(b)
the dipole moment and magnetic field.
(a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
the correct explanation of assertion
(b) Both Assertion and reason are correct and reason is
not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true
(c) 24. Assertion: The sensitivity of a moving coil
galvanometer is increased by placing a suitable
magnetic material as a core inside the coil.
Reason: Soft iron has high magnetic permeability and
cannot be easily magnetized or demagnetized.
(a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
the correct explanation of assertion
(b) Both Assertion and reason are correct and reason is
(d) not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false
20. A dip circle is at right angle to the magnetic meridian. (d) Assertion is false and reason is true
What will be the apparent dip? 25. Assertion: The true geographic north direction is
(a) 0° (b) 30° found by using a compass needle.
(c) 60° (d) 90° Reason: The magnetic meridian of the earth is along
the axis of rotation of the earth.
Section – B (Assertion & Reason Questions) (a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
the correct explanation of assertion
21. Assertion: At magnetic poles horizontal component of (b) Both Assertion and reason are correct and reason is
magnetic field is negligible not the correct explanation of assertion
Reason: If the needle is only capable of moving in a (c) Assertion is true and reason is false
horizontal plane, it can point along any direction (d) Both assertion and reason are incorrect
(a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
the correct explanation of assertion
(b) Both Assertion and reason are correct and reason is
not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 113

26. Assertion: steel is used for making permanent Section – C (Case Study Questions)
magnets
Case Study – 1
Reason: Steel has high retentivity and coercivity
If a small compass needle of known magnetic moment
(a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
m and moment of inertia I is kept in a uniform
the correct explanation of assertion
magnetic field, it will oscillate.
(b) Both Assertion and reason are correct and reason is
not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true
27. Assertion: The ferromagnetic property depends on
temperature
Reason: At higher temperature, a ferromagnet
becomes a paramagnet.
(a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
the correct explanation of assertion
(b) Both Assertion and reason are correct and reason is The torque on the needle is τ= m × B
not the correct explanation of assertion
In magnitude
= τ mBsin θ
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true Here τ is restoring torque and θ is the angle between m
28. Assertion: The individual atoms (or ions or and B.
molecules) of a paramagnetic material possess a An expression for magnetic potential energy can also
permanent magnetic dipole moment of their own be obtained on lines similar to electrostatic potential
Reason: On account of the ceaseless random thermal energy.
motion of the atoms, no net magnetisation is seen by The magnetic potential energy u m is given by
the permanent dipole moment of individual atoms
when no external magnetic field is present.
um = ∫ τ ( θ) dθ
(a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is = ∫ mBsin θdθ = −mBcos θ
the correct explanation of assertion  
(b) Both Assertion and reason are correct and reason is u m =−m ⋅ B
not the correct explanation of assertion Taking the constant of integration to be zero means
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false fixing the zero of potential energy at= 90° ,
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true i.e., when the needle is perpendicular to the field.

29. The angle at which the torque on the needle will be

maximum is:
(a) 90° (b) 30°
(c) 60° (d) 45°

30. The dipole moment of a current loop is independent of

the:
(a) Area of the loop
(b) Number of turns
(c) Magnitude of magnetic field
(d) Current in the loop

31. Most unstable position for the needle would be at:

(a) 0° (b) 90°
(c) 180° (d) 360°
114 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

32. A rectangular magnet of magnetic moment 2M is cut

into two piece of same length, the magnetic moment of
each piece will be
(a) M (b) 2M
M M
(c) (d)
2 4

Case Study – 2
Components of Earth Magnetic Field:

Magnetic Meridian
When a magnetic needle is suspended freely in the air, The angle that the north pole of the needle makes with
it always points in the north-south direction free from the horizontal axis is known as the angle of Dip or
all other attracting forces. Magnetic Inclination.
A vertical plane passing through the magnetic axis of a
freely suspended magnet is called magnetic meridian. 33. At poles, the angle of dip is
(a) 0° (b) 90°
Geographic Meridian
(c) 60° (d) 45°
A vertical plane passing through a place and
geographic north and south axis is called geographic 34. At 45° of angle of dip:
meridian. (a) The horizontal and vertical components of the
earth’s magnetic field are equal.
Magnetic Declination (b) The horizontal is greater than the vertical
Magnetic Declination is defined as the angle made by components of the earth’s magnetic field.
the Magnetic meridian with the geographic meridian. (c) The horizontal is smaller than the vertical
components of the earth’s magnetic field.
(d) None of these
35. The angle between the magnetic meridian and
geographical meridian is called
(a) Angle of declination (b) Angle of dip
(c) Angle of inclination (d) None of the above
36. At a certain place the angel of dip is 60° and the
Angle of Dip and Magnetic Inclination:
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is 0.10
Take a magnetic needle and suspend it freely so that it
Oersted. The earth’s total magnetic field is
can rotate about a horizontal axis as shown in the
1
diagram below: (a) 3 (b)
5
1 1
(c) (d)
3 2
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 115

Case Study – 3
In electromagnetism, permeability is the measure of 37. If the relative permeability for a material is slightly
magnetization that a material obtains in response to an more than 1, then it is a ____ material.
applied magnetic field. (a) Ferromagnetic (b) Paramagnetic
(c) Diamagnetic (d) None of the above
On the basis of a magnetic permeability
38. Susceptibility is positive for
(a) Ferromagnetic materials
(b) Paramagnetic materials
(c) Diamagnetic materials
(d) Both Ferromagnetic and Paramagnetic materials

39. In Superconductors, χ = −1 and µ r =0 , then it is a

Paramagnetic Diamagnetic Ferromagnetic (a) Ferromagnetic (b) Paramagnetic
Weakly Weakly Strongly (c) Diamagnetic (d) Uncertain
attracted by a repelled by a attracted by a 40. Superconductors,
magnet magnet. magnet (a) Attracts the magnetic field
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ (b) Repels the magnetic field
↑↓↑↓↑↓↑↓ ↑↓↑↓↑↓↑↓↑↓ ↑ ↑ ↑ (c) Absorbs the magnetic field
(d) Cancels the magnetic field
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
They can be They can be
solid, liquid or solid, liquid or They are solid
gas. gas. Iron, Nickel,
Litium, Copper, Silver, Cobalt
Tantalum Gold χ >> 1
0 < χ <1 χ<0

Also, µ r = 1 + χ
Where, µ r is relative permeability.
116 MAGNETISM AND MATTER

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic 10. (i) Name the three elements of the Earth’s magnetic
1 field.
field, at a place is times its vertical component
3 (ii) Where on the surface of the Earth are the vertical
there. Find the value of the angle of dip at that place. components of the Earth’s magnetic field zero?
What is the ratio of the horizontal component to the (Foreign 2011)
total magnetic field of the earth at that place? 11. Explain the following
(AI 2010 C) (i) Why do magnetic lines of force form continuous
2. Draw magnetic field lines when a (i) diamagnetic, (ii) closed loops?
paramagnetic substance is placed in an external (ii) Why are the field lines repelled (expelled) when a
magnetic field. Which magnetic property distinguishes diamagnetic material is placed in an external uniform
this behaviour of the field lines due to the two magnetic field?
substances? (Foreign 2011)
(Delhi 2010) 12. A small compass needle of magnetic moment ‘M’ and
3. What is the characteristic property of a diamagnetic moment of inertia ‘I’ is free to oscillate in a magnetic
material? field ‘B’. It is slightly disturbed from its equilibrium
(Foreign 2010) position and then released. Show that it executes
4. (i) Write two characteristics of a material used for simple harmonic motion. Hence, write the expression
making permanent magnets. for its time period.
(ii) Why is the core of an electromagnetic made of (Delhi 2011C)
ferromagnetic materials? 13. Distinguish between diamagnetic and ferromagnetic
(Delhi 2010) material in terms of (i) susceptibility and (ii) their
5. What is the difference between an electromagnet and a behaviour in a non-uniform magnetic field.
permanent magnet? How is an electromagnet (2/5, AI 2011 C)
designed? State any two factors on which the strength 14. The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field
of an electromagnet depends. at a place is B and angle of dip is 60o. What is the
(Delhi 2010C) value of the vertical component of earth’s magnetic
6. Where on the surface of Earth is the vertical field at the equator?
component of Earth’s magnetic field zero? (Delhi 2012)
(AI 2011) 15. A magnetic needle, free to rotate in a vertical plane,
7. If the horizontal and vertical components of the orients itself vertically at a certain place on the Earth.
Earth’s magnetic field are equal at a certain place, What are the values of (i) horizontal component of
what would be the angle of dip at that place? Earth's magnetic field and (ii) angle of dip ai this
(AI 2011 C) place? (Foreign 2012)
8. A magnetic needle free to rotate in a vertical plane 16. State two characteristics properties distinguishing the
parallel to the magnetic meridian has its north tip behavior of paramagnetic and diamagnetic materials.
down at 60o with the horizontal. The horizontal (AI 2012 C)
component of the earth's magnetic field at the place, is 17. (a) How does a diamagnetic material behave when it is
known to be 0.4 G. Determine the magnitude of the cooled to very low temperatures?
earth's magnetic field at the place. (b) Why does a paramagnetic sample display greater
(Delhi 2011) magnetisation when cooled? Explain. (Delhi 2012 C)
9. If χ stands for the magnetic susceptibility of a given 18. Where on the surface of Earth is the vertical
component of Earth’s magnetic field zero?
material, identify the class of material for which
(Delhi 2013 C)
(i) −1 ≤ χ < 0
19. A compass needle, free to turn in a vertical place
(ii) 0 < x < ε(ε stands for a small positive number) orients itself with its axis vertical at a certain place on
(AI 2011) the earth. Find out the values of (i) horizontal
component of earth’s magnetic field and (ii) angle of
dip at the place. (2/5, Delhi 2013)
MAGNETISM AND MATTER 117

20. A small compass needle of magnetic moment ‘m’ is 29. At a place, the horizontal component of earth’s
free to turn about an axis perpendicular to the direction magnetic field is B and angle of dip is 60o. What is the
of uniform magnetic field ‘B’. The moment of inertia value of the horizontal component of the earth’s
of the needle about the axis ‘I’. The needle is slightly magnetic field at the equator? (Delhi 2017)
disturbed from its stable position and then released. 30. Write two properties of a material suitable for making
Prove that it executes simple harmonic motion. Hence (a) a permanent magnet, and (b) an electromagnet.
deduce the expression for its time period. (AI 2017)
(3/5, Delhi 2013) 31. An iron ring of relative permeability µ r has windings
21. Depict the behaviour of magnetic field lines with (i) a of insulated copper wire of n turns per metre. When
diamagnetic material and (ii) a paramagnetic material the current in the windings is I, find the expression for
placed in an external magnetic field. Mention briefly the magnetic field in the ring. (2/3, A I 2018)
the properties of these materials which explain this 32. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 0.9853.
distinguishing behaviour. (AI 2013 C) Identify the type of magnetic material. Draw the
22. What are permanent magnets? Give one example. modification of the field pattern on keeping a piece of
(Delhi 2013) this material in a uniform magnetic field. (1/3, 2018)
23. Relative permeability of a material µ r =0.5, Identify 33. A bar magnet of magnetic moment 6 J T-1 is aligned at
the nature of the magnetic material and write its 60° with a uniform external magnetic field of 0.44 T.
relation to magnetic susceptibility. (Delhi 2014 C) Calculate (a) the work done in turning the magnet to
24. Give two points to distinguish between a paramagnetic align its magnetic moment (i) normal to the magnetic
and a diamagnetic substance. (Foreign 2014) field, (ii) opposite to the magnetic field, and (b) the
25. (a) How is an electromagnet different from a torque on the magnet in the final orientation in case
permanent magnet? (ii).
(b) Write two properties of a material which make it (AI 2018)
suitable for making electromagnets. (AI 2014 C) 34. State Gauss’s law for magnetism. Explain its
26. Show diagrammatically the behaviour of magnetic significance.
field lines in the presence of (i) paramagnetic and (ii) (1/3, Delhi 2019)
diamagnetic substances. How does one explain this 35. Write the four important properties of the magnetic
distinguishing feature? (AI 2014) field lines due to a bar magnet.
27. In what way is the behaviour of a diamagnetic material (2/3, Delhi 2019)
different from that of a paramagnetic when kept in an 36. Write three points of differences between para, dia-
external magnetic field? (AI 2016) and ferro- magnetic materials giving one example for
28. Depict the behaviour of magnetic field lines in the each.
presence of a diamagnetic material. (Foreign 2016) (Delhi 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

MAGNETISM AND MATTER

 06
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 119

Chapter at a Glance
1. Magnetic Flux: The total number of magnetic lines
of force passing normally through an area placed in a
magnetic field is equal to the magnetic flux linked
with that area.

5. When a metal rod of length l is placed normal to a

uniform magnetic field B and moved with a velocity v
perpendicular to the field, the induced emf (called
motional emf) across its ends is ε = Blv
Net flux through the surface   
  6. In motional emf B, v and l are three vectors. If any
= ∫=
  B. dA BA cos 
two vectors are parallel induced emf will be zero.
(θ is the angle between area vector and magnetic
field vector) If θ = 0o then φ = BA, If θ = 90o then φ
= 0.
Unit and Dimension: Magnetic flux is a scalar
quantity. It’s S.I. unit is weber (wb), CGS unit is
Maxwell or Gauss × cm2; (1wb = 108 Maxwell). 7. Changing magnetic fields can set up current loops in
nearby metal (any conductor) bodies. They dissipate
2. Faraday’s Laws of EMI electrical energy as heat. Such currents are eddy
currents.
First law: Whenever the number of magnetic lines of
force (magnetic flux) passing through a circuit 8. Inductance is the ratio of the flux-linkage to current. It
changes an emf is produced in the circuit called is equal to N  .
induced emf. The induced emf persists only as long as I
there is change or cutting of flux. 9. The circuit behavior of an inductor is quite different
Second law: The induced emf is given by rate of from that of a resistor. while a resistor opposes the
change of magnetic flux linked with the circuit i.e. di
current i, an inductor opposes the change in the
d d dt
e= − . For N turns e = − N . ; Negative sign circuit.
dt dt
indicates that induced emf (e) opposes the change of
flux.
3. Lenz’s law states that the polarity of the induced emf
is such that it tends to produce a current which di
opposes the change in magnetic flux that produces it. 10. If main current through a coil increases (i↑) so
dt
The negative sign in the expression for Faraday’s law
will be positive (+ve), hence induced emf e will be
indicates this fact.
negative (i.e. opposite emf) ⇒ Enet = E – e
4. If a bar magnet moves towards a fixed conducting
coil, then due to the flux changes an emf, current and
charge induces in the coil. If speed of magnet
increases, then induced emf and induced current
increases but induced charge remains same.
120 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

11. A changing current in a coil 1 (coil P) can induce an 13. The self-inductance of a long solenoid, the core of
emf in a nearby coil 2 (coil S). which consists of a magnetic material of relative
permeability µr, is given by L = µr µ0 n2 Al
where A is the area of cross-section of the solenoid, l
its length and n the number of turns per unit length.
14. In an ac generator, mechanical energy is converted to
electrical energy by virtue of electromagnetic
induction. If coil of N turn and area A is rotated at ν
revolutions per second in a uniform magnetic field B,
This relation is given by, then the motional emf produced is
dΙ 2 ε = NBA (2πf) sin (2πft)
ε1 =−M12
dt
where we have assumed that at time t = 0 s, the coil is
The quantity M12 is called mutual inductance of coil 1 perpendicular to the field.
with respect to coil 2. One can similarly define M21.
There exists a general equality,
M12 = M21
12. When a current in a coil changes, it induces a back
emf in the same coil. The self-induced emf is given
by,
dΙ
ε = −L
dt
L is the self-inductance of the coil. It is a measure of
the inertia of the coil against the change of current
through it.
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 121

Solved Examples
Example–1 (b)
Predict the direction of induced current in the
situations described by the following Figs. (a) to (f).
[NCERT]
Sol. (a)

On using Lenz’s law, we find the direction of the

induced current here to be along prqp.
(c)

Using Lenz’s law, we find the direction of the

induced current to bealong yzxy.
(d)

Using Lenz’s law, we find the direction of the

induced current to bealong zyxz.
(e)
The direction of the induced current in a closed loop
could be givenby Lenz’s law. The following pairs of
figures show the direction of the
induced current when the North pole of a bar magnet is
moved towards andaway from a closed loop
respectively. Using Lenz’s law, we found the direction of the
induced current to bealong xryx.
(f)

Here we find that, no current is induced since the field

Now, by using Lenz’s rule, the direction of the lines are lying in the same plane as that of the closed
induced current in the givensituation is found to be loop.
along qrpq.
122 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

Example – 2 Example – 3
Use Lenz’s law to determine the direction of induced A long solenoid with 15 turns per cm has a small loop
current in the situations described by Fig. :(a) A wire of area 2.0 cm2 placed inside the solenoid normal to its
of irregular shape turning into a circular shape; (b) A axis. If the current carried by the solenoid changes
circular loop being deformed into a narrow straight steadily from 2.0 A to 4.0 A in 0.1 s, what is the
wire. induced emf in the loop while the current is changing?
(NCERT) Sol. We are given the following information:
Number of turns on the solenoid
= 15turns / cm = 1500turns / m
Number of turns per unit length, n = 1500 turns
The solenoid has a small loop of area,
A = 2.0cm2 = 2 × 10-4 m2
Current carried by the solenoid changes from 2A to
4A.
Sol. (a) According to the Lenz’s law, the direction of the Now, the change in current in the solenoid,
induced emf is such that it tends to produce a current di = 4 - 2 = 2A
that would oppose the change in the magnetic flux that Change in time, dt = 0.1 s
produced it.The wire is here is expanding to form a Induced emf in the solenoid could be given by
circle, which means that force would be acting Faraday’s law as:
outwards on each part of wire because of the dφ …………………. (1)
ε=
magneticfield (acting in the downwards direction). dt
Now, the direction of induced current should be such Where, induced flux through the small loop,
that it will produce magnetic field in the upward φ = BA …………..(2)
direction (towards the reader). Therefore, the force on Equation (1) would now reduce to :
wire will be towards inward direction, i.e., induced
d  di 
current would be flowing in anticlockwise direction in ε= (BA) = Aµ 0 n ×  
dt  dt 
the loop from cbad.
Substituting the given values into this equation,
we get,
2
ε = 2 × 10−4 × 4π × 10−7 × 1500 ×
0.1
∴ ε = 7.54 × 10-6 V
Therefore, the induced voltage in the loop is found to
be, ε = 7.54 × 10-6 V.
(b)
Example-4
A rectangular wire loop of sides 8 cm and 2 cm with a
small cut is moving out of a region of uniform
magnetic field of magnitude 0.3 T directed normal to
the loop. What is the emf developed across the cut if
the velocity of the loop is 1 cm s–1 in a direction
normal to the (a) longer side, (b) shorter side of the
loop? For how long does the induced voltage last in
each case?
On deforming the shape of a circular loop into a
(NCERT)
narrow straight wire, the flux piercing the surface
Sol. (a) We are given the following,
decreases. Therefore, the induced currentflows along
Length of the rectangular wire, 1 = 8cm = 0.08 m
abcd according to Lenz’s law.
Width of the rectangular wire, b = 2cm = 0.02 m
Now, the area of the rectangular loop,
A = 1b = 0.08 × 0.02 = 16 × 10-4 m2
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.3T
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 123

Velocity of the loop, v = 1cm/s = 0.01 m/s Example-6

ε = B/v A horizontal straight wire 10 m long extending from
Substituting the given values, east to west is falling with a speed of 5.0 m s–1, at
ε = 0.3 × 0.08 × 0.01 = 2.4 × 10-4 V right angles to the horizontal component of the earth’s
0.08 magnetic field, 0.30 × 10–4 Wb m–2.
⇒
= t = 8s
0.01 (NCERT)
Therefore, the induced voltage is found to be (a) What is the instantaneous value of the emf induced
0.6 × 10-4 V which lasts for 8s. in the wire?
(b) We know that, Emf developed in the loop could be (b) What is the direction of the emf?
given as: (c) Which end of the wire is at the higher electrical
ε = Blv potential?
Substituting the given values, Sol. (a) We are given the following:
ε = 0.3 × 0.02 × 0.01 = 0.6 × 10-4 V Length of the wire, 1 = 10m
Time taken to travel along the widt Falling speed of the wire, v = 5.0 m/s
Distance travelled 1 Magnetic field strength, B = 0.3 × 10-4 Wbm-2
t = Emf induced in the wire is thus found to be,
velocity v
ε = Blv
0.02
t
⇒= = 2s ⇒ ε = 0.3 × 10-4 × 5 × 10
0.01
∴ ε = 1.5 × 10-3V
Therefore, the induced voltage is found to be 0.6 × 10-4
V which lasts for 8s. Hence, the emf induced in the wire is ε = 1.5 × 10-3 V.
(b) Using Fleming’s rule, we find the direction of the
Example-5 induced emf is from West to East.
A 1.0 m long metallic rod is rotated with an angular (c) The estern end of the wire is the end is at higher
frequency of 400 rad s-1 about an axis normal to the potential.
rod passing through its one end. The other end of the
rod is in contact with a circular metallic ring. A Example-7
constant and uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T parallel Current in a circuit falls from 5.0 A to 0.0 A in 0.1 s. If
to the axis exists everywhere. Calculate the emf an average emf of 200 V induced, give an estimate of
developed between the centre and the ring. the self-inductance of the circuit.
(NCERT) (NCERT)
Sol. We are given the following : Sol. We are given the following:
Length of the rod, 1 = 1m Initial current, Ι1 = 5.0 A
Angular frequency, ω = 400 rad/s Final current Ι2 = 0.0 A
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.5 T Change in current, dΙ = Ι1 - Ι2 = 5A
One end of the rod has zero linear velocity, while the Time taken for the change, t = 0.1 s
other end has a linear velocity of 1ω. Average emf, ε = 200 V
1ω + 0 1ω For self – inductance (L) of the coil, we have the
Average linear velocity of the rod,
= ν =
2 2 relation for average emf that could be given as:
Emf developed between the centre and the ring, ε = L di
dt
 B1   Bl ω 
2
ε Blv
= = B1 =   
 2   2  ε
⇒L =
On substituting the given values,  di 
 
 dt 
0.5 × (1) × 400
2

=∴ε = 100V Substituting the given value we get,

2
Therefore, the emf developed between the centre and 200
∴ L = 4H
=
the ring is 100 V.  5 
 
 0.1 
Therefore, we found the given values we get,
124 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

Example-8 Hence, the voltage difference developed between the

A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1.5 ends of the wings is 3.125 V.
H. If the current in one coil changes from 0 to 20 A in
0.5 s, what is the change of flux linkage with the other Example-10
coil? An air-cored solenoid with length 30 cm, area of cross-
(NCERT) section 25 cm2 and number of turns 500, carries a
Sol. We are given the following, current of 2.5 A. The current is suddenly switched off
Mutual inductance of a pair of coils, µ = 1.5 H in a brief time of 10–3 s. How much is the average back
Initial current, Ι1 = 0A emf induced across the ends of the open switch in the
Final current, Ι2 = 20A circuit? Ignore the variation in magnetic field near the
Chagne in current, dΙ = Ι2 - Ι1 = 20 – 0 = 20A ends of the solenoid.
Time taken for the change, t = 0.5s (NCERT)
Sol. Length of the solenoid, 1 = 30 cm = 0.3 m
Induced emf, ε = dφ ………………(1)
dt Area of cross – section, A = 25 cm2 = 25 × 10-4 m2
Where, dφ is the change in the flux linkage with the Number of turns on the solenoid, N = 500
coil. Current in the solenoid, Ι = 2.5 A
Emf is related with mutual inductance could be given Current flows for time, t = 10-3 s
as: Average back emf,

ε =µ
dΙ ………………………..(2) e = dφ ………………………..(1)
dt dt
Equation equations (1) and (2), we get, Where,
dφ dΙ dφ = Change in
= µ flux = NAB ……………………….(2)
dt dt
⇒ dφ= 1.5 × (20) Where, B = Magnetic field strength =
∴ dφ =30Wb NΙ
µo ………………..(3)
Ι
Hence, we found the change in the flux linkage to be
Where, µo = Permeability of free space = 4π × 10-7
30 Wb.
TmA-1
Example-9 µ 0 N 2 ΙA
ε=
A jet plane is travelling towards west at a speed of 1t
1800 km/h. What is the voltage difference developed 4π× 10−7 × (500) 2 × 2.5 × 25 × 10−4
⇒ε=
between the ends of the wing having a span of 25 m, if 0.3 × 10−3
the Earth’s magnetic field at the location has a ∴ ε = 6.5 V
magnitude of 5 × 10–4 T and the dip angle is 30°. Hence, the average back emf induced in the solenoid is
(NCERT) found to eb 6.5 V
Sol. Speed of the jet plane, v = 1800 km/h = 500 m/s
Wingspan of jet plane, 1 = 25 m Example–11
Earth’s magnetic field strength, B = 5.0 × 10-4 T Explain why resistance coils are usually double
Angle of dip, δ = 30o wound.
Vertical component of Earth’s magnetic field could be Sol. The resistance coils are double wound to avoid
given by, induction effects. Magnetic field due to current in one
Bv = B sinδ half of the coil is cancelled by magnetic field due to
⇒ Bv = 5 × 10-4 sin 30o = 2.5 × 10-4 T current in the other half of the coil (which is in
Voltage difference between the ends of the wind can opposite direction).
be calculated as,
ε = Bv × 1 × v Example–12
Substituting the given values, A bar magnet falls through a metal ring. Will its
⇒ ε = 2.5 × 10-4 × 25 × 500 acceleration be equal to ‘g’?
∴ ε = 3.125V Sol. No, acceleration of the magnet will not be equal to g.
It will be less than ‘g’. This is because as the magnet
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 125

falls, amount of magnetic flux linked with the ring 2

φ = (5 t + 10 t + 5) × 10 Wb
–3

changes. An induced current is developed in the ring

As e = dφ (in magnitude)
which opposes the downward motion of the magnet. dt
After the magnet has crossed the metal ring, amount of
∴ e = d (5t + 10 t + 5) × 10
2 –3

magnetic flux linked with the ring goes on decreasing. dt

An induced current developes in the ring and opposes Wb/sec = (10t + 10) × 10 volt
–3

the fall of the magnet. Therefore, downward At t = 5 sec,

acceleration of the magnet continues to be less than –3
e = (10 × 5 + 10) × 10 volt = 0.06 volt.
‘g’.
Example–16
Example–13 Find the change in current in an inductor of 10 H in
Three identical coils A, B and C are placed with their –2
which the e.m.f. induced 300 V in 10 sec. Also, find
planes parallel to one another, figure. Coils A and C
the change in magnetic flux.
carry current as shown. Coils B and C are fixed. The –2
Sol. Here, dI = ? L = 10 H, e = 300 V, dt = 10 sec., dφ = ?
coil A is moved towards B with uniform speed. Is
there any induced current in B. As e = dφ
dt

∴ 300 = 10 dI−2
10
300 × 10−2
=dI = 0.3 A
10

Also, e = dφ
dt
–2
Sol. As coils B and C are fixed, there is no induced current dφ = e dt = 300 × 10 = 3 Wb
in B due to C. However, when A is moved towards B,
an e.m.f. is induced in B, which would oppose relative Example–17
motion of A towards B. As current in A is clockwise, A plot of magnetic flux (φ) versus current (I) is shown
induced current in B must be anticlockwise. in figure, for two inductors A and B. Which of the two
has larger value of self induction ?
Example–14
When current in a coil changes with time, how is the
back e.m.f. induced in the coil related to it ?
Sol. Back e.m.f. induced in the coil, e = −L dI
dt
where L is coefficient of self-inductance of the coil
and dI/dt is the rate of change of current through the
coil. The variation of –e with t is shown in figure.
Sol. As L = φ/I, therefore L for A > L for B.

Example–18
A solenoid of length 50 cm with 20 turns per cm and
2
area of cross section 40 cm completely surrounds
another co–axial solenoid of the same length, area of
2
cross section 25 cm with 25 turns per cm. Calculate
the mutual inductance of the system.
Example–15 1
Sol. Here, l = 50 cm = m
The magnetic flux through a coil perpendicular to its 2
plane and directed into paper is varying according to Total no. of turns in outer solenoid
2
the relation φ = (5t + 10t + 5) milliweber. Calculate N1 = 20 × 50 = 1000
the e.m.f. induced in the loop at t = 5 s. Area of cross section of outer solenoid,
2 –4 2
2
Sol. Here, φ = (5 t + 10 t + 5) milli weber A1 = 40 cm = 40 × 10 m
126 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

Total no. of turns in inner solenoid, A solenoid of resistance 50 Ω and inductance 80 H is

N2 = 25 × 50 = 1250 connected to a 200 V battery. How long will it take for
Area of cross section of inner solenoid, the current to reach 50% of its final equilibrium value?
2
A2 = 25 cm = 25 × 10 m
–4 2
Calculate the maximum energy stored?
µ 0 N1 N 2 Sol. Here, R = 50 Ω, L = 80 H, E = 200 V, t = ?
M= A2
 I0
I=
= = 4π × 10 × 1000 × 1250 × 25 × 10 = 7.85 × 10
−7 −4
–3 2
1/ 2 L 80 8 E 200
henry. τ= = = s, I0= = = 4A
R 50 5 R 50
From I = I0 (1 − e − t/ τ )
Example–19
A coil of 100 turns and 1 cm radius is kept coaxially 50 8
=I0 I0 (1 − e − t/ τ ) ; t =
τ log e 2 = × 0.693 =
1.109s
within a long solenoid of 8 turns per cm and 5 cm 100 5
radius. Find the mutual inductance. Maximum energy stored
Sol. The magnetic field B in the primary of solenoid given
1 1
= LI02 = × 80 × ( 4 ) =640 J
2
by B = µ0 Np i
2 2
The magnetic flux linked with the secondary coil is
given by Ns φ = Ns B As = Ns (µ0 Np i) As Example–22
where As is the cross sectional area of secondary of A conducting rod AB makes contact with the metal
solenoid. rails AD and BC which are 0.5 m apart. If uniform
The mutual inductance is therefore, magnetic field of induction 0.5 Wb/m2 acts
Ns ϕ perpendicular to the plane of the figure.
M= = µ0 N p Ns As
i
Substituting the given values, we get :
M = (4π × 10–7 weber/amp–m)
(800/m) × 100 × π × 25 × 10–4
= 7.89 × 10–4 H.

Example–20
(a) Calculate the mutual inductance between two coils
when a current of 4 amp. changes to 12 amp. in 0.5
(a) Calculate the magnitude and direction of the
sec. and induces an e.m.f. of 50 milli–volts in the
induced emf when the rod is moving to the right with
secondary.
speed 4 m/s.
(b) Also calculate the induced e.m.f. in the secondary
(b) If the resistance of the circuit ABCD is 0.2 ohm,
if current in the primary changes from 3 amp. to 9
calculate the force required to maintain the motion
amp. in 0.02 secs.
assuming smooth contacts.
Sol. (a) di = 4 − 12 = −16 amp / sec (c) Compare the rate at which mechanical work is
dt 0.5
done by the force with the rate of heat developed in the
 di  circuit.
Induced emf = – M  
 dt  Sol. (a) Let AB = l and AD = BC = x at some instant.

∴=
M
( 50 ×10=)
−3

3.125 × 10−3 Henry.

⇒ φ=Blx
16 dϕ dx
⇒ induced emf = = B = Bv
(b) di = 3 − 9 = −300 amp / sec dt dt
dt 0.02 ⇒ induced emf = 0.5 × 0.5 × 4 = 1 volt.
Now emf = – (3.125 × 10–3) (–300) = 0.9375 volt (b) induced current = i
= induced emf/R = 1/0.2 = 5 A
magnetic force acting on AB = B i l
Example–21 = 0.5 × 5 × 0.5 = 1.25 N towards left.
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 127

The applied force to maintain constant velocity must (b) i (0.3) = 0.3 (1 – 1/e) = 0.19A
be of same magnitude but opposite direction i.e., (c) di/dt = e–10t/3 = 1/e = 0.37 A/s
towards right. (d) P = i2R = (0.19)2 10 = 0.361 Watts
(c) Rate of work done = Fv = 1.25 × 4 = 5 Watts. dU d  1 2  di
(e) =  Li  = Li = 3 × 0.19 × 0.37 =
0.21 W
Rate of heat dissipation in resistance i2 dt dt  2  dt
R = 52 × 0.2 = 5 Watts. (f) Rate at which cell delivers energy = Ei = 3 (0.19)
Hence the work done by force applied to the rod is = 0.57 Watts.
completely converted to heat in the resistance.
di
It is early seen that E i = i2 R + Li
dt
Example-23
A wheel with 10 metalllic spokes each 0.5 m long is
rotated with a speed of 120 rpm, in a plane normal to
earth’s magnetic field at the place. If the magnitude of
the field is 0.40 gauss, what is the induced e.m.f.
between the axle and rim of the wheel.
Sol. Here, no. of spokes, N = 10
length of the spoke, l = radius, r = 0.5 m.
Frequency, n = 120 rpm = 2 rps. = 2 Hz Yes total energy is conserved
–4
B = 0.4 gauss = 0.4 × 10 tesla, e = ?
Example – 25
As the wheel rotates, linear velocity of spoke end at
Induced electric field due to changing magnetic flux
the rim = r ω and linear velocity of spoke end at the
are more readily observed than induced magnetic field
axle = 0
due to changing electric field. Why ?
0+rω 1
Average linear velocity, = v = rω Sol. The changing electric field produces displacement
2 2 current, which is very small and hence the magnetic
As e.m.f. induced across the ends of each spoke field set up by it is also small, the same cannot be
1 observed easily. In an a.c. circuit displacement current
e = Bωl 2
2 can be increased by increasing the angular frequency
–4 22 –5 of current. This would increase the induced electric
e = 0.4 × 10 × 0.5 × × 2 × 0.5 = 6.28 × 10 volt
7 field. On the other hand, the induced electric field due
As all spokes are connected in parallel between the to changing magnetic flux can be increased by taking
axle and the rim, therefore net e.m.f. induced is the more number of turns of the coil. The induced e.m.f. in
same as that induced across the ends of each spoke. different turns of the same coil are added up, resulting
in induced electric field which is easily observed.
Example – 24
A series circuit having a self–induction 3 H, a pure
resistor 10 ohm and a source of constant voltage 3 V is
closed at time t = 0. Find :
(a) time constant of the circuit. At the end of 1 time–
constant, find :
(b) the current in the circuit,
(c) the rate at which the current in the circuit is
increasing,
(d) the rate at which joule’s heating is produced,
(e) the rate at which energy is stored in the magnetic
field,
(f) the rate at which energy is delivered by the source.
Is the total energy conserved ?

Sol. i = 3/10 (1 – e–10 t /3)

(a) τ = L/R = 0.3 sec
128 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section-A (1 Mark Questions) 14. Name two scientists who concluded electric currents
1. A metallic wire coil is stationary in a uniform were induced in closed coils when subjected to
magnetic field. What is the emf induced in the coil? changing magnetic fields by performing experiments.
2. Why does metallic piece become very hot when it is 15. State Lenz’s Law. On which fundamental principle is
surrounded by a coil carrying high frequency (H.F) the law based upon.
alternating current? 16. Suppose we bring a bar magnet near a coil and the
3. The induced emf is also called back emf. Why? North Pole of the bar magnet is facing the coil. In
4. The electric current flowing in a wire in the direction what direction the current is induced in the coil?
from B to A Find out the direction of the induced
current in the metallic loop kept the wire as shown in Section-C (3 Marks Questions)
the figure. 17. Mention two ways in which a current can be induced
in a coil kept in a uniform magnetic field.
18. State Lenz’s law. Show that it is in accordance with
the law of conservation of energy.
19. What is the effect on the mutual inductance between
the pair of coils when
5. Two spherical bobs, one metallic and the other of (i) the distance between the coils is increased?
glass, of the same size are allowed to fall freely from (ii) the number of turns in each coil is decreased?
the same height above the ground. Which of the two Justify your answer in each case.
would reach earlier and why? 20. If the rate of change of current of 2A/s induces an
6. The closed loop PQRS of wire is moved into a emf of 10mV in a solenoid. What is the self-
uniform magnetic field at right angles to the plane of inductance of the solenoid?
the paper as shown in the figure. Predict the direction 21. A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of
of the induced current in the loop. 1.5 H. If the current in one coil changes from 0 to 20
A in 0.5 s, what is the change of flux linkage with the
other coil?
22. A coil of N turns and mean cross-sectional area A is
rotating with uniform angular velocity ω about an
axis at right angle to uniform magnetic field B. What
is the emf induced in the coil?
7. State the Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
8. Write S.I. unit of magnetic flux. Is it a scalar or a
Section-D (4 Marks Questions)
vector?
23. A current of 10 A is flowing in a long straight wire
9. On what factors does the self-inductance of a
situated near a rectangular coil. The two sides, of the
solenoid depends?
coil, of length 0.2 m are parallel to the wire. One of
10. Define self–induction of a coil. Give one example.
them is at a distance of 0.05 m and the other is at a
distance of 0.10 m from the wire. The wire is in the
Section-B (2 Marks Questions) plane of the coil. Calculate the magnetic flux through
11. A bar magnet falls from a height ‘h’ through a metal
the rectangular coil. If the current uniformly to zero
ring. Will its acceleration be equal to g? Give reason
in 0.02 s, find the emf induced in the coil and indicate
for your answer.
the direction in which the induced current flows.
12. If the change in flux through the loop in time △t is
△Φ and the resistance of loop be ‘r’. Find out the
amount of charge flowing through the conductor in
time △t.
13. Mention one advantage of eddy current.
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 129

Section -E (5 Marks Questions) 25. Figure shows a rectangular conducting loop PQRS in
24. A conducting rod PQ, of length l, connected to a which arm RS of length l is movable. The loop is
resistor R, is moved at a uniform at a uniform speed kept in a uniform magnetic field B directed
v, normal to a uniform magnetic field B, as shown in downward perpendicular to the plane of the loop. The
the figure arm RS is moved with a uniform speed v.

Deduce an expression for

(a) The emf induced across the arm RS
(i) Deduce the expression for the emf induced in the
(b) The external force required to move the arm and
conductor.
(c) The power dissipated as heat.
(ii) Find the force required to move the rod in the
magnetic field.
(iii) Mark the direction of induced current in the
conductor.
130 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section - A (Single Choice Questions) (c) magnitude of induced current
1. A circular disc of radius 0.2 m is placed in a uniform (d) magnitude and direction of induced current
1 9. Two similar circular loops carry equal currents in the
magnetic field of induction Wbm −2 in such a way same direction. On moving coils further apart, the
π
 electric current will
that its axis makes an angle of 60° with B. The (a) increase in both
magnetic flux linked with the disc is (b) decrease in both
(a) 0.02 Wb (b) 0.06 Wb (c) remain unaltered
(c) 0.08 Wb (d) 0.01 Wb (d) increase in one and decrease in the second
2. A coil having 500 square loops of side 10 cm is 10. The wing span of an aero plane is 36 m. If the plane
placed normal to magnetic field which increases at a is flying at 400 km/h, the e.m.f. induced between the
rate of 1 T/sec. The magnitude of induced e.m.f. is wings tips is (assume B = 4 × 10-5 T)
(a) 0.1 V (b) 0.5 V (a) 16 V (b) 1.6 V
(c) 1 V (d) 5V (c) 0.16 V (d) 0.016 V
3. A magnet is moved towards a coil (i) quickly (ii) 11. What is the self inductance of an air core solenoid 1
slowly. The induced e.m.f. is m long, diameter 0.5 m, if it has 500 turns? Take π2 =
(a) same in both 10.
(b) more in (i) than in (ii) case (a) 3.15 × 10-4 H (b) 4.8 × 10-4 H
(c) smaller in (i) than in (ii) case (c) 5 × 10-4 H (d) 6.25 × 10-2 H
(d) nothing can be said 12. In a solenoid, if number of turns is doubled, then self-
4. A coil of cross-sectional area 102m2 is placed in the inductance will become
magnetic field, which changes from zero to 4 × 10-2 (a) Half (b) Double
Wb/cm2 within 5 sec. What will be the current across (c) ¼ times (d) Quadruple
5 Ω resistance? 13. Dimensions of self-inductance are :
(a) 0.016 A (b) 0.16 A (a) MLT-2 A-2 (b) ML2 T-1A-2
(c) 1.6 A (d) 16.0 A (c) ML2T-2A-2 (d) ML2T-2A-1
5. Whenever a magnet is moved either towards or away 14. A coil of self-inductance 0.5 mH carries a current of
from a conducting coil, an emf is induced, the 2 A. The energy stored (in joule) is
magnitude of which is independent of (a) 1 (b) 0.001
(a) the strength of the magnetic field (c) 0.5 (d) 0.05
(b) the speed with which the magnet is moved 15. The unit of inductance is equivalent to
(c) the number of turns of the coil volt×ampere ampere
(d) the resistance of the coil (a) (b)
second volt ×second
6. Use of eddy currents is done in the following except
(a) moving coil galvanometer volt volt × second
(c) (d)
(b) electric brakes ampere ×second ampere
(c) induction motor 16. Two coils are placed close to each other. The mutual
(d) dynamo inductance of the pair of coils depends upon
7. An aeroplane having a wing space of 35 m flies due (a) The rates at which currents are changing in the
North with the speed of 90 ms−1. The induced emf two coils
between the tips of the wings will be (take, B = 4 × (b) Relative position and orientation of the two coils
10-5 T) (c) The materials of the wires of the coils
(a) 0.013 V (b) 1.26 V (d) The currents in the two coils
(c) 12.6 V (d) 0.126 V 17. Two circular coils can be arranged in any of the three
8. The Lenz’s law gives situations shown in figure. Their mutual inductance
(a) direction of induced current will be
(b) magnitude of induced emf
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 131

Section-B (Assertion & Reason Questions)

21. Assertion: When magnetic field is in the plane of a
rectangular coil, magnetic flux linked with it is zero.
=
Reason: This follows from φ BA cos θ ; where the
symbols have their standard meanings. potential
(a) maximum in situation (i) energy of the charge.
(b) maximum in situation (ii) (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) maximum in situation (iii)
(d) the same in all situations (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
18. According to phenomenon of mutual inductance not the correct explanation of the assertion.
the mutual inductance does not depend on the (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(a) geometry of the two coils involved (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(b) the mutual inductance depends on the intrinsic 22. Assertion: Eddy current is produced in any metallic
magnetic property, like relative permeability of the conductor when magnetic flux is changed around it.
material Reason: Electric potential determines the flow of
(c) the mutual inductance is independent of the charge.
magnetic property of the material (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
(d) ratio of magnetic flux produced by the coil 1 at reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
the place of the coil 2 and the current in the coil 2 (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
will be different from that of the ratio defined by not the correct explanation of the assertion.
interchanging the coils (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
19. A metal rod moves at a constant velocity in a (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
direction perpendicular to its length. A constant 23. Assertion: Faraday’s laws are consequences of
uniform magnetic field exists in space in a direction conservation of energy.
perpendicular to the rod as well as its velocity. Select Reason: Faraday’s laws involve conservation of
the correct statement (s) from the following? mechanical energy into electrical energy.
(a) The entire rod is at the same electric potential (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
(b) There is an electric field in the rod reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) The electric potential is highest at the centre of the (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
rod and decrease towards its ends not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(d) The electric potential is lowest at the centre of the (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
rod and increases towards its ends. (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
20. A conducting rod of length 2l is rotating with 24. Assertion: Magnetic flux can produce induced emf.
constant angular speed ω about its perpendicular Reason: Faraday established induced emf
 theoretically.
bisector. A uniform magnetic field B exists parallel (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
to the axis of rotation. The e.m.f. induced between reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
two ends of the rod is (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
25. Assertion: The induced emf in a conducting loop of
wire will be non-zero when it rotates in a uniform
magnetic field.
Reason: The emf is induced due to change in
2 1 magnetic flux.
(a) Bω (b) Bω 2
2
1 (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
(c) Bω 2 (d) Zero
8 reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
132 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is energy which is converted into electrical energy, in
not the correct explanation of the assertion. accordance with the law of conservation of energy.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. 29. Lenz’s law is in accordance with
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. (a) Conservation of mass
26. Assertion: An induced emf is generated when (b) Conservation of momentum
magnet is withdrawn from the solenoid. (c) Conservation of energy
Reason: The relative motion between magnet and (d) Conservation of charge
solenoid induces emf. 30. Energy for the charges to flow in the conducting coil
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the when a magnet is moved relative the coil comes from
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. (a) Work done by Magnetic field
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is (b) Work done by external source which is moving
not the correct explanation of the assertion. the magnet
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. (c) Push of the magnetic force on the electrons
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. (d) Work done by electric field created due to
27. Assertion: Acceleration of a magnet falling through magnetic flux change
a long solenoid decreases. 31. Negative sign in the Faraday’s flux rule indicates that
Reason: The induced current produced in a circuit (a) Emf induced tends to move only negative charges
always flow in such a direction that it opposes the (b) Emf is only induced when the flux decreases
change or the cause producing it. (c) Induced emf opposes change in the magnetic flux
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the (d) All of the above
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. 32. The magnitude of the emf induced in a conductor is
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is directly proportional to the (a) 1 Farad(b) 3 Farad
not the correct explanation of the assertion. (a) Change in current
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. (b) Change in motion
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. (c) Change in voltage
28. Assertion: Self-inductance is called the inertia of (d) Change in magnetic flux
electricity.
Reason: Self-inductance is the phenomenon, Case Study -2
according to which an opposing induced emf is The production of induced emf in a circuit, when the
produced in a coil as a result of change in current or current in the same circuit changes is called self
magnetic flux linked in the coil. induction(L). The self induction in a circuit mainly
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the depends upon its geometry. For a solenoid it is
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. determined by the number of turns, area of cross-
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is section and the length of the solenoid.The unit of self
not the correct explanation of the assertion. induction is also called henry (symbol H). The
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. coefficient of self induction of a coil is said to be 1
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. henry if induced emf equal to 1 volt is produced in
the coil, when the current in it changes at the rate of 1
Section-C (Case Study Questions) ampere per second.
Case Study-1 33. Self induction is property with which
(i) Lenz's law explains the ve sign in Faraday's flux (a) Emf is induced in a circuit, when current in a
dφ nearby circuit changes
rule ε = − B (b) Emf is induced in a circuit, when magnetic flux in
dt
a nearby circuit changes
It states that the induced emf is such as to oppose the
(c) Emf is induced in a circuit, when current in the
cause that produces it.
circuit changes
(ii) Lenz’s law is in accordance with the conservation
(d) Emf is induced by change in battery voltage in
of energy. As the induced emf opposes the cause the
circuit
produces it. Therefore mechanical work needs to be
done to continue the process. It is this mechanical
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 133

34. Unit of self induction is 37. Magnetic flux is a

(a) Henry (b) Tesla (a) Scalar quantity (b) Vector quantity
(c) Weber (d) Ampere (c) Tensor quantity (d) None of the above
35. Self induction depends on 38. Magnetic flux depends on the
(a) The circuit in which the solenoid is connected (a) Magnitude of the area through which flux is to be
(b) The resistance of the solenoid material calculated
(c) The geometry of the solenoid (b) Magnitude of the magnetic field through the area
(d) The mass of the solenoid (c) Orientation of magnetic field relative to the area
36. Which of these doesn’t affect the self induction of a (d) All of the above
solenoid 39. There is a uniform horizontal magnetic field B = 10
(a) Changing the length of the solenoid Tesla in a region. A square wireframe with side
(b) Changing the cross section area of the solenoid length 4m is kept at an angle of 30 degrees with
(c) Changing the number of turns of the solenoid horizontal in the region. Magnetic flux through the
(d) Changing the resistivity of the solenoid wireframe is:
(a) 160 Wb (b) 40 Wb
Case Study -3 3
Magnetic flux ( φ ) through a surface of area A, in a (c) 80 Wb (d) Wb
2
  
magnetic field B is defined as φ=
B B.A
= BA cos θ 40. Instead of a galvanometer, if a bulb is used then,
where ( θ ) is the angle between magnetic field and (a) Bulb will glow brighter as magnet is moved closer
to the coil only
Area vector (perpendicular to the area at a given (b) Bulb will glow dimmer as magnet is moved closer
point). SI unit of magnetic flux is Weber(Wb). If to the coil only
magnetic field has different values at various parts of (c) Bulb will glow as long as magnet keeps moving
a surface then the magnetic flux through the surface relative to the coil
is given by (d) Bulb will not glow at all
     
=φB B1 .dA1 + B2 .dA 2= + ... ∑ Bi .dA i
all

Faraday conducted experiments and found that emf is

generated in a coil when magnetic flux through the
coil changes with time. He stated his experimental
results in the form of a law which is known as
Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction. The law
is stated mathematically as
dφ
ε=− B
dt
Where ε is the emf generated and r.h.s. is the rate of
change of magnetic flux with time. Negative sign
indicates that the emf generated is always in such a
way that the magnetic field created due to the current
produced by the emf tries to oppose the change in
magnetic field. So if magnetic flux is increasing in a
coil due to increase in magnetic field then emf will be
created in the coil and the current due to that emf will
create a magnetic field opposite to the existing
magnetic field (which is increasing).
134 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. Two loops of different shapes are moved in a region
of uniform magnetic field in the directions marked by
arrows as shown in the figure. What is the direction
of the induced current in each loop?
(Foreign 2010)

5. A plot of magnetic flux (φ) versus current (I) is

shown in the figure for two inductors A and B. Which
of the two has larger value of self inductance?
(Delhi 2010)

2. In the given figure, a bar magnet is quickly moved

towards a conducting loop having a capacitor. Predict
the polarity of the plates A and B of the capacitor.
(AI 2010)

6. Two identical loops, one of copper and the other of

aluminium, are rotated with the same angular speed
in the same magnetic field. Compare (i) the induced
3. A rectangular loop, and a circular loop having the emf and (ii) the current produced in the two coils.
same area, are moved out of a uniform magnetic field Justify your answer. (AI 2010)
region, to a field free region, with a constant velocity 7. Two long co-axial solenoids of the same length but
 different radii and different number of turns are
v . Would the induced emf remain constant in the two
wound one over the other. Deduce the expression for
loops as they move out of the field region? Justify
the mutual inductance of this arrangement.
your answer.
(Foreign 2010)
(Delhi 2010)
8. (a) Describe briefly, with the help of a labelled
diagram, the basic elements of an A.C. generator.
State its underlying principle.
(b) Show diagrammatically how an alternating emf is
generated by a loop of wire rotating in a magnetic
4. State Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction. field. Write the expression for the instantaneous value
Figure shows a rectangular conductor P Q R S in of the emf induced in the rotating loop. (Delhi 2010)
which the conductor P Q is free to move in a uniform 9. Two bar magnets are quickly moved towards a
magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the metallic loop connected across a capacitor C’ as
paper. The field extends from x = 0 to x = b and is shown in the figure. Predict the polarity of the
zero for x > b. Assume that only the arm P Q capacitor. (AI 2011)
possesses resistance r. When the arm P Q is pulled
outward from x = 0 to x = 2 b and is then moved
backward to x = 0 with constant speed v, obtain the
expressions for the flux and the induced emf. Sketch 10. A current is induced in coil C1 due to the motion of
the variations of these quantities with distance current carrying coil C2 . (a) Write any two ways by
0 ≤ x ≤ 2b which a large deflection can be obtained in the
(AI 2010) galvanometer G. (b) Suggest an alternative device to
demonstrate the induced current in place of a
galvanometer. (Delhi 2011)
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 135

11. State Lenz's law. Using this law indicate the direction 18. Predict the direction of induced current in metal rings
of the current in a closed loop when a bar magnet 1 and 2 when current I in the wire is steadily
with north pole in brought close to it. Explain briefly decreasing? (Delhi 2012)
how the direction of the current predicted wrongly
results in the violation of the law of conservation of
energy (AI 2011)

19. A bar magnet is moved in the direction indicated by

the arrow between two coils P Q and CD. Predict the
directions of induced current in each coil. (AI 2012)

12. A rectangular loop and a circular loop are moving out

of a uniform magnetic field region with a constant

velocity v as shown in the figure. In which loop do
20. The closed loop (P Q R S) of wire is moved into a
you expect the induced emf to be constant during the
uniform magnetic field at right angles to the plane of
passage out of the field region? The field is normal to
the paper as shown in the figure. Predict the direction
the loops. (AI 2011)
of the induced current in the loop. (Foreign 2012)
21. A metallic rod of L length is rotated with angular
frequency of ω with one end hinged at the centre and
the other end at the circumference of a circular
metallic ring of radius L, about an axis passing
13. Current in a circuit falls steadily from 5.0 A to 0.0 A
through the centre and perpendicular to the plane of
in 100 ms. If an average e.m.f. of 200 V is induced,
the ring. A constant and uniform magnetic field B
calculate the self-inductance of the circuit.
parallel to the axis is present everywhere. Deduce the
(Foreign 2011)
expression for the emf between the centre and the
14. Two concentric circular coils C1 and C2 , radius r1
metallic ring. (Delhi 2012)
and r2 ( r1 << r2 ) respectively are kept co-axially. If 22. (i) Define mutual inductance between two long
current is passed through C2 , then, find an expression coaxial solenoids.
(ii) Find out the expression for the mutual inductance
for mutual inductance between the two coils.
of inner solenoid of length l having the radius r1 and
(AI 2011C)
15. What are eddy currents? Write any two applications the number of turns n1 per unit length due to the
of eddy currents. (AI 2011) second outer solenoid of same length and n 2 number
16 (a) Derive the expression for the mutual inductance
of turns per unit length. (Delhi 2012)
of two long coaxial solenoids of same length l having
23. Define self-inductance of a coil. Write its SI unit.
radii r1 and r2 ( r2 > r1 ) .
Derive the expression for self-inductance of a long
(b) Show that mutual inductance of solenoid 1 due to solenoid of cross-sectional area ' A ', length ' l having
solenoid 2, M12 , is the same as that of 2 due to 1 i.e., ' n ' turns per unit length. (AI 2012C)
M 21 . (Foreign 2011) 24. Draw a labelled diagram of an a.c. generator. Briefly
explain its principle and working. (AI 2012 C)
17. (a) State the working of a.c. generator with the help
25. (a) State the principle on which AC generator works.
of a labelled diagram.
Draw a labelled diagram and explain its working.
(b) The coil of an a.c. generator having N turns, each
(b) A conducting rod held horizontally along East-
of area A, is rotated with a constant angular velocity
West direction is dropped from rest from a certain
ω. Deduce the expression for the alternating e.m.f. height near the Earth's surface. Why should there be
generated in the coil. an induced emf across the ends of the rod?
(c) What is the source of energy generation in this Draw a plot showing the instantaneous variation of
device? (AI 2011) emf as a function of time from the instant it begins to
fall. (Foreign 2012)
136 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

26. On what factors does the magnitude of the emf negligible resistance, obtain the expression for the
induced in the circuit due to magnetic flux depend? power generated. (AI 2013)
(Foreign 2013) 32. How does the mutual inductance of a pair of coils
27. State Lenz's law. A metallic rod held horizontally change when
along east-west direction, is allowed to fall under (i) distance between the coils is increased and
gravity. Will there be an emf induced at its ends? (ii) number of turns in the coils is increased?
Justify your answer. (Delhi 2013) (AI 2013)
28. A wheel with 8 metallic spokes each 50 cm long is 33. Starting from the expression for the energy
rotated with a speed of 120rev / min in a plane 1
W = LI 2 , stored in a solenoid of self inductance L
normal to the horizontal component of the Earth's 2
magnetic field. The Earth's magnetic field at the place to build up the current I, obtain the expression for the
is 0.4G and the angle of dip is 60°. Calculate the magnetic energy in terms of the magnetic field B,
emf induced between the axle and the rim of the area A and length l of the solenoid having n number
wheel. How will the value of emf be affected if the of turns per unit length. Hence, show that the energy
number of spokes were increased? (AI 2013) density is given by B2 / 2µ 0 (Delhi 2013)
29. A metallic rod of length ' l is rotated with a frequency 34. (a) Define the term 'mutual inductance'. Deduce the
v with one end hinged at the centre and the other end expression for the mutual inductance of two long
at the circumference of a circular metallic ring of coaxial solenoids having different radii and different
radius r, about an axis passing through the centre and number of turns.
perpendicular to the plane of the ring. A constant (b) A coil is mechanically rotated with constant
uniform magnetic field B parallel to the axis is angular speed ω in a uniform magnetic field which is
present everywhere. Using Lorentz force, explain perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the coil. The
how emf is induced between the centre and the plane of the coil is initially held perpendicular to the
metallic ring and hence obtain the expression for it. field. Plot a graph showing variation of (i) magnetic
(AI 2017, Delhi 2013)
flux φ and (ii) the induced emf in the coil as a
30. A rectangular conductor LMNO is placed in a
uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T. The field is directed function of ωt . (Foreign 2013)
perpendicular to the plane of the conductor. When the 35. The electric current flowing in a wire in the direction
arm MN of length of 20 cm is moved towards left from B to A is decreasing. Find out the direction of
with a velocity of 10 m s −1 , calculate the emf induced the induced current in the metallic loop kept above
the wire as shown. (Delhi 2014)
in the arm. Given the resistance of the arm to be 5Ω
(assuming that other arms are of negligible
resistance) find the value of the current in the arm.
(AI 2013)
36. A flexible wire of irregular shape, abcd, as shown in
the figure, turns into a circular shape when placed in
a region of magnetic field which is directed normal to
the plane of the loop away from the reader. Predict
the direction of the induced current in the wire.
(Foreign 2014)
31. A metallic rod of length ' l is rotated with a uniform
angular speed ω, with one end hinged at the centre
and the other end at the circumference of a circular
metallic ring of radius R = l, about an axis passing
through the centre and perpendicular to the plane of
the ring. A constant and uniform magnetic field B
parallel to the axis is present everywhere. Deduce the 37. Describe a simple experiment (or activity) to show
expression for the emf induced in the rod. If r is the that the polarity of emf induced in a coil is always
resistance of the rod and the metallic ring has such that it tends to produce a current which opposes
the change of magnetic flux that produces it.
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 137

(Delhi 2014) 46. Give one example of use of eddy currents.

38. Define the term 'mutual inductance' between the two (Foreign 2014)
coils. Obtain the expression for mutual inductance of 47. A metallic piece gets hot when surrounded by a coil
a pair of long coaxial solenoids each of length l and carrying high frequency alternating current. Why?
radii r1 and r2 ( r2 > r1 ) . Total number of turns in (Delhi 2014C)
48. Figure shows a current carrying solenoid moving
the two solenoids are N1 and N 2 respectively.
towards a conducting loop. Find the direction of the
(AI 2014) current induced in the loop. (Delhi 2015)
39. Define the term self-inductance of a solenoid. Obtain
the expression for the magnetic energy stored in an
inductor of self-inductance L to build up a current I
through it. (AI 2014)
40. The currents flowing in the two coils of self 49. State Lenz's law. Use it to predict the polarity of the
inductance L1 = 16mH and L 2 = 12mH are capacitor in the situation given below: (AI 2015)
increasing at the same rate. If the power supplied to
the two coils are equal, find the ratio of (i) induced
voltages, (ii) the currents and (iii) the energies stored
in the two coils at a given instant. (Foreign 2014) 50. A jet plane is travelling towards west at a speed of
41. State Lenz's law. Give one example to illustrate this 1800 km / h.
law. "The Lenz's law is a consequence of the (i) Estimate voltage difference developed between the
principle of conservation of energy". Justify this ends of the wing having a span of 25 m if the earth's
statement. (AI 2014) magnetic field at the location has a magnitude of
42. The current flowing through an inductor of self 5 × 10−4 T and dip angle is 30°.
inductance L is continuously increasing. Plot a graph (ii) How will the voltage developed be affected if the
showing the variation of jet changes its direction from west to north?
(i) Magnetic flux versus the current (AI 2015)
(ii) Induced emf versus dI/dt 51. A square loop of side 20 cm is initially kept 30 cm
(iii) Magnetic potential energy stored versus the away from a region of uniform magnetic field of 0.1
current. (Delhi 2014) T as shown in the figure. It is then moved towards the
43. Deduce an expression for the mutual inductance of right with a velocity of 10 cm s −1 till it goes out of the
two long coaxial solenoids but having different radii
field. Plot a graph showing the variation of
and different number of turns. (AI 2014)
(i) magnetic flux (φ) through the loop with time (t).
44. (a) Draw a schematic sketch of an ac generator
describing its basic elements. State briefly its (ii) induced emf (ε) in the loop with time t.
working principle. Show a plot of variation of (iii) induced current in the loop if it has resistance of
(i) Magnetic flux and 0.1Ω.
(ii) Alternating emf versus time generated by a loop (AI 2015)
of wire rotating in a magnetic field.
(b) Why is choke coil needed in the use of fluorescent
tubes with ac mains? (Delhi 2014)
45. (a) Draw a labelled diagram of a.c. generator and
state its working principle.
(b) How is magnetic flux linked with the armature 52. Define the term 'self-inductance' of a coil. Write its
coil changed in a generator? S.I. unit.
(c) Derive the expression for maximum value of the (AI 2015)
induced emf and state the rule that gives the direction
of the induced emf.
(d) Show the variation of the emf generated versus
time as the armature is rotated with respect to the
direction of the magnetic field. (Delhi 2014)
138 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

53. (a) Define mutual inductance and write its S.I. units. (Delhi 2017)
(b) Derive an expression for the mutual inductance of
two long co-axial solenoids of same length wound
one over the other.
(c) In an experiment, two coils C1 and C 2 are placed
close to each other. Find out the expression for emf 61. A bar magnet is moved in the direction indicated by
induced in the coil C1 due to a change in the current the arrow between two coils P Q and C D. Predict the
through the coil C 2 direction of the induced current in each coil.
(Delhi 2017)
(Delhi 2015)
54. Define mutual inductance of a pair of coils and write
on which factors does it depend.
(AI 2015)
62. What is the direction of induced currents in metal
55. What are eddy currents? How are they produced?
rings 1 and 2 when current I in the wire is increasing
Describe briefly three main useful applications of
steadily?
eddy currents.
(AI 2017)
(Foreign 2015)
63. A horizontal conducting rod 10 m long extending
56. (i) Define mutual inductance. −1
(ii) A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance from east to west is falling with a speed 5.0 m s at
of 1.5 H. If the current in one coil changes from 0 to right angles to the horizontal component of the
20 A in 0.5 s, what is the change of flux linkage with Earth's magnetic field, 0.3 × 10−4 Wb m −2 . Find the
the other coil? instantaneous value of the emf induced in the rod.
(Delhi 2016) (AI 2017)
57. (a) Explain the meaning of the term mutual 64. (a) Define the term 'self-inductance' and write its S.I.
inductance. Consider two concentric circular coils, unit.
one of radius r1 and the other of radius r2 ( r1 < r2 ) (b) Obtain the expression for the mutual inductance
of two long co-axial solenoids S1 and S2 wound one
placed coaxially with centres coinciding with each
other. Obtain the expression for the mutual over the other, each of length L and radii r1 and r2 and
inductance of the arrangement. n1 and n 2 number of turns per unit length, when a
(b) A rectangular coil of area A, having number of
turns N is rotated at ‘f’ revolutions per second in a current I is set up in the outer solenoid S2 .
uniform magnetic field B, the field being (Delhi 2017)
perpendicular to the coil. Prove that the maximum 65. Define mutual inductance between a pair of coils.
emf induced in the coil is 2πfNBA. Derive an expression for the mutual inductance of
(AI 2016) two long coaxial solenoids of same length wound one
58. (i) Define self-inductance. Write its SI unit. over the other.
(ii) A long solenoid with 15 turns per cm has a small (AI 2017)
66. Define self-inductance of a coil. Obtain the
loop of area 2.0 cm 2 placed inside the solenoid
expression for the energy stored in an inductor L
normal to its axis. If the current carried by the
connected across a source of emf.
solenoid changes steadily from 2.0 to 4.0 A in 0.1 s,
(AI 2017)
what is the induced emf in the loop while the current
is changing?
(Foreign 2016)
59. A long straight current carrying wire passes normally
through the centre of circular loop. If the current
through the wire increases, will there be an induced
emf in the loop? Justify.
(Delhi 2017)
60. Predict the polarity of the capacitor in the situation
described below:
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 139

67. (a) Draw a labelled diagram of ac generator. Derive an alternating emf is generated by a loop of wire
the expression for the instantaneous value of the emf rotating in a magnetic field.
induced in the coil. (b) A circular coil of radius 10 cm and 20 turns is
(b) A circular coil of cross-sectional area 200 cm 2 and rotated about its vertical diameter with angular speed
20 turns is rotated about the vertical diameter with of 50rads −1 in a uniform horizontal magnetic field of
angular speed of 50rads −1 in a uniform magnetic 3.0 × 10−2 T.
field of magnitude 3.0 × 10−2 T. Calculate the (i) Calculate the maximum and average emf induced
maximum value of the current in the coil. in the coil.
(Delhi 2017) (ii) If the coil forms a closed loop of resistance 10Ω,
68. Draw a labelled diagram of an ac generator. Obtain calculate the maximum current in the coil and the
the expression for the emf induced in the rotating coil average power loss due to Joule heating.
for N turns each of cross sectional area A, in the (AI 2019)

presence of a magnetic field B. 73. State Lenz's law
(AI 2017) 74. A rectangular loop P Q M N with movable arm P Q
69. An aeroplane is flying horizontally from west to east of length 10 cm and resistance 2Ω is placed in a
with a velocity of 900km/ hour. Calculate the uniform magnetic field of 0.1 T acting perpendicular
potential difference developed between the ends of its to the plane of the loop as is shown in the figure. The
wings having a span of 20 m. The horizontal resistances of the arms MN, NP and M Q are
negligible. Calculate the (i) emf induced in the arm P
component of the Earth's magnetic field is 5 × 10−4 T
Q and (ii) current induced in the loop when arm PQ is
and the angle of dip is 30° . moved with velocity 20 m/s.
(2018)
70. State the principle of an ac generator and explain its
working with the help of a labelled diagram. Obtain 75. A metallic rod of length l and resistance R is rotated
the expression for the emf induced in a coil having N with a frequency v, with one end hinged at the centre
turns each of cross sectional area A, rotating with a and the other end at the circumference of a circular

constant angular speed ' ω ' in a magnetic field B, metallic ring of radius l, about an axis passing
directed perpendicular to the axis of rotation. through the centre and perpendicular to the plane of
(2018) the ring. A constant and uniform magnetic field B
71. The figure shows a rectangular conducting frame parallel to the axis is present everywhere.
MNOP of resistance R placed partly in a (a) Derive the expression for the induced emf and the
 current in the rod.
perpendicular magnetic field B and moved with
 (b) Due to the presence of the current in the rod and
velocity v as shown in the figure. Obtain the
of the magnetic field, find the expression for the
expression for the magnitude and direction of the force acting on this
rod.
(c) Hence obtain the expression for the power
required to rotate the rod.

(a) force acting on the arm 'ON' and its direction.

(b) power required to move the frame to get a steady
emf induced between the arms M N and P O.
(AI 2019)
72. (a) Draw a schematic diagram for an ac generator.
Explain its working and obtain the expression for the
instantaneous value of the emf in terms of the
magnetic field B, number of turns N of the coil of
area A rotating with angular frequency ω. Show how
140 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

Notes:

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
 07
ALTERNATING CURRENT &
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
142 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

Chapter at a Glance
1. An alternating voltage υ = υm sin ωt applied to a 7. An interesting characteristic of a series RLC circuit
resistor R drives a current i = im sin ωt in the is the phenomenon of resonance. The circuit
υ exhibits resonance, i.e., the amplitude of the current
resistor, i m = m . The current is in phase with the is maximum at the resonant frequency,
R
applied voltage. 1
ω0 = . The quality factor Q defined by
2. For an alternating current i = im sin ωt passing LC
through a resistor R, the average power loss P ω0 L 1
(averaged over a cycle) due to joule heating is =Q = is an indicator of the sharpness
R ω0 CR
1
(i m ) 2 R . To express it in the same form as the dc of the resonance, the higher value of Q indicating
2
sharper peak in the current.
power (P = I2R), a special value of current is used.
8. A circuit containing an inductor L and a capacitor
It is called root mean square (rms) current and is
C (initially charged) with no ac source and no
denoted by I:
resistors exhibits free oscillations. The charge q of
im the capacitor satisfies the equation of simple
= I = 0.707i m
2 harmonic motion:
Similarly, the rms voltage is defined by d2q 1
υm 2
+ q= 0
=V = 0.707 υm dt LC
2 and therefore, the frequency ω of free oscillation is
We have P = IV = I2 R 1
3. An ac voltage υ = υm sin ωt applied to a pure ω0 = . The energy in the system oscillates
LC
inductor L, drives a current in the inductor i = im sin
between the capacitor and the inductor but their
(ωt – π/2), where im = υm/XL. XL = ωL is called
sum or the total energy is constant in time.
inductive reactance. The current in the inductor
9. A transformer consists of an iron core on which are
lags the voltage by π/2. The average power
bound a primary coil of Np turns and a secondary
supplied to an inductor over one complete cycle is
coil of Ns turns. If the primary coil is connected to
zero.
an ac source, the primary and secondary voltages
4. An ac voltage υ = υm sin ωt applied to a capacitor
and the currents are related by
drives a current in the capacitor: i = im sin (ωt +
π/2). Here, N   Np 
Vs =  s  Vp and Is   Ip
 Np 
= im =
υm
, XC
1
is called capacitive reactance.    Ns 
XC ωC
The current through the capacitor is π/2 ahead of
the applied voltage. As in the case of inductor, the
average power supplied to a capacitor over one
complete cycle is zero.
5. For a series RLC circuit driven by voltage υ = υm
sin ωt, the current is given by i = im sin (ωt + φ)
υm
where i m = If the secondary coil has a greater number of turns
R + (X L ) 2 .
2
than the primary, the voltage is stepped-up (Vs >
Xc − X L Vp). This type of arrangement is called a step- up
and φ = tan −1 transformer. If the secondary coil has turns less
R
than the primary, we have a step-down transformer.
2
Z= R 2 + ( X c − X L ) is called the impedance of 10. When a value is given for ac voltage or current, it
the circuit. is ordinarily the rms value. The voltage across the
6. In a purely inductive or capacitive circuit, cosφ = 0 terminals of an outlet in your room is normally 240
and no power is dissipated even though a current is V. This refers to the rms value of the voltage. The
flowing in the circuit. In such cases, current is amplitude of this voltage is
referred to as a wattless current. υm = 2= 2(240)= 340V
ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 143

11. The power rating of an element used in ac circuits ● Infrared waves were discovered by Herschell. These
refers to its average power rating. are the electromagnetic waves of frequency range 3
12. The power consumed in an ac circuit is never × 1011 Hz to 4 × 1014 Hz. Infrared waves are
negative. sometimes called heat waves. Infrared waves are
13. In an ac circuit, while adding voltages across produced by hot bodies and molecules. These waves
different elements, one should take care of their are not detected by the human eye but snakes can
phases properly. For example, if VR and VC are detect them.
voltages across R and C, respectively in an RC
● It is the narrow region of the electromagnetic
circuit, then the total voltage across RC
spectrum, which is detected by the human eye. Its
combination is V
=RC VR2 + VC2 and not VR + VC frequency ranges from 4×1014 Hz to 8×1014 Hz. It is
since Vc is π/2 out of phase of VR. produced due to atomic excitation.
14. In a RLC circuit, resonance phenomenon occur ● The ultraviolet rays were discovered by Ritter in
1 1801. The frequency range of ultraviolet rays is 8 ×
when XL = XC or ω0 = . For resonance to
LC 1014 Hz to 5 × 1016 Hz. The ultraviolet rays are
occur, the presence of both L and C elements in the produced by sun, special lamps and very hot bodies.
circuit is a must. With only one of these (L or C) ● The X–rays were discovered by German Physicist
elements, there is no possibility of voltage W. Roentgen. Their frequency range is 1016 Hz to 3
cancellation and hence, no resonance is possible. × 1021 Hz. These are produced when high energy
electrons are stopped suddenly on a metal of high
atomic number. X–rays have high penetrating
power.
● γ–rays are the electromagnetic waves of frequency
range 3 × 1018 Hz to 5 × 1022 Hz. γ–rays have nuclear
origin. These rays are highly energetic and are
produced by the nucleus of the radioactive
substances.
17. Intensity of an electromagnetic wave at a point is
15. The power factor in a RLC circuit is a measure of defined as the energy crossing per second per unit
how close the circuit is to expending the maximum area normally around that point during the
power. propagation of electromagnetic waves.
16. Displacement current is that current which comes 1 B02 1 2
into play in the region in which the electric field and =I = c B rms c
2 µ0 µ0
the electric flux is changing with time.
dϕ
I D =∈0 = E
dt
Maxwell modified Ampere’s circuital law in order
to make the same logically consistent.
   dϕE 
∫ B ⋅ d  = µ0 ( I + I0 ) = µ0  I + ε0 dt 
17. The orderly distribution of electromagnetic
radiations according to their wavelength or
frequency is called the electromagnetic spectrum.
● Radio waves are the electromagnetic wave of
frequency range from 5 × 105 Hz to 109 Hz. These
waves are produced by oscillating electric circuits
having an inductor and capacitor.
● Microwaves are the electromagnetic waves of
frequency range 1 GHz to 300 GHz. They are
produced by special vacuum tubes. namely;
klystrons, magnetrons and Gunn diodes etc.
144 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

Solved Examples
Example-1 c
λ=
Why is the use of a.c. voltage preferred over d.c. v
voltage? Give two reasons.
3 × 108
Sol. A.C. voltage is preferred over D.C. voltage because of = = 10m
following reasons : 30 × 106
1. it can be stepped-up or stepped-down by a
transformer. Example - 5
2. carrying losses are much less. The circuit arrangement as shown in the diagram
shows that when an a.c. passes through the coil A, the
Example - 2 current starts flowing in the coil B.
Explain briefly how electromagnetic waves are
produced by an oscillating charge. How is the
frequency of EM waves produced related to that of the
oscillating charge?
Sol. An oscillating or accelerated charge is supposed to be
source of an electromagnetic wave. An oscillating
charge produces an oscillating electric field in space
which further produces an oscillating magnetic field
which in turn is a source of electric field. These (i) State the underlying principle involved.
oscillating electric and magnetic field, hence, keep on (ii) Mention two factors on which the current produced
regenerating each other and an electromagnetic wave in the coil B depends.
is produced The frequency of EM wave = Frequency Sol. (i) It is based on the principle of “mutual induction”.
of oscillating charge. (ii) Two factors are :
● distance between the coils.
Example - 3 ● orientation of the coils.
What physical quantity is the same for X-rays of ● Number of turns in the coil, (any two)
wavelength 10-10 m, the red light of wavelength 6800
Å and radio waves of wavelength 500 m? Example - 6
(NCERT) The amplitude of the magnetic field part of a harmonic
Sol. The speed of light (3 × 10 m/s) in a vacuum is the
8
electromagnetic wave in vacuum is B0 = 510 nT. What
same for all wavelengths. It is independent of the is the amplitude of the electric field part of the wave?
wavelength in the vacuum. (NCERT)
Sol. Amplitude of magnetic field of an electromagnetic
Example - 4 wave in a vacuum,
A plane electromagnetic wave travels in vacuum along B0 = 510 nT = 510 × 10-9 T
the z-direction. What can you say about the directions Speed of light in vacuum, c = 3 × 108 m/s
of its electric and magnetic field vectors? If the
frequency of the wave is 30 MHz, what is its Example - 7
wavelength? State the underlying principle of a transformer. How is
(NCERT) the large-scale transmission of electric energy over
Sol. The electromagnetic wave travels in a vacuum along long distances done with the use of transformers?
the z-direction. The electric field (E) and the magnetic Sol. Principle of transformer A transformer is based on the
field (H) are in the x-y plane. They are mutually principle of mutual induction, i.e. whenever the
perpendicular. amount of magnetic flux linked with a coil changes, an
Frequency of the wave, v = 30 MHz = 30 × 106 s-1 emf is induced in the neighboring coil.
Speed of light in vacuum, C = 3 × 108 m/s Power transmission Electric power is transmitted over
Wavelength of a wave is given as: long distances at high voltage. So, step-up
transformers are used at power stations to increase the
 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 145

voltage of power whereas a series of step-down V = 220 V

transformers are used to decrease the voltage up to 220 Frequency (f) = 50 Hz
V. (a) We know
V
I rms = rms
Example - 8 R
What is the function of a step-up transformer? 220
Sol. Step-up transformer converts low alternating voltage Substituting the values I=
rms = 2.20A
100
into high alternating voltage and high alternating
(b) Power = V.I
current into low alternating current. The secondary coil
Or Power = 220 × 2.2
of step-up transformer has a greater number of turns
Or Power = 484 W
that the primary (NS> NP).
Example - 12
Example - 9
(a) The peak voltage of an ac supply is 300 V. What
Mention various energy losses in a transformer.
is the rms voltage?
Sol. Energy losses in transformer
(b) The rms value of current in an ac circuit is 10 A.
(i) Eddy Current loss: Eddy current in the iron core of
What is the peak current. (NCERT)
the transformer facilitates the loss of energy in the
Sol. (a) Peak voltage of the ac supply, V0 = 300 V
form of heat.
V0 300
(ii) Flux leakage: Total fluxes linked with primary do We know Vrms = = = 212.1V
not completely pass though the secondary which 2 2
denotes the loss in the flux. (b) The rams value of current is given as I = 10 A
(iii) Copper loss: Due to heating, energy loss takes Using above identify for current peak current is given
place in copper wires of primary and secondary coils. as:
(iv) Hysteresis loss: The energy loss takes place in I0 = 1.414 × Irms
magnetizing and demagnetising the iron core over Or I0 = 1.414 × 10 = 14.14 A
every cycle.
(v) Humming loss: The magnetostriction effect leads Example - 13
to a set core in vibration which in turn produces the A 44 mH inductor is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz ac
sound. The loss is referred to as humming loss. supply. Determine the rms value of the current in the
circuit. (NCERT)
Example - 10 Sol. Given :
The instantaneous current and voltage of an a.c. L = 44 mH = 44 × 10-3 HV = 220 V
circuits are given by i = 10 sin 300 t A and V = 200 sin Frequency(f) = 50 Hz
300 t V. What is the power dissipation in the circuit? Angular frequency, ω = 2πƒ
Sol. P I rms Vrms cos φ
= Inductive reactance, XL = ωL = 2πƒL
cos φ =1  φ =0 o V
Irms is given by =
XL
I0 V0 1
P= × = I0 V0 Determining inductive reactance
2 2 2
XL = 2 × 3.14 × 50 × 44 × 10-3 Ω
1
∴P = × 10 × 200 = 1, 000W XL = 13.82 ohms
2 Therefore
220
Example - 11 Irms = 220 /13.82
13.82
A 100 Ω resistor is connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz ac
Or Irms = 15.92 A
supply.
(a) What is the rms value of current in the circuit?
(b) What is the net power consumed over a full cycle?
(NCERT)
Sol. Given:
R = 100 ohms
 146 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

Example - 14
A 60 µF capacitor is connected to a 110 V, 60 Hz ac Example - 17
supply. Determine the rms value of the current in the A series LCR circuit with R = 20 Ω, L = 1.5 H and C
circuit. (NCERT) = 35 µF is connected to a variable-frequency 200 V
Sol. Given: ac supply. When the frequency of the supply equals
C = 60 microfarads the natural frequency of the circuit, what is the
V = 110 volts average power transferred to the circuit in one
V complete cycle? (NCERT)
Frequency(f) = 60 Hz Irms =
Xc Sol. Given:
1 R = 20Ω
Now, X c = L = 1.5 H
(2 × 3.14 × 60 × 60 × 10?( −6) )
C = 35 µF = 30 × 10-6F
Xc = 44.284 ohms
V = 200 volts
110 Impedance of the circuit is given by the relation,
Hence, Irms = = 2.488A
44.284 2
Z= R 2 + ( X L − XC )
Example - 15 At resonance,
Obtain the resonant frequency ωr of a series LCR XL = XC
circuit with L = 2.0H, C = 32 µF and R = 10 Ω. What Z = R = 20Ω
is the Q-value of this circuit? (NCERT) V 200
So =I = = 10A Thus,
Sol. L = 2H Z 20
C = 32 µF = 32 × 10-6 F The average power transferred t the circuit in one
R = 10Ω complete cycle.
Resonant frequency P = I2R
1 1 Or P = 10 × 10 × 20 = 2000 W
= ωr = = −3
125rad / s
2 × 32 × 10−6 8 × 10
Now Q – value = ωL/R Example - 18
Figure shows a series LCR circuit connected to a
1 L
Q= variable frequency 230 V source. L = 5.0 H, C =
R C
80µF, R = 40 Ω.
1 2
=
10 32 × 10−6
1
= = 25
10 × 4 × 10−3
Hence, the Q – value is = 25

Example - 16
A charged 30 µF capacitor is connected to a 27 mH
(a) Determine the source frequency which drives the
inductor. What is the angular frequency of free
circuit in resonance.
oscillations of the circuit? (NCERT)
(b) Obtain the impedance of the circuit and the
Sol. Given:
amplitude of current at the resonating frequency.
C = 30 µF = 30 × 10-6 F
(c) Determine the rms potential drops across the three
L = 27 mH 27 × 10-3 elements of the circuit. Show that the potential drop
1 across the LC combination is zero at the resonating
Angular frequency of free oscillations ωr =
LC frequency.
1 (NCERT)
Sol. Given:
27 × 10 × 30 × 10−6
−3
V = 230 V
1
= =−4
1.11× 103 rad / s L=5H
9 × 10 C = 80 µF
ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 147

R = 40 Ω 4000 × 230
=n2 = 400
(a) Source frequency at resonance 2300
1 1 Hence, there are 400 turns in the second winding.
= = = 50 rad/s
LC 5 × 80 × 10−6
(b) At resonance, Example – 20
Impedance, Z = Resistance, R An ideal inductor when connected in a.c. circuit does
So Z = R = 40 ohms not produce heating effect though it reduces the
Now rms value of current, current in the circuit. Explain why ?
v Sol. An ideal inductor is a coil having some inductance
I= (L) but no ohmic resistance R. Amount of heat
z 2
produced in time t = I Rt. As R = 0, therefore, heat
230
Or I = produced = 0. However, the inductor offers inductive
40
reactance XL = ω L = 2 π v L to the a.c. Therefore,
Hence I = 5.75 A
Amplitude of this value of current = 1.414 × I the current is reduced.
= 1.414 × 5.75
Example - 21
= 8.13 A
A parallel plate capacitor made of circular plates
(c) Now taking into consideration the rms potential drops
each of radius 10.0 cm has a capacitance 200 pE.
Across Resistance,
The capacitor is connected to a 200 V a.c. supply
VR = IR = 5.75 × 40 –1
with an angular frequency of 200 rad s .
= 230 V
(a) What is the r.m.s. value of the conduction current?
Across Capacitance,
(b) Is the conduction current equal to displacement
VC = IXC
current?
= 1437.5 V
(c) Peak value of displacement current.
Across Inductance,
Sol. Here, R = 10 cm = 0.1 m;
VL = IXL –12 –10
= 5.75 × 50 × 5 C = 200 pF = 200 × 10 F = 2 × 10 F;
–1 –2
= 1437.5 V Erms = 200 V; ω = 200 rad s ; r = 2.0 × 10 m.
Across LC combination E rms –10
(a) I rms = = ω C E rms = 200 × (2 × 10 ) × 200 = 8
VLC = I(XL - XC) At resonance, 1 / ωC
X L = XC –6
× 10 A = 8 µA
So, VLC = 0 (b) Yes, because ID = I
Hence shown, that potential drop across LC
2 × 8 × 10−6 = 11.312 × 10 A
–6
(c) I0= 2 I rms=
combination is zero at resonanting frequency

Example - 19
A power transmission line feeds input power at 2300 Example - 22
V to a step- down transformer with its primary Figure (a), (b), (c) show three alternating circuits
windings having 4000 turns. What should be the with equal currents. If frequency of alt. emf be
number of turns in the secondary in order to get increased, what will be the effect on currents in the
output power at 230 V? three cases? Explain.
(NCERT)
Sol. Input voltage, V1 = 2300
Number of turns in primary coil, n1 = 4000
Output voltage V2 = 230 V
Number of turns in secondary coil = n2 Voltage is
V n
related to the number of turns as: 1 = 1
V2 n 2
2300 4000
=
230 n2
148 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

Example - 24
Give difference between displacement current and
conduction current.
Sol. Conduction current is due to flow of electrons in the
circuit. It exists even if the flow of electrons is at
uniform rate.
Displacement current is due to time varying electric
Sol. field. It does not exist under steady condition.
(i) in circuit (a), there will be no effect on the current
flowing. This is because, R is not affected by Example - 25
frequency. Suppose that the electric field part of an
(ii) In circuit (b), current will decrease as inductive electromagnetic wave in vacuum is
reactance XL = ω L = 2 π v L will increases with 8
E = 3.1 N/C cos [(1.8 rad/m)y + (5.4 × 10 rad/s) t]
increasing frequency. (a) What is the direction of motion ?
(iii) In circuit (c), current will increase as capacitative (b) What is the wavelength λ ?
reactance will decrease on increasing the frequency. (c) What is the frequency v ?
(d) What is the amplitude of the magnetic field part
Example - 23 of the wave ?
Why is the core of a transformer made of a (e) Write an expression for the magnetic field part of
magnetic material of high permeability ? the wave.
Sol. When permeability of magnetic material of Sol.
transformer core is high, almost whole of magnetic (a) From the given equation, it is clear that the direction
flux will be linked with the core. Therefore, magnetic of motion of e.m. wave is along negative y direction
flux linked with the secondary coil will almost be i.e. along − ĵ .
equal to the amount of magnetic flux linked with the
(b) Comparing the given equation with the equation E =
primary coil. Therefore, energy loss due to leakage of
E0 cos (ky + ωt), we have
magnetic flux will be reduced considerably.
8
k = 1.8 rad/m; ω = 5.4 × 10 rad/s;
E0 = 3.1 N/C
2π 2 × ( 22 / 7 )
=
λ = = 3.492m ≈ 3.5 m.
k 1.8
ω 5.4 × 108
(c) v= = = 85.9 × 106 ≈ 86 MHz.
2π 2 × ( 22 / 7 )
E 3.1
(d) B0 =0 = 8 = 1.03 × 10−8 T ≈ 10.3nT.
c 3 × 10
(e) B = B0 cos (ky + ωt) = (10.3 nT) cos
8
[(1.8 rad/m) y + (5.4 × 10 rad/s) t]
ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 149

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Question

Section – A (1 Mark Questions) 10. If a LC circuit is considered analogous to a
harmonically oscillating spring block system, which
1. Define the term rms value of the current. energy of the LC circuit would be analogous to
2. Define the term wattles current. potential energy and which one analogous to kinetic
3. Power factor of an a.c. circuit is 0.5. What will be the energy?
phase difference between voltage and current in the
circuit? Section – C (3 Marks Questions)
4. State the reason why microwaves are best suited for
11. (a) At a very high frequency of AC the capacitor
long distance transmission of signal.
behaves as a perfect conductor. Explain.
5. Why is it not possible to have electrolysis by A.C?
(b) At an airport, a person is made to walk through
the doorway of a metal detector, for security reasons.
Section – B (2 Marks Questions) If she/he is carrying anything made of metal, the
6. Two identical loops, one of copper and another of metal detector emits a sound. On what principle does
aluminum are rotated with the same speed in the same this detector work?
magnetic field. In which case, the induced: 12. A 15.0 µF capacitor is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz
(a) emf. source. Find the capacitive reactance and the rms
(b) current will be more current.
and why? 13. A series LCR circuit with R = 20Ω , L = 1.5 H and C
7. Name the EM waves used for studying crystal = 35µF is connected to a variable-frequency 200 V ac
structure of solids. What is its frequency range? supply. When the frequency of the supply equals the
natural frequency of the circuit, what is the average
8. The figure given shows an arrangement by which power transferred to the circuit in one complete
current flows through the bulb (X) connected with coil cycle?
B, when a.c. is passed through coil A. 14. A transformer has 600 turns of the primary winding
and 20 turns of the secondary winding. Determine the
secondary voltage if the secondary circuit is open and
the primary voltage is 140 V.
15. State the principle of working of a transformer. Can a
transformer be used to step up or step down a d.c.
voltage? Justify your Answer.
16. An inductor of unknown value, a capacitor of 100 μF
and a resistor of 10 Ω are connected in series to a 200
(i) Name the phenomenon involved. V. 50 Hz a.c. source. It is found that the power factor
(ii) If a copper sheet is inserted in the gap between the of the circuit is unity. Calculate the inductance of the
coils, explain how the brightness of the bulb would inductor and the current amplitude.
change. 17. When an ac source is connected across a capacitor,
9. Calculate the rms value of the alternating current current Starts flowing through the circuit. Show how
represented in this figure. Ampere's circuital law is generalized to explain the
flow of current through the capacitor. Hence obtain
the expression for the displacement current inside the
capacitor.
150 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

18. (a) An em wave is traveling in a medium with a Section – D (4 Marks Questions)


velocity v = viˆ . Draw a sketch showing the
23. Show that in the free oscillations of an LC circuit, the
propagation of the em wave, indicating the direction
sum of energies stored in the capacitor and the
of the oscillating electric and magnetic fields.
inductor is constant in time.
(b) How are the magnitudes of the electric and
magnetic fields related to the velocity of the em
wave?
Section – E (5 Marks Questions)
19. Explain with the help of a labeled diagram, the 24. A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 283 V and
principle construction and working of a transformer? frequency 50 Hz is applied to a series LCR circuit in
20. The primary coil of an ideal step up transformer has which R = 3 W, L = 25.48 mH, and C = 796 μF. Find
100 turns and the transformation ratio is also 100. (a) the impedance of the circuit; (b) the phase
The input voltage and the power are 220 V and 1100 difference between the voltage across the source and
W respectively. Calculate. the current; (c) the power dissipated in the circuit;
(i) Number of turns in the secondary and (d) the power factor.
(ii) The current in the primary
(iii) Voltage across the secondary 25. Answer the following :
21. The oscillating magnetic field in a plane (a) Name the em waves which are suitable for radar
electromagnetic wave is given by systems used in aircraft navigation. Write the range
By = (8 × 10-6) sin [2× 10-11 t + 300 π ]T of frequency of these waves.
(i) Calculate the wavelength of the electo-magnetic (b) If the Earth did not have an atmosphere, would its
wave. average surface temperature be higher or lower than
(ii) Write down the expression for the oscillating what it is now? Explain.
electric field. (c) An em wave exerts pressure on the surface on
which it is incident. Justify.Answer:
 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 151

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section – A (Single Choice Questions)
1. An ac voltage is represented by
=E 220 2 cos(50π)t
How many times will the current become zero, is 1 s
?
(a) 50 times (b) 100 times
(c) 30 times (d) 25 times
2. The peak value of AC voltage on 220 V mains i
(a) 240 2V (b) 230 2V
8. An alternating current of rms value 10 A is passed
(c) 220 2V (d) 200 2V
through a 12 Ω resistor. The maximum potential
3. A generator produces a voltage that is given by V = difference across the resistor is
240 sin (120 t) volt, where t is in second. The (a) 20 V (b) 90 V
frequency and r.m.s. voltage are: (c) 169.68 V (d) None of these
(a) 60 Hz. and 240 volt (b) 19 Hz and 120 volt 9. In a series AC circuit, the AC voltage across
(c) 19 Hz and 170 volt (d) 754 Hz and 170 volt resistance R, inductor L and capacitor C are 5 V, 10
4. Alternating current cannot be measured by DC V and 10 V respectively. The AC voltage applied to
ammeter, because the circuit will be
(a) AC cannot pass through DC ammeter (a) 10 V (b) 25 V
(b) AC changes direction (c) 5 V (d) 20 V
(c) Average value of current for complete cycle is 10. Which of the following curves, figure correctly
zero represent the variation of capacitive reactance (XC)
(d) DC ammeter will get damaged
with frequency (f) ?
5. The instantaneous values of current and voltage in an
AC circuit are given by I = 6 sin(100 πt + π/4), V = 5
sin (100 πt – π/4), then
(a) current leads the voltage by 45°
(b) voltage leads the current by 90°
(c) current leads the voltage by 90°
(d) voltage leads the current by 45°
6. For high frequency, capacitor offers
(a) more resistance (b) less resistance
(c) zero resistance (d) None of these
7. The alternating current I in an inductance coil varies
with time according to graph given in figure

11. For high frequency, inductor offers

(a) more resistance (b) less resistance
(c) zero resistance (d) none of these
12. In an L-C-R series AC circuit, the voltage across each
of the components L C, and R is 50 V. The voltage
across the L-C combination will be
(a) 50 V (b) 50 2V
Which one of the following graphs, gives the (c) 100 V (d) zero
variation of voltage with time?
152 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

13. In an AC circuit, the current lags behind the voltage Section – B (Assertion & Reason Questions)
by π/3. The component(s) of the circuit is/are
(a) R and L (b) L and C 21. Assertion : Electromagnetic waves are transverse in
(c) R and C (d) only R nature.
14. An electric heater rated 220 V and 550 W is Reason : The electric and magnetic fields in
connected to AC mains. The current drawn by it is electromagnetic waves are perpendicular to each
(a) 0.8 A (b) 2.5 A other and the direction of propagation.
(c) 0.4 A (d) 1.25 A (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
15. Which of the following statements is false for the Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
properties of electromagnetic waves? (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(a) Both electric and magnetic field vectors attain the Reason is not the correct explanation of the
maxima and minima at the same place and same Assertion.
time. (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(b) The energy in an electromagnetic wave is divided (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
equally between electric and magnetic vectors. 22. Assertion: Quantity L/R possesses the dimension of
(c) Both electric and magnetic field vectors are current.
parallel to each other and perpendicular to the Reason: In order to reduce the rate of increase of
direction of propagation of the wave. current through a solenoid, we should increase the
(d) These waves do not require any material medium time constant.
for propagation. (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
16. The energy of X-ray photon is 3.3 × 10–16 J. Its Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
frequency is (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(a) 2 × 1019 Hz (b) 5 × 1018 Hz Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(c) 5 × 10 Hz
17
(d) 5 × 1016 Hz Assertion.
17. The oscillating electric and magnetic field vectors of (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
electromagnetic wave are oriented along (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
(a) the same direction and in phase 23. Assertion: It is beneficial to transmit power at high
(b) the same direction but have a phase difference of voltages.
90° Reason: High voltage implies low current.
(c) mutually perpendicular direction and are in phase (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(d) mutually perpendicular directions but has a phase Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
difference of 90° (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
18. Which of the following relation is correct Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(a) ∈0 E 0 =µ0 B0 (b) µ0 ∈0 E 0 =
B0 Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
E0
(c) = µ0 ∈0 B0 (d) µ0 E 0 = ∈0 B0 (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
19. An electromagnetic wave going through vacuum is 24. Assertion: Electromagnetic waves interact with
described by E = E0 sin (kx − ωt ) and B = B0 sin (kx matter and set up oscillations.
– ωt). Which of the following equations is true? Reason: Interaction is independent of the wavelength
(a) E0k = B0ω (b) E0ω = B0k of the electromagnetic wave.
(c) E0B0 = ωk (d) None of the above (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
20. The magnetic field in a traveling electromagnetic (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
wave has a peak value of 20 nT. The peak value of Reason is not the correct explanation of the
electric field strength is Assertion.
(a) 3 Vm-1 (b) 6 Vm-1 (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(c) 9 Vm-1 (d) 12 Vm-1 (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 153

25. Assertion: In series LCR- circuit, the resonance this potential difference, also called ac voltage, be
occurs at one frequency only. given =by v v m sin ωt where v m is the amplitude of
Reason: At resonance, the inductive reactance is the oscillating potential difference and ω is its
equal and opposite to the capacitive reactance angular frequency. To find the value of current
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the through the resistor, we apply Kirchhoff’s loop rule
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the ∑ ε(t) =
0 to get v m sin ωt =iR
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
26. Assertion: An electric motor will be maximum
efficient when back emf set up in the armature is half
the value of the applied battery emf.
Reason: Efficiency of electric motor is independent 29. What is the peak value of current through the circuit?
of magnitude of back emf. (a) vm/2R (b) vm/R
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the (c) v m 2R (d) 2v m / R
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
30. The average value of current in the circuit in one
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
complete cycle is
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
2Vm 2Vm
Assertion. (a) (b)
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. R πR
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. 2Vm
(c) 0 (d)
27. Assertion: Microwaves are better carriers of signals R
than optical waves. 31. The average value of current in the circuit in half
Reason: Microwaves move faster than optical waves. cycle is
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the i 2i
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. (a) m (b) m
2 π
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
2i m
Reason is not the correct explanation of the (c) 2i m (d)
Assertion. π
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. 32. In a resistive circuit by what value of phase angle
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. does alternating current lead the e.m.f.?
28. Assertion: Infrared radiation plays an important role (a) 45o (b) 90o
in maintaining the average temperature of earth. (c) 75o (d) 0o
Reason: Infrared radiations are sometimes referred to
as heat waves. Case Study – 2
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the When the capacitor is connected to an ac source, as a
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. Fig. It limits or regulates the current, but does not
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the completely prevent the flow of charge. The capacitor
Reason is not the correct explanation of the is alternately charged and discharged as the current
Assertion. reverses each half cycle. Let q be the charge on the
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. capacitor at any time. t. The instantaneous voltage v
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. q
across the capacitor is v = From the Kirchhoff’s
C
Section – C (Case Study Questions) loop rule, the voltage across the source and the
q
Case Study – 1 capacitor are equal, v m sin ωt = To find the
c
A resistor connected to a source of ac voltage. We
dq
consider a source which produces sinusoidally current, we use the relation i =
dt
varying potential differences across its terminals. Let
154 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

dq
i = (v m Csin ωt) =ωCv m cos(ωt)
dt
The electromagnetic spectrum consists of a span of
all electromagnetic radiation which further contains
many subranges which are commonly referred to as
portions. The entire range (electromagnetic spectrum)
is given by radio waves, microwaves, infrared
radiation, visible light, ultraviolet radiation, X-rays,
gamma rays and cosmic rays in the increasing order
of frequency and decreasing order of wavelength.

 π
Using the relation, cos(ω=
t) sin  ωt +  We have
 2
 π
=i i m sin  ωt + 
 2 37. The condition under which a microwave oven heats
33. What is the value of im ? up a food item containing water molecules most
V V efficiently in
(a) m (b) m
C ωC (a) the frequency of the microwave must match the
Vm resonant frequency of the water molecules
(c) (d) Vm ωC (b) the frequency of the microwave has no relation
2ωC
with the natural frequency of water molecules
34. the R.M.S. value of current is?
(c) microwave are heat waves, so always produce
V ωC
(a) m (b) Vm ωC heating
2 (d) infrared waves produce heating in a microwave
Vm ωC oven
(c) (d) 0
2 38. The infra- red spectrum lies between:
35. The R.M.S. the value of voltage is? (a) Radio wave and microwave region
V V (b) The micro-wave and visible region
(a) m (b) m
2 2 (c) The visible and ultraviolet region
(d) The ultraviolet and the X-ray region
(c) 0 (d) 2Vm
39. The decreasing order of the wavelength of infrared,
36. In a capacitive circuit by what value of phase angle microwave, uItraviolet and gamma rays is
does alternating current leads the e.m.f.? (a) microwave, infrared, ultraviolet, gamma rays
(a) 45o (b) 90o (b) microwaves, gamma rays, infrared, ultraviolet
(c) 75o (d) 0o (c) infrared, microwave, ultraviolet, gamma rays
(d) gamma rays, ultraviolet, infrared, microwaves
Case Study – 3 40. Which of the following rays are not electromagnetic
waves?
(a) γ -rays (b) β -rays
(c) Heat rays (d) X- rays
ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 155

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

Alternating Current 7. A step down transformer operates on a 2.5 kV line. It
supplies a load with 20 A. The ratio of the primary
1. Define the term 'rms value of the current'. How is it winding to the secondary is 10: 1. If the transformer
related to the peak value? is 90 % efficient, calculate:
(AI 2010C) (i) the power output,
2. A reactive element, in an a.c. circuit, causes the (ii) the voltage, and
current flowing (i) to lead in phase by π / 2, (ii) to lag (iii) the current in the secondary.
in phase by π / 2 with respect to the applied voltage. (3/5, Foreign 2010)
Identify the element in each case. 8. The peak value of emf in ac is E 0 . Write its (i) rms
(Delhi 2010C) (ii) average value over a complete cycle.
3. An ac voltage,
= V V0 sin ωt. is applied across a pure (Foreign 2011)
inductor L. Obtain an expression for the current I in 9. Define the term wattless current.
the circuit and hence obtain the (Delhi 2011)
(i) inductive reactance of the circuit, and 10. A 100µF capacitor in series with a 40Ω resistance is
(ii) the 'phase', of the current flowing, with respect to connected to a 100 V, 60 Hz supply. Calculate (i) the
the applied voltage.
reactance, (ii) the impedance and (iii) maximum
(A I 2010 C)
current in the circuit.
4. A series L C R circuit is connected to a 220 V
(AI 2011C)
variable frequency ac supply. If L = 10mH, 11. Prove that an ideal capacitor, in an ac circuit does not
 400  dissipate power.
= C  2  µF and R= 55Ω.
 π  (AI 2011)
(a) Find the frequency of the source, for which the 12. Show that in an ac circuit containing a pure inductor,
average power absorbed by the circuit is maximum. the voltage is ahead of current by π / 2 in phase.
(b) Calculate the value of maximum current (2 / 5, A I 2011)
amplitude. 13. Explain
(Delhi 2010C) (i) Resistance,
5. A series L C R circuit is connected to an ac source (ii) Reactance and
having voltage
= V Vm sin ωt . Derive the expression (iii) Impedance
for the instantaneous current I and its phase (Delhi 2011C)
relationship to the applied voltage. Obtain the 14. (a) An alternating voltage
= V Vm sin ωt applied to a
condition for resonance to occur. Define 'power series L C R circuit drives a current given by
factor'. State the conditions under which it is (i) =i i m sin(ωt + φ). Deduce an expression for the
maximum and (ii) minimum. average power dissipated over a cycle.
(Delhi 2010) (b) For circuits used for transporting electric power, a
6. Draw a schematic diagram of a step-up transformer. low power factor implies large power loss in
Explain its working principle. Deduce the expression transmission. Explain.
for the secondary to primary voltage in terms of the (c) Determine the current and quality factor at
number of turns in the two coils. In an ideal resonance for a series L C R circuit with
transformer, how is this ratio related to the currents in L = 1.00mH,1.00nF and = R 100Ω connected to an
the two coils?
ac source having peak voltage of 100 V.
How is the transformer used in large scale
(Foreign 2011)
transmission and distribution of electrical energy over
long distances?
(AI 2010)
156 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

15. (i) With the help of a labelled diagram, describe 23. Write the expression for the impedance offered by the
briefly the underlying principle and working of a step series combination of resistor, inductor and capacitor
up transformer. connected to an ac source of voltage
= V V0 sin ωt.
(ii) Write any two sources of energy loss in a Show on a graph the variation of the voltage and the
transformer. current with ' ωt ' in the circuit.
(iii) A step up transformer converts a low input (AI 2012 C)
voltage into a high output voltage. Does it violate law
of conservation of energy? Explain.
24. A light bulb is rated 100 W for 220 V ac supply of
(Delhi 2011)
50 Hz . Calculate
16. A power transmission line feeds power at 2200 V
(i) the resistance of the bulb;
with a current of 5 A to step down transformer with
(ii) the rms current through the bulb.
its primary winding having 4000 turns. Calculate the
(AI 2012)
number of turns and the current in the secondary in
25. State the underlying principle of a transformer. How
order to get output power at 220 V.
is the large scale transmission of electric energy over
(2/5, Foreign 2011)
long distances done with the use of transformers?
17. (a) Draw a schematic diagram of a step-up
(AI 2012)
transformer. Explain its working principle.
26. A series L C R circuit is connected to an ac source.
Assuming the transformer to be 100 % efficient,
Using the phasor diagram, derive the expression for
obtain the relation for (i) the current in the secondary
the impedance of the circuit. Plot a graph to show the
in terms of the current in the primary, and (ii) the
variation of current with frequency of the source,
number of turns in the primary and secondary
explaining the nature of its variation.
windings.
(AI 2012)
(b) Mention two important energy losses in actual
27. (a) A voltage= V Vo sin ωt applied to a series L C R
transformers and state how these can be minimized.
(Delhi 2011C) circuit drives a current
= i io sin ωt in the circuit.
18. When an ac source is connected across an inductor, Deduce the expression for the average power
show on a graph the nature of variation of the voltage dissipated in the circuit.
and the current over one complete cycle. (b) For circuits used for transporting electric power, a
(Delhi 2012C) low power factor implies large power loss in
19. Mention the two characteristic properties of the transmission. Explain.
material suitable for making core of a transformer. (c) Define the term 'Wattless current'. (Delhi 2012C)
(AI 2012)
20. An alternating voltage given by V = 140sin 314t is 28. (a) State the principle of a step-up transformer.
connected across a pure resistor of 50Ω . Find Explain, with the help of a labelled diagram, its
(i) the frequency of the source. working.
(ii) the rms current through the resistor. (b) Describe briefly any two energy losses, giving the
(AI 2012) reasons for their occurrence in actual transformers.
21. A lamp is connected in series with a capacitor. (Foreign 2012)
Predict your observation when this combination is 29. Why is the core of a transformer laminated?
connected in turn across (Delhi 2013C)
(i) ac source and (ii) a dc battery. What change would 30. A series L C R circuit is connected to an ac source
you notice in each case if the capacitance of the (200 V,50 Hz). The voltages across the resistor,
capacitor is increased? capacitor and inductor are respectively 200 V, 250 V
(Delhi 2012C) and 250 V.
22. Calculate the quality factor of a series LCR circuit
(i) The algebraic sum of the voltages across the three
with L = 2.0H, C = 2µF and R= 10Ω. Mention the elements is greater than the voltage of the source.
significance of quality factor in LCR circuit. How is this paradox resolved?
(Foreign 2012) (ii) Given the value of the resistance of R is 40Ω,
calculate the current in the circuit.
(Foreign 2013)
ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 157

31. A resistor ' R ' and an element ' X ' are connected in R 2 where R 2 > R1. Write the relation between L1 , C1
series to an ac source of voltage. The voltage is found and L 2 , C2 at resonance. Which one, of the two,
to lead the current in phase by π / 4. If ' X ' is replaced
would be better suited for fine tuning in a receiver
by another element ' Y ', the voltage lags behind the
set? Give reason.
current by π / 4.
(Foreign 2013)
(i) Identify elements ' X ' and ' Y.
(ii) When both ' X ' and ' Y ' are connected in series 37. A capacitor of unknown capacitance, a resistor of
with ' R ' to the same source, will the power
dissipated in the circuit be maximum or minimum? 100Ω and an inductor of self inductance =
L (4 / π )
2

Justify your answer. henry are in series connected to an ac source of 200 V

(Foreign 2013) and 50 Hz, Calculate the value of the capacitance and
32. A lamp is connected in series with a capacitor. the current that flows in the circuit when the current
Predict your observations when the system is is in phase with the voltage.
connected first across a dc and then an ac source. (AI 2013C)
What happens in each case if the capacitance of the 38. (a) Explain with the help of a labelled diagram, the
capacitor is reduced? principle and working of a transformer. Deduce the
(Delhi 2013C) expression for its working formula.
33. In a series L C R circuit connected to an ac source of (b) Name any four causes of energy loss in an actual
variable frequency and voltage= V Vm sin ωt , draw a transformer.
plot showing the variation of current (I) with angular (AI 2013C)
frequency ( ω ) for two different values of resistance 39. Why is the use of ac voltage preferred over dc
R1 and R 2 ( R1 > R 2 ) . Write the condition under voltage? Give two reasons.
(AI 2014)
which the phenomenon of resonance occurs. For 40. Show that the current leads the voltage in phase by
which value of the resistance out of the two curves, a
π / 2 in an ac circuit containing an ideal capacitor.
sharper resonance is produced? Define Q-factor of
(Foreign 2014)
the circuit and give its significance.
41. A capacitor 'C', a variable resistor 'R ' and a bulb 'B'
(Delhi 2013)
are connected in series to the ac mains in circuit as
34. (a) For a given=ac i i m sin ωt, show that the average
shown. The bulb glows with some brightness.
power dissipated in a resistor R over a complete cycle
1
is i 2m R.
2
(b) A light bulb is rated at 100 W for a 220 V ac
supply. Calculate the resistance of the bulb.
(AI 2013)
How will the glow of the bulb change if (i) a
35. When an ac source is connected to an ideal capacitor
dielectric slab is introduced between the plates of the
show that the average power supplied by the source
capacitor, keeping resistance R to be the same; (ii) the
over a complete cycle is zero.
resistance R is increased keeping the same
(2/3, Delhi 2013C)
capacitance? (Delhi 2014)
36. (a) Using phasor diagram for a series L C R circuit
42. In series L C R circuit obtain the conditions under
connected to an ac source of voltage
= V V0 sin ωt,
which (i) the impedance of the circuit is minimum
derive the relation for the current flowing in the and (ii) wattless current flows in the circuit.
circuit and the phase angle between the voltage across (Foreign 2014)
the resistor and the net voltage in the circuit. 43. A voltage= V V0 sin ωt is applied to a series L C R
(b) Draw a plot showing the variation of the current I
circuit. Derive the expression for the average power
as a function of angular frequency ' ω ' of the applied
dissipated over a cycle. Under what condition is
ac source for the two cases of a series combination of
(i) no power dissipated even though the current flows
(i) inductance L1 , capacitance C1 and resistance R1 through the circuit,
and (ii) inductance L 2 , capacitance C2 and resistance (ii) maximum power dissipated in the circuit?
(AI 2014)
158 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

44. (a) A series L C R circuit is connected to an ac source 49. An inductor L of inductive reactance X L is connected
of variable frequency. Draw a suitable phasor in series with a bulb B and an ac source. How would
diagram to deduce the expressions for the amplitude brightness of the bulb change when
of the current and phase angle. (i) number of turn in the inductor is reduced,
(b) Obtain the condition of resonance. Draw a plot (ii) an iron rod is inserted in the inductor and (iii) a
showing the variation of current with the frequency of capacitor of reactance X C = X L is inserted in series
a.c. source for two resistances R1 and R 2 ( R1 > R 2 ) .
in the circuit. Justify your answer in each case.
Hence define the quality factor, Q and write its role in (Delhi 2015)
the tuning of the circuit. 50. A source of ac voltage = V V0 sin ωt is connected to a
(Delhi 2014C) series combination of a resistor ' R ' and a capacitor
45. Derive an expression for the impedance of a series L 'C. Draw the phasor diagram and use it to obtain the
C R circuit connected to an ac supply of variable expression for (i) impedance of the circuit and (ii)
frequency. phase angle.
Plot a graph showing variation of current with the (AI 2015C)
frequency of the applied voltage.
51. A circuit containing an 80mH inductor and a 250mF
Explain briefly how the phenomenon of resonance in
capacitor in series connected to a 240 V,100rad / s
the circuit can be used in the tuning mechanism of a
radio or a TV set. supply. The resistance of the circuit is negligible.
(a) A series L C R circuit is connected to an ac source (i) Obtain rms value of current.
of variable frequency. Draw a suitable phasor (ii) What is the total average power consumed by the
diagram to deduce the expressions for the amplitude circuit?
of the current and phase angle. (Delhi 2015C)
(b) Obtain the condition of resonance. Draw a plot 52. Define 'quality factor' of resonance in series L C R
showing the variation of current with the frequency of circuit. What is its SI unit?
(Delhi 2016)
a.c. source for two resistances R1 and R 2 ( R1 > R 2 ) .
53. The power factor of an ac circuit is 0.5. What is the
Hence define the quality factor, Q and write its role in phase difference between voltage and current the
the tuning of the circuit. circuit?
(Delhi 2014C) (Foreign 2016)
46. (a) Draw a schematic arrangement for winding of 54. An ac source of voltage = V V0 sin ωt is connected to
primary and secondary coil in a transformer when the
a series combination of L, C and R. Use the phasor
two coils are would on top of each other.
diagram to obtain expressions for impedance of the
(b) State the underlying principle of a transformer and
circuit and phase angle between voltage and current.
obtain the expression for the ratio of secondary to
Find the condition when current will be in phase with
primary voltage in terms of the
the voltage. What is the circuit in this condition
(i) number of secondary and primary windings and
called? (3/5, Delhi 2016)
(ii) primary and secondary currents.
55. A 2µF capacitor, 100Ω resistor and 8 H inductor are
(c) Write the main assumption involved in deriving
the above relations. connected in series with an ac source
(d) Write any two reasons due to which energy losses (i) What should be the frequency of the source such
may occur in actual transformers. that current drawn in the circuit is maximum? What is
(AI 2014C) this frequency called?
47. Define capacitive reactance. Write its S.I. units. (ii) If the peak value of emf of the source is 200 V,
(Delhi 2015) find the maximum current.
48. Plot a graph showing variation of capacitive (iii) Draw a graph showing variation of amplitude of
reactance with the change in the frequency of the ac circuit current with changing frequency of applied
source. voltage in a series L C R circuit for two different
(AI 2015C) values of resistance R1 and R 2 ( R1 > R 2 ) .
(iv) Define the term 'Sharpness of Resonance'. Under
what condition, does a circuit become more selective?
(Foreign 2016)
ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 159

56. In series L R circuit X L = R and power factor of the 60. (a) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-up transformer.
circuit is P1. When capacitor with capacitance C such Obtain the ratio of secondary to primary voltage in
terms of number of turns and currents in the two
that X L = X C is put in series, the power factor
coils.
becomes P2 . Calculate P1 / P2 . (b) A power transmission line feeds input power at
(2/5, Delhi 2016) 2200 V to a step-down transformer with its primary
57. (i) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-down windings having 3000 turns. Find the number of turns
transformer. State the principle of its working. in the secondary to get the power output at 220 V.
(ii) Express the turn ratio in terms of voltages. (Delhi 2017)
(iii) Find the ratio of primary and secondary currents 61. A device X is connected across an ac source of
in terms of turn ratio in an ideal transformer. voltage
= V V0 sin ωt. The current through X is given
(iv) How much current is drawn by the primary of a π

transformer connected to 220 V supply when it as I I0 sin  ωt +  .
=
 2
delivers power to a 110 V-550 W refrigerator?
(a) Identify the device X and write the expression for
(AI 2016)
its reactance.
58. (i) Write the function of a transformer. State its
(b) Draw graphs showing variation of voltage and
principle of working with the help of a diagram.
current with time over one cycle of ac, for X.
Mention various energy losses in this device.
(c) How does the reactance of the device X vary with
(ii) The primary coil of an ideal step up transformer
frequency of the ac? Show this variation graphically.
has 100 turns and transformation ratio is also 100 .
(d) Draw the phasor diagram for the device X.
The input voltage and power are respectively 220 V
(A I 2018)
and 1100 W. Calculate
62. (a) In a series L C R circuit connected across an ac
(a) number of turns in secondary
source of variable frequency, obtain the expression
(b) current in primary
for its impedance and draw a plot showing its
(c) voltage across secondary
variation with frequency of the ac source.
(d) current in secondary
(b) What is the phase difference between the voltages
(e) power in secondary
across inductor and the capacitor at resonance in the
(Delhi 2016)
L C R circuit?
59. A device ' X ' is connected to an ac source
(c) When an inductor is connected to a v 200 Vdc
= V V0 sin ωt. The variation of voltage, current and
voltage, a current of 1 A flows through it. When the
power in one cycle is shown in the following graph:
same inductor is connected to a 200 V,50 Hz ac
source, only 0.5 A current flows. Explain, why? Also,
calculate the self inductance of the inductor.
(Delhi 2019)
63. (a) What do you understand by 'sharpness of
resonance' for a series L C R resonant circuit?
How is it related with the quality factor ' Q ' of the
circuit? Using the graphs given in the diagram,
(a) Identify the device ' X '. explain the factors which affect it. For which graph is
(b) Which of the curves A, B and C represent the the resistance (R) minimum?
voltage, current and the power consumed in the (b) A 2µF capacitor, 100Ω resistor and 8H inductor
circuit? Justify your answer.
are connected in series with an a c source. Find the
(c) How does its impedance vary with frequency of
frequency of the a c source for which the current
the ac source? Show graphically.
drawn in the circuit is maximum. If the peak value of
(d) Obtain an expression for the current in the circuit
emf of the source is 200 V , calculate the
and its phase relation with ac voltage.
(AI 2017) (i) maximum current and, (ii) inductive and
capacitive reactance of the circuit at resonance.
(AI 2019)
160 ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

64. (a) Draw the diagram of a device which is used to 73. Welders wear special goggles or face masks with
decrease high ac voltage into a low ac voltage and glass Windows to protect their eyes from
state its working principle. Write four sources of electromagnetic radiation. Name the radiations and
energy loss in this device. write the ränge of their frequency.
(b) A small town with a demand of 1200 kW of (AI 2013)
electric power at 220 V is situated 20 km away from 74. To which part of the electromagnetic spectrum does a
an electric plant generating power at 440 V. The wave of frequency 5 × 1019 Hz belong?
resistance of the two wire line carrying power is (AI 2013)
0.5Ω per km. The town gets the power from the line 75. To which part of the electromagnetic spectrum does a
through a 4000 220 V step-down transformer at a wave of frequency 3 × 1013 Hz belong?
sub-station in the town. Estimate the line power loss (AI 2014)
in the form of heat.
(Delhi 2019) 76. A parallel plate capacitor is being charged by a time
varying current. Explain briefly how Ampere's
Electromagnetic Waves circuital law is generalized to incorporate the effect
due to the displacement current.
65. A plane electromagnetic wave travels in vacuum (AI 2011 & 2014)
along z-direction. What can you say about the 77. A capacitor is connected in series to an ammeter
direction of electric and magnetic field vectors? across a d.c. source. Why does the ammeter show a
(Delhi 2011) momentary deflection during the charging of the
66. A plane electromagnetic wave travels in vacuum capacitor? What would be the deflection when it is
along x-direction. What can you say about the fully charged?
direction of electric and magnetic field vectors? (AI 2014)
(Delhi 2011) 78. An e.m. wave, Y1, has a wavelength of 1 cm while
another e.m. wave, Y2, has a frequency of 1015 Hz.
67. How are radio waves produced? (AI 2011) Name these two types of waves and write one useful
application for each. (AI 2014)
68. How are X-rays produced? (AI 2011)
79. Name the types of e.m. radiations which
69. When an ideal capacitor is charged by a de battery, 1. are used in destroying Cancer cells,
no current flows. However, when an ac source is 2. cause tanning of the skin and
used, the current flows continuously. How does one 3. maintain the earth's warmth.
explain this, based on the concept of displacement Write briefly a method of producing any one of these
current? waves. (Delhi 2015)
(Delhi 2012)
70. A capacitor, made of two parallel plates each of plate 80. Why are microwaves considered suitable for radar
area A and Separation d, is being charged by an Systems used in aircraft navigation? (Delhi 2016)
external ac source. Show that the displacement
current inside the capacitor is the same as the current 81. For a plane electromagnetic wave, propagating along
charging the capacitor. (AI 2012) the Z-axis, write the two (possible) pairs of
expression for its oscillating electric and magnetic
71. (a) How are electromagnetic waves produced? fields. How are the peak values of these (oscillating)
(b) How do you convince yourself that fields related to each other? (AI 2016)
electromagnetic waves carry energy and momentum?
(Delhi 2012, A I 2012)
72. A capacitor has been charged by a de source. What
are the magnitudes of conduction and displacement
currents, when it is fully charged? (Delhi 2013)
ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 161

82. (i) Identify the part of the electromagnetic spectrum 87. Write the relation for the speed for electromagnetic
which is : waves in terms of the amplitudes of electric and
(a) suitable for radar System used in aircraft magnetic fields. (AI 2017)
navigation,
(b) produced by bombarding a metal target by high 88. How does Ampere-Maxwell law explain the flow of
speed electrons. current through a capacitor when it is being charged
(ii) Why does a galvanometer show a momentary by a battery? Write the expression for the
deflection at the time of charging or discharging a displacement current in terms of the rate of change of
capacitor? Write the necessary expression to explain electric flux. (Delhi 2017)
this Observation. (AI 2016)
83. Name the type of e.m. waves having a wavelength 89. Identify the electromagnetic waves whose
range 10-7 m to 10-9 m. How are these waves wavelengths vary as
generated? Write their two uses. (a) 10−12 < λ < 10−8 m
(AI 2017, Delhi 2010)
(b) 10−3 m < λ < 10−1 m
84. Name the type of e.m. waves having a wavelength
Write one use for each. (AI 2017)
range of 0.1 m to 1 mm. How are these waves
generated? Write their two uses.
90. How is an electromagnetic wave produced? Draw a
(AI 2017, Delhi 2010)
sketch of a plane e.m. wave propagating along X-axis
depicting the directions of the oscillating electric and
85. How is the speed of em-waves in vacuum determined
magnetic fields. (Delhi 2017)
by the electric and magnetic fields? (Delhi 2017)

86. Do electromagnetic waves carry energy and

momentum? (AI 2017)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

ALTERNATING CURRENT &

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
 08
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 163

Chapter at a Glance
where u and v are object and image distances,
1. Reflection is governed by the equation ∠i = ∠r′ and
respectively and f is the focal length of the mirror. f is
sin i
refraction by the Snell’s law, = µ , where the (approximately) half the radius of curvature R. f is
sin r negative for concave mirror; f is positive for a convex
incident ray, reflected ray, refracted ray and normal lie mirror.
in the same plane,  is the refractive index of glass
5. For a prism of the angle A, of refractive index µ 2
medium.
placed in a medium of refractive index µ1 ,

 ( A + δm ) 
sin  
µ  2 
µ 21 = 2 =
µ1 A
sin  
2
where δm is the angle of minimum deviation.
2. The critical angle of incidence C for a ray incident
from a denser to rarer medium, is that angle for which
the angle of refraction is 90°. For i > C , total internal
reflection occurs.

6. For refraction through a spherical interface (from

medium 1 to 2 of refractive index µ1 and µ 2 ,
respectively
3. Cartesian sign convention: Distance measured in the µ 2 µ1 µ 2 − µ1
− =
same direction as the incident light are positive; those v u R
measured in the opposite direction are negative. All
Thin lens formula
distances are measured from the pole/optical centre of
the mirror/lens on the principal axis. The heights 1 1 1
− =
measured upwards above x-axis and normal to the v u f
principal axis of the mirror/lens are taken as positive. Lens maker’s formula
The heights measured downwards are taken as
negative. 1 µ − µ1  1 1 
= 2  − 
f µ1  R1 R 2 

where, f is positive for a converging lens; f is negative

for a diverging lens.

4. Mirror equation:
1 1 1
+ =
v u f
164 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

1 where fo and fe are the focal lengths of the objective

7. The power of a lens P = .
f and eyepiece, respectively, and L is the distance
between their focal points.
The SI unit for power of a lens is dioptre (D)
1 D = 1 m–1 .
If several thin lenses of focal length f1 , f2 , f3 ,.. are in
contact, the effective focal length of their
combination, is given by
1 1 1 1
= + + + ...
f f1 f 2 f3
The total power of a combination of several lenses is
P = P1 + P2 + P3 + …
8. Dispersion is the splitting of light into its constituent 11. Magnifying power m of a telescope is the ratio of the
color. angle  subtended at the eye by the image to the
angle 〈 subtended at the eye by the object.
β fo
m= =
α fe
where fo and fe are the focal lengths of the objective
and eyepiece, respectively.

9. Magnifying power m of a simple microscope is given

D
by m = 1 + ,where D = 25 cm is the least distance of
f
distinct vision and f is the focal length of the convex
lens.
D
If the image is at infinity, m = .
f

10. For a compound microscope, the magnifying power

D
m me × mo , where me = 1 + , is the
is given by =
fe
magnification due to the eyepiece and mo is the
magnification produced by the objective.
Approximately,
L D
m
= ×
fo fe
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 165

Solved Examples
Example-1 Example-4
An object is placed in front of a concave mirror of A double convex lens of glass of refractive index 1.6
radius of curvature 40 cm at a distance of 10 cm. Find has its both surfaces of equal radii of curvature of 30
the position, nature and magnification of the image. cm each. An object of height 5 cm is placed at a
1 1 1 R distance of 12.5 cm from the lens. Calculate the size
Sol. Using, = − and f = of the image formed.
v f u 2
Sol. Given µ = 1.6, R1 = + 30 cm, R2 = – 30 cm, O = 5
1 2 1 2 1 1 1 cm, u = –12.5 cm
We get = − = − = +
v R u ( −40 ) ( −10 ) −20 10
1  1 1 
1 −10 + 20 10 1 Focal length (f) of lens : = ( µ − 1)  − 
Or= = = or
= v 20 cm f  R1 R 2 
v 200 200 20
 1 1   2 
Image is formed behind the mirror. =(1.6 − 1)  +  =0.6 ×  
v −20  30 30   30 
Magnification, m = − = = 2 30
u −10 ⇒= f = 25 cm
Image is virtual , erect and enlarged. 0.6 × 2
1 1 1
From this lens formula = −
Example-2 f v u
A small plane mirror is placed at the centre of a 1 1 1 1 1 1− 2
spherical screen of radius R. A beam of light is ⇒ = + = − =
v f u 25 12.5 25
falling on the mirror. If the mirror makes n
⇒v= −25cm
revolutions per second, then find the speed of light on
the screen after reflection from the mirror. I v
Magnification m
= =
Sol. When the plane mirror rotates through an angle θ, the O u
reflected ray rotates through an angle 2θ. So a spot on v ( −25)
the screen will make 2 × n = 2n revolution per ∴ Size of image, I = ×O = × 5 = 10 cm
second(frequency).
u ( −12.5)
To find the velocity :
V = 2πR × frequency Example-5
= 2π × R × 2n In the accompanying diagram, the direct image is
V = 4πnR m/s formed by the lens (f = 10 cm) of an object placed at
O and that formed after reflection from the spherical
Example-3 mirror are formed at the same point O’. What is the
Calculate the distance of an object of height ‘h’ from radius of curvature of the mirror ?
a concave mirror or focal length 10 cm, so as to
obtain a real image of magnification 2.
Sol. Given focal length f = – 10 cm, u = ?
v
magnification m =− =−2 ⇒ v =2 u
u
1 1 1
From mirror formula = + , we have
f v u
Sol. The formation of image is shown in figure.
1 1 1 3 1
− = + ⇒ = −
10 2u u 2u 10
10 × 3
⇒u= = −15cm
2
The distance of the object from the mirror is 15 cm in
front of mirror.
166 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

Object O is at the right, so we are using the first focus 1 1 1 1 1 1

of convex lens, therefore, for the lens f = – 10 cm, (i)= − ⇒ = −
f v u u v f
v = – 15 cm.
fv 6.25 × ( −25 ) −6.25 × 25
From lens formula, ⇒ u= = = =−5cm
1 1 1 f − v 6.25 − ( −25 ) 31.25
= −
f v u (ii) Angular magnification when final image is at the
1 1 1 1 1 −2 + 3 distance of distinct vision
⇒ =− = − + = D 25
u v f 15 10 30 m =1 + =1 + =5
⇒u= 30 cm f 6.25
(iii) Angular magnification when final image is
The image of O at O’ by the mirror and lens is
formed at infinity
formed only if O is at the centre of curvature of the
lens i.e., OC = R (radius of curvature). D 25
m
= = = 4
From Fig. | u | + | R | = 50 cm f 6.25
⇒ | R | = 50 – | u | = 50 – 30 = 20 cm
Example-8
Example-6 A compound microscope with an objective of 1.0 cm
A convex lens made up of glass of refractive index focal length and an eye-piece of 2.0 cm focal length
1.5 is dipped, in turn, in : has a tube length of 20 cm. Calculate the magnifying
(i) medium A of refractive index 1.65 power of the microscope, if the final image is formed
(ii) medium B of refractive index 1.33 at the near point of the eye.
Explain, giving reasons, whether it will behave as a Sol. Magnifying power of compound microscope for final
converging lens or a diverging lens in each of these image at near point of eye.
two media. L  D
m= − 1 + 
f0  fe 
Sol. If fa fis focal length of lens (refractive index µg) in
air, then its focal length (fe) in a liquid of refractive 20  25 
= − 1 + = −20 (1 + 12.5 )
index (µl) is given by 10  2.0 
µg − 1 = −20 × 13.5 = −270
=fg
µg
× fa ( Given= )
µg 1.5
Negative sign shows that the final image is inverted.
−1
µ
Example-9
(i) For medium A, µl = 1.65
A ray of light passing through an equilateral
1.5 − 1 0.5 × 1.65
∴ fe = × fa = f =−5.5f a triangular prism from air undergoes minimum
1.5
−1 (1.5 − 1.65) a 3
1.65 deviation when angle of incidence is th of the angle
4
Negative sign shows that the action of converging
of prism. Calculate the speed of light in the prism.
lens in air is diverging when immersed in medium A.
(ii) For medium B, µl = 1.33 3 3
Sol. Given A = 60°,i= A= × 60°= 45°
1.5 − 1 0.5 × 1.33 4 4
∴= f ×
= fa × fa For minimum deviation i1 = i2 = i and
1.5 1.5 − 1.33
−1 A
1.33 r=
1 r2= = 30°
0.5 × 1.33 2
= = × f a 3.91f a sin i
0.17 ∴ Refractive index of prism, µ =
Positive sign shows that lens remains converging. sin r
sin 45° 1/ 2
Example-7 = = = = 2 1.41
sin 30° 1/ 2
A converging lens of focal length 6.25 cm is used as a
Speed of light in prism,
magnifying glass. If the near point of the observer is
25 cm from the eye and lens is held close to eye, c 3 × 108
v= = = 2.13 × 108 ms −1
calculate (i) the distance of the object from the lens µ 1.41
(ii) angular magnification (iii) angular magnification
when final image is formed at infinity
Sol. Given f = 6.25 cm, v = – 25 cm, u = ?
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 167

b
Example-10 Given µ= 1.2 +
λ2
An astronomical telescope uses two lenses of power Putting μ = 1.6 and λ = 400 nm = 4 × 10–7 m
10 D and 1 D. What is its magnifying power in
b
normal adjustment? 1.6
= 1.2 +
( )
2
Sol. Magnifying power of astronomical telescope in 4 × 10−7
normal adjustment
⇒ b = (4 × 10 ) × 0.4 m2 = 6.4 × 10–14 m2
–7 2
f P
m= − 0 = − e [ with f 0 > f e or P0 < Pe ] Now putting λ = 5000 Å = 5 × 10–7 m, we get
fe P0
6.4 × 10−14
Given
= P0 1D,
= Pe 10 D µ =' 1.2 + = 1.2 + 0.256= 1.456
( )
2
5 × 10−7
10
∴m =− = −10
1
Example-12
Example-11 How far should an object be held from a concave
A beam of light of wavelength 400 nm is incident mirror of focal length 40 cm so as to obtain a real
normally on a right angled prism as shown. It is image twice the size of the object?
observed that the light just grazes along the surface Sol. Real image is formed i.e, v < 0
AC after falling on it. Given that the refractive index −v
Magnification = = −2
of the material of the prism varies with the u
wavelength λ as per the relation μA = 1.2 + b/λ2 v = 2u
−1 −1 −1
+ =
2u u f
2u
f=
3
3f 3 × 40
=u = = 60 cm
2 2

Example-13
A converging lens of refractive index 1.5 and of focal
Calculate the value of b and the refractive index of length 15 cm in air, has the same radii of curvature
the prism material for a wavelength λ = 5000 Å for both sides. If it is immersed in a liquid of
[(Given θ = sin–1 (0.625)] refractive index 1.7, find the focal length of the lens
Sol. Given λ = 400 nm = 400 × 10–9 m in the liquid.
i1 = 0, r1 = 0 Sol. µg = 1.5
r1 + r2 = θ ⇒ r2 = θ – r1 = θ
µg 1.5
i2 = 90° L µ g= =
µ L 1.7
1
Using ∝ ( µ − 1) we get
f
 
fL µg − 1  1.5 − 1 
= = i.e.f L 15  
fg L µg − 1  1.5 − 1 
 1.7 
 0.5 
i.e. f L = 15  × 1.7  = −1.5 × 4.25 =
−63.75 cm
 −0.2 
For snell’s law
sin i 2 sin 90° 1
=µ = =
sin r2 sin θ sin θ
1
=
∴µ = 1.6
0.625
168 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

Hence, the angular magnification of the given

refracting telescope is 1500.
Example-14
An object is placed at a distance of 40 cm from a
concave mirror of focal length 15 cm. If the object is Example-17
displaced through a distance of 20 cm toward the A prism is made of glass of unknown refractive
mirror, by how much distance is the image displaced index. A parallel beam of light is incident on a face of
? the prism. The angle of minimum deviation is
1 1 1 measured to be 40°. The refracting angle of the prism
Sol. Using, = + is 60°.
f u v
What is the refractive index of the material of the
uf
u= prism?
u −f (NCERT)
For a concave mirror, Sol. Angle of minimum deviation, δm = 40°
f = – 15 cm and u = – 40 cm
Angle of the prism, A= 60°
( −40 )( −15) 40 ×15
∴ v= = = −24 cm Refractive index of the material of the prims = µ′
( −40 ) − ( −15) 25
The angle of deviation is related to refractive index
On displacement of object towards the mirror
( µ′) as:
u' =− ( 40 − 20 ) =
−20 cm
 A + δm 
( −20 )( −15) 20 × 15 sin 
2 
v' = =
− −60 cm
=
( −20 ) − ( −15) 5 µ′ = 
A
sin
∴ movement of image 2
= (–60) – (–24) = 36 cm. ( 60° + 40° )
sin
= 2= sin 50°
= 1.532
Example-15 60°
sin sin 30°
Does the human eye partially lose its ability of
2
accommodation when it undergoes short-sightedness
Hence, the refractive index of the material of the
(myopia) or long-sightedness (hypermetropia)? If not,
prism is 1.532.
what might cause these defects of vision? (NCERT)
Sol. When a person is suffering from myopia or
Example-18
hypermetropia, the eye-lenses are used. Myopia is a
A tank is filled with water to a height of 12.5 cm. The
condition when the eyeballs start to elongate from the
apparent depth of a needle lying at the bottom of the
front to the back. Hypermetropia is a condition when
tank is measured by a microscope to be 9.4cm.
the eyeballs start to shorten. While presbyopia is a
(i) What is the refractive index of water?
condition where the eyeballs loses its ability of
(ii) If water is replaced by a liquid of refractive index
accommodation.
1.63 up to the same height, by what distance would
the microscope have to be moved to focus on the
Example-16
needle again?
A giant refracting telescope at an observatory has an
(NCERT)
objective lens of focal length 15 m. If an eyepiece of
Sol. Actual depth of the needle in water, h1 =12.5cm
focal length 1.0 cm is used, what is the angular
Apparent depth of the needle in water, h2 = 9.4 cm
magnification of the telescope?
Refractive index of water = µ
(NCERT)
Sol. Focal length of the objective lens (i) The value of µ can be obtained as follows:
f 0 =15m =15 × 100 =1500cm h1
µ=
Focal length of the eyepiece, f e = 1.0 cm h2
The angular magnification of a telescope is given as: 12.5
= ≈ 1.33
f 9.4
α= 0
fe Hence, the refractive index of water is about 1.33.
15 × 102 (ii) Water is replaced by a liquid of refractive index
= = 1500 µ′ =1.63
1.0
The actual depth of the needle remains the same, but
its apparent depth changes.
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 169

Let y be the new apparent depth of the needle. In this case u = + 12 cm, f = – 16 cm,
Hence, we can write the relation:
h
µ′ = 1
y
h
∴ y =1
µ′
12.5 This implies that image is formed to the right of the
= = 7.67 cm
1.63 lens and is real.
Hence, the new apparent depth of the needle is
7.67cm. It is less than h2. Therefore, to focus the Example-20
needle again, the microscope should be moved up. (a) An equiconvex lens with radii of curvature of
Distance by which the microscope should be moved magnitude r each, is put over a liquid layer poured on
up = 9.4 – 7.67 = 1.73cm. top of a plane mirror. A small needle, with its tip on
the principal axis of the lens, is moved along the axis
Example-19 until its inverted real image coincides with the needle
A beam of light converges to a point P. A lens is itself. The distance of the needle from the lens is
placed in the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from measured to be ‘a’. On removing the liquid layer and
P. At what point does the beam converge if the lens is repeating the experiment the distance is found to be
(a) convex lens of focal length 20 cm, (b) a concave ‘b’.
lens of focal length 16 cm (NCERT)

Sol. (a) Point P acts as a virtual object for convex lens.

Given u = + 12 cm, f = + 20 cm

Given that two value of distance measured represent

the focal length values in the two cases, obtain a
formula for the refractive index of the liquid.
(b) If r = 10 cm, a = 15 cm, b = 10 cm, find the refractive
index of the liquid.
Sol. (a) The focal length (f1) of lens is given by
This implies that image is formed to the right of the
lens and is real. 1  1 1  2 ( µ − 1)
= ( µ − 1)  +  =
f1 r r r
Given f1 = b
1 2 ( µ − 1) r
=
∴ =⇒b
b r 2 ( µ − 1)
The focal length of liquid lens (plano concave lens) is
1  1 1  ( µ − 1) r
This implies that image is formed to the right of the = ( µ − 1)  − −  =  = f2 =
f2  r ∞ r ( µ − 1)
lens and is real.
(b) As glass lens and liquid lens are in contact
1 1 1 1 ( µ − 1)
∴ = + = − 
f f1 f 2 b r
Given f = a
1 1 µ −1
∴ = − 
a b r
µ − 1 1 1
= −
r b a
1 1
1 r − 
µ −=
b a
170 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

Refractive index of liquid, Object distance, u = -12 cm

r r Focal length of the convex mirror, f = 15 cm
µ = 1 + − Image distance = v
b a
10 10 2 4 1 1 1
(b) µ = 1 + − = 1 + 1 − = = 1.33 + =
10 15 3 3 u v f
1 1 1
= −
Example-21 v f u
A person looking at a cloth with a pattern consisting 1 1 4+5 9
of vertical and horizontal lines is able to see the + = =
15 12 60 60
vertical lines more distinctly than the horizontal ones.
60
What is the defect due to? How is such a defect of ∴ = 6.7cm
vision corrected? (NCERT) 9
.Sol. In the given situation, the person is having difficulty The distance between the needle image and the mirror
in seeing the horizontal lines while the vertical lines is 6.7 cm and the image is obtained on the other side
are distinctly visible. This occurs when the refracting of the mirror.
system of the eye is not working the same for Using magnification formula:
different planes. This is known as astigmatism. For h v
m= 2 = −
the vertical plane, the curvature of the eye is h1 u
sufficient. But the same curvature is not sufficient for v
the horizontal plane. Hence, the formation of sharp h 2=× h1
u
images from the vertical line is possible on the retina
and the horizontal liens appears blurred. With the 6.7
= × 4.5 = +2.5cm
help of cylindrical lenses, this defect can be 12
corrected. h1 2.5
m =
= = 0.56
h 2 4.5
Example-22
2.5 cm is the height of the image. As it has a positive
You are given prisms of crown class and flint glass
sign, the image is erect, virtual and diminished. As
with a wide variety of angles. Suggest a combination
the needle is moved further from the mirror, the
of prisms which will
image also moves away from the mirror resulting in a
(i) deviate a pencil of white light without much
reduction in the size of the image.
dispersion,
(ii) disperse (and displace) a pencil of white light
Example-24
without much deviation. (NCERT)
Double-convex lenses are to be manufactured from a
Sol. (i) The two prisms must be place next to each other.
glass refractive index 1.55, with both faces of the
The bases of these two prisms must be such that
same radius of curvature. What is the radius of
they are on the opposite sides of the incident white
curvature required if the focal length is to be 20 cm?
light. The dispersion of white light first takes
Sol. Refractive index of glass, µ =1.55 (NCERT)
place when it is incident on the first prism. The
dispersed ray then enters the second prism as an Focal length of the double-convex lens, f = 20 cm
incident ray. The dispersion of light from both the Radius of curvature of one face of the lens = R1
prisms emerges as a white light. Radius of curvature of the other face of the lens = R2
(ii) Consider the two prisms from (i). The deviations Radius of curvature of the double-convex lens = R
from this combination of prisms becomes equal by Therefore, R1 = R and R2 = -R
adjusting angle between them. When the angle is The value of R is calculated as:
maintained between these two prisms, the pencil 1  1 1 
of white light will disperse without much
= ( µ − 1)  − 
f  R1 R 2 
deviation.
1 1 1
= (1.55 − 1)  + 
Example-23 20 R R 
A 4.5 cm needle is placed 12 cm away from a convex 1 2
mirror of focal length 15 cm. Give the location of the = 0.55 ×
20 R
image and the magnification. Describe what happens
Therefore R= 0.55 × 2 × 20= 22cm
as the needle is moved further from the mirror.
22 cm is the radius of curvature of the double-convex
(NCERT)
lens.
Sol. Size of the needle, h1 = 4.5 cm
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 171

Example-25
An object of size 0.3 cm is placed 14 cm in front of a
concave lens of focal length 21 cm. Describe the
image produced by the lens. What happens if the
object is moved further away from the lens?
(NCERT)
Sol. Size of the object, h1 = 3cm
Object distance, u = −14cm
Focal length of the concave lens, f = -21 cm
Image distance = v
1 1 1
− =
v u f
1 1 1
= − −
v 21 14
−2 − 3 −5
= =
42 42
42
Therefore v = − = −8.4cm
5
Therefore, the image obtained is 8.4 cm away and is
obtained on the other side of the lens. Since there is
negative sign, it is understood that the image is virtual
and erect.
Image height ( h 2 ) v
m =
Object height ( h 2 ) u
−8.4
Therefore, h 2 = × 3= 0.6 × 3= 1.8cm .
14
The height of the image is 1.8 cm.
If the object is moved further away from the lens,
then the virtual image will move towards the mirror.
As the object distance increases, the image size
decreases.
172 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section–A (1 Mark Questions) 9. An object is placed at the midpoint of focus and the
pole of a concave mirror. If the focal length of the
1. What do you mean by the twinkling effect of star mirror be f, then find the distance of the image from
light? the pole of the mirror.
2. If an object moves towards a plane mirror with a 10. State the conditions for the phenomenon of total
speed v at an angle θ to the perpendicular to the plane internal reflection to occur.
of the mirror, find the relative velocity between the
object and the image.
3. A man is 6 ft tall. In order to see his entire image, Section–C (3 Marks Questions)
find the minimum length of a plane mirror that he 11. Draw a ray diagram of an astronomical telescope in the
requires. normal adjustment position. State one drawbacks of
4. A ray of light passes through four transparent media this type of telescope.
with refractive indices as shown in 12. A converging lens of refractive index 1.5 and of focal
the figure. The surfaces of all media are parallel. If length 15 cm in air, has the same radii of curvature
the emergent ray CD is parallel to the incident ray for both sides. If it is immersed in a liquid of
AB, then which medium's refractive indices should refractive index 1.7, find the focal length of the lens
be the same? in the liquid.
13. The radii of curvature of the faces of a double convex
lens are 10 cm and 15 cm. If the focal length of the
lens is 12 cm, find the refractive index of the material
of the lens.
14. A ray of light enters from a denser medium into rarer
medium. The speed of light in the rarer medium is
twice that in denser medium. What is the critical
5. A glass lens of refractive index 1.5 is placed in a angle for total internal reflection to take place?
trough of liquid. What must be the refractive index of 15. A concave mirror having the focal length 15 cm,
the liquid in order to mark the lens disappear? forms an image having twice of the linear dimensions
of the object. If the image is virtual, then find the
Section–B (2 Marks Questions) position of the object.
16. Spectacles of power -1.0 dioptre is being used by a
6. A glass slab is immersed in water. Find the critical
person suffering from myopia for distant version. He
angle at glass water interfaces, given aμg = 1.5 and aμw
also needs to use separate reading glass of power +2.0
= 1.33.(Given sin −1 ( 0.885=
) 62° ) dioptres when he turns old. Explain what may have
7. The refractive index of the material of the prism is happened.
3, then find the angle of minimum deviation of the 17. In a compound microscope, an object is placed at a
prism. distance of 1.5 cm from the objective of focal length
8. A fish is a little away below the surface of a lake. If 1.25 cm. If the eyepiece has a focal length of 5 cm
the critical angle is 49°, then the fish could see things and the final image is formed at the near point,
above the water surface within an angular range of estimate the magnifying power of the microscope.
18. Two lenses of power 10 D and –5 D are placed in
θ° . Find θ° .
contact.
(i) Calculate the power of lens combination.
(ii) Where should an object be held from the lens, so
as to obtain a virtual image of magnification 2 ?
19. What is the focal length of a convex lens of focal
length 30 cm in contact with a concave lens of focal
length 20 cm? Is the system a converging or a
diverging lens? Ignore the thickness of the lenses.
20. Focal length of a convex lens of refractive index 1.5
is 2 cm. Find the focal length of the lens when
immersed in a liquid of refractive index of 1.25.
21. Draw a ray diagram of a compound microscope.
Write the expression for its magnifying power.
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 173

22. A ray of monochromatic light is incident on one 25. (a) The magnification produced by the objective lens
refracting face of a prism of angle 75°. It passes and the eye lens of a compound microscope are 25
through the prism and is incident on the other face at and 6 respectively. Find the magnifying power of
the critical angle. If the refractive index of the this microscope.
material of the prism is 2 , then find the angle of (b) In the accompanying diagram, the direct image is
incidence on the first face of the prism. formed by the lens (f = 10 cm) of an object placed
at O and that formed after reflection from the
spherical mirror are formed at the same point O’.
Section–D (4 Marks Questions) What is the radius of curvature of the mirror ?
23. Draw a ray diagram of a reflecting type telescope.
State two advantages of this telescope over a
refracting telescope.

Section–E (5 Marks Questions)

24. A figure divided into squares, each side 1 mm2 , is
being viewed at a distance of 9 cm through a
magnifying lens of focal length 10 cm, held close to
the eye.
(a) Draw a ray diagram showing the formation of the
image.
(b) What is the magnification produced by the lens?
How much is the area of each square in the virtual
image?
(c) What is the angular magnification of the lens ?
174 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section–A (Single Choice Questions) 9. The focal lengths of a converging lens measured for
violet, green and red colors are f V , f G , f R
1. Which of the following pairs can produce erect,
diminished and virtual images? respectively. We will find
(a) Concave lens and convex mirror (a) f G > f R (b) f V < f R
(b) Convex lens and convex mirror (c) f V > f R (d) f V = f R
(c) Convex lens and concave mirror 10. If the central portion of a convex lens is wrapped in
(d) Concave lens and concave mirror black paper as shown in the figure
2. Lens used to remove long sightedness
(hypermetropia) is
(a) Concave lens (b) Plano-concave lens
(c) Convexo-concave lens (d) Convex lens
3. Match the items in List–I with items in List–II and
collect the correct answers from the codes given
below the lists
(a) No image will be formed by the remaining portion
List–I List–II
of the lens
(I) Myopia (A) Bifocal lens
(b) The full image will be formed but it will be less
(II) Hyper-metropia (B) Cylindrical lens
bright
(III) Presbyopia (C) Concave lens
(c) The central portion of the image will be missing
(IV) Astigmation (D) Convex lens
(d) There will be two images each produced by one of
(a) (I) – (D), (II) – (C), (III) – (A), (IV) – (B)
the exposed portions of the lens
(b) (I) – (D), (II) – (C), (III) – (A), (IV) – (B)
11. Magnification produced by a concave lens cannot be
(c) (I) – (B), (II) – (D), (III) – (A), (IV) – (C)
(a) more than one (b) equal to one
(d) (I) – (A), (II) – (B), (III) – (C), (IV) – (D)
(c) less than one (d) equal to or less than 1
4. Rainbows are formed by
12. A lens behaves as a converging lens in air and a
(a) reflection and diffraction
diverging lens in water. The refractive index of the
(b) refraction and scattering
material is
(c) dispersion and total internal reflection
(a) equal to unity (b) equal to 1.33
(d) interference only
(c) between unity and 1.33 (d) greater than 1.33
5. Two lenses have powers + 1D and – 2D respectively.
13. If in a plano-convex lens, radius of curvature of
The power of combination is
convex surface is 10 cm and the focal length of the
(a) + 2D (b) – 3 D
lens is 30 cm, the refractive index of the material of
(c) – 1D (d) + 1D
the lens will be
6. A convex lens of focal length 80 cm and a concave
(a) 1.5 (b) 1.66
lens of focal length 50 cm are combined together.
(c) 1.33 (d) 3
What will be their resulting power
14. To increase magnifying power of telescope, we
(a) + 6.5 D (b) – 6.5 D
should increase
(c) + 7.5 D (d) –0.75 D
(a) the focal length of the objective
7. A convex lens and a concave lens, each having the
(b) the focal length of the eyepiece
same focal length of 25 cm, are put in contact to form
(c) aperture of the objective
a combination of lenses. The power in dioptres of the
(d) aperture of the eyepiece
combination is
15. The angular resolution of a 10 cm diameter telescope
(a) 25 (b) 50
at a wavelength of 5000 Å is of the order of
(c) Infinite (d) zero
(a) 106 rad (b) 10–2 rad
8. Two thin lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are in
(c) 10 rad
–4
(d) 10–6 rad
contact and coaxial. The power of the combinations is
16. A telescope has focal length of objective and
f1 f2 eyepiece as 200 cm and 5 cm respectively. What is
(a) (b)
f2 f1 magnification of a telescope?
f1 + f 2 f1 + f 2 (a) 40 (b) 80
(c) (d) (c) 50 (d) 0.01 N
2 f1f 2
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 175

17. If size of aperture is decreased (c) If the Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
(a) intensity of image is decreased (d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
(b) no effect in formation of image 24. Assertion: If a plane glass slab is placed on the
(c) any of the above letters of different colors, all the letters appear to be
(d) none of these raised up to the same height.
18. In an astronomical telescope, the focal length of the Reason: Different colors have the same wavelengths.
objective is made (a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the
(a) shorter than that of eye piece Reason is a correct explanation of the Assertion.
(b) greater than that of the eye piece (b) If both Assertion and Reason are correct but
(c) half of the eye piece Reason is not a correct explanation of the
(d) equal to that of eye piece Assertion.
19. When light rays are incident on a prism at an angle of (c) If the Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
45°, the minimum deviation is obtained. If refractive (d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
index of the material of prism is 2 , then the angle 25. Assertion: When an object is placed between two
of prism will be plane parallel mirrors, then all the images found are
(a) 30° (b) 40° of equal intensity.
(c) 50° (d) 60° Reason: In case of plane parallel mirrors, only two
20. A convex lens is dipped in a liquid whose refractive images are possible.
index is equal to the refractive index of the lens. Then (a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the
its focal length will Reason is a correct explanation of the Assertion.
(a) become small, but non-zero (b) If both Assertion and Reason are correct but
(b) remain unchanged Reason is not a correct explanation of the
(c) become zero Assertion.
(d) become infinite (c) If the Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
(d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
26. Assertion: Critical angle of light passing from glass
Section–B (Assertion & Reason Questions)
to air is minimum for violet color.
21. Assertion: The stars twinkle while the planets do not.
Reason: The wavelength of blue light is greatest to
Reason: The stars are much bigger in size than the
the light of other colors.
planets.
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the
Reason is a correct explanation of the Assertion.
Reason is a correct explanation of the Assertion.
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are correct but
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are correct but
Reason is not a correct explanation of the
Reason is not a correct explanation of the
Assertion.
Assertion.
(c) If the Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
(c) If the Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
(d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
(d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
27. Assertion: Within a glass slab, a double convex air
22. Assertion: Owls can move freely during night.
bubble is formed. This air bubble behaves like a
Reason: They have a large number of rods on their
converging lens.
retina.
Reason: Refractive index of air is more than the
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the
refractive index of glass.
Reason is a correct explanation of the Assertion.
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are correct but
Reason is a correct explanation of the Assertion.
Reason is not a correct explanation of the
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are correct but
Assertion.
Reason is not a correct explanation of the
(c) If the Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
Assertion.
(d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
(c) If the Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
23. Assertion: Different colors travel with the same
(d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
speed in vacuum.
Reason: Wavelength of light does not depend on the
refractive index of the medium.
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the
Reason is a correct explanation of the Assertion.
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are correct but
Reason is not a correct explanation of the
Assertion.
176 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

28. Assertion: The images formed by total internal 32. The magnification of an image by a convex lens is
reflections are much brighter than those formed by positive only when the object is placed
mirrors or lenses. (a) at its focus F (b) between F and 2F
Reason: There is no loss of intensity in total internal (c) t 2F (d) between F and optical centre
reflection.
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are correct and the Case Study - 2
Reason is a correct explanation of the Assertion. The lens maker’s formula is a relation that connects
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are correct but focal length of a lens to radii of curvature of two
Reason is not a correct explanation of the surfaces of the lens and relative index of the material
Assertion. 1  1 1 
(c) If the Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect. of the lens. It is = ( µ − 1) 
−  , where µ is
f R
 1 R 2 
(d) If both the Assertion and Reason are incorrect.
refractive index of lens material w.r.t. the medium in
Section–C (Case Study Questions) which lens is held. As, µ v > µ r , therefore, f r > f v .
Case Study - 1 Mean focal length of lens for yellow colour is
Refraction Through Lens =f fr × fv .
A convex or converging lens is thicker at the centre
3
than at the edges. It converges a parallel beam of light 33. Focal length of a equiconvex lens of glass µ = in air
on refraction through it. It has a real focus. Convex 2
lens is of three types (i) Double convex lens is 20 cm. The radius of curvature of each surface is
(ii) Plano-convex lens (iii) Concavo-convex lens. (a) 10 cm (b) -10 cm
Concave lens is thinner at the centre than at the (c) 20 cm (d) – 20 cm
edges. It diverges a parallel beam of light on 34. A substance is behaving as convex lens in air and
refraction through it. It has a virtual focus. concave in water, then its refractive index is
(a) greater than air but less than water
29. A object O is placed at a distance 0.3 m from a (b) greater than both air and water
convex lens (focal length 0.2 m) cut into two halves (c) smaller than air
each of which is displaced by 0.0005m as shown in (d) almost equal to water
figure. 35. For a thin lens with radii of curvature R1 and R2,
refractive index n and focal length f, the factor
 1 1 
 −  is equal to
 R1 R 2 
1
(a) (b) f ( n − 1)
f ( n − 1)
( n − 1) n
(c) (d)
What will be the location of the image? f f ( n − 1)
(a) 30 cm right of lens (b) 60 cm right of lens  3
(c) 70 cm left of lens (d) 40 cm left of lens 36. A given convex lens of glass  µ =  can behave as
 2
30. Two thin lenses are in contact and the focal length of
concave when it is held in a medium of µ equal to
the combination is 80 cm. If the focal length of one
lens is 20 cm, the focal length of the other would be: 3
(a) 1 (b)
(a) -26.7 cm (b) 60 cm 2
(c) 80 cm (d) 20 cm 2 7
31. A spherical air bubble is embedded in a piece of (c) (d)
3 4
glass. For a ray of light passing through the bubble, it
behaves like a
(a) converging lens (b) diverging lens
(c) plano-converging lens (d) plano-diverging lens
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 177

Case Study - 3
Optical Fibre 38. A ray of light will undergo total internal reflection
An optical fibre is a thin tube of transparent material inside the optical fibre, if it
that allows light to pass through, without refracted (a) goes from rarer medium to denser medium
into the air or another external medium. It make use (b) is incident at an angle less than the critical angle
of total internal reflection. These fibres are fabricated (c) strikes the interface normally
in such a way that light reflected at one side of the (d) i s incident at an angle greater than the critical
inner surface strikes the other at an angle larger than angle
critical angle. Even, if the fibre is bent, light can 39. If in core, angle of incidence is equal to critical angle,
easily travel along the length. then angle of refraction will be
(a) 0° (b) 45°
(c) 90° (d) 180°
40. In an optical fibre (shown), correct relation for
refractive indices of core and cladding is

37. Which of the following is based on the phenomenon

of total internal reflection of light?
(a) Sparkling of diamond
(b) Optical fibre communication (a) n1 = n2 (b) n1 > n2
(c) Instrument used by doctor for endoscopy (c) n1 < n2 (d) n1 + n2 = 2
(d) All of these
178 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. Draw a ray diagram showing the formation of the (b) Use the ray diagram to obtain the expression for
image by a concave mirror of an object placed its linear magnification. (AI 2012)
beyond its centre of curvature. If the lower half of the 8. For the same value of angle of incidence, the angles
mirror’s reflecting surface is covered, what effect will of refraction in three media A, B and C are 15°, 25°
it have on the image? (AI 2011C) and 35° respectively. In which media would the
2. Use the mirror equation show that velocity of light be minimum? (AI 2012)
(a) An object placed f and 3f of a concave mirror 9. Two thin lenses of power -4D and 2D are placed in
produces a real image beyond 2f. contact coaxially. Find the focal length of the
(b) A convex mirror always produces a virtual image combination. (AI 2012C)
independent of the location of the object. 10. You are given three lenses, L1, L2 and L3 each of
(c) An object placed between the pole and focus of a focal length 20 cm. An object is kept at 40 cm in
concave mirror produces a virtual and enlarged front of L1, as shown. The final real image is formed
image. (AI 2011) at the focus ‘I’ of L3. Find the separations between
3. (a) State the necessary conditions for producing total L1, L2 and L3.
internal reflection of light.
(b) Draw ray diagrams to show how specially
designed prisms make use of total internal
reflection to obtain inverted image of the object
by deviating rays (i) through 90° and (ii) through
180° . (AI 2011)
(AI 2012C)
4. A convex lens made up of glass of refractive index 11. Draw a ray diagram showing the path of a ray of light
1.5 is dipped, in turn, in (i) a medium of refractive entering through a triangular glass prism. Deduce the
index 1.65, (ii) a medium of refractive index 1.33, expression for the refractive index of glass prism in
(a) Will it behave as a converging or a diverging lens terms of the angle of minimum deviation and angle of
in the two cases? the prism. (AI 2012)
(b) How will its focal length change in the two 12. Draw a labelled ray diagram of a reflecting telescope.
media? (AI 2011) Mention its two advantages over the refracting
5. (i) A giant refracting telescope has an objective lens telescope. (AI 2012)
of focal length 15 m. If an eye piece of focal length 13. Explain why both the objective and the eyepiece of a
1.0 cm is used, what is the angular magnification of compound microscope must have short focal lengths.
the telescope? (AI 2012)
(ii) If this telescope is used to view the moon, what is 14. Draw a ray diagram showing the image formation by
the diameter of the image of the moon formed by the a compound microscope when the final image is
objective lens? The diameter of the moon is formed at the near point. (AI 2012)
3.48 × 106 m and the radius of lunar orbit is 15. When red light passing through a convex lens is
3.8 × 108 m . (Delhi 2015, AI 2011) replaced by light of blue colour, how will the focal
6. An object AB is kept in front of a concave mirror as length of the lens change? (AI 2013C)
shown in figure. 16. A convex lens of focal length f1 is kept in contact
with a concave lens of focal length f2. Find the focal
length of the combination. (AI 2013)
17. (a) Small telescope has an objective lens of focal
length 140 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 5.0
cm. Find the magnifying power of the telescope
for viewing distant objects when
(i) Complete the ray diagram showing the image (i) the telescope is in normal adjustment,
formation of the object. (ii) the final image is formed at the least distance
(ii) How will the position and intensity of the image of distinct vision.
be affected if the lower half of the mirror’s (b) Also find the separation between the objective
reflecting surface is painted black? (AI 2012) lens and the eye piece in normal adjustment.
7. (a) Draw a ray diagram for a convex mirror showing (AI 2013C)
the image formation of an object placed anywhere
in front of the mirror.
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 179

18. Draw a labelled ray diagram of a refracting telescope. 24. Two monochromatic rays of light are incident
Define its magnifying power and write the expression normally on the face AB of an isosceles right-angled
for it. Write two important limitations of a refracting prism ABC. The refractive indiecs of the glass prism
telescope over a reflecting type telescope. (AI 2013) for the two rays ‘1’ and ‘2’ are respectively 1.33 and
19. A biconvex lens made of a transparent material of 1.45. Trace the path of these rays after entering the
refractive index 1.25 is immersed in water of prism.
refractive index 1.33. Will the lens behave as a
converging or a diverging lens? Give reason.
(AI 2014)
20. A convex lens of focal length 20 cm is placed
coaxially with a convex mirror of radius of curvature
20 cm. The two are kept at 15 cm from each other. A
point object lies 60 cm in front of the convex lens.
Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the
(AI 2014C)
image by the combination. Determine the nature and
25. Write the conditions for observing a rainbow. Show
position of the image formed. (AI 2014)
by drawing suitable diagrams, how one understands
21. A convex lens of focal length 20 cm is placed
the formation of rainbow.
coaxially with a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm
(AI 2014C)
at a distance of 50 cm apart from each other. A beam
26. Draw a ray diagram to show the image formation by a
of light coming parallel to the principal axis is
combination of two thin convex lenses in contact.
incident on the convex lens. Find the position of the
Obtain the expression for the power of this
final image formed by this combination. Draw the ray
combination in terms of the focal lengths of the
diagram showing the formation of the image.
lenses. (AI 2015)
(AI 2014)
27. (a) A ray PQ of light is incident on the face AB of a
22. A convex lens of focal length 20 cm is placed
glass prism ABC (as shown in the figure) and
coaxially with a convex mirror of radius of curvature
emerged out of the face AC. Trace the path of the
20 cm. The two are kept 15 cm apart. A point object
is placed 40 cm in front of the convex lens. Find the ray. Show that ∠i + ∠e = ∠A + ∠δ , where
position of the image formed by this combination. δ and e denote the angle of deviation and angle of
Draw the ray diagram showing the image formation. emergence respectively.
(AI 2014)
23. (a) A point object is placed in front of a double
convex lens (of refractive index n = n2/n1 with
respect to air) with its spherical faces of radii of
curvature R1 and R2. Show the path of rays due to
refraction at first and subsequently at the second
surface to obtain the formation of the real image
of the object. Hence obtain the lens-maker’s Plot a graph showing the variation of the angle of
formula for a thin lens. deviation as a function of angle of incidence. State
(b) A double convex lens having both faces of the
the condition under which ∠δ is minimum.
same radius of curvature has refractive index 1.55.
(b) Find out the relation between the refractive index
Find out the radius of curvature of the lens
required to get the focal length of 20 cm. ( µ ) of glass prism and ∠A for the case when the
(AI 2014C) angle of prism (A) is equal to the angle of
minimum deviation ( δm ) . Hence obtain the value
of the refractive index for angle of prism A= 60°
.
(AI 2015)
28. Why does bluish colour predominate in a clear sky?
(AI 2015)
29. You are given two converging lenses of focal lengths
1.25 cm and 5 cm to design a compound microscope.
If it is desired to have a magnification of 30, find out
the separation between the objective and the
eyepiece. (AI 2015)
180 RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

30. A small telescope has an objective lens of focal 37. A double convex lens is made of a glass of refractive
length 150 cm and eyepiece of focal length 5 cm. index 1.55, with both faces of the same radius of
What is the magnifying power of the telescope for curvature. Find the radius of curvature required, if the
viewing distant objects in normal adjustment? focal length is 20 cm. (1/3, AI 2017)
If this telescope is used to view a 100 m tall tower 3 38. How does the angle of minimum deviation of a glass
km away, what is the height of the image of the tower prism vary, if the incident violet light is replaced by
formed by the objective lens? (AI 2015) red light? Give reason. (AI 2017)
31. Draw a ray diagram showing the image formation by 39. A ray of light passing from air through an equilateral
a compound microscope. Obtain expression for total glass prism undergoes minimum deviation when the
magnification when the image is formed at infinity. 3
(3/5 AI 2015C) angle of incidence is of the angle of prism.
4
32. (a) Derive the mathematical relation between Calculate the speed of light in the prism.
refractive indices n1 and n2 of two media and (2/5, AI 2017)
radius of curvature R for refraction at a convex 40. (a) Draw a ray diagram showing the formation of
spherical surface. Consider the object to be a point image by a reflecting telescope.
source lying on the particle axis in rarer medium (b) Write two advantages of a reflecting telescope
of refractive index n1 and a real image formed in over a refracting telescope. (AI 2017)
the denser medium of refractive index n2. Hence, 41. (a) Draw a ray diagram depicting the formation of the
derive lens maker’s formula. image by an astronomical telescope in normal
(b) Light from a point source in air falls on a convex adjustment.
spherical glass surface of refractive index 1.5 and (b) You are given the following three lenses. Which
radius of curvature 20 cm. The distance of light two lenses will you use as an eyepiece and as an
source from the glass surface is 100 cm. At which objective to construct an astronomical telescope?
position is the image formed? (AI 2016) Give reason.
33. A ray PQ incident normally on the refracting face BA Lenses Power (D) Aperture (cm)
is refracted in the prism BAC made of material L1 3 8
refractive index 1.5. Complete the path of ray through L2 6 1
the prism.
L3 10 1
(AI 2017)
42. (a) Draw a ray diagram for the formation of image of
compound microscope.
(b) You are given the following three lenses. Which
two lenses will you use as an eyepiece and as an
objective to construct a compound microscope?
Lenses Power (D) Aperture (cm)
From which face will the ray emerge? Justify your
L1 3 8
answer. (AI 2016)
L2 6 1
34. Why does sun appear red at sunrise and sunset?
L3 10 1
(Foreign 2015, AI 2016)
(AI 2017)
35. (i) Draw a labelled ray diagram to obtain the real
image formed by an astronomical telescope in
normal adjustment position. Define its magnifying
power.
(ii) You are given three lenses of power 0.5 D, 4D
and 10 D to design a telescope.
(a) Which lens should he use as objective and
eyepiece? Justify your answer.
(b) Why is the aperture of the objective preferred
to be large? (AI 2016)
36. Monochromatic light of wavelength 589 nm is
incident from air on a water surface. If µ for water is
1.33, find the wavelength, frequency and speed of the
refracted light. (2/3, AI 2017)
RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 181

43. A symmetric biconvex lens of radius of curvature R 47. An object is kept in front of a concave mirror of focal
and made of glass of refractive index 1.5, is placed on length 15 cm. The image formed is real and three
a layer of liquid placed on top of a plane mirror as times the size of the object. Calculate the distance of
shown in the figure. An optical needle with its tip on the object from the mirror. (AI 2019)
the principal axis of the lens is moved along the axis 48. (a) Using the ray diagram for a system of two lenses
until its real, inverted image coincides with the needle of focal length f1 and f2 in contact with each other,
itself. The distance of the needle from the lens is show that the two lens system can be regarded as
measured to be x. On removing the liquid layer and equivalent to a single lens of focal length f, where
repeating the experiment, the distance is found to be 1 1 1
y. Obtain the expression for the refractive index of = + .
f f1 f 2
the liquid in terms of x and y.
Also wire the relation for the equivalent power of
the lens combination.
(b) Determine the position of the image formed by
the lens combination given in the figure.

(AI 2018)
44. The figure shows a ray of light falling normally on (AI 2019)
the face AB of an equilateral glass prism having 49. (a) Plot a graph for angle of deviation as a function of
3 4 angle of incidence for a triangular prism.
index , placed in water of refractive index . Will (b) Derive the relation for the refractive index of the
2 3
this ray suffer total internal reflection on striking the prism in terms of the angle of minimum
face AC? Justify your answer. deviation and angle of prism. (AI 2019)
50. Draw a ray diagram to show the image formation of a
distant object by a refracting telescope. Write the
expression for its angular magnification in terms of
the focal lengths of the lenses used. State the
important considerations required to achieve large
resolution and their consequent limitations. (AI 2019)
(1/3, AI 2018)
45. Explain two advantages of a reflecting telescope over
a refracting telescope. (1/5, AI 2018)
46. A beam of light converges at a point P. Now a convex
lens is placed in the path of the convergent beam at
15 cm from point P. At what point does a beam
converge if the convex lens has a focal length 10 cm?
(AI 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

09
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 183

Chapter at a Glance
1. The Huygens’ principle tells us that each point on a
wavefront is a source of secondary waves, which add
up to give the wavefront at a later time.
2. Huygens’ construction tells us that the new wavefront
is the forward envelope of the secondary waves.
When the speed of light is independent of direction,
the secondary waves are spherical. The rays are then
perpendicular to both the wavefronts and the time of
travel is the same measured along any ray. This
principle leads to the well-known laws of reflection
and refraction.
4. A single slit of width gives a diffraction pattern with a
central maximum. The intensity falls to zero at angle

of ± λ , ± 2λ , with successively weaker secondary

d d
maxima in between.

3. Young’s double slit of separation d gives equally

spaced fringes of angular separation λ/d. The source, Diffraction limits the angular resolution of a telescope
midpoint of the slits, and central bright fringe lie in a to λ/D where D is the diameter. Two stars closer than
straight line. An extended source will destroy the this give strongly overlapping images. Similarly, a
fringes if it subtends angle more than λ/d at the slits. microscope objective subtending angle 2 θ at the
focus, in a medium of refractive index n, will just
separate two objects spaced at a distance λ/(2n sin θ ),
which is the resolution limit of a microscope.

Path difference between the interfering waves meeting

yd
x = d sin θ
at a point P on the screen is given by = 5. Natural light, e.g., from the sun is unpolarized. This
D
means the electric vector takes all possible directions
where x is the position of point P from central
in the transverse plane, rapidly and randomly, during a
maxima.
measurement.
For maxima at P :x = nλ;
where n = 0, ± 1, ± 2, …
( 2n − 1) λ
and For minima at P : x = ;
2
where n = ± 1, ± 2,…
184 WAVE OPTICS

A polaroid transmits only one component (parallel to certain angle of incidence (called the angle of
a special axis). The resulting light is called linearly polarization θP).
polarized or plane polarized. Also μ = tan θp Brewster’s law
For i < θPori > θP
Both reflected and refracted rays becomes partially
polarized. For glass θP ≈ 57o, for water θP ≈ 53o

When this kind of light is viewed through a second

polaroid whose axis turns through 2π, two maxima
and minima of intensity are seen. Polarized light can
also be produced by reflection at a special angle
(called the Brewster angle) and by scattering through
π/2 in the earth’s atmosphere.

6. Malus Law: This law states that the intensity of the

polarized light transmitted through the analyzer varies
as the square of the cosine of the angle between the
plane of transmission of the analyzer and the plane of
the polarizer. If Ιi = Intensity of unpolarized light.
Ii
So I0 = i.e. if an unpolarized light is converted
2
into plane polarized light (say by passing it through a
polaroid or a Nicol-prism), its intensity becomes half
I
and I i cos 2 θ
=
2

7. Brewster’s Law: Brewster discovered that when a

beam of unpolarized light is reflected from a
transparent medium (refractive index = μ ), the
reflected light is completely plane polarized at a
WAVE OPTICS 185

The formula below gives the relation of wavelength of

Solved Examples light in water and the speed and frequency of light,
v
λ=
Example-1 v
Monochromatic light of wavelength 589 nm is incident 2.26 × 108
from air on a water surface. What are the wavelength, ⇒λ=
5.09 × 1014
frequency and speed of (a) reflected, and (b) refracted
light? Refractive index of water is 1.33. ⇒ λ 444.007 × 10−9 m
=
(NCERT) ⇒ λ =444.01mm
Sol. (a) Reflected light?
Wavelength of incident monochromatic light is given Example 2
as, What is the shape of the wavefront in each of the
λ = 589nm = 589 ×109 m following cases:
Speed of light in air is c = 3 × 108 m (a) Light diverging from a point source.
Refractive index of water is μ =1.33 (b) Light emerging out of a convex lens when a point
In this case, the ray will reflect in the same medium as source is placed at its focus.
that of incident ray. Hence, the wavelength, speed, and (c) The portion of the wavefront of light from a
frequency of the reflected ray will be the equal to that distant star intercepted by the Earth.
of the incident ray. (NCERT)
Frequency of light can be given by the relation, Sol. (a) Light diverging from a point source.
c When a light diverges from a point source, the shape
v= of the wavefront in this case is spherical. The
λ
wavefront originating from a point source is shown in
Where,
the given figure.
ν = Frequency of light
c = Speed of light
λ = Wavelength of light
3 × 108
⇒v=
589 × 10−9
⇒ v= 5.09 × 1014 Hz
Hence, the speed, frequency, and wavelength of the
reflected light are
3 × 108 m/s, 5.09 × 1014 Hz and 589nm respectively.
(b) refracted light? Refractive index of water is
1.33.
The frequency of light is independent of the property
(b) Light emerging out of a convex lens when a
of the medium in which it is travelling.
point source is placed at its focus.
Hence, the frequency of the refracted ray in water will
The shape of the wavefront when a light emerging out
be equal to the frequency of the incident light or
of a convex lens when a point source is placed at its
reflected light in air.
focus is a parallel grid. This can be represented as
Frequency of the refracted light ray, ν = 5.09 × 1014 Hz
shown in the given figure.
Speed of light in water is related to the refractive index
of water as given in the formula below:
c
v=
µ
3 × 108
⇒v=
1.33
⇒ v= 2.26 × 108 m/s
186 WAVE OPTICS

(c) The portion of the wavefront of light from a The formula for phase difference can be given as:
distant star intercepted by the Earth. 2π
Phase difference = × Path difference
In this case the portion of the wavefront of light from a λ
distant star intercepted by the Earth is a plane. Since, path difference is λ,
Phase difference is φ = 2π
Example 3 I ' = 2I1 + 2I1 = 4I1
In a Young’s double-slit experiment, the slits are
separated by 0.28 mm and the screen is placed 1.4 m Given,
away. The distance between the central bright fringe K'
I1 = …(1)
and the fourth bright fringe is measured to be 1.2 cm. 4
Determine the wavelength of light used in the λ
When path difference =
experiment. 3
(NCERT) 2π
Sol. Distance between the slits is given as, d = 0.28mm = Phase difference, φ =
3
0.28 × 10-3 m
Hence resultant intensity,
Distance between the slits and the screen, D = 1.4m
2π
Distance between the central fringe and the fourth (n = I R = I 1 + I1 + 2 I1I1 cos
4) fringe, 3
u = 1.2cm = 1.2 × 10-2 m  1
⇒ I R = 2I1 + 2I 2  −  = I1
In case of a constructive interference, the relation for  2
the distance between the two fringes can be given as: Using equation (1), we can state that
D K
u = nλ I R= I1=
d 4
where, Hence, for monochromatic light waves, the intensity of
n = Order of fringes = 4 λ K
light at a point where the path difference is is
λ= Wavelength of light used 3 4
ud units.
λ=
nD
1.2 × 10−2 × 0.28 × 10−3 Example 5
⇒λ=
4 × 1.4 A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths, 650
⇒ λ = 6 × 10−7 nm and 520 nm, is used to obtain interference fringes
in a Young’s double-slit experiment.
⇒ λ =600nm
(a) Find the distance of the third bright fringe on the
Hence, the wavelength of the light is 600nm
screen from the central maximum for wavelength
650 nm.
Example 4
(b) What is the least distance from the central
In Young’s double-slit experiment using
maximum where the bright fringes due to both the
monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the intensity of
wavelengths coincide?
light at a point on the screen where path difference is
[NCERT]
λ, is K units. What is the intensity of light at a point
Sol. (a) Given that, Wavelength of the first light beam,
where path difference is λ/3?
λ1 = 650nm
(NCERT)
Wavelength of second light beam, λ2 = 520nm
Sol. The intensity of the two light waves be I1 and I2. Their
Distance of the slits from the screen = D
resultant intensities can be evaluated as:
Distance between the two slits = d
I ' = I1 + I 2 + 2 I1I 2 cos φ
Distance of the nth bright fringe on the screen from the
Where, central maximum is given by the formula below,
φ = The phase difference between two waves for D
monochromatic light waves, x = nλ1  
d
Since I1 = I2
For the third bright fringe, n = 3
So I ' =2I1 + 2I1 cos φ
WAVE OPTICS 187

D D Example 7
x =3 × 650 × =1950   nm, which is nothing but What is the Brewster angle for air to glass transition?
d d
(Refractive index of glass = 1.5.)
the distance of the third bright fringe on the screen
(NCERT)
from the central maximum.
Sol. Given that,
(b) In this case, let the nth bright fringe due to
Refractive index of glass is given =1.5
wavelength λ2 a n d (n − 1) th bright fringe due to
Brewster angle = θ
wavelength λ1 coincide on the screen. Equate the Brewster angle is associated to refractive index as
conditions for bright fringes as follows: mentioned in the formula below:
nλ2 = (n − 1) λ 1 tanθ = μ
⇒ 520n = 650n − 650 ⇒ θ = tan-1 (1.5) = 56.31°
⇒ 650 = 130n Hence, the Brewster angle for transition from air to
⇒n=5 glass is 56.31° .
Hence, the least distance from the central maximum
can be attained by the relation: Example 8
D Light of wavelength 5000 Å falls on a plane reflecting
x = nλ 2
d surface. What are the wavelength and frequency of the
D D reflected light? For what angle of incidence is the
⇒ x =5 × 520 =2600 nm
d d reflected ray normal to the incident ray?
Note: The value of d and D are not given in the (NCERT)
Sol. Wavelength of incident light is given,
question, hence the exact answer cannot be found.
λ = 5000 Å = 5000 × 10-10 m
Speed of light,
Example 6
In a double-slit experiment the angular width of a c = 3 × 108 m/s
fringe is found to be 0.2° on a screen placed 1 m away. Frequency of incident light is given by the formula,
The wavelength of light used is 600 nm. What will be c
v=
the angular width of the fringe if the entire λ
experimental apparatus is immersed in water? Take 3 × 108
⇒v= = 6 × 1014
refractive index of water to be 4/3. 5000 × 1010
(NCERT) The wavelength and frequency of incident light is
Sol. Given that, equal to that of reflected ray.
Distance of the screen from the slits is given as, D = Therefore, the wavelength of reflected light is 5000Å
1m and its frequency is 6 × 10-14 Hz.
Wavelength of light used, λ1 = 600nm When reflected ray is normal to incident ray, the
Angular width of the fringe in air, θ1 = 0.2° addition of the angle of incidence, given as, ∠i and
Angular width of the fringe in water = θ2 angle of reflection, given as, ∠r is 90°
4 According to the law of reflection, the angle of
Refractive index of water is .
3 incidence is always the same as the angle of reflection.
Refractive index is associated with angular width as: Hence, the sum can be written as:
θ ∠i =∠r =90°
µ= 1
θ2 ⇒ ∠i + ∠i= 90°
3 ⇒ 2∠i = 90°
⇒ θ2 = θ1
4 90°
⇒ ∠i= = 45°
3 2
⇒ θ2 = × 0.2= 0.15°
4 Hence, the angle of incidence for the given condition
Therefore, the angular width of the fringe in this case θ in the question is 45°.
in water will reduce to 0.15°.
188 WAVE OPTICS

Example 9 Example 11
Estimate the distance for which ray optics is good The distance between two slits in Young’s
approximation for an aperture of 4 mm and interference experiment is 0.03 cm. The fourth bright
wavelength 400 nm. fringe is obtained at a distance of 1 cm from the
central fringe on a screen placed at a distance of 1.5
(NCERT)
m from slits. Calculate the wavelength of light used.
Sol. Fresnel’s distance (ZF) can be defined as the distance
Sol. The distance of nth bright from central fringe is,
for which the ray optics is a good approximation. It
nDλ
can be expressed by the relation, yn =
d
a2 y .d
ZF = ∴wavelength λ = n
λ nD
Where, Here yn = 1cm = 1 × 10–2 m, d = 0.03 cm = 0.03 × 10–2
Aperture width is a, m,
Wavelength of light is λ. D = 1.5 m and n = 4
Now, a = 4mm = 4 × 10-3 m
∴λ =
(1×10 ) × ( 0.03 ×10 ) =
−2 −2
30 × 10−7
= 5 × 10−7 m
λ = 400nm = 400 × 10-9 m 4 × 1.5 6
On substitution, magnification,

=ZF
(=
4 × 10 )
−3 2

40m
Example 12
In Young’s experiment, the width of fringes obtained
400 × 10−9 with light of wavelength 6000 Å is 2.0 mm. What
Thus, the distance for which the ray optics is a good will be the fringe width if the entire apparatus is
approximation is 40m. immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.33.
Dλ
Sol. Fringe width β = ...(1)
Example 10 d
In double-slit experiment using light of wavelength When apparatus is immersed in liquid, the wavelength
600 nm, the angular width of a fringe formed on a of light changes while D and d remain unchanged. If λ’
is wavelength of light in liquid, then
distant screen is 0.1º. What is the spacing between the
λ
two slits? λ '=
(NCERT) n
Sol. Wavelength of light used is given as, Dλ '
New fringe width, β ' = ...(2)
λ = 600nm = 600 × 10-9m d
Angular width of fringe is, Dividing (2) by (1), we get
β' λ' λ / n 1
π 3.14 ∴ = ==
θ= 0.1=° 0.1× = rad β λ λ n
180 1800
β
Angular width of a fringe is related to slit spacing (d) ∴ β' =
as: n
Here β = 2.0 mm
λ
θ= 2.0
d ∴ = β' = mm 1.5mm
1.33
λ
⇒d=
θ
600 × 10−9
⇒ d= = 3.44 × 10−4 m
3.14
1800
Hence, the spacing between the slits is 3.44 × 10-4 m.
WAVE OPTICS 189

Example 13 (b) When screen is moved away from the slits, D

In Young’s double slit experiment, using light of Dλ
wavelength 400 m, interference fringes of width ‘X’ increases so fringe width β = increases.
d
are obtained. The wavelength of light is increased to
600 nm and the separation between the slits is halved.
Example 15
If one wants the observed fringe width on the screen
A slit of width ‘a’ is illuminated by light of
to be same in the two cases, find the ratio of the
wavelength, 700 nm. What will be the value of slit
distance between the screen and the plane of
width ‘a’ when
interfering sources with the two arrangements.
(a) first minimum falls at an angle of diffraction 30° ?
Dλ D λ (b) first maximum falls at an angle of diffraction 30° ?
Sol. X = 1 1 or 2 2
d1 d2 λ
Sol. (a) For first minimum, sin θ1 =
D1λ1 D 2 λ 2 a
Given X = X’ ⇒ =
d1 d2 λ
⇒ a=
D 2 λ1 d 2 sin θ1
= .
D1 λ 2 d1
d1 d 1 Here λ = 700 nm = 7.00 × 10–7 m, θ1 = 30°
Given λ1 = 400 nm, λ2 = 600 nm, d2 = ⇒ 2 = 7.00 × 10−7 7.00 × 10−7
2 d1 2 =∴a = = 14 × 10−7
sin 30° 0.5
D 2  400 nm   1  1
∴ =   × = = 1.4 ×10 –6 m
D1  600 nm   2  3
3λ
That is, new distance of screen from sources should be (b)For first maximum sin θ '1 =
2a
1
of its initial value. 3λ 3 × 7.00 × 10−7
3 ∴ a= = = 2.1 × 10–6 m
2sin θ '1 2 × sin 30°
Example 14
In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits 0.15 Example 16
mm apart are illuminated by monochromatic light of Light of wavelength 500 nm falls, from a distant
wavelength 450 nm. The screen is 1.0 m away from source, on a slit 0.50 mm wide. Find the distance
the slits. between the two dark bands, on either side of the
(a) Find the distance of second (i) bright fringe (ii) central bright band of the diffraction pattern
dark fringe, from the central maximum. observed, on a screen placed 2 m from the slits.
(b) How will the fringe pattern change if the screen Sol. The distance between two dark bands on either side of
is moved away from the slits. central bright bands is equal to the total width of bright
Sol. band.
(a) Given d = 0.15 mm = 0.15 × 10–3 m 2Dλ
λ = 450 nm = 450 × 10–9 m β0 =
a
D = 1.0 m
Given D = 2 m, λ = 500 nm = 500 × 10–9 m,
(i) Distance of second bright maximum from
a = 0.50 mm = 0.50 × 10–3 m
central maximum (n = 2) (from relation yn =
n Dλ 2 × 2 × 500 × 10−9
) ∴ β0 = = 4 × 10–3 m = 4 mm
d 0.50 × 10−3
2Dλ 2 × 1.0 × 450 × 10−9
y2
= =
d 0.15 × 10−3
m = 6 × 10–3 = 6 mm
(ii) Distance of second dark fringe from central
maximum (n = 2) [from relation yn =
 1  Dλ
n −  ]
 2 d
−9
 1  1.0 × 450 × 10
y '2 =  2 −  ×
 2 0.15 × 10−3
m = 4.5 × 10 –3 m = 4.5 mm
190 WAVE OPTICS

Example 17 Example 19
10 Light of wavelength 550 nm. is incident as parallel In Young’s double slit experiment the slits are
beam on a slit of width 0.1 mm. Find the angular separated by 0.28 mm and the screen is placed 1.4 m
width and the linear width of the principal maximum away. The distance of 4th bright fringe is measured to
in the resulting diffraction pattern on a screen kept at be 1.2 cm from center of screen. Determine the
a distance of 1.1 m from the slit. Which of these wavelength of light used in this experiment.
widths would not change if the screen were moved to Sol. Given d = 0.28 mm = 0.28 × 10–3 m, D = 1.4 m
a distance of 2.2 m from the slit? Position of n th bright fringe from central fringe is
Sol. Given λ = 550 nm = 5.50 × 10–7 m, nDλ
a = 0.1 mm = 0.1 × 10–3 m, D = 1.1 m yn =
d
Angular half width of principal maximum, Here n = 4, y4 = 1.2 cm = 1.2 × 10–2 m
λ 5.50 × 10−7 y .d
θ= = ⇒ Wavelength λ = 4
a 0.1× 10−3 4D
= 5.5 × 10–3 radians
Total angular width = 2θ = 11 × 10–3 radians =
(1.2 ×10 m ) × ( 0.28 ×10 m )
−2 −3

Total linear width, 4 × 1.4

= D × 2θ = 6 × 10–7 m = 600 nm
= 1.1 × 11 × 10–3 m = 12.1 mm
The angular width would not change. Example 20
A parallel beam of light of wavelength 500 nm falls on
Example 18 a narrow slit and the resulting diffraction pattern is
Two polaroid’s are set in crossed positions. A third observed on a screen 1 metre away. It is observed that
polaroid is placed between the two making an angle θ the first minimum is at a distance of 2.5 mm from the
with the pass axis of the first polaroid. Write the centre of the screen, find the width of the slit.
expression of the intensity of light transmitted from the Sol. Condition for minima for diffraction pattern due to a
second polaroid. In what orientations will the single slit is
transmitted intensity be (i) minimum and (ii) a sin θ = nλ
maximum ? For first order minimum n = 1
Sol. Let intensity of incident unpolarized light on first For small value of θ,
polaroid be I0. y
sin θ = tan θ =
D
y
∴ a = λ
D
λD 500 × 10−9 × 1 5
Intensity of light transmitted through 1st polaroid P1 is ⇒ a= = = × 10−4 =0.2 mm
y 2.5 × 10−3 2.5
I
I1 = 0
2 Example 21
Intensity of light transmitted through polaroid P3 is What is Brewster’s angle for air to glass transition ?
I0 Refractive index of glass = 1.5.
= I2 cos 2 θ
2 Sol. From Brewster’s law
Angle between pass-axis of P3 and P2 is (90 – θ) n = tan ip
∴ Intensity of light transmitted through polaroid P2 Given n = 1.5
is Brewster’s angle, ip = tan–1 n = tan1 (1.5) = 56.3°
I 
= I3 I 2 cos 2 (=
90 − θ )  0 cos 2 θ  sin 2 θ
2 
I0 I
= )2 0 sin 2θ
( 2 cos θ sin θ=
8 8
(i) Intensity I3 will be minimum, when
sin 2θ = 0 ⇒ θ = 0°
(ii) Intensity I3 will be maximum when
sin 2θ = 1 ⇒ θ = 45°
WAVE OPTICS 191

Example-22 Example 24
State two conditions for sustained interference of light. Two slits in Young’s double slit experiment are
Also write the expression for the fringe width. illuminated by two different lamps emitting light of
Sol. Condition for sustained interference : same wavelength. Will you observe the interference
(i) The interfering sources must be coherent i.e. pattern ? Justify your answer.
source must have same frequency and constant Sol. The light emitted by different lamps is not coherent, so
initial phase. the waves emitted by source can not produce
(ii) Interfering waves must have same or nearly interference.
same amplitude, so that there may be contrast
between maxima and minima. Example 25
Dλ If a light beam shows no intensity variation when
Fringe width β = transmitted through a polaroid which is rotated; does
d
where D = distance between slits and screen. it mean that the light is unpolarized ? Explain briefly.
d = separation between slits. Sol. Yes, the incident light (of intensity I0) is unpolarized.
Reason : If incident light is unpolarized, the intensity
λ = wavelength of light
of transmitted light through a polaroid is always I0/2,
which is constant.
Example-23
But if incident light is polarised, the intensity
Two identical coherent waves, each of intensity I, are
producing an interference pattern. Find the value of variation I = I0 cos2 θ, necessarily takes place.
the resultant intensity at a point of
(i) constructive interference and
(ii) destructive interference.
Sol. Resultant intensity at any point having a phase
difference φ is
I R = I1 + I 2 + 2 I1 I 2 cos φ
Here, I1 = I2 = I
∴ I R = I + I + 2 I.I cos φ = 2I + 2I cos φ
(i)At a point of constructive interference
φ = 2nπ (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
⇒ cos φ = 1
∴ I max = 2I + 2I = 4I

(ii)At a point of destructive interference

π
=φ (2n − 1)
2
⇒cos φ = 0
Imin = 2I – 2I = 0
192 WAVE OPTICS

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section–A (One Mark Questions) 10. Two Nicols are oriented with these principal planes
1. State the reason why two independent sources of light making an angle of 60°. Find the percentage of
cannot be considered as coherent sources. incident unpolarised light which passes through the
2. Draw a diagram to show refraction of a plane wave system.
front incident in a convex lens and hence draw the
refracted wave front. Section–C (Three Marks Questions)
3. Differentiate between a ray and a wave front. 11. A double slit experiment is performed with light of
4. In Young's experiment the monochromatic light is wavelength 500 nm. A thin film of thickness 2μm and
used to illuminate two slits A and B as shown in refractive index 1.5 is introduced in the path of the
figure. Interference fringes are observed on a screen upper beam. Then find the new location of the central
placed in front of the slits. Now a thin glass plate is maximum.
placed normally in the path of beam coming from the 12. (i) State the principle on which the working of an
slit A, then what changes will be observed in the optical fiber is based.
fringe width? (ii) What are the necessary conditions for this
phenomenon to occur?
13. State one feature by which the phenomenon of
interference can be distinguished from that of
diffraction.
A parallel beam of light of wavelength 600 nm is
incident normally on a slit of width ‘a’. If the distance
between the slits and the screen is 0.8 m and the
distance of 2nd order maximum from the centre of the
5. Find the angular resolution of a 10 cm diameter screen is. 15 mm, calculate the width of the slit.
o
14. Explain how Corpuscular theory predicts the speed of
telescope at a wavelength of 5000 A .
light in a medium, say, water, to be greater than the
speed of light in vacuum. Is the prediction confirmed
Section–B (Two Marks Questions) by experimental determination of the speed of light in
6. In a single slit diffraction pattern, the distance water? If not, which alternative picture of light is
between the first minima on the left and the first consistent with experiment?
minima on the right is 5 mm. The screen on which the 15. In Young’s double slit experiment, a mica slit of
diffraction pattern is displayed is at a distance of 80 thickness t and refractive index μ is introduced in the
cm from the slit. The wavelength is 6000 Å. Then find ray from the first source S1. By how much distance the
the slit width. fringes pattern will be displaced?
7. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance 16. In Young's double-slit experiment, the intensity of
between two slits is halved and the distance between light at a point on the screen where the path difference
the screen and slit is made three times. Then, find the λ is K, (λ being the wavelength of light used). Then
new width of the fringe. find the intensity at a point where the path difference is
8. Two coherent sources of different intensities send λ
waves which interfere. The ratio of maximum intensity .
4
to the minimum intensity is 25. Then find the ratio of
17. The distance between two sources is 0.1 mm in
intensities of the sources.
Young’s double slit interference experiment. The
9. In Young’s double slit experiment, the aperture screen
distance of the screen from the sources can be
distance is 2 m. The slit width is 1 mm and light of 600
mentioned as 20 cm. Wavelength of light used will be
nm is used. If a thin plate of glass ( µ = 1.5) of o
thickness 0.06 mm is placed over one of the slits, then 5460 A . Then what will the angular position of the
find the lateral displacement of the fringes that will first dark fringe?
take place there.
WAVE OPTICS 193

18. A beam of light of λ =600nm from a distance source Section–E (Five Marks Questions)
falls on a single slit 1 mm wide and the resulting 24. Answer the following questions:
diffraction pattern is observed on a screen away. (a) In a single slit diffraction experiment, the width of
Then find the distance between first dark fringes on the slit is made double the original width. How
either side of the central bright fringes. does this affect the size and intensity of the central
19. By the use of sodium light (λ = 5898 Å, 92 fringes are diffraction band?
visible in the Young’s double slit experiment. When (b) In what way is diffraction from each slit related to
o the interference pattern in a double-slit experiment?
the mentioned color where λ =5461A has been used. (c) When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path
Then how many fringes will be seen? of light from a distant source, a bright spot is seen
20. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity at a at the centre of the shadow of the obstacle. Explain
λ why?
point where the path difference is ( λ being the
6 (d) Two students are separated by a 7 m partition wall
wavelength of light used) is I. If I0 denotes the in a room 10 m high. If both light and sound waves
I can bend around obstacles, how is it that the
maximum intensity, then find the value of . students are unable to see each other even though
I0
they can converse easily.
21. In a Young’s double slit experiment, one of the slit is
(e) Ray optics is based on the assumption that light
covered with a transparent sheet of thickness 36 × 10–3
travels in a straight line. Diffraction effects
cm due to which position of central fringe shifts to a
(observed when light propagates through small
position originally occupied by 30th bright fringe. Find
apertures/slits or around small obstacles) disprove
the refractive index of the sheet, if λ = 6000Å.
this assumption. Yet the ray optics assumption is so
22. Two polaroids are oriented with their planes
commonly used in understanding location and
perpendicular to incident light and transmission axis
several other properties of images in optical
making an angle of 30° with each other. What fraction
instruments. What is the justification?
of incident unpolarised light is transmitted?
25. (a) What are Polaroids and how are they used?
(b) What is Malus Law?
Section–D (Four Marks Questions)
23. (a) State two conditions required for obtaining
coherent sources.
(b) In Young’s arrangement to produce interference
pattern, show that dark and bright fringes
appearing on the screen are equally spaced.
(c) In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are 2
mm apart and are illuminated with a mixture of
two wavelengths λ0 = 750 nm and λ = 900 nm.
Find the minimum distance from the common
central bright fringe on a screen 2m from the slits
where a bright fringe from one interference
pattern coincides with a bright fringe from the
other.
194 WAVE OPTICS

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section–A (Single Choice Questions) 9. In Young’s double slit experiment, the phase
1. The Huygens’s concept of the secondary wave, difference between the light waves reaching third
(a) Will allow us to find the focal length of a thick lens bright fringe from the central fringe will be (λ = 6000
(b) A geometrical way in order to calculate a Å)
wavefront. (a) Zero (b) 2π
(c) Has been used to find out the velocity of light (c) 4π (d) 6π
(d) Has been used to describe polarization 10. A Young’s double slit experiment uses a
2. The corpuscular theory of light which is a postulation monochromatic source. The shape of the interference
by Newton which is based on, fringes formed on a screen
(a) Newton’s rings (a) Straight line (b) parabola
(b) The rectilinear propagation of light (c) Hyperbola (d) circle
(c) The color through thin films 11. A monochromatic beams of light is used for the
(d) The dispersion of white light into colors. formation of fringes on the screen by illuminating the
3. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference, we two slits in the Young’s double slit mica is interposed
require two sources which emit radiation in the path of one of the interfering beams then
(a) Of the same frequency & having a definite phase
relationship
(b) Of nearly the same frequency
(c) Of the same frequency
(d) Of different wavelengths
4. Interference is possible in
(a) Light waves only
(b) Sound waves only
(c) Both light and sound waves
(d) Neither light nor sound waves. (a) The fringe width increases
5. If the ratio of maximum and minimum intensities of an (b) The fringe width decreases
interference pattern is 36 : 1, then the ratio of (c) The fringe width remains the same but the pattern
amplitudes of the two interfering waves will be shifts
(a) 3 : 7 (b) 7 : 4 (d) The fringe pattern disappears
(c) 4 : 7 (d) 7 : 5 12. If white light is used in Young’s double slit
6. When viewed in white light, soap bubbles show colors experiment
because of (a) no interference pattern is formed
(a) Interference (b) scattering (b) white fringes are formed
(c) Diffraction (d) dispersion (c) central bright fringe is white
7. Interference was observed in the interference chamber (d) central bright fringe is coloured
where air was present. Now the chamber is evacuated, 13. Diffraction and interference indicate
and if the same light is used, a careful observer will (a) Wave nature (b) particle nature
see (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) none of the above
(a) No interference 14. A diffraction pattern is obtained using a beam of red
(b) Interference with brighter bands light. What happens if the red light is replaced by blue
(c) Interference with dark bands light?
(d) Interference with larger width (a) No change
8. In Young’s double-slit experiment the fringe width is (b) Diffraction bands become narrower and crowded
β. If entire arrangement is placed in a liquid of together
refractive index n, the fringe width becomes (c) Bands become broader and farther apart
(d) Bands disappear
β
(a) (b) nβ
n +1
(c) β/n (d) β/n – 1
WAVE OPTICS 195

15. The main difference in the phenomenon of 20. When unpolarized light is incident on a plane glass
interference and diffraction is that plate at Brewster’s (polarizing) angle, then which of
(a) Diffraction is due to interaction of light from the the following statements is correct?
same wave front whereas interference is the (a) Reflected and refracted rays are completely
interaction of waves from two isolated sources. polarized with their planes of polarization parallel
(b) Diffraction is due to the interaction of light from to each other.
the same wave front, whereas the interference is the (b) Reflected and refracted rays are completely
interaction of two waves derived from the same polarized with their planes of polarization
source. perpendicular to each other
(c) Diffraction is due to interaction of waves derived (c) The reflected light is plane polarized but
from the same sources, whereas the interference is transmitted light is partially polarized
the bending of light from the same wave front. (d) The reflected light is partially polarized but
(d) Diffraction is caused by reflected waves from a refracted light is plane polarized.
source whereas interference caused is due to
refraction of waves from a surface. Section–B (Assertion & Reason Questions)
16. Light waves can be polarized because they
21. Assertion (A): In interference all the fringes are of
(a) Have high frequencies
same width.
(b) Have short wavelength
Reason (R): In interference fringe width is
(c) Are transverse
independent of position of the fringe.
(d) Can be reflected
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
17. An unpolarised beam of intensity I0 falls on a polaroid.
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
The intensity of the emergent light is
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason
I is not the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(a) 0 (b) I0
2 (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
I (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
(c) 0 (d) zero
4 22. Assertion (A): For best contrast between maxima and
18. Choose the correct statement minima in the interference pattern of Young’s double
(a) The Brewster’s angle is independent of wavelength slit experiment, the intensity of light emerging out of
of light. the two slits should be equal.
(b) The Brewster’s angle is independent of the nature Reason (R): The intensity of interference pattern is
of the reflecting surface. proportional to square of amplitude.
(c) The Brewster’s angle is different for different (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
wavelengths. Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(d) Brewster’s angle depends on wavelength but not on (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason
the nature of the reflecting surface. is not the correct explanation of the Assertion.
19. When unpolarised light beam is incident from air onto (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
glass (n = 1.5) at the polarizing angle (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
(a) reflected beam is polarized 100% 23. Assertion (A): Interference obeys the law of
(b) reflected and refracted beams are partially conservation of energy.
polarized Reason (R): The energy is redistributed in case of
(c) the reason for option (a) is that almost all the interference.
light is reflected (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(d) All of the above Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason
is not the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
196 WAVE OPTICS

24. Assertion (A): A ray of light falls on a transparent 28. Assertion: Radio waves can be polarized.
slab of µ =1.732 . If reflected and refracted light is Reason: Radio waves are transverse in nature.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
mutually perpendicular. The angle of incidence is 60o. Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
Reason: It follows Brewster’s law, tan θp =µ; where (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason
θp is polarizing angle. is not the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason Section–C (Case Study Questions)
is not the correct explanation of the Assertion. Case Study - 1
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. Intensity of Interference
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. If double slit apparatus is immersed in a liquid of
25. Assertion: In Young’s experiment, the fringe width refractive index, µ the wavelength of light reduces to
for dark fringes is different from that for bright fringes. β
Reason: If Young’s double slit experiment, is λ ' and fringe width also reduces to β ' = .
µ
performed with a source of white light and then only
The given figure shows a double-slit experiment in
dark and white colored bright fringes are observed.
which coherent monochromatic light of wavelength λ
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. from a distant source is incident upon the two slits,
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason each of width w(w >> λ ) and the interference pattern
is not the correct explanation of the Assertion. is viewed on a distant screen. A thin piece of glass of
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. thickness t and refractive index n is placed between
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. one of the slit and the screen, perpendicular to the light
26. Assertion: A thin mica sheet of thickness 2 × 10−6 m path

2
and refractive index µ = is introduced in the path of
3
one of the waves. The wavelength of wave used is
o
5000 A . The central bright maximum will shift by 2
fringes.
29. In Young’s double slit interference pattern, the fringe
Reason: Shift in number of fringes is given by
width
( µ − 1) t (a) can be changed only by changing the wavelength
(n) = .
λ of incident light
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the (b) can be changed only by changing the separation
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. between the two slits
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason (c) can be changed wither by changing the wavelength
is not the correct explanation of the Assertion. or by changing the separation between two sources
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. (d) is a universal constant and hence cannot be
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. changed
27. Assertion: When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in 30. If the width w of one of the slits is increased to 2w,
the path of light from some distance, a bright spot is they become the amplitude due to slit
seen at the centre of shadow of the obstacle. (a) 1.5 a (b) a/2
Reason: Destructive interference occurs at the centre (c) 2a (d) no change
of the shadow. 31. In YDSE, let A and B be two slits. Films of thickness
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the tA and tB and refractive indices mA and mB are placed
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. in front of A and B, respectively. If µ A t A =µB t B ,
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason then the central maxima will
is not the correct explanation of the Assertion. (a) not shift (b) shift towards A
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. (c) shift towards B
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
WAVE OPTICS 197

(d) shift towards A if t B = t A and shift towards B if (d) diffraction bands become narrower and crowder
tB < tA . together.
36. To observe diffraction, the size of the obstacle
32. In Young’s double slit experiment, a third slit is made
(a) should λ / 2 , where λ is the wavelength
in between the double slits. Then
(b) should be of the order of wavelength.
(a) fringes unequal width are formed
(c) has no relation to wavelength
(b) contrast between bright and dark fringes is reduced
(d) should be much larger than the wavelength.
(c) intensity of fringes totally disappears
(d) only bright light is observed on the screen.
Case Study - 3
Interference of Light Waves and Young’s
Case Study - 2
Experiment
Diffraction at a Single Slit (Fraunhofer)
Interference is based on the superposition principle.
When light from a monochromatic source is incident
According to this principle, at a particular point in the
on a single narrow slit, it gets diffracted and a pattern
medium, the resultant displacement produced by a
of alternate bright and dark fringes is obtained on
number of waves is the vector sum of the
screen, called “Diffraction Patters” of single slit. In
displacements produced by each of the waves.
diffraction pattern of single slit, it is found that
If two sodium lamps illuminate two pinholes S1 and
(I) Central bright fringe is of maximum intensity and
S2, the intensities will add up and no interference
the intensity of any secondary bright fringe decreases
fringes will be observed on the screen.
with increase in its order.
Here the source undergeos abrupt phase change in
(II) Central bright fringe is twice as wide as any other
times of the order of 10-10 seconds.
secondary bright of dark fringe.

37. Two coherent sources of intensity 10 W/m2 and

33. A single slit of width 0.1 mm is illuminated by a 25W/m2 interfere to form fringes. Find the ratio of
o
parallel beam of light of wavelength 6000 A and maximum intensity to minimum intensity.
diffraction bands are observed on a screen 0.5 m from (a) 15.54 (b) 16.78
the slit. The distance of the third dark band from the (c) 19.72 (d) 18.39
central bright band is 38. Which of the following does not show interference?
(a) 3 mm (b) 1.5 mm (a) Soap bubble (b) Excessively thin film
(c) 9 mm (d) 4.5 mm (c) A thick film (d) Wedge shaped film
34. In Fraunhofer diffraction pattern, slit width is 0.2 mm 39. The maximum number of possible interference
and screen is at 2 m away from the lens. If wavelength maxima for slit separation equal to twice the
o wavelength in Young’s double-slit experiment, is
of light used is 5000 A then the distance between the (a) infinite (b) five
first minimum one either side the central maximum is (c) three (d) zero
(a) 10-1 m (b) 10-2m 40. The resultant amplitude of a vibrating particle by the
−2
(c) 2 × 10 m −1
(d) 2 × 10 m  π
superposition of the two waves= y1 a sin ωt +  and
35. A diffraction pattern is obtained by using a beam of  3
red light. What will happen, if the red light is replaced y 2 a sin ωt is
=
by the blue light?
(a) a (b) 2a
(a) bands disappear
(b) bands become broader and farther apart (c) 2a (d) 3a
(c) no change will take place
198 WAVE OPTICS

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. State Huygens principle of diffraction of light 8. Laser light of wavelength 640 nm incident on a pair of
(AI 2011C) slits produces an interference pattern in which the
2. Using Huygen’s principle draw a diagram showing bright fringes are separated by 7.2 mm. Calculate the
how a plane wave gets refracted when it is incident on wavelength of another source of light which produces
the surface separating a rarer medium from a denser interference fringes separated by 8.1 mm using same
medium. Hence verify Snell’s law of refraction. arrangement. Also find the minimum value of the
(AI 2011C) order (n) of bright fringe of shorter wavelength which
3. Laser light of wavelength 630 nm incident on a pair of coincides with that of the longer wavelength.
sits produces an interference pattern in which the (AI 2012C)
bright fringes are separated by 7.2 mm. Calculate the 9. (a) In Young’s double slit experiment, derive the
wavelength of another source of laser light which condition for (i) constructive interference and (ii)
produces interference fringes separated by 8.1 mm destructive interference at a point on the screen.
using same pair of slits. (AI 2011C) (b) A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths,
4. (a) State the importance of coherent sources in the 800 nm and 600 nm is used to obtain the
phenomenon of interference. interference fringes in a Young’s double slit
(b) In Young’s double slit experiment to produce experiment on a screen placed 1.4 m away. If the
interference pattern, obtain the conditions for two slits are separated by 0.28 mm, calculate the
constructive and destructive interference. Hence least distance from the central bright maximum
deduce the expression for the fringe width. where the bright fringes of the two wavelengths
(c) How does the fringe width get affected, if the entire coincide. (AI 2012)
experimental apparatus of Young’s immersed in 10. How does the angular separation between fringes in
water? (AI 2011C) single-slit diffraction experiment change when the
 o  distance of separation between the slit and screen is
5. Yellow light  λ =6000 A  illuminates a single slit of doubled. (AI 2012)
 
 o 
width 1× 10−4 m . Calculate the distance between two 11. Yellow light  λ =6000 A  illuminates a single slit of
 
dark lines on either side of the central maximum, when
the diffraction pattern is viewed on a screen kept 1.5 m width 1× 10−4 m . Calculate (i) the distance between
away from the slit. (AI 2011C) two dark lines on either side of the central maximum,
6. The velocity of a certain monochromatic light, in a when the diffraction pattern is viewed on a screen kept
given transparent medium is 2.25 × 108 m / s . What is 1.5 m away from the slit; (ii) the angular spread of the
the (a) critical angle of incidence, (b) polarizing angle first diffraction minimum. (AI 2012)
for this medium? (AI 2011C) 12. Define the resolving power of a microscope. Write two
7. (a) Explain, with the help of diagram, how plane factors by which resolving power can be increased.
polarised light is obtained by scattering. (2/3, AI 2012C)
(b) Between two polaroid’s placed in crossed position 13. What would be the effect on the resolving power of the
a third polaroid makes an angle of 30° with the axis telescope if its objective lens is immersed in a
transparent medium of higher refractive index?
of the first polaroid. Find intensity of transmitted
(2/3, AI 2012C)
light from the system assuming I0 to be the
14. In what way is plane polarised light different from an
intensity of polarised light obtained from the first
unpolarised light? (AI 2012C)
polaroid.
15. What does a polaroid consist of? Using a simple
(AI 2011C)
polaroid, show that light waves are transverse in
nature. (AI 2012C)
WAVE OPTICS 199

16. (a) How does an unpolarized light incident on a 21. (a) Two monochromatic waves emanating from two
polaroid get polarized? coherent sources have the displacements
Describe briefly, with the help of a necessary diagram, represented by
the polarization of light by reflection from a = y1 a cos ωt and =y 2 a cos ( ωt + φ )
transparent medium.
where φ is the phase difference between two
(b) Two polarods ‘A’ and ‘B’ are kept in crossed
position. How should a third polaroid ‘C’ be placed displacements. Show that the resultant intensity at a
between them so that the intensity of polarized light point due to their superposition is given by
transmitted by polaroid B reduces to 1/8th of the φ
I = 4I0 cos 2 , where I0 = a 2 .
intensity of unpolarized light incident on A? 2
(AI 2012) (b) Hence obtain the conditions for constructive and
17. (a) Write the conditions under which light sources can destructive interference. (AI 2014)
be said to be coherent. 22. (a) In Young’s double slit experiment, describe briefly
(b) Why is it necessary to have coherent sources in how bright and dark fringes are obtained on the
order to produce an interference pattern? screen kept in front of a double slit. Hence obtain
(AI 2013C) the expression for the fringe width.
18. In a modified set-up of Young’s double slit (b) The ratio of the intensities at minima to the
experiment, it is given that SS2 − SS1 = λ / 4 , i.e., the maxima in the Young’s double slit experiment is 9
: 25. Find the ratio of the widths of the two slits.
source ‘S’ is not equidistant from the slits S1 and S2.
(AI 2014)
23. (a) Using a phenomenon of polarisation, show how
transverse nature of light can be demonstrated.
(b) Two polaroids P1 and P2 are placed with their pass
axes perpendicular to each other. Unpolarised light
of intensity I0 is incident on P1. A third polaroid P3
is kept in between P1 and P2 such that its pass axis
(a) Obtain the conditions for constructive and
destructive interference at any point P on the screen makes an angle of 30° with that of P1. Determine
in terms of the path difference =
δ S2 P − S1P . the intensity of light transmitted through P1 , P2 and

(b) Does the observed central bright fringe lie above or P3. (AI 2014)
below ‘O’? Give reason to support your answer. 24. Use Huygens principle to show how a plane wavefront
(AI 2013C) propagates from a denser to rarer medium. Hence
19. A parallel beam of light of 500 nm falls on a narrow verify Snell’s law of refraction (AI 2015)
slit and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on 25. (a) Define a wavefront. How is it different from a ray?
a screen 1 m away. It is observed that the first (b) Depict the shape of a wavefront in each of the
minimum is at a distance of 2.5 mm from the centre of following cases.
the screen. Calculate the width of the slit. (AI 2013) (i) Light diverging from point source,
20. (a) What is linearly polarized light? Describe briefly (ii) Light emerging out of a convex lens when a point
using a diagram how sunlight is polarised. source is placed at its focus.
(b) Unpolarised light is incident on a polaroid. How (iii) Using Huygen’s construction of secondary
would the intensity of transmitted light change wavelets, draw a diagram showing the passage of
when the polaroid is rotated? (AI 2013) a plane wavefront from a denser into a rarer
medium. (AI 2015)
26. (a) The ratio of the widths of two slits in Young’s
double slit experiment is 4 : 1.
Evaluate the ratio of intensities at maxima and
minima in the interference pattern.
(b) Does the appearance of bright and dark fringes in
the interference pattern violate, in any way,
conservation of energy? Explain (AI 2015)
200 WAVE OPTICS

27. (a) Consider two coherent sources S1 and S2 producing 31. Explain the following giving reasons:
monochromatic waves to produce interference (i) When monochromatic light is incident on a surface
pattern. Let the displacement of the wave produces separating two media, the reflected and refracted
by S1 be given by light both have the same frequency as the incident
=Y1 a cos ωt frequency.
and the displacement by S2 be (ii) When light travels from a rarer to a denser
medium, the speed decreases. Does this decrease in
Y1 a cos ( ωt + φ )
=
speed imply a reduction in the energy carried by
Find out the expression for the amplitude of the the wave?
resultant displacement at a point and show that the (iii) In the wave picture of light, intensity of light is
intensity at that point will
= be I 4a 2 cos 2 φ / 2 . determined by the square of the amplitude of the
Hence establish the conditions for constructive and wave. What determined the intensity in the photon
destructive interference. picture of light? (AI 2016)
(b) What is the effect of the interference fringes in 32. Define wavefront. Use Huygen’s principal to verify
Young’s double slit experiment when (i) the width the laws of refraction (3/5, AI 2017)
of the source slit is increased; (ii) the 33. Draw the intensity pattern of single slit diffraction and
monochromatic source is replaced by a source of double slit interference. Hence, state two difference
white light? (AI 2015) between interference and difference patterns.
28. State clearly how an unpolarised light gets linearly (AI 2017)
polarised when passed through a polaroid.
(i) Unpolarised light of intensity I0 is incident on a 34. Define resolving power of a microscope and write one
polaroid P1 which is kept near another polaroid P2 factor on which it depends. (1/3, AI 2017)
whose pass axis is parallel to that of P1. How will 35. In polarised light is passed through a polaroid P1.
intensities of light, I1 and I2, transmitted by the When this polarised beam passes through another
paloroids P1 and P2 respectively, change on rotating polaroid P2 and if the pass axis of P2 makes angle θ
P1 without disturbing P2? with the pass axis of P1, then write the expression for
(ii) Write the relation between the intensities I1 and I2? the polarised beam passing through P2. Draw a plot
(AI 2015) showing the variation of intensity when θ varies from
29. (a) Good quality sun-glasses made of polaroids are 0 to 2π . (AI 2017)
preferred over ordinary coloured glasses. Justifying 36. How is linearly polarised light obtained by the process
your answer. of scattering of light. Find the Brewster angle for air –
(b) Two polaroids P1 and P2 are placed in crossed glass interface, when the refractive index of glass =
positions. A third polaroids P3 is kept between P1 1.5. (2/5, AI 2017)
and P2 such that pass axis of P3 is parallel to that of 37. Define a wavefront. Using Huygen’s principle verify
P1. How would the intensity of light (I2) transmitted the laws of reflection at a plane surface. (AI 2018)
through P2 vary as P3 is rotated? Draw a plot of 38. (a) If one of two identical slits producing interference
intensity ‘I2” versus the angle ' θ ' between pass in Young’s experiment is covered with glass, so
axes of P1 and P3. (AI 2015) that the light intensity passing through it is reduced
30. Define the term wavefront. State Huygen’s principle. to 50%, find the ratio of the maximum and
Consider a plane wavefront incident on a thin convex minimum intensity of the fringe in the interference
lens. Draw a proper diagram to show how the incident pattern.
wavefront traverses through the lens and after (b) What kind of fringes do you expect to observe if
refraction focuses on the focal point of the lens, giving white light is used instead of monochromatic light?
the shape of the emergent wavefront. (AI 2016) (AI 2018)
WAVE OPTICS 201

39. (a) In a single slit diffraction experiment, the width of 42. Explain giving reason, how the resolving power of a
the slit id made double the original width. How compound microscope depends on the
does this affect the size and intensity of the central (a) frequency of the incident light
diffraction band? Explain. (b) focal length of the objective lens? (AI 2019)
(b) When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path 43. (a) Explain, using a suitable diagram, how unpolarized
of light from a distant source, a bright spot in seen light gets linearly polarized by scattering.
at the centre of the obstacle, Explain why? (b) Describe briefly the variation of the intensity of
(AI 2018) transmitted light when a polaroid sheet kept between
40. Show using a proper diagram how unpolarised light two crossed polaroids is rotated. Draw the graph
can be linearly polarised by reflection from a depicting the variation of intensity with the angle of
transparent glass surface. (2/3, AI 2018) rotation. How many maxima and minima would be
41. The figure shows a modified Young’s double slit observed when θ varies from 0 to π ?
experimental set-up. here SS2 − SS1 = λ/4

(a) Write the condition constructive interference.

(b) Obtain an expression for the fringe (AI 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

WAVE OPTICS
 10
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND
MATTER
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 203

Chapter at a Glance
1. Photon
A photon is a packet of energy. It possesses energy 2.2 Conclusion
given by, E = hν 1. Lighter the particle, greater is its de-Broglie
Where h = 6.62 × 10−34 Js is Plank’s constant and ν is wavelength.
frequency of the photon. 2. The faster the particle moves, smaller is its de-Broglie
If λ is wavelength of the photon, then, c = νλ wavelength.
Here, c = velocity of light. 3. The de-Broglie wavelength of α–particle is
Therefore, E = hν = hc/λ independent of the charge or nature of the particle.
Energy of a photon is usually expressed in electron 4. The matter waves are not electromagnetic in nature. If
volt (eV). 1eV = 1.6 × 10−19 J the velocity of the particle is comparable to the
velocity of light, then mass of the particle is given by
2. Dual Nature of Radiation m0
m=
The various phenomena concerning radiation can be v2
divided into three parts: 1− 2
c
• The phenomena such as interference, diffraction, 3. Free Electrons in Metals
polarization etc. in which interaction of radiation takes Electron is a fundamental constituent of the atom. A
places with radiation itself. Such phenomena can be metal contains free electrons, which move about freely
explained on the basis of electromagnetic (wave) through the atomic spaces in a random fashion. But as
nature of radiation only. soon as an electron leaves the metal, immediately an
• The phenomena such as photoelectric effect, Compton equal positive charge is produced on the surface of the
effect, etc. in which interaction of radiation takes place metal. As a result, the electron is pulled back into the
with matter. Such phenomena can be explained on the metal and hence remains confined to it. The pull on the
basis of quantum (particle) nature of radiation. electrons at the surface is found to depend on the
• The phenomena such as rectilinear propagation, nature of metal surface and is described by a
reflection, refraction, etc. in which neither the characteristic of the metal, called work function.
interaction of radiation takes place with radiation, nor Work Function
of radiation with matter. Such phenomena can be The minimum energy, which must be supplied to the
explained on the basis of either of the two natures of electron so that it can just come out of the metal
the radiation. surface is called the work function of the metal.
This process is called electron emission and may be
2.1 De-Broglie Waves achieved in the following ways
Louis-Broglie put forward a bold hypothesis that • Thermionic emission. In this process of electron
matter should also possess dual nature. emission, the additional energy is supplied in the form
The following observations led him to the duality of heat. The emitted electrons are known as thermo-
hypothesis for matter. electrons.
1. The whole energy in this universe is in the form of • Photoelectric emission. In this process, as already
matter and electromagnetic radiation. discussed, the additional energy is supplied by means
2. The nature loves symmetry. As the radiation has got of electromagnetic radiation. The emitted electrons are
dual nature, matter should also possess dual nature. known as photoelectrons.
Thus, according to de-Broglie, a wave is associated • Secondary emission, in this process, the fast-moving
with every moving particle. These waves are called electrons on collision with the metal surface knock out
de-Broglie waves or matter waves. electrons, called the secondary electrons.
de-Broglie wavelength is given by • Field emission. In this process, the electrons are forced
h out of metal surface by strong electric field
λ=
mv
Where h = plank constant
m = mass pf particle 4. Photoelectric Effect
v = speed of particle.
204 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

The phenomenon of ejection from a metal surface, 4. The number of photoelectrons emitted i.e.
when light of sufficiently high frequency falls upon it photoelectric current is independent of the frequency
is known as the photoelectric effect. The electrons so of the incident light and depends only upon its
emitted are called photoelectrons. intensity.

Experimental Study of Photoelectric Effect: 4.2 Einstein's Photoelectric Equation

The apparatus consists of an evacuated glass tube If a photon of energy hν falls on the surface of a metal
fitted with two electrodes. The electrode E is called and the work function of the metal is hν0
emitting electrode and the other electrode C is called 1
collecting electrode. Then hν = hν0 + mv 2 max . This is Einstein’s photo
2
When a suitable radiation is incident on the electrode electric equation.
E, electrons are ejected from it. The electrons, which Where ν0 = threshold frequency.
have sufficient kinetic energy, reach the electrode C
despite its negative polarity. The potential difference
between the two electrodes acts as the retarding
potential. As the collecting electrode is made more
and more negative, fewer and fewer electrons will
reach the cathode and the photo-electric current
recorded by the ammeter with fall. In case, the
retarding potential equals V0, called the stopping
potential, no electron will reach the cathode and the
current will become zero. In such a case, the work
done by stopping potential is equal to the maximum
kinetic energy of the electrons i.e.
1
eV0 = mv 2 max
2

4.1 Laws of Photoelectric Emission

1. The emission of photoelectrons takes place only, when
the frequency of the incident radiation is above a
certain critical value, characteristic of that metal.
The critical value of frequency is known as the
threshold frequency for the metal of the emitting
electrode.
2. The emission of photoelectrons starts as soon as light
falls on metal surface.
3. The maximum kinetic energy with which an electron is
emitted from a metal surface is independent of the
intensity of the light and depends only upon its
frequency.
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 205

Solved Examples
Example-1 15
when ν1 = 4 × 10 Hz, Vs = VS1 (say)
The threshold frequency for a certain metal is 3.3 × 15
when ν 2 = 8 × 10 Hz, Vs = VS2 (say)
1014 Hz. If light of frequency 8.2 × 1014 Hz is incident
on the metal, predict the cut- off voltage for the h W
∴ VS1 = ν1 −
photoelectric emission e e
[NCERT] h W
VS 2 = ν 2 −
Sol. Given: e e
h
ν0 = 3.3 × 1014 Hz Subtracting VS 2 − VS1= (ν 2 − ν1 )
e
ν = 8.2 × 1014 Hz
Cut off voltage 6.4 ×10−34 15 15
= (8 × 10 – 4 × 10 )
eV0 = h(ν - ν0) 1.6 ×10−19
Substituting the values = 16 volt.
V0 = 2.03 eV
Example-4
Example-2 Define the term work function of a metal. The
threshold frequency of a metal is f0. When the light
For photoelectric effect in sodium, the figure shows
the plot of cut-off voltage versus frequency of of frequency 2f0 is incident on the metal plate, the
incident radiation. Calculate (i) threshold frequency maximum velocity of electrons emitted is v1. When
(ii) work function for sodium. the frequency of the incident radiation is increased to
Sol. 5 f0, the maximum velocity of electrons emitted is v2.
Find the ratio of v1 to v2.
Sol. Work function: The work function of a metal is
defined as the minimum energy required to free an
electron from its surface binding.
1 2
Einstein’s photoelectric equation is hν = hν0 + mv
2
In first case ν = 2f0, ν0 = f0, v = v1
1
∴ h2f0 = hf0 + mv12
2
1 2
⇒ mv1 = hf0 ...(1)
2
(i) The threshold frequency is the frequency of In second case, ν = 5f0, ν 0 = f0, v = v2
incident light at which kinetic energy of ejected
1
photoelectron is zero. ∴ h(5f0) = hf0 + mv22
2
From fig. threshold frequency
14 1
ν0 = 4.5 × 10 Hz ⇒ mv 22 = 4hf0 ...(2)
2
(ii) Work function, W = hν0 2
 
–34
= 6.6 × 10 × 4.5 × 10 joule
14
Dividing  v1  =1 ⇒ v1 =1 .
v  4 v 2
2  2
6.6 ×10−34 × 4.5 ×1014
= eV
1.6 ×10−19 Example-5
= 1.85 eV Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of a neutron of
kinetic energy 150 eV.
–27
Example-3 (Mass of neutron = 1.67 × 10 kg)
By how much would the stopping potential for a given h
Sol. de Broglie wavelength λ =
photosensitive surface go up if the frequency of the 2mE K
15
incident radiations were to be increased from 4 × 10 Here
15
Hz to 8 × 10 Hz ? –19 –17
EK = 150 eV = 150 × 1.6 × 10 J = 2.4 × 10 J
Sol. Stopping potential VS is given by
6.63 ×10−34
∴ λ= m
h W [2 ×1.67 ×10−27 × 2.4 ×10−17 ]
Vs= ν− –12
e e = 2.335 × 10 m
206 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

= 0.02335 Å. (a) Maximum kinetic energy of emitted electron

–34 14 –19
Ek = hν –W = 6.63 × 10 × 6 × 10 –2.14 × 1.6 ×10
Example-6
0.54 ×10−19
An electron and an alpha particle have the same de Ek = 0.54 × 10
–19
J= eV = 0.34 eV
Broglie wavelength associated with them. How are 1.6 ×10−19
their kinetic energies related to each other ? (b) Stopping potential V0 is given by
Sol. Given λelectron = λα E 0.34 eV
de Broglie wavelength associated with a particle of V0 = k = = 0.34 V
e e
mass m and energy E is
h Example-9
λ=
2mE k In an experiment of photoelectric effect, the slope of
cut-off voltage versus frequency of incident light is
h h –15
⇒ = found to be 4.12 × 10 Vs. Calculate the value of
2me E e 2mα E α
Planck’s constant.
E α me
⇒ = Sol. Einstein’s photoelectric equation is Ek = hν – W
E e mα
or eV0 = hν – W
h W
Example-7 or V0 = ν −
15
Radiations of frequency 10 Hz are incident on two e e
photosensitive surfaces P and Q. h
Clearly, slope of V0 – ν curve is .
Following observations are made e
(i)for surface P, photoemission occurs but h –15
photoelectrons have zero kinetic energy. Given = 4.12 × 10 V-s
e
(ii) for surface Q, photoemission occurs and the –15 –19 –34
photoelectrons have some kinetic energy. ⇒ h = 4.12 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 = 6.59 × 10 Js
Which of these has a higher work function ?
(iii)If the incident frequency is slightly reduced, what Example-10
will happen to the photoelectron emission in the two Calculate the (a) momentum and (b) de Broglie
cases ? wavelength of the electrons accelerated through a
Sol. (i) For surface P, Ek = 0, so kinetic energy of photon potential difference of 56 V.
ΚΕ = work function –31
–34 15 Sol. For electron, mass m = 9.1 × 10 kg
i.e., hν = W = hν0 = 6.6 × 10 × 10
–19 (a) Momentum p = 2mE k = 2meV
= 6.6 × 10 joule
(ii) For surface Q, the photoelectrons have some = 2 × 9.1×10−31 ×1.6 ×10−19 × 56 = 4.04 × 10
–24
kg ms
–1

kinetic energy, so Einstein’s equation

(b) de Broglie wavelength
hν = W + Ek,
h 6.63 ×10−34
work function of Q is less than that of P λ= =
–19 p 4.04 ×10−24
W < 6.6 × 10 joule
–10
i.e., surface P has higher work function than surface Q = 1.64 × 10 m = 0.164 nm
(iii) As frequency of incident radiation is reduced
slightly, energy of photon will become less than work Example-11
function of P, but will be more than the work function An electron and a photon, each has a wavelength of
Q, hence surface P will show no photoelectric 1.00 nm. Find
emission, while surface Q will show photoelectric (a) their momentum
emission ; but the kinetic energy of photoelectrons (b) the energy of the photon and
from surface Q will be lower than initial value. (c) the kinetic energy of electron.
–9
Sol. Given λ = 1.00 nm = 1.00 × 10 m
Example-8 (a) Momentum of electron and photon are equal ;
The work function of cesium metal is 2.14 eV. When given by
14
light of frequency 6 × 10 Hz is incident on the metal h 6.63 ×10−34 –25 –1
surface, photoemission of electrons occurs. What is p= = = 6.63 × 10 kg ms
λ 1.00 ×10−9
the
(a) maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons hc
(b) Energy of photon, E = hν = = pc
(b) stopping potential and λ
–25 8 –17
E = 6.63 × 10 × 3 × 10 J = 19.89 × 10 J
14
Sol. Given W = 2.14 eV, ν = 6 × 10 Hz
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 207

1 2 p2 quite small. It is generally denoted by W0 or φ0 and

(c) Kinetic energy of electron Ek = mev = usually measured in eV.
2 2m e
(6.63 ×10−25 ) 2 –19 Example-15
E k= −31
J = 2.42 × 10 J
2 × 9.1×10 A proton and a deuteron are accelerated through the
same accelerating potential. Which one of the two
Example-12 has
Find the ratio of de Broglie wavelength of molecules (i) greater value of de-Broglie wavelength associated
of hydrogen and helium which are at temperatures with it, and
27°C and 127°C respectively. (ii) greater value momentum?
h Give reasons to justify your answer.
Sol. de Broglie wavelength is given by λ = Sol. (i) de-Broglie wavelength,
mv λ ∝ 1/mass (for same accelerating potential)
Root-mean-square velocity of a gas particle at the Mass of a proton is less as compared to a deuteron.
given temperature (T) is given as, So, proton will have greater value of de-Broglie
1 2 3 wavelength associated with it.
mv = kT
2 2 (ii) Momentum p ∝ mass (for same accelerating
3kT potential)
v= Mass of deuteron is more as compared to a proton.
m So, it will have a greater value of momentum.
where k = Boltzmann’s constant and m = mass of the
gas particle and T = temperature of the gas in K. Example-16
mv = 3mkT Plot a graph showing variation of de-Broglie
h h 1
λ= = wavelength λ versus , where V is accelerating
mv 3mkT V
λH m He THe 4 ( 273 + 127 ) 8 potential for two particles. A and B carrying same
= = = charge but of masses m1, m2 (m1 > m2).
λ He m H TH 2 ( 273 + 27 ) 3
Sol.

Example-13
Write the expression for the de-Broglie wavelength
associated with a charged particle having charge ‘q’
and mass ‘m’, when it is accelerated by a potential V.
Sol. Let v be the velocity gained by the given charge
particle when it is accelerated through a potential
difference of ‘V’ volts kinetic energy of the particle 1
1 qV = mv 2
= mv 2 . 2
2 p2
Kinetic energy of the particle = Work done on the qV =
particle by electric field. 2m
1 h
∴ mv 2 = qV ⇒=p 2mqV
=
2 λ
h
p2 ⇒ λ=
or = qV 2mqV
2m
p = 2mqV 1
⇒ Slope ∝
m
Example-14 Example-17
What do you understand by the work function of a Write three characteristic features in photoelectric
metal? Name the units in which the work function of effect which cannot be explained on the basis of
a metal is commonly expressed. wave theory of light but can be explained only using
Sol. The work function of a metal is defined as the energy Einstein’s equation.
required to eject an electron away from the surface of Sol. (i) Existence of threshold frequency: According to
the metal, without imparting any kinetic energy to it. wave theory, there should not exist any threshold
It is quite large for heavier elements like platinum frequency, but Einstein’s theory explains the
whereas for other elements like alkali metals, it is existence of threshold frequency.
208 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

(ii) Dependence of kinetic energy of frequency of the particle to that of electron is 1.813 × 10-4.
incident light: According to wave theory, the Calculate the particle’s mass and identify the particle.
maximum kinetic energy of emitted electrons should Sol. de Broglie wavelength of a moving particle, having
depend on intensity of incident light and not on mass m and velocity v:
frequency whereas Einstein’s equation explains that it h h
depends on frequency and not on intensity. λ= =
p mv
(iii) Instantaneous emission of electrons:
According to wave theory there should be time lag h
Mass, m =
between emission of electron and incident of light λv
whereas Einstein’s equation explains why there is no h
time lag between incident of light and emission of For an electron, mass m e = ...(i)
λ e ve
electrons.
h
For the particle, mass m =...(ii)
Example-18 λv
According to the photoelectric effect one incident λ
photon can eject only one photoelectron. Explain. Now, we have
= v 3v e and= 1.813 × 10−4
λe
Sol. The photoelectric emission takes place, when the
incident photon is absorbed by the electron in the m λ e ve
Then, mass of particle, =
atom. The energy equal to work function of metal is me λ v
used up in ejecting the photoelectron and the 1  1 
difference appears as the kinetic energy of the m
= ( 9.11×10 −31
kg ) × × 
3  1.813
× 104 

electron. Since, one photon can be absorbed by one
electron, a photon can eject only one electron. m 1.675 × 10−27 kg
=
Thus, the particle, with this mass could be a proton or
Example-19 a neutron.
Show that the wavelength of electromagnetic
radiation is equal to the de-Broglie wavelength of its Example-21
quantum (photon). Why are de-Broglie waves associated with a moving
[NCERT] football not visible?
Sol. The momentum of a photon having energy (hν) is Sol. Due to the large mass of a football, the de-Broglie
given by  h 
hν h wavelength  λ =  associated with a moving
=p =  mv 
c λ football is very small, quite beyond measurement.
h Hence its wave nature is not visible.
λ= ...(i)
p
Example-22
Here, λ = wavelength of the electromagnetic
radiation Assume that the frequency of the radiation incident
c = speed of light on a metal plate is greater than its threshold
h = Planck’s constant frequency. How will the following change if the
de-Broglie wavelength of the photon is given by frequency of incident radiation is doubled?
1. Kinetic energy of electrons
h
λ= 2. Photoelectric current
mv Sol. (a) If the frequency of the incident radiation is
But p = mv doubled, hν – hν0 is increased, hence kinetic energy
h is increased.
∴ λ= ...(ii) (b) If the frequency of the incident radiation is
p
doubled, there will be no change in the number of
Here, m = Mass of the photon photoelectrons i.e., photo electronic current.
v = Velocity of the photon
Therefore, it can be inferred from equations (i) and
(ii) that the wavelength of the electromagnetic
radiation is equal to the de-Broglie wavelength of the
Example-23
photon.
Find the de Broglie wavelength of an electron in a
Example-20 metal at 27°C (Given me = 9.1×10−31 kg,
A particle is moving three times as fast as an k B 1.38 × 10−23 JK −1 )
=
electron. The ratio of the de Broglie wavelength of Sol. Here, T = 27 + 273 = 300 K
For an electron in a metal, de Broglie wavelength
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 209

h
λ=
3mk B T
6.63 × 10−34
⇒λ=
3 × 9.1× 10−31 × 1.38 × 10−23 × 300
= 6.2 × 10−9 m
⇒λ

Example-24
A surface ejects electrons when hit by green light, but Sol.
none when hit by yellow light. Will electrons be K max = hν − W
ejected if the surface is hit by red light? eV= hf − W
0

Sol. No, as energy for red light is even lesser than yellow h W
V
=0 f−
light so there will be no ejection. e e
hc 1 On comparing with equation of straight line, we can
= E , E ∝ , λR > λY > λG say that the more is the negative intercept, the greater
λ λ
is the work function and if we draw the graph further
on y-axis, we will see that negative intercept is more
for metal Q, so metal Q will have a grater value of
work function.
Example-25
The graphs, between the stopping potential ‘V0’ and
frequency ‘f’ of two metal plates P and Q are shown.
Which metal has greater value of work function?
210 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section-A (1 Mark Questions)
1. Define photoelectric work function. How is it related
to threshold frequency?
2. Which photon has more energy: A red one or a violet
one?
3. Why are alkali metals most suited as photo-sensitive 14. The given graph shows the variation of photoelectric
metals? current (i) versus applied voltage (V) for two
4. Work function of aluminum is 4.2 eV. If two photons different photosensitive materials and for two
each of energy 2.5 eV are incident on its surface, will different intensities of the incident radiation. Identify
the emission of electrons take place? Justify your the pairs of curves that correspond to different
answer. materials but same intensity of incident radiation.
5. Does the 'stopping potential' in photo-electric
emission depend upon (i) the intensity of the incident
radiation in a photocell? (ii) the frequency of the
incident radiation?
6. How does the maximum kinetic energy of electrons
emitted vary with the work function of the metal?
7. The stopping potential in an experiment on
photoelectric effect is 1.5 V. What is the maximum
kinetic energy of the photoelectrons emitted? 15. Find the ratio of de-Broglie wavelengths associated
8. Why are de-Broglie waves associated with a moving with two electrons accelerated through 25 V and 36
football not visible? V.
9. The de-Broglie wavelength of a particle of kinetic
energy K is λ . What would be the wavelength of the Section-C (3 Marks Questions)
particle if its kinetic energy were K/4? 16. An electron is accelerated through a potential
10. An α − particle and a proton are accelerated through difference of 100 volts. What is the de-Broglie
the same potential difference. Calculate the ratio of wavelength associated with it? To which part of the
linear momenta acquired by the two. electromagnetic spectrum does this value of
wavelength correspond?
17. A proton and a deuteron are accelerated through the
Section-B (2 Marks Questions)
same accelerated potential. Which one of the two has
11. How is the photoelectric current affected on
(a) Greater value of de-Broglie wavelength associated
increasing the (i) frequency (ii) intensity of the
with it, and
incident radiations and why?
(b) Less momentum?
12. What will happen to:
Given reasons to justify your answer.
(i) kinetic energy of photoelectrons
18. Using the graph show in the figure for stopping
(ii) photocurrent
potential v/s the incident frequency of photons.
If the light is changed from ultraviolet to X-rays in a
Calculate Planck’s constant
photo-cell experiment? Intensity of the beam is the
same in both cases.
13. Two lines A and B in the plot given below show the
1
variation of de-Broglie wavelength, λ versus
V
where V is the accelerating potential difference, for
two particles carrying the same charge. Which one of
two represents a particle of smaller mass?
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 211

19. Calculate the de – Broglie wavelength of the electron Section-E (5 Marks Questions)
orbiting in the n = 2 state hydrogen atom. 24. (a) Explain thermionic emission, field emission and
20. Electrons are emitted from the cathode of a photocell photoelectric emission.
of negligible work function when photons of (b) If light of wavelength 412.5 nm is incident on
wavelength are incident on it. Derive the expression each of the metals below, which ones will show
for the de Broglie wavelength of the electrons emitted photoelectric emission and why?
in terms of the wavelength of the incident light.
21. An electromagnetic wave of wavelength X is incident Metal Work Function(eV)
on a photosensitive surface of negligible work Na 1.92
function. If the photo electrons emitted from this K 2.15
surface have the de -Broglie Wavelength λ1 , prove Ca 3.20
 2mc  2 Mo 4.17
that
= λ   λ1 .
 h 
22. The photon emitted during the de-excitation from the 25. What is the significance of the Davisson and Germer
1st excited level to the ground state of hydrogen atom experiment? Describe the experiment in your words
is used to irradiate a photo cathode of a photocell. in and draw a schematic diagram of the experimental
which stopping potential of 5 V is used. Calculate the setup.
work function of the cathode used.

Section-D (4 Marks Questions)

23. The wavelength of light from the spectral emission
line of sodium is 589 nm. Find the kinetic energy at
which
(a) An electron, and
(b) A neutron would have the same de Broglie
wavelength.
212 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section - A (Single Choice Questions) the potential required to stop the ejection of electrons
1. The energy that should be added to an electron, to will be
(a) 2 V (b) Less than 2 V
reduce its de-Broglie wavelengths from 10−10 m to
(c) Zero (d) Greater than 2 V
0.5 × 10−10 m, will be
9. If the work function for a certain metal is 3.2 × 10−19
(a) Four times the initial energy
joule and it is illuminated with light of frequency
(b) Thrice the initial energy
(c) Equal to the initial energy 8 × 1014 Hz. The maximum kinetic energy of the
(d) Twice the initial energy photo-electrons would be
2. The de-Broglie wavelength of an electron having (a) 2.1× 10−19 J (b) 8.5 × 10−19 J
80eV of energy is nearly (1eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J, Mass (c) 5.3 × 10−19 J (d) 3.2 × 10−19 J
of electron = 9 × 10–31kg Plank’s constant = 6.6 × 10– (h 6.63 × 10−34 Js)
=
34
J-sec) 10. Light of wavelength 5000 Å falls on a sensitive plate
(a) 140 Å (b) 0.14 Å with photoelectric work function of 1.9 eV. The
(c) 14 Å (d) 1.4 Å kinetic energy of the photoelectron emitted will be
3. If an electron and a photon propagate in the form of
waves having the same wavelength, it implies that (a) 0.58 eV (b) 2.48 eV
they have the same (c) 1.24 eV (d) 1.16 eV
(a) Energy (b) Momentum 11. If intensity of incident light is increased in PEE then
(c) Velocity (d) Angular momentum which of the following is true
(a) Maximum K.E. of ejected electron will increase
4. The de-Broglie wavelength of a particle moving with (b) Work function will remain unchanged
a velocity 2.25 × 108 m/s is equal to the wavelength (c) Stopping potential will decrease
of photon. The ratio of kinetic energy of the particle (d) Maximum K.E. of ejected electron will decrease
to the energy of the photon is (velocity of light is 3 × 12. The magnitude of saturation photoelectric current
108 m/s) depends upon
(a) 1/8 (b) 3/8 (a) Frequency (b) Intensity
(c) 5/8 (d) 7/8 (c) Work function (d) Stopping potential
5. The momentum of a photon is 3.3 × 10−29 kg − m/sec. 13. For photoelectric emission, tungsten requires light of
Its frequency will be 2300 Å. If light of 1800 Å wavelength is incident
(a) 3 × 103 Hz (b) 6 × 103 Hz then emission
(a) Takes place
(c) 7.5 × 1012 Hz (d) 1.5 × 1013 Hz
(b) Don’t take place
6. Wavelength of a 1 keV photon is 1.24 × 10−9 m . What (c) May or may not take place
is the frequency of 1 MeV photon (d) Depends on frequency
(a) 1.24 × 1015 Hz (b) 2.4 × 1020 Hz 14. The light rays having photons of energy 1.8 eV are
18
(c) 1.24 × 10 Hz 23
(d) 2.4 × 10 Hz falling on a metal surface having a work function 1.2
7. The number of photo-electrons emitted per second eV. What is the stopping potential to be applied to
from a metal surface increases when stop the emitting electrons
(a) The energy of incident photons increases (a) 3 eV (b) 1.2 eV
(b) The frequency of incident light increases (c) 0.6 eV (d) 1.4 eV
(c) The wavelength of the incident light increases 15. A photon of energy 8 eV is incident on metal surface
(d) The intensity of the incident light increases of threshold frequency 1.6 × 1015 Hz. The maximum
8. In a photoelectric experiment for 4000 Å incident kinetic energy of the photoelectrons emitted (in eV)
radiation, the potential difference to stop the ejection (Take h= 6 × 10−34 Js) .
is 2 V. If the incident light is changed to 3000 Å, then (a) 1.6 (b) 6
(c) 2 (d) 1.2
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 213

16. When radiation is incident on a photoelectron emitter, 22. Assertion: For frequency greater than threshold
the stopping potential is found to be 9 volts. If e / m frequency, photoelectric current increases with the
for the electron is 1.8 × 1011 C kg −1 the maximum increase in intensity of incident light.
Reason: The number of photoelectrons emitted from
velocity of the ejected electrons is
a surface is independent of frequency of incident
(a) 6 × 105 ms −1 (b) 8 × 105 ms −1
light.
(c) 1.8 × 106 ms −1 (d) 1.8 × 105 ms −1 (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
17. Two identical metal plates show photoelectric effect Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
by a light of wavelength λ A falls on plate A and λ B (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
on plate B (λ A = 2λ B ) . The maximum kinetic energy
Assertion.
is (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(a) 2K A = K B (b) K A < K B / 2 (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
(c) K A = 2K B (d) K A = K B / 2 23. Assertion: In process of photoelectric emission, all
18. Light of wavelength 1824 Å, incident on the surface emitted electrons do not have same kinetic energy.
of a metal, produces photo-electrons with maximum Reason: If radiation falling on photosensitive surface
energy 5.3 eV. When light of wavelength 1216 Å is of different wavelength then energy acquired by
used, the maximum energy of photoelectrons is 8.7 electrons absorbing photons of different wavelength
eV. The work function of the metal surface is shall be different.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(a) 3.5 eV (b) 13.6 eV Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(c) 6.8 eV (d) 1.5 eV (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
19. If the energy of a photon corresponding to a Reason is not the correct explanation of the
Assertion.
wavelength of 6000 Å is 3.32 × 10−19 J , the photon
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
energy for a wavelength of 4000 Å will be
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
24. Assertion: Photoelectric effect supports the quantum
(a) 1.4 eV (b) 4.9 eV
nature of light.
(c) 3.1 eV (d) 1.6 eV
Reason: It is because of the fact that electric charge
20. A photon of energy 8 eV is incident on a metal
of photoelectrons is quantized.
surface of threshold frequency 1.6 × 1015 Hz , then the
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted is Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
= 6.6 × 10−34 Js)
(h (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(a) 4.8 eV (b) 2.4 eV Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(c) 1.4 eV (d) 0.8 eV Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
Section-B (Assertion & Reason Type
25. Assertion: In photoelectric effect, on increasing the
Questions) intensity of light, both the number of electrons
21. Assertion: The de-Broglie wavelength of a molecule emitted and kinetic energy of each of them get
varies inversely as the square root of temperature. increased but photoelectric current remains
Reason: The root mean square velocity of the unchanged.
molecule depends on the temperature. Reason: The photoelectric current depends only on
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the wavelength of light.
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
Reason is not the correct explanation of the (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
Assertion. Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. Assertion.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
214 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

26. Assertion: The De-Broglie wavelength equation has

significance for any microscopic and sub microscopic
particles.
Reason: The De-Broglie wavelength is inversely
proportional to the mass of the object when its
velocity is constant.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the 29. If a proton and an electron have the same de Broglie
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. wavelength, then
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the (a) kinetic energy of electron < kinetic energy of
Reason is not the correct explanation of the proton
Assertion. (b) kinetic energy of electron = kinetic energy of
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. proton
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. (c) momentum of electron = momentum of proton
(d) momentum of electron < momentum of proton
27. Assertion: The energy (E) and momentum (p) of a
30. Which of these particles having the same kinetic
E energy has the largest de Broglie wavelength?
photon is related by p = .
c (a) Electron (b) Alpha particle
Reason: The photon behaves like a particle. (c) Proton (d) Neutron
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the 31. Two particles A1 and A 2 of masses
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
m1 , m 2 ( m1 > m 2 ) have the same de Broglie
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
Reason is not the correct explanation of the wavelength. Then
Assertion. (a) their momenta are the same
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. (b) their energies are the same
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. (c) momentum of A1 is less than the momentum of
28. Assertion: When certain wavelength of light falls on A2
metal surface it ejects electron. (d) energy of A1 is less than the energy of A 2
Reason: Light is a wave in nature.
32. When the velocity of an electron increases, its de
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
Broglie wavelength
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(a) increases
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(b) decreases
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(c) remains same
Assertion.
(d) may increase or decrease
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
Case Study-2
Photoelectric effect refers to the emission of electrons
Section-C (Case Study Questions) from certain metal surfaces when irradiated with high
Case Study-1 frequency light (Em radiation). (UV rays falling on
de-Broglie Wavelength: According to de-Broglie, a cesium metal is a good example).
moving material particle sometimes acts as a wave
and sometimes as a particle or a wave associated with
moving material particle which controls the particle
in every respect. The wave associated with moving
particle is called matter wave or de-Broglie wave.
Wavelength of this wave is called de-Broglie Number of electrons emitted is proportional to the
h intensity of light, K.E. of electron emitted depends on
wavelength, is given by λ = .
mv the frequency of incident light. K.E. does not depend
on intensity of light. The minimum frequency of light
required to initial photoelectric effect is called
threshold frequency (ν0). The work function is given
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 215

by φ = h ν0. Maximum KE of emitted electrons when h

and it is given by λ = where h is the Plank’s
light of frequency ν falls on the metal surface is given p
by KEmax = hν - φ (φ is the work function). Negative constant and p is the momentum of the particle.
potential can be applied to the electrons to stop them
come outside the metal surface.
33. The intensity of light is plotted against number of
photoelectric. The graph is a:
(a) Straight line passing through origin
(b) Straight line with a + y intercept
(c) Parabola passing through the origin Charge of electron is e and its mass is m.
(d) None of these 37. If momentum of a particle increases its de Broglie
34. The work function of a metal corresponds to a wavelength
frequency 2 × 1015 Hz of light. Which of the (a) Increase (b) Decreases
following frequency cannot cause photoelectric effect (c) No change (d) Variables
from the metal? 38. The fringe width due to electron rays in the
(a) 1.5 × 1016 Hz (b) 8.2 × 1014 Hz mentioned example is (V is the accelerating voltage):
(c) 6.5 × 10 Hz
15
(d) 2.2 × 1015 Hz λD λD
(a) (b)
35. A particular metal can emit electrons when green 2d d
light falls on it. In which of the following case, the hD λD 2
(c) (d)
maximum KE of emitted electrons cannot be more, d 2meV dm
compared to this case? 39. If a light of wavelength less then that of light falling
(a) Using blue light with the same metal on the Cs sample(used in the experiment), then fringe
(b) Using a metal of less work function with the same width on the screen will:
light(green) (a) Increase
(c) Using red light with the first metal (b) Decreases
(d) Using UV light with the second metal (c) First increases, then decreases
36. If frequency of incident light becomes n times the (d) No change occurs
initial frequency (ν > ν0), then KE of emitted electron 40. If the experiment was conducted with protons instead
becomes. of electrons, then fringe width and will be
(a) n times the initial KE (a) More
(b) More than n times the initial KE (b) Less
(c) Less than n times the initial KE (c) Remaining same
(d) No change in KE (d) Irregular and varnishing quickly

Case Study-3
In photoelectric effect, the energy of the incident light
causes the ejection of electron. This is the result of
particle nature of light. Similarly, all material
particles also shows wave nature (while in motion).
This is observed in the case of tiny particles moving
at speed comparable with that of light. Electrons can
be sent through YDSE set up and observations
similar to that of light can be made.
The figure shows a cesium sample irradiated with
light of wavelength λ. The photoelectrons emitted
are directly perpendicular to the plane of slits of a
YDSE set up. The electrons are accelerated before
passing through the slits. Wavelength of material
particles in motion is called de Broglie wavelength
216 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation. State clearly material. State clearly how this graph can be used to
the three salient features observed in photoelectric determine (i) Planck’s constant and (ii) work function
effect, which can be explained on the basis of this of the material.
equation. (Foreign 2012)
(AI 2010) 12. A proton and an electron have same kinetic energy.
2. Define the term ‘stopping potential’ in relation to Which one has greater de-Broglie wavelength and
photoelectric effect. why?
(AI 2011) (AI 2012)
3. Define the tern ‘threshold frequency’ in relation to 13. Show on a graph the variation of the de-Broglie
photoelectric effect. wavelength(λ) associated with an electron, with the
(Foreign 2011) square root of accelerating potential (V).
4. For a given photosensitive material and with a source (Foreign 2012)
of constant frequency of incident radiation, how does 14. The given graphs shows the variation of photoelectric
the photocurrent vary with the intensity of incident current (I) versus applied voltage (V) for two
light? different photosensitive materials and for two
(AI 2011) different intensities of the incident radiations.
5. Draw a plot showing the variation of photoelectric Identify the pairs of curves that correspond to
current with collector plate potential for two different different materials but same intensity of incident
frequencies, υ1 > υ2, of incident radiation having the radiation?
same intensity. In which case will the stopping
potential be higher? Justify your answer.
(AI 2011)
6. Show graphically, the variation of the de-Broglie
wavelength (λ) with the potential (V) through which
an electron in accelerated from rest.
(Delhi 2011)
7. Write the relationship of de-Broglie wavelength λ
associated with a particle of mass m in terms of its (Delhi 2013)
kinetic energy E.
(Delhi 2011) 15. Show on a plot the nature of variation of
8. A particle is moving three times as fast as an photoelectric current with the intensity of radiation
electron. The ratio of the de-Broglie wavelength of incident on a photosensitive surface.
the particle to that of the electron is 1.813 × 10-4. (Delhi 2013)
Calculate the particle’s mass and identify the particle 16. Write the expression for the de-Broglie having charge
(AI 2011) ‘q’ and mass ‘m’, when it is accelerated by a
9. An electron and a photon each have a wavelength potential V.
1.00 nm. Find (AI 2013)
(i) their momenta, 1
17. Figure shows a plot of , where V is the
(ii) the energy of the photon and V
(iii) the kinetic energy of electron accelerating potential, versus the de-Broglie
(Delhi 2011)
wavelength ‘λ’ in the case of two particles having
10. Why is photoelectric emission not possible at all
same charge ‘q’ but different masses m1 and m2.
frequencies?
Which line (A or B) represents a particle of large
(AI 2012)
mass?
11. Draw a graph between the frequency of incident
radiation (υ) and the maximum kinetic energy of the
electrons emitted from the surface of a photosensitive
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 217

same, how does the resolving power of an electron

microscope compare with that of an optical
microscope which uses yellow light?
(AI 2014)
25. Describe briefly three experimentally observed
features in the phenomenon of photoelectric effect.
(AI 2015)
(AI 2013) 26. A beam of monochromatic radiation is incident on a
18. In photoelectric effect, why should the photoelectric photosensitive surface, Answer the following
current increases as the intensity of monochromatic questions giving reasons.
radiation incident on a photosensitive surface in (a) Do the emitted photoelectrons have the same
increased? Explain. kinetic energy?
(Delhi 2014) (b) Does the kinetic energy of the emitted electrons
19. Two monochromatic radiations of frequencies υ1 and depend on the intensity of incident radiation?
(c) On what factors does the number of emitted
υ2 (υ1 > υ2) and having the same intensity are in turn,
photoelectrons depend?
incident on a photosensitive surface to cause
(Foreign 2015)
photoelectric emission. Explain, given reason, in
27. Figure shows a plot of stopping potential (V0) with
which case (i) more number of electrons will be
emitted and (ii) maximum kinetic energy of the frequency (υ) of incident radiation for two
emitted photoelectrons will be more. photosensitive material M1 and M2. Explain.
(Delhi 2014) (i) why the slope of both the lines is same?
20. Define intensity of radiation on the basis of photon (ii) for which material emitted electrons have greater
picture of light. Write its SI unit. kinetic energy for the same frequency of incident
(AI 2014) radiation?
21. Write three basic properties of photons which are
used to obtain Einstein’s photoelectric equation. Use
this equation to draw a plot of maximum kinetic
energy of the electrons emitted versus the frequency
of incident radiation.
(AI 2014)
22. A proton and a deuteron are accelerated through the (AI 2015)
same acceleration potential. 28. Using the graph shown in the figure for stopping
Which one of the two has potential versus the incident frequency of photons,
(a) greater value of de-Broglie wavelength associated calculate Planck’s constant
with it, and
(b) less momentum?
Give reasons to justify your answer.
(Delhi 2014)
23. X-rays fall on a photosensitive surface to cause
photoelectric emission. Assuming that the work
function of the surface can be neglected, find the
relation between the de-Broglie wavelength (λ) of the
electrons emitted and the energy (Ev) of the incident
photons. Draw the nature of the graph for λ as a (Delhi 2015)
function of Ev. 29. Draw a plot showing the variation of de-Broglie
(Delhi 2014) wavelength of electron as a function of its K.E.
24. An electron microscope uses electrons accelerated by (Delhi 2015)
a voltage of 50 kV. Determine the de Broglie 30. A proton and an α-particle have the same de-Broglie
wavelength associated with the electrons. Taking wavelength. Determine the ratio of
other factors, such as numerical aperture etc. to be (i) their accelerating potentials
218 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

(ii) their speeds features of photoelectric effect which cannot be

(Delhi 2015) explained by wave theory.
31. Sketch the graphs showing variation of stopping (AI 2017)
potential with frequency of incident radiations for 37. Explain giving reasons for the following:
two photosensitive materials A and B having (a) photoelectric current in a photocell increase with
threshold frequency υA > υB. the increase in the intensity of the incident
(i) In which case is the stopping potential ? radiation.
(ii) Does the slope of the graph depend on the nature (b) The stopping potential (V0) varies linearly with
of the material used? Explain. the frequency (υ) of the incident radiation for a
(AI 2016) given photosensitive surface with the slope
32. Define the term “cut off frequency” in photoelectric remaining the same for different surface.
emission. The threshold frequency of a metal is f. (AI 2017)
when the light of frequency 2f in incident on the 38. The following graph shows the variation of
metal plate, the maximum velocity of photo-electron photocurrent for a photosensitive metal:
is v1. When the frequency of the incident radiation is
increased of 5f, the maximum velocity of
photoelectrons is v2. Find the ratio v1 : v2.
(Foreign 2016)
33. In the wave picture of light, intensity of light is
determined by the square of the amplitude of the
wave. What determines the intensity in the photon (a) Identify the variable X on the horizontal axis.
picture of light? (b) What does the point A on the horizontal axis
(AI 2016) represent?
34. The wavelength λ of a photon and the de Broglie (c) Draw this graph for three different values of
wavelength of an electron have the same value. Show frequencies of incident radiation υ1, υ2 and υ3 (υ1
that energy of a photon is (2λ mc/h) times kinetic > υ2 > υ3) for same intensity.
energy of electron, where m, c and h have their usual (d) Draw this graph for three different values of
meaning. intensities of incident radiation I1, I2 and I3 (I1 > I2
(Foreign 2016) > I3) having same frequency.
35. In the study of a photoelectric effect the graph (AI 2017)
between the stopping potential V and frequency υ of 39. Name the phenomenon which shows the quantum
the incident radiation on two different metals P and Q nature of electromagnetic radiation.
is shown in: (AI 2017)
40. (i)How does one explain the emission of electrons
from of photosensitive surface with the help of
Einstein’s photoelectric equation?
(ii) the work function of the following metals is given
: Na = 2.75 eV, K = 2.3 eV, Mo = 4.17 eV and Ni =
5.15 eV. Which of these metals will not cause
photoelectric emission for radiation of wavelength
(i) Which one of the two metals has higher threshold 3300 Å from a laser source placed 1m away from
frequency? these metals? What happens if the laser source is
(ii) Determine the work function of the metal which brought nearer and placed 50 cm away?
has greater value. (Delhi 2017)
(iii) Find the maximum kinetic energy of electron 41. (i) State two important features of Einstein’s
emitted by light of frequency 8 × 1014 Hz for this photoelectric equation,
metal. (ii) Radiation of frequency 1015 Hz is incident on two
(Delhi 2017) photosensitive surface P and Q. There is not
36. Using photon picture of light, shown how Einstein’s photoemission from surface P. Photoemission occurs
photoelectric equation can be established. Write two from surface Q but photoelectrons have zero kinetic
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER 219

energy. Explain these observations and find the value 46. Define the term “ threshold frequency” in the context
of work function for surface Q. of photoelectric emission.
(Delhi 2017) (Delhi 2019)
42. Given reason for maximum kinetic energy of the 47. Define the term “Intensity” in photon picture of
photoelectrons is independent of the intensity of electromagnetic radiation.
incident radiation. (Delhi 2019)
(AI 2017) 48. The figure shows the variation of stopping potential
43. An α-particle and a proton are accelerated through V0 with the frequency υ of the incident radiations for
the same potential difference. Find the ratio of their two photosensitive metal P and Q. which metal has
de Broglie wavelengths. smaller threshold wavelength? Justify your answer.
(Delhi 2017)
44. Draw graphs showing variation of photoelectric
current with applied voltage for two incident
radiations of equal frequency and different
intensities. Mark the graph for the radiation of higher
intensity.
(AI 2018)
45. If light of wavelength 412.5 nm is incident on each of (AI 2019)
the metals given in table, which on will show 49. (a) Define the terms, (i) threshold frequency and (ii)
photoelectric emission and why? stopping potential in photoelectric effect.
Metal Work Function (eV) (b) Plot a graph of photocurrent versus anode
Na 1.92 potential for a radiation of frequency υ and intensities
K 2.15 I2 and I2 (I1 < I2)
Ca 3.20 (Delhi 2019)
50. Why is wave theory of electromagnetic radiation not
Mo 4.17
able to explain photoelectric effect? How does
(AI 2018)
photon picture resolve this problem?
(Delhi 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND

MATTER
11
ATOMS
ATOMS 221

Chapter at a glance
1. Atomic Structure and It’s The experimental observations led Rutherford to the
following conclusions:-
History 1. Since most of the α-particles passed undeviated, the
atom has a lot of empty space in it.
1.1 Thomson’s Atom Model 2. Since fast and the heavy α-particles could be
deflected even through 180º, the whole of the
The positive charge is uniformly distributed over the entire
positive charge and practically the entire mass of the
sphere and the electrons are embedded in the sphere of
atom was confined to an extremely small central
positive charges just like seeds in a watermelon or plums in
core. It was called nucleus. Since 1 in about 8000
the pudding. For this reason, Thomson’s atom model is also
α-particles is deflected through 180º, the size of the
known as plum-pudding model. The total positive charge
nucleus is about 1/10000th of the size of the atom.
inside the atom is equal to the total negative charge carried
by electrons, so that every atom is electrically neutral. 1.1.1 Rutherford’s Atom Model
Failure of Thomson’s Atom Model On the basis of the results of α-scattering experiment,
Rutherford suggested the following picture of the atom:
It had to be discarded, because of the following reasons:
1. Atom may be regarded as a sphere of diameter 10–10
1. It could not explain the origin of the spectral lines in
m but whole of the positive charge and almost the
the form of series as in case of hydrogen atom.
entire mass of the atom is concentrated in a small
2. It could not account for the scattering of α-particles central core called nucleus having diameter of about
through large angles as in case of Rutherford’s α- 10–14 m.
scattering experiment. 2. The nucleus is surrounded by electrons. In other
words, the electrons are spread over the remaining
1.2. Rutherford’s Alpha Scattering part of the atom leaving plenty of empty space in the
atom.
Experiment Observations
1. Most of α-particles were found to pass through the 1.1.2 Drawbacks of Rutherford’s Atom
gold foil without any appreciable deflection. Model
2. The different α-particles in passing through the gold 1. When the electrons revolve round the nucleus, they
foil undergo different amounts of deflections. A are continuously accelerated towards the centre of
large number of α-particles suffer fairly large the nucleus. According to Lorentz, an accelerated
deflections. charged particle should radiate energy continuously.
3. A very small number of α-particles (about 1 in 8000) Therefore, in the atom, a revolving electron should
practically retracted their paths or suffered deflection continuously emit energy and hence the radius of its
of nearly 180º. path should go on decreasing and ultimately it should
fall into the nucleus. However, electrons revolve
4. The graph between the total number of α–particles round the nucleus without falling into it. Therefore,
N(θ) scattered through angle θ and the scattering Rutherford’s atom model cannot explain the stability
angle θ was found to be as shown in fig. of the atom.
2. If the Rutherford’s atom model is true, the electron
can revolve in orbits of all possible radii and hence it
should emit continuous energy spectrum. However,
the atoms like hydrogen possess line spectrum.
222 ATOMS

1.1.3 Distance of Closest Approach 13.6 V

Binding Energy (BE)n = – En =.
Consider an α-particle of mass m possesses initial velocity n2
u, when it is at a large distance from the nucleus of an atom • En2 − En1 = Energy emitted when an electron
having atomic number Z. At the distance of closest jumps from n2th orbit to n1th orbit (n2 > n1) .
approach, the kinetic energy of α-particle is completely
converted into potential energy. Mathematically. 1 1
∆E = (13.6 ev)  2
− 2 .
 n1 n 2 
1/2 mu2 =
1 ( 2e )( Ze ) ∴r = 1 . 2 Ze2
. 0 ∆E = hν ; ν = frequency of spectral line emitted .
4πε 0 r0 4πε0 1 / 2 mu 2
1
= v= wave no. [ no. of waves in unit length
λ
(1m)]
1 1 1
= R 2 − 2 .
λ  n1 n 2 
Where R = Rydberg's constant for hydrogen = 1.097
2. Bohr Atomic Model × 107 m-1 .
• For hydrogen like atom/species of atomic number Z:
Bohr adopted Rutherford model of the atom & added some
arbitrary conditions. These conditions are known as his Bohr radius 2 n2
rnz = = n ( 0.529 A° ) ;
postulates: Z Z
• The electron in a stable orbit does not radiate energy. Z2
Enz = (– 13.6) ev
m v2 k z e2 n2
i.e. = 2
r r Rz = RZ2 – Rydberg's constant for element of
• A stable orbit is that in which the angular momentum atomic no. Z
of the electron about nucleus is an integral (n) 2.2 Spectral Series
h h • Lyman Series: (Landing orbit n = 1).
multiple of . i.e. mvr = n ; n = 1 , 2 , 3 ,
2π 2π
1 1 
.......(n ≠ 0). =
Ultraviolet region ν R 2
− 2  ; n2 > 1
• The electron can absorb or radiate energy only if the 1 n 2 
electron jumps from a lower to a higher orbit or falls • Balmer Series: (Landing orbit n = 2)
from a higher to a lower orbit. 1 1
• The energy emitted or absorbed is a light photon of =
Visible region ν R 2
− 2  ; n2 > 2
 2 n2 
frequency ν and of energy E = hν.
• Paschan Series: (Landing orbit n = 3)
2.1 For Hydrogen Atom: (Z = Atomic
1 1
Number = 1) =
In the near infrared region ν R 2
− 2  ; n2 > 3
3 n2 
h
• Ln = angular momentum in the nth orbit = n . • Bracket Series: (Landing orbit n = 4)
2π
• rn = radius of nth circular orbit = (0.529 Aº) n2 ; 1 1
=
In the mid infrared region ν R 2
− 2  ; n2 > 4
(1Aº = 10-10 m) ; rn n2.  4 n2 
• En Energy of the electron in the nth orbit = • Pfund Series: (Landing orbit n = 5)
−13.6 eV 1 1 1
i.e. E n ∝ 2 . =
In far infrared region ν R 2
− 2  ; n2 > 5
5 n2 
2
n n
NOTE: In all these series n2 = n1 + 1 is the α line
Total energy of the electron in an atom is negative, = n1 + 2 is the β line
indicating that it is bound. = n1 + 3 is the γ line .... etc.
where n1 = Landing orbit
ATOMS 223

Solved Examples
Example-1 6.6 × 10−34 × 3 × 108 × 9
Find angular momentum of an electron when it is in ⇒λ=
21.76 × 10−19
the second Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom.
Sol. Angular momentum = mvr ⇒
= λ 8.189 × 10−7 m
nh 2h h 6.6 × 10 –34 ⇒ λ =818.9nm
= = = =
2π 2π π 3.14
= 2.10 × 10–34 kg m2/s Example-5
The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6
Example-2 eV. What are the kinetic and potential energies of
The radius of the first orbit of the electron of a the electron in this state?
hydrogen atom is 5.3 × 10–11 m. What is the radius of [NCERT]
its second orbit? Sol. Provided that the ground state energy of hydrogen
Sol. Given, atom, E = -13.6 eV which is the total energy of a
r1 = 5.3 × 10–11 m hydrogen atom.
n 2 h 2 ε0 Here, kinetic energy is equal to the negative of the
We know that, r =
πmZe 2 total energy.
For first orbit, n = 1 Kinetic energy = -E = - (-13.6) = 13.6 eV
The potential energy is the same as the negative of two
h 2 ε0
r1 = = 5.3 × 10–11 m times kinetic energy.
2
πmZe Potential energy = 2 × (13.6) = -27.2 eV
For second orbit, n = 2,
∴ The kinetic energy of the electron is 13.6 eV and
2 h 2 ε0 the potential energy is -27.2 eV
= r2 ( 2 ) ×
πmZe 2
= 4 × 5.3 × 10–11 m Example-6
= 2.12 × 10–10 m What do you mean by the distance of the closest
approach of an α-particle in Rutherford experiment ?
Example-3 Derive its expression.
Find out the wavelength of the electron orbiting in the Sol. An α-particle directed towards the centre of the
ground state of hydrogen atom. nucleus will move close upto a distance r0 where its
Sol. We know that, kinetic energy will appear as potential energy. This
2πr = nλ distance r0 is called 'distance of closest approach'.
For first orbit, n = 1 Kinetic energy of an a-particle is given by,
2πr =nλ 1
λ = 3.331 Å [∵ r = 0.53 Å] K .E. = mv 2
2
The electrostatic potential energy of the α-particle of
Example-4
charge 2e at a distance r0 is given by,
What is the shortest wavelength present in the
1 ( Ze ) × 2e
Paschen series of spectral lines? P.E. = .
Sol. We know the Rydberg’s formula is given as; 4πε0 r0
At distance ro closest approach, both P.E. and K.E.
hc 1 1
21.76 × 10−19  2 − 2 
= are balanced. Thus,
λ  n1 n 2  P.E. = K.E.
Here, 1 ( Ze ) × 2e 1 2
= mv
h = Planck’s constant = 6.6 × 10-34 Js 4πε0 r0 2
c = speed of light = 3 × 108 m/s 1 4 Ze 2
(n1 and n2 are integers) r0 =
4πε0 mv 2
The shortest wavelength present within the Paschen
series of the spectral lines is for values n1 = 3 and n2 = Ze 2
r0 =
∞. πε0 mv 2
hc  1 1 
⇒ = 21.76 × 10−19  2 − 
λ  (3) ( ∞ )2 
224 ATOMS

Example-7 4 ( 4 – 1)
Calculate the nearest distance of approach of an α- N= =6
2
particle of energy 2.5 MeV being scattered by a gold Fig. shows the schematic emission of these spectral
nucleus (Z = 79). lines.
Sol. The electrostatic potential at a distance x due to
nucleus is given by Ze/4πε0x, where Ze is the charge
on the nucleus.
The P.E. of an α-particle when it is at a distance x
from the nucleus is given by
Ze 2Ze 2
2e =
4πε0 x (4πε0 x)
2e being the charge on α-particle.
Since the α-particle momentarily stops when its Example-11
initial K.E. is completely changed into P.E. here, On an energy level diagram of hydrogen, show by a
hence downward or an upward arrow transition which
1 2Ze 2 2Ze 2  2  results in :
mv 2 = or x = × 
2 4πε0 x 4πε0  mv 2  (i) emission line of Balmer series.
1 (ii) emission line of Lyman series.
Now energy of α-particle = mv 2 = 2.5 MeV (iii) absorption line of Lyman series.
2 Sol.
6 –19
= 2.5 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 J
–13
= 2.5 × 1.6 × 10 J
Substituting the values, we get
2 × 79 × 2.56 ×10−38 × 9 ×109 –14
x= −13
= 9.101 × 10 m.
2.5 ×1.6 ×10

Example-8
State any two postulates of Bohr's theory of hydrogen
atom.
Sol. Postulates of Bohr's theory of hydrogen atom :
(i) In an atom, the electrons revolve around the
nucleus in certain definite circular paths called orbits
or shells.
(ii) Each shell or orbit corresponds to a definite
energy. Therefore, these circular orbits are also
known as energy levels or energy shells.

Example-9 (b)
The wavelength of some of the spectral lines obtained
in hydrogen spectrum are 9546 Å, 6463 Å and 1216
Å, which one of these wavelengths belongs to Lyman
series?
Sol. Lyman series lies in ultraviolet region. Therefore,
wavelength of the spectral lines in Lyman series must
be less than the wavelengths in visible region i.e.,
3900Å. Therefore, spectral line of wavelength 1216
Å lies in Lyman series.

Example-10 Example-12
The electron in hydrogen atom is initially in the third (i) State Bohr's quantisation condition for defining
excited state. What is the maximum number of stationary orbits. How does de-Broglie hypothesis
spectral lines which can be emitted, when it finally explain the stationary orbits ?
moves to the ground state? (ii) Find the relation between the three wavelengths
Sol. Total number of spectral lines emitted between the λ1, λ2, and λ3 from the energy level diagram shown
energy levels n = 4 (third excited state) and 1 (ground below.
state) is given by
ATOMS 225

hc
ECA =
λ3
Where, ECB = Energy gap between level B and C,
EBA = Energy gap between level A and B,
ECA = Energy gap between level A and C.
Sol. (i) Quantisation condition : Of all possible circular Now,
orbits allowed by the classical theory, the electrons ECA = ECB + EBA
are permitted to circulate only in those orbits in hc hc hc
= +
which the angular momentum of an electron is an λ3 λ1 λ 2
h
integral multiple of ; h being Planck's constant. 1 1 1
2π = +
λ3 λ1 λ 2
λλ
λ3 = 1 2
λ 2 + λ1

Example-13
In a hydrogen atom a transition of electrons takes
place from 3rd orbit to 2nd orbit. Calculate the
Therefore, for any permitted orbit, wavelength of the emitted photon. To which spectral
nh series will the photon belong?
=L mvr= ; n = 1, 2, 3….. Sol. The wavelength of the emitted photon is given by
2π
Where L, m, and v are the angular momentum, mass 1  1 1 
= R 2 – 2 
and speed of the electron, r is the radius of the λ n 
 1 n2 
permitted orbit and n is positive integer called
principal quantum number. Here, R = 1.097 × 107, n1 = 1 and n3 = 3
The above equation is Bohr's famous quantum 1  1 1 
= 1.097 × 107  2 – 2 
condition. When an electron of mass m is confined to λ 2 3 
move on a line of length l with velocity v, the de-
 5 
Broglie wavelength λ associated with electron is : = 1.097 × 107  
h h  36 
=λ = λ = 6.53 × 10–7 m = 6563 Å
mv p
or P = Linear momentum Example-14
h h nh The energy of the lowest level of hydrogen atom is –
⇒ p= = =
λ 2l / n 2l 13.6 eV. Calculate the energy, frequency and
When electron revolves in a circular orbit of radius wavelength of the photon emitted by transition from
‘r’ then 2l = 2πr. n = 2 to n = 4.
nh nh –13.6
∴p= or p × r = Sol. We have, E = eV
2πr 2πr n2

Or angular momentum L = p × r is integral multiple –13.6 –13.6
= E4 = 2
eV eV
of h/2π which is Bohr’s quantisation of angular 4 16
momentum. –13.6 –13.6
(ii) = E2 = eV
22 4
ΔE = E4 – E2
–13.6  –13.6 
= – 
16  4 
–13.6 + 13.6 × 4
=
16
hc 40.8
ECB = Or ∆=E = 2.55 eV
λ1 16
hc hc
EBA = We know, ∆E =
λ2 λ
226 ATOMS

hc 6.6 × 10 –34 × 3 × 108 Sol. We are given the separation of two energy levels in
Or=
λ = an atom,
∆E 2.55 × 1.6 × 10 –19
E = 2.3eV = 2.3 × 1.6 × 10–19 = 3.68 × 10–19J
12375 × 10 –10 Now, let ν be the frequency of radiation emitted
λ= = 4852.9 Å
2.55 when the atom transits from the upper level to the
ΔE = hν lower level. We have the relation for energy as:
∆E 2.55 × 1.6 × 10 –19 E = hν
Or =ν = Hz Where,
h 6.6 × 10 –34 h = Planck's constant = 6.62 × 10–34Js
ν = 6.18 × 1015 Hz. E
⇒ ν=
h
Example-15
Substituting the given values,
Calculate the de-Broglie wavelength of the electron
orbiting in the n = 2 stage of hydrogen atom. 3.68 × 10 –19
ν= = 6.62 × 10–32 = 5.55 × 1014 Hz
Sol. The velocity of an orbiting electron, 6.62 × 10 –32
Zc Hence, the frequency of the radiation is found to be
v=
137 n 5.55 × 1014Hz.
Where, c = speed of light in vacuum.
Example-19
1× 3 × 108
So,
= v = 1.09 × 106 m / s Prove that the speed of election in the ground state of
137 × 2 hydrogen atom is equal to the speed of electron in the
The de-Broglie wavelength, λ = h/mv first excited state of hydrogen like Li++ atom.
Where h is Plank’s constant = 6.6 × 10–34 Js Sol. We have the following expression
And mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
2πKe 2
6.6 × 10 –34 vn =
So, λ = = 6.65 × 10–10 m nh
( )
9.1× 10 –31 × 1.09 × 106 For ground state of hydrogen atom x = 1;
2πKe 2
v1 =
Example-16 h
What is Bohr's quantisation condition for the angular Z × 2πKe 2
momentum of an electron in the second orbit? For hydrogen like atom ( vn ) z = ….(1)
nh
Sol. We know that,
Now, for Li++ atom z = 3 n = 2
nh
L= 2 × 2πKe 2
2π ⇒ ( vn ) Li ++ =
We are given, n = 2 2h
2h 2πKe 2
⇒ L= ⇒ ( vn ) Li ++ = …(2)
2π h
h Now, from (1) and (2), we have
∴L=
π ( vn )H = ( vn ) Li++
Therefore, Bohr's quantisation condition for the Hence, we proved that the speed of electron in the
angular momentum of an electron in the second orbit ground state of hydrogen atom is equal to the speed
h of electron in the first excited state of hydrogen like
is found to be, L = .
π Li++ atom.
Example-17 Example-20
State the limitations of Bohr's atomic model. A hydrogen atom initially in the ground level absorbs
Sol. The limitations of Bohr's atomic model are: a photon, which excites it to the n = 4 level.
(1) It does not give any indication regarding the Determine the wavelength and frequency of the
arrangement and distribution of electrons in an atom. photon.
(2) It could not account for the wave nature of Sol. We have, For ground level, n1 = 1
electrons. Let E1 be the energy of this level and it is known that
E1 is related with n1 as:
Example-18 –13.6
E1 =
A difference of 2.3eV separates two energy levels in n12
an atom. What is the frequency of radiation emitted –13.6
when the atom makes a transition from the upper =
⇒ E1 = –13.6 eV
level to the lower level? 12
ATOMS 227

We are told that the atom is excited to a higher level, D- longest wavelength
n2 = 4.
Let E2 be the energy of this level. Example-22
–13.6 (a) Using the Bohr’s model calculate the speed of
E2 = eV
n22 the electron in a hydrogen atom in the n = 1, 2, and 3
–13.6 levels. (b) Calculate the orbital period in each of
=
⇒ E2 = –13.6 eV these levels.
42
[NCERT]
Now, the amount of energy absorbed by the photon
Sol. Consider v1 to be the orbital speed of the electron in a
could be given as:
hydrogen atom in the ground state level n1 = 1.
E2 = E2 – E1
For charge (e) of an electron, v1 is given by the
–13.6  13.6 
⇒ E= ––  relation,
16  1 
e2
–13.6 × 15 v1 =
⇒ E= eV  h 
16 n1 4πε0  
 2π 
13.6 × 15
∴
= E × 1.6 × 10 –19 = 2.04 × 10–18 J e 2
16 ⇒ v1 =
For a photon of wavelength λ the expression of 2ε0 h
energy could be written as: Here,
hc e = 1.6 × 10-19C
E=
λ ε 0 = Permittivity of free space = 8.85 × 10-12 N-1C2m-2
Where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.6 × 10-34 Js
h = Planck’s constant = 6.6 × 10–34 J s
(1.6 × 10−19 ) 2
c = speed of light = 3 × 108 m/s ⇒ v1 =
hc 2 × 8.85 × 10−12 × 6.62 × 10−34
⇒ λ= ⇒=v1 0.0218 × 108
E
6.6 × 10 –34 × 3 × 108 ⇒ v1 = 2.18 × 106 m / s
⇒ λ=
2.04 × 10 –18 For level n2 = 2, we can write the relation for the
∴λ = 9.7 × 10–8 m = 97 mm corresponding orbital speed as;
And frequency of a photon is given by the relation, e2
c v2 =
ν= n 2 eε 0 h
λ
(1.16 × 10−19 ) 2
3 × 10 8 ⇒ v2 =
=∴ν ≈ 3.1× 1015 Hz 2 × 2 × 8.85 × 10−12 × 6.62 × 10−34
9.7 × 10 –8 ⇒ v 2 = 1.09 × 106 m / s
Example-21 And, for n3 = 3, we can write the relation for the
Consider the following electronic energy level diagram corresponding orbital speed as
of H-atom: Photons associated with shortest and e2
v3 =
longest wavelengths would be emitted from the atom n 3 eε 0 h
by the transitions labelled: (1.16 × 10−19 ) 2
⇒ v3 =
3 × 2 × 8.85 × 10−12 × 6.62 × 10−34
⇒ v3 = 7.27 × 105 m / s
Clearly, the speeds of the electron in a hydrogen atom
in the levels n = 1, 2 and 3 are 2.18 × 106 m/s, 1.09 ×
106 m/s and 7.27 × 105 m/s respectively.
(b) Consider T1 to be the orbital period of the electron
when it is in level n1 = 1.
Sol. Shortest wavelength corresponds to largest energy
It is known that the orbital period is related to the
difference and longest wavelength corresponds to
smallest energy difference. E4 – E2 is the largest 2πr1
orbital speed as T1 =
energy difference and E4 – E3 is the smallest (of given) v1
C- shortest wavelength Here,
228 ATOMS

n12 h 2 ε0
r1 = Radius of the orbit in n1 = Example-24
πme 2
The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV
m = Mass of an electron = 9.1 × 10-31 kg
(i) What is the kinetic energy of an electron in the
2π× (1) 2 × (6.62 × 10−34 ) 2 × 8.85 × 10−12 second excited state ?
⇒ T1 =
2.18 × 106 × π× 9.1× 10−31 × (1.6 × 10−19 ) 2 (ii) If the electron jumps to the ground state from the
second excited state, calculate the wavelength of
⇒ T= 15.27 × 10−17
1
the spectral line emitted.
⇒ T=
1 1.527 × 10−16 s Sol. The energy levels of H-atom are given by
For level n2 = 2, we can write the orbital period as; Rhc 13.6
En = = − 2 eV
2πr2 n 2
n
T2 =
v2 (i) For second excited state n = 3
Here, 13.6 13.6
∴ E3 = − 2 eV = − eV =−1.51eV
n 22 h 2 ε0 (3) 9
r2 = Radius of the orbit in n2 = th
πme 2 Kinetic energy of electron in n state is
K3 = – E3 = + 1.51 eV
2π× (2) 2 × (6.62 × 10−34 ) 2 × 8.85 × 10−12
⇒ T1 = (ii) The wavelength of emitted radiation from second
1.09 × 106 × π× 9.1× 10−31 × (1.6 × 10−19 ) 2
excited state (n = 3) to ground state (n = 1) is given by
= 1.22 × 10−15 s hc
And for the level n3 = 3, we can write the orbital = E3 – E1 = – 1.51 eV + 13.6 eV = 12.09 eV
λ
2πr3
period as; T3 = hc 6.626 ×10−34 × 3 ×108
v3 ⇒ λ
= = m
12.09 eV 12.09 ×1.6 ×10−19
Here, –7
= 1.027 × 10 m = 102.7 nm
3 2
n h ε0
r3 = Radius of the orbit in n3 = = 3

πme 2 Example-25
2 −34 2 −12 The energy level diagram of an element is given
2π× (3) × (6.62 × 10 ) × 8.85 × 10
= alongside. Identify, by doing necessary calculations,
7.27 × 105 × π× 9.1× 10−31 × (1.6 × 10−19 ) 2 which transition corresponds to the emission of a
= 4.12 × 10−15 s spectral line of wavelength 102.7 nm.
Hence, the orbital periods in the levels n = 1, 2 and 3
are 1.527 × 10-16 s, 1.22 × 10-15 s and 4.12 × 10-15 s
respectively.

Example-23
The radius of the innermost electron orbit of a
hydrogen atom is 5.3×10–11 m. What are the radii of
the n = 2 and n = 3 orbits? hc 6.6 ×10−34 × 3 ×108
[NCERT] Sol. ∆E = = J
λ 102.7 ×10−9
Sol. Provided that the innermost radius, r1 = 5.3 × 10-11 m.
Let r2 be the radius of the orbit at n = 2. It is related to 6.6 ×10−34 × 3 ×108
= eV
the radius of the innermost orbit as; 102.7 ×10−9 ×1.6 ×10−19
r2 = (n)2r1 66 × 3000
= = 12.04 eV
⇒ r2 = (2)2 × 5.3 × 10-11 = 2.1 × 10-10 m 1027 ×16
Similarly, for n = 3; Now, ∆E = |-13.6-(-1.50)
r3 = (n)2r1 ∆E = | – 13.6 – (– 1.50)|= 12.1 eV
⇒ r2 = (3)2 × 5.3 × 10-11 = 4.77 × 10-10 m Hence, transition shown by arrow D corresponds to
Clearly, the radii of the n = 2 and n = 3 orbits are 2.1 × emission of λ = 102.7 nm.
10-10 m 4.77 × 10-10 m respectively.
ATOMS 229

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section-A (1 Mark Questions) Section-C (3 Marks Questions)
1. Why Thomson's model of the atom is known as a 16. A 12.75 eV electron beam is used to excite a gaseous
plum pudding model? hydrogen atom at room temperature. Determine the
2. Why did Thomson's atomic model fail? corresponding series of the lines emitted.
3. Write two important inferences drawn from 17. Write two important limitations of Rutherford’s
Rutherford's alpha particle scattering experiment. nuclear model of the atom.
4. Why do we use a very thin gold foil in Rutherford's 18. A difference of 2.3 eV separates two energy levels in
α-particle scattering experiment? an atom. What is the frequency of radiation emitted
5. What is the significance of the negative energy of when the atom makes a transition from the upper
electron in the orbit? level to the lower level?
6. What are stationary orbits? 19. The level diagram of an element is given below.
7. State Bohr's quantization condition in terms of de- Identify by doing necessary calculations, which
Broglie wavelength. transition corresponds to the emission of a spectral
8. How much energy is possessed by an electron for line of wavelength 487 nm.
n=∞ (hydrogen atom)?
9. In a hydrogen atom, if the electron is replaced by a
particle which is 200 times heavier but has the same
charge, how would its radius change?
10. The short wavelength limits of the Lyman, Paschen
and Balmer series, in the hydrogen spectrum, are
denoted by λ L , λ P and λ B respectively. Arrange
these wavelengths in increasing order. 20. An electron and a photon each have a wavelength 2.0
nm. Find
(i) their momenta, (ii) The energy of the photon and
Section-B (2 Marks Questions)
(iii) The K.E of electron.
11. Find the ratio of energies of photons produced due to
21. The radius of the innermost electron orbit of a
transition of an electron of hydrogen atom from its (i)
second permitted energy level to the first level, and hydrogen atom is 5.3 × 10−11 m . What are the radii of
(ii) the highest permitted energy level to the first the n = 4 and n = 5 orbits?
permitted level.
12. In the Rutherford scattering experiment, the distance Section-D (4 Marks Questions)
of closest approach for an a-particle is do. If α- 22. In accordance with the Bohr's model, find the
particle is replaced by a proton, then how much quantum number that characterizes the earth's
kinetic energy in comparison to a particle will be revolution around the sun in an orbit of radius
required to have the same distance of closest 1.5 × 1011 m with orbital speed 3 × 104 m / s . (Mass of
approach ?
earth
= 6.0 × 1024 kg )
13. The radius of innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen
23. The total energy of an electron in the first excited
atom is 5.3 × 10−11 m. What is the radius of orbit in the
state of the hydrogen atom is about -3.4 eV.
second excited state?
(a) What is the kinetic energy of the electron in this
14. Using Bohr’s postulates of the atomic model, derive
state?
the expression for radius of nth electron orbit, thus
(b) What is the potential energy of the electron in this
obtaining the expression for Bohr’s radius.
state?
15. Total energy of an electron in an atom is negative.
(c) Which of the answers above would change if the
What does it signify ? Calculate the energy required
choice of the zero of potential energy is changed?
to move a electron from ground state to first excited
state.
230 ATOMS

Section-E (5 Marks Questions) 25. Answer the following questions, which help you
24. Using Bohr's postulates, obtain the expression for the understand the difference between Thomson's model
total energy of the electron in the stationary states of and Rutherford's model better.
the hydrogen atom. Hence draw the energy level (a) Is the average angle of deflection of α-particles by
diagram showing how the line spectra corresponding a thin gold foil predicted by Thomson's model much
to Balmer series occur due to transition between less, about the same, or much greater than that
energy levels. predicted by Rutherford's model?
(b) Is the probability of backward scattering (i.e.,
scattering of α-particles at angles greater than 90°)
predicted by Thomson's model much less, about the
same, or much greater than that predicted by
Rutherford's model?
(c) Keeping other factors fixed, it is found
experimentally that for small thickness t, the number
of α-particles scattered at moderate angles is
proportional to t. What clue does this linear
dependence on t provide?
(d) In which model is it completely wrong to ignore
multiple scattering for the calculation of average
angle of scattering of α-particles by a thin foil?
ATOMS 231

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section - A (Single Choice Questions) 7. The ionisation potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6
volt. The energy required to remove an electron in the
1. If in nature there may not be an element for which the n = 2 state of the hydrogen atom is
principal quantum number n > 4, then the total (a) 27.2 eV (b) 13.6 eV
possible number of elements will be (c) 6.8 eV (d) 3.4 eV
(a) 60 (b) 32 8. A beam of fast moving alpha particles were directed
(c) 4 (d) 64
towards a thin film of gold. The parts A′, B′ and C′
2. In the Bohr's hydrogen atom model, the radius of the
stationary orbit is directly proportional to (n = of the transmitted and reflected beams corresponding
principal quantum number) to the incident parts A, B and C of the beam, are
(a) n 0 (b) n shown in the adjoining diagram. The number of alpha
(c) n −2
(d) n 2 particles in
3. In the n orbit, the energy of an electron is
th

13.6
E n = − 2 eV for hydrogen atom. The energy
n
required to take the electron from first orbit to second
orbit will be (a) B′ will be minimum and in C′ maximum
(a) 10.2 eV (b) 12.1 eV
(b) A′ will be maximum and in B′ minimum
(c) 13.6 eV (d) 3.4 eV (c) A′ will be minimum and in B′ maximum
4. Energy levels A, B, C of a certain atom (d) C′ will be minimum and in B′ maximum
corresponding to increasing values of energy i.e., 9. According to Bohr's theory the radius of electron in
E A < E B < E C . If λ1 , λ 2 , λ 3 are the wavelengths of an orbit described by principal quantum number n
radiations corresponding to the transitions C to B, B and atomic number Z is proportional to
to A and C to A respectively, which of the following Z2
statements is correct (a) Z2 n 2 (b)
n2
Z2 n2
(c) (d)
n Z
10. The radius of electron's second stationary orbit in
Bohr's atom is R. The radius of the third orbit will be
λλ (a) 3 R (b) 2.25 R
(a) λ 3 = λ1 + λ 2 (b) λ 3 = 1 2
λ1 + λ 2 R
(c) 9 R (d)
(c) λ1 + λ 2 + λ 3 = 0 (d) λ = λ + λ
2
3
2
1
2
2 3
5. The ratio of the energies of the hydrogen atom in its 11. If m is mass of electron, v its velocity, r the radius of
first to second excited state is stationary circular orbit around a nucleus with charge
(a) 1/4 (b) 4/9 Ze, then from Bohr's first postulate, the kinetic
(c) 9/4 (d) 4 1
energy K = mv 2 of the electron in C.G.S. system is
6. An electron jumps from the 4th orbit to the 2nd orbit of 2
hydrogen atom. Given the Rydberg's constant equal to
R = 105 cm −1 . The frequency in Hz of the emitted 1 Ze 2 1 Ze 2
radiation will be (a) (b)
2 r 2 r2
3 3
(a) × 105 (b) × 1015 Ze2
16 16 (c) (d) Ze
r 2
r
9 3
(c) × 1015 (d) × 1015
16 4 12. Consider an electron in the nth orbit of a hydrogen
atom in the Bohr model. The circumference of the
232 ATOMS

orbit can be expressed in terms of the de Broglie n2

wavelength λ of that electron as (c) (d) Z
Z n
(a) (0.259) nλ (b) nλ 19. The order of the size of nucleus and Bohr radius of an
(c) (13.6) λ (d) nλ atom respectively are
13. The energy of a hydrogen atom in its ground state is (a) 10−14 m, 10−10 m (b) 10−10 m,10−8 m
−13.6 eV . The energy of the level corresponding to (c) 10−20 m, 10−16 m (d) 10−8 m,10−6 m
the quantum number n = 2 (first excited state) in the 20. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is – 13.6
hydrogen atom is eV. What is the potential energy of the electron in
(a) – 2.72 eV (b) – 0.85 eV this state
(c) – 0.54 eV (d) – 3.4 eV (a) 0 eV (b) – 27.2 eV
14. Minimum excitation potential of Bohr's first orbit in (c) 1 eV (d) 2 eV
hydrogen atom is
(a) 13.6 V (b) 3.4 V Section-B (Assertion & Reason Type
(c) 10.2 V (d) 3.6 V
Questions)
15. Which of the following statements are true regarding
21. Assertion: According to electromagnetic theory an
Bohr's model of hydrogen atom
accelerated particle continuously emits radiation.
(I) Orbiting speed of electron decreases as it shifts to
Reason: According to classical theory, the proposed
discrete orbits away from the nucleus
path of an electron in Rutherford atom model will be
(II) Radii of allowed orbits of electron are
parabolic.
proportional to the principal quantum number
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(III) Frequency with which electrons orbits around
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
the nucleus in discrete orbits is inversely proportional
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
to the principal quantum number
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(IV) Binding force with which the electron is bound
Assertion.
to the nucleus increases as it shifts to outer orbits
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
Select correct answer using the codes given below
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
Codes :
22. Assertion: In alpha particle scattering number of
(a) I and III (b) II and IV
alpha particles undergoing head on collision is small.
(c) I, II and III (d) II, III and IV
Reason: Small fraction of the number of incident
16. When an electron in hydrogen atom is excited, from
particles rebound back.
its 4th to 5th stationary orbit, the change in angular
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
momentum of electron is (Planck’s constant:
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
=h 6.6 × 10−34 J-s ) (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(a) 4.16 × 10−34 J-s (b) 3.32 × 10−34 J-s Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(c) 1.05 × 10−34 J-s (d) 2.08 × 10−34 J-s Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
17. In a hydrogen atom, the distance between the electron
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
and proton is 2.5 × 10−11 m . The electrical force of
23. Assertion: Atoms of each element are stable and
attraction between them will be emit characteristic spectrum.
(a) 2.8 × 10−7 N (b) 3.7 × 10−7 N Reason: The spectrum provides useful information
(c) 6.2 × 10−7 N (d) 9.1× 10−7 N about the atomic structure.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
18. The time of revolution of an electron around a
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
nucleus of charge Ze in nth Bohr orbit is directly
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
proportional to
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
Assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
n3 (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
(a) n (b) 2
Z
ATOMS 233

24. Assertion: The electron in the hydrogen atom passes Reason: The spectrum of hydrogen atom is only
from energy level n = 4 to the n = 1 level. The absorption spectrum.
maximum and minimum number of photons that can (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
be emitted are six and one respectively. Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
Reason: The photons are emitted when electron (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
make a transition from the higher energy state to the Reason is not the correct explanation of the
lower energy state. Assertion.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
Reason is not the correct explanation of the Section-C (Case Study Questions)
Assertion.
Case Study-1
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
Line Spectra of the Hydrogen Atom: The spectral
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
series of hydrogen atom were accounted for by Bohr
25. Assertion: Most of the mass of the atom is
  1 1 
concentrated in its nucleus. using the relation
= v R  2 − 2  . where R =
Reason: All alpha particles striking a gold sheet are  n1 n 2 
scattered in different directions. Rydberg constant = 1.097 × 107 m-1. Lyman series is
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the obtained when an electron jumps to first orbit from
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. any subsequent orbit. Similarly, Balmer series is
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the obtained when an electron jumps to 2nd orbit from
Reason is not the correct explanation of the any subsequent orbit, Paschen series is obtained when
Assertion. an electron jumps to 3rd orbit from any subsequent
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. orbit. Whereas Lyman series lies in U.V. region,
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. Balmer series is in visible region and Paschen series
26. Assertion: Hydrogen atom consists of only one lies in infrared region. Series limit is obtained when
electron but its emission spectrum has many lines. n2 = ∞ .
Reason: Only Lyman series is found in the
29. The wavelength of first spectral line of Lyman series
absorption spectrum of hydrogen atom whereas in the
is
emission spectrum, all the series are found.
(a) 1215.4 Å (b) 1215.4 cm
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(c) 1215.4 m (d) 1215.4 mm
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
30. The wavelength limit of Lyman series is
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(a) 1215.4 Å (b) 511.9 Å
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(c) 951.6 Å (d) 911.6 Å
Assertion.
31. The frequency of first spectral line of Balmer series is
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. (a) 1.097 × 107 Hz
27. Assertion: Balmer series lies in the visible region of (b) 4.57 × 1014 Hz
electromagnetic spectrum. (c) 4.57 × 1015 Hz
Reason: Wavelength emission observed in Balmer (d) 4.57 × 1016 Hz
region lies between 500 Å to 1000 Å. 32. Which of the following transitions in hydrogen atoms
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the emit photons of highest frequency?
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. (a) n = 1 to n = 2
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the (b) n = 2 to n = 6
Reason is not the correct explanation of the (c) n = 6 to n = 2
Assertion. (d) n = 2 to n = 1
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. Case Study-2
28. Assertion: It is essential that all the lines available in Electron Transitions for the Hydrogen Atom:
the emission spectrum will also be available in the Bohr's model explains the spectral lines of hydrogen
absorption spectrum.
234 ATOMS

atomic emission spectrum. While the electron of the Case Study-3

atom remains in the ground state, its energy is
Rutherford's model of atom: This model of atom
unchanged. When the atom absorbs one or more
was given by Rutherford. According to him each
quanta of energy, the electrons moves from the
atom have tiny core at its centre which is called
ground state orbit to an excited state orbit that is
nucleus of the atom. In the nucleus whole mass and
further away.
positive charge of the nucleus is concentrated. The
size of the nucleus is of the order of 10-15 m and
atomic size is about 10–10 m.

The given figure shows an energy level diagram of

the hydrogen atom. Several transitions are marked as
I, II, III and so on. The diagram is only indicative and
not to scale. The nucleus of the atom is surrounded by a number
33. In which transition is a Balmer series photon of electrons. But whole atom is electrically neutral.
absorbed? These electrons revolve in certain orbits around the
(a) II (b) III nucleus of an atom the electrons get centripetal force
(c) IV (d) VI from the electrostatic force between nucleus and
34. The wavelength of the radiation involved in transition electrons.
II is 37. The tiny core at the centre of atom is:
(a) 291 nm (b) 364 nm (a) Electron (b) Atom
(c) 487 nm (d) 652 nm (c) Nucleus (d) Proton
35. Which transition will occur when a hydrogen atom is 38. Whole mass of the atom is concentrated at
irradiated with radiation of wavelength 103 nm? (a) Periphery of atom (b) Nucleus
(a) I (b) II (c) Proton (d) None of these
(c) IV (d) V 39. The size of the nucleus is of the order of:
36. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition (a) 1015 m (b) 10–5 m
from n = n1 to n = n2 state. The time period of the (c) 10 m
–15
(d) 1010 m
electron in the initial state is eight times that in the 40. The nucleus of the atom is surrounded by a number
final state. The possible values of n1 and n2 are of
(a)= n1 4,= n2 2 (b)= n1 8,=n2 2 (a) Proton (c) Electron
n1 8,=
(c)= n2 3 n1 6,=
(d)= n2 2 (c) Electron (d) None of these
ATOMS 235

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. Draw a schematic arrangement of the Geiger – 9. Why is the classical (Rutherford model) for an atom
Marsden experiment for studying α-particle of electron orbiting around the nucleus not able to
scattering by a thin foil of gold. Describe briefly, by explain the atomic structure?
drawing trajectories of the scattered α-particle, how (Delhi 2012)
study can be used to estimate the size of the nucleus. 10. Define the distance of closest approach. An α-particle
(Foreign 2010) of kinetic energy ‘K’ is bombarded of a thin gold foil.
2. What is the ratio of radii of the orbits corresponding The distance of the closest approach is ‘r’. what will
to first excited state and ground state in hydrogen be the distance of closest approach for an α particle
atom? of double the kinetic energy?
(Delhi 2010) (Delhi 2012)
3. Define ionization energy. What is its value for a 11. Using Bohr’s postulates for hydrogen atom, show
hydrogen atom? that the total energy (E) of the electron in the
(AI 2010) stationary states can be expressed as the sum of
4. State Bohr’s quantization condition for defining kinetic energy (K) and potential energy (U), where K
stationary orbits. = -2U. Hence deduce the expression for the total
(Foreign 2010) energy in the nth energy level of hydrogen atom.
5. State any two postulates of Bohr’s theory of (Foreign 2012)
hydrogen atom. 12. (i) In hydrogen atom, an electron undergoes transition
What is the maximum possible number of spectral from 2nd excited state to the first excited state and
lines observed when the hydrogen atom is in its then to the ground state. Identity the spectral series to
second excited state? Justify your answer. Calculate which these transitions belong.
the ratio of the maximum and minimum wavelength (ii) Find out the ratio of the wavelength of the emitted
of the radiations emitted in this process. radiations in the two cases.
(AI 2010) (AI 2012)
6. Using the postulates of Bohr’s model of hydrogen 13. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom -13.6 eV.
atom, obtain an expression for the frequency of It an electron makes a transition from an energy level
radiation emitted when atom make a transition from -0.85 eV to -3.4 eV, calculate the wavelength of the
the higher energy state with quantum number n1 to spectral line emitted. The which series of hydrogen
the lower energy state with quantum number nf (nf < spectrum does this wavelength belong?
ni) (AI 2012)
(Foreign 2011) 14. State de-Broglie Hypothesis
7. The electron in a given Bohr orbit has a total energy (Delhi 2012)
of -1.5 eV. Calculate its 15. Using Bohr’s second postulate of quantization of
(i) kinetic energy (ii) potential energy (iii) orbital angular momentum show that the
wavelength of radiation emitted, when this electron circumference of the electron in the nth orbital state in
makes a transition to the ground state hydrogen atom is n times the de Broglie wavelength
[Given : Energy in the ground state = -13.6 eV and associated with it.
Rydberg’s constant = 1.09 × 107 m-1] (Delhi 2012)
(Delhi 2011) 16. In an experiment on α-particle scattering by a thin
8. (a) Using de Broglie’s hypothesis, explain with the foil of gold, draw a graph showing, the number of
help of a suitable diagram, Bohr’s second postulate of particles scattered versus the scattering angle θ. Why
quantization of energy levels in a hydrogen atom. is it that a very small fraction of the particles are
(b) The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is - scattered at θ > 90°? Write two important conclusions
13.6 eV. What are the kinetic and potential energies that can be drawn regarding the structure of the atom
of the electron in this state? from the study of this experiment.
(AI 2011) (Foreign 2013)
236 ATOMS

17. In the ground state of hydrogen atom, its Bohr radius 25. A 12.5 eV electron beam is used to bombard gaseous
is given as 5.3 × 10-11 m. The atom is excited such hydrogen at room temperature. Upto which energy
that the radius becomes 21.2 × 10-11 m. Find (i) the level the hydrogen atoms would be excited?
value of the principal quantum number and (ii) the Calculate the wavelengths of the first member of
total energy of the atom in this excited state. Lyman and first member of Balmer series.
(Delhi 2013) (Delhi 2014)
18. Using Bohr’s postulates, obtain the expression for the 26. The value of ground state energy of hydrogen atom is
total energy of the electron in the stationary states of -13.6 eV.
the hydrogen atom. Hence draw the energy level (i) Find the energy require to move an electron from
diagram showing how the line spectra corresponding the ground state to the first excited state of the atom.
to Balmer series occur due to transition between (ii) Determine (a) the kinetic energy and
energy levels. (b) orbital radius in the first excited state of the atom.
(Delhi 2013) (Given the value of Bohr radius = 0.53 Å).
19. The energy levels of a hypothetical atom are shown (AI 2014)
in the given figure. Which of the shown transitions 27. An electron is revolving around the nucleus with a
will result in the emission of a photon of wavelength constant speed of 2.2 × 108 m/s. Find the de Broglie
275 nm? wavelength associated with it.
Which of these transitions correspond to emission of (AI 2014)
radiation of (i) maximum and (ii) minimum 28. In Rutherford scattering experiment, draw the
wavelength? trajectory traced by α-particles in the coulomb field
(Foreign 2013 & 2011) of target nucleus and explain how this led to estimate
20. When is Hα line of the Balmer series in the emission the size of the nucleus.
spectrum of hydrogen atom obtained? (AI 2015)
(Delhi 2013) 29. Calculate the shortest wavelength in the Balmer
21. What is the maximum number of spectral lines series of hydrogen atom. In which region (infrared
emitted by a hydrogen atom when it is in the third visible, ultraviolet) of hydrogen spectrum does this
excited state? wavelength lie?
(AI 2013) (AI 2015)
22. Using Bohr’s postulates, derive the expression for the 30. Show that the radius of the orbit in hydrogen atom
frequency of radiation emitted when electron in varies as n2, where n is the principal quantum number
hydrogen atom undergoes transition from higher of the atom.
energy state (quantum number n1) to the lower state, (Delhi 2015)
(nf). When electron in hydrogen atom jumps from 31. The figure shows energy level diagram of hydrogen
energy state ni = 4 to nf = 3, 2, 1. Identify the spectral atom.
series to which the emission lines belon.
(AI 2013)
23. Using Rutherford’s model of the atom, derive the
expression for the total energy of the electron in
hydrogen atom. What is the significance of total
negative energy possessed by the electron?
(AI 2014)
24. (a) The radius of the innermost electron orbit of a
(a) Find out the transition which result in the
hydrogen atom is 5.3 × 10-11 m. Calculate its radius in
emission of a photon of wavelength 496 nm.
n = 3 orbit. (b) which transition corresponds to the emission of
(b) The total energy of an electron in the first excited radiation of maximum wavelength? Justify your
state of the hydrogen atom is 3.4 eV. Find out its (i) answer.
kinetic energy and (ii) potential energy in this state. (AI 2015)
(Delhi 2014)
ATOMS 237

32. Using Rydberg formula, calculate the longest 42. The short wavelength limit for the Lyman series of
wavelength belonging to Lyman and Balmer series of the hydrogen spectrum is 913.4 Å. Calculate the short
hydrogen spectrum. In which region these transitions wavelength limit for Balmer series of the hydrogen
lies? spectrum.
(Foreign 2015) (AI 2017)
33. The kinetic energy of the electron orbiting in the first 43. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6
excited state of hydrogen atom is 3.4 eV. Determine eV. If an electron makes a transition from an energy
the de Broglie wavelength associated with it. level -1.51 eV to -3.4 eV, calculate the wavelength of
(Foreign 2015) the spectral line emitted and name the series of
34. State Bohr postulate of hydrogen atom that gives the hydrogen spectrum to which it belongs
relationship for the frequency of emitted photon in a (AI 2017)
transition. 44. A hydrogen atom initially in the ground state absorbs
(Foreign 2016) photon which excites it to the n = 4 level. Estimate
35. Define ionization energy. How would the ionization the frequency of the photon.
energy change when electron in hydrogen atom is (AI 2018)
replaced by a particle of mass 200 times that of the 45. State Bohr’s postulate to define stable orbits in
electron but having the same charge? hydrogen atom. How does de Broglie’s hypothesis
(AI 2016) explain the stability of these orbits?
36. Calculate the de-Broglie wavelength of the electron (2018)
orbiting in the n = 2 state of hydrogen atom. 46. State Bohr’s quantization condition of angular
(AI 2016) momentum. Calculate the shortest wavelength of the
37. Use de-Broglie’s hypothesis to write the relation for Bracket series and state to which part of the
the nth radius of Bohr orbit in terms of Bohr’s electromagnetic spectrum does it belong.
quantization condition of orbital angular momentum. (Delhi 2019)
(Foreign 2016) 47. Using Bohr’s postulates, derive the expression for the
38. Find the relation between the three wavelength λ1, λ2 orbital period of the electron moving in the nth orbit
and λ3 from the energy level diagram shown in the of hydrogen atom.
figure. (AI 2019)
48. Calculate the orbital period of the electron in the first
excited state of hydrogen atom.
(Delhi 2019)
49. Write Rydberg’s formula for wavelengths of the
spectral lines of hydrogen spectrum. Mention to
(Delhi 2016) which series in the emission spectrum of hydrogen,
39. Write two important limitations of Rutherford nuclear Hα line belongs.
model of the atom. (AI 2019)
(Delhi 2017) 50. Obtain the expression for the ratio of the de Broglie
40. Find out the wavelength of the electron orbiting in wavelengths associated with the electron orbiting in
the ground state of hydrogen atom. the second and third excited states of hydrogen atom.
(Delhi 2017) (Delhi 2019)
41. A 12.75 eV electron beam is used to excited a
gaseous hydrogen atom at room temperature.
Determine the wavelength and the corresponding
series of the lines emitted.
(AI 2017)
238 ATOMS

Notes:

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

ATOMS
12
Nuclei
240 NUCLEI

Chapter at a glance
Or 1 a.m.u = 931.5 MeV
1.1 Isotopes
The atoms of an element, which have the same atomic
number but different mass numbers, are called isotopes. 1.6 Nuclear Size
(i) 8O , 8O , 8O
16 17 18
The volume of the nucleus is directly proportional to the
(ii) 17Cl , 17Cl
35 37 number of nucleons (mass number) constituting the nucleus.
If R is the radius of the nucleus having mass number A, then
(iii) 82Pb206, 82Pb207, 82Pb208.
4
πR 3 α A
1.2 Isotones 3
Or R α A1/3 Or R = R0 A1/3 R0 = 1.2 × 10- m
15

The atoms whose nuclei have same number of neutrons are

called isotones. 6C14, 7N15
1.7 Nuclear Density
1.3 Isobars Mass of the nucleus of the atom of mass number A = A
The atoms, which have same mass number but different a.m.u = A × 1.660565 × 10-27 kg. If R is radius of the
atomic numbers, are called isobars. nucleus, then
(i) 1H3 and 1H3 (ii) 2Li7 and 4Be7 4 4 4
πR 3 = π ( R 03 A1/3 ) = πR 03 A
3
Volume of nucleus =
(iii) 28Ar40 and 29Ca40 (iv) 32Ge76 and 34Se76 3 3 3
Taking R0 = 1.2 × 10-15 m, we have
1.4 Atomic Mass Unit mass of nucleus
The atomic mass unit (a.m.u) is a very small unit of mass Density of the nucleus, ρ =
volume of nucleus
and it is found to be very convenient in nuclear physics.
A × 1.66065 × 10−27
Atomic mass unit is defined as 1/12th of the mass of one 6C12 = = 2.26 × 1017 kg m-3
4
atom. π (1.2 × 10 ) × A
−15 3

3
According to Avogadro’s hypothesis, number of atoms in 12 (independent of A)
g of 6C12 is equal to Avogadro number i.e. 6.023 × 1023.
Therefore, the mass of one carbon atom (6C12) is i.e.
NOTE:
1.992678 × 10–26 kg. • The density of the nuclei of all the atoms is
Therefore, 1 a.m.u. same as it is independent of mass number.

or 1 a.m.u. = 1.660565 × 10-27 kg • The high density of the nucleus (≈ 1017 kg m-3)
suggests the compactness of the nucleus. Such
examples of high densities are met in the form
1.5 Energy Equivalent of Atomic Mass of neutron stars.
Unit
According to Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence relation,
1.8 Mass Defect
the energy equivalent of mass m is given by E = mc2 The difference between the sum of the masses of the
Where c is speed of light. nucleons constituting a nucleus and the rest mass of the
nucleus is known as mass defect. It is denoted by ∆m.
Suppose that m = 1 a.m.u = 1.660565 × 10-27 kg
Let us calculate the mass defect in case of the nucleus of an
Since, c = 2.998 × 108 ms-1, the energy equivalent of 1 a.m.u
atom zXA. The nucleus of the atom contains Z protons and
is given by
(A−Z) neutrons. Therefore, if mN (zXA) is mass of the
1 a.m.u = (1.660565 × 10-27 kg) × (2.998 × 108 ms1)2 nucleus of the atom ZXA, then the mass defect is given by
= 1.4925 × 10-10 J
∆m = [Zmp + (A−Z)mn −mN (zXA)]
Since, 1 MeV = 1.602 × 10-13 J, we have
NUCLEI 241

The binding energy of a nucleus may be defined as the A fission reaction will be steady, in case k = 1. In case k > 1,
energy equivalent to the mass defect of the nucleus. It may the fission reaction will accelerate and it will retard, in case
be measured as the work required to be done to separate the k < 1.
nucleon an infinite distance apart, so that they no longer
interact with each other.

If ∆m is mass defect of a nucleus, then according to

1.12 Nuclear Fusion
Einstein’s mass-energy relation, binding energy of the When two light nuclei fuse to form a larger nucleus, energy
nucleus = ∆m c2 (in joule). is released, this process is called nuclear fusion. Some
Here, mass defect ∆m has to be measured in kilogram. In examples of such energy liberating fusion reactions are:
case, mass defect is measured in a.m.u., then
1
Binding energy of the nucleus = ∆m × 931.5 (in MeV) 1 H + 11H → 12 H + e + + v + 0.42 MeV
2
Binding energy = [Zmp + (A−Z)mn− mN (ZXA)] × 931.5 MeV 1 H + 12 H → 32 He + n + 3.27 MeV
2
1 H + 12 H → 13 H + 11H + 4.03 MeV

1.9 Binding Energy Per Nucleon

The binding energy per nucleon is the average energy In the first reaction, two protons combine to form a deuteron
required to extract one nucleon from the nucleus. and a position with a release of 0.42 MeV energy. In second
binding energy reaction, two deuterons combine to form the light isotope of
Thus, binding energy per nucleon =
A helium. In third reaction, two deuterons combine to form a
triton and a proton. For fusion to take place, the two nuclei
must come close enough so that attractive short – range
nuclear force is able to affect them. However, since they are
both positively charged particles, they experience coulomb
repulsion. They, therefore, must have enough energy to
overcome this coulomb barrier. The height of the barrier
depends on the charges and radii of the two interacting
nuclei. It can be shown, for example, that the barrier height
for two protons is ~ 400 keV, and is higher for nuclei with
higher charges. We can estimate the temperature at which
two protons in a proton gas would (averagely) have enough
Fig. 10.9
to overcome the coulomb barrier :

3
1.10 Packing Fraction   kT = K 400 keV, which gives T ~ 3 × 109 K.
2
Packing fraction = (mass defect)/A.
When fusion is achieved by raising the temperature of the
system so that particles have enough kinetic energy to
1.11 Nuclear Fission
overcome the coulomb repulsive behaviour, it is called
The process of splitting of a heavy nucleus into two nuclei thermonuclear fusion.
of nearly comparable masses with liberation of energy is
called nuclear fission. 2. Radioactivity
U235 + 0n1 → [92U236] → 56Ba141+ 36Kr92 + 30n1 + Q
92
The spontaneous transformation of an element into another
Neutron reproduction factor is defined as the ratio of the rate with the emission of some particle (or particles) or
of production of neutrons to the rate of loss of neutrons. electromagnetic radiation is called natural radioactivity.
Thus,
rate of production of neutrons
k=
rate of loss of neutrons
242 NUCLEI

2.1 Laws of Radioactivity Decay N

dN
t
Integrating ∫N N = ∫0 –λdt
Rutherford and Soddy studied the phenomenon of 0

radioactivity in details and formulated the following laws, N

Or log e = −λt
known as the laws of radioactive decay: N0
N
Or = e −λt
• Radioactivity is a spontaneous phenomenon and one N0
cannot predict, when a particular atom in a given Or N = N0e−λt
radioactive sample will undergo disintegration.
• When a radioactive atom disintegrates, either an α-
particle (nucleus of helium) or a β-particle (electron) 2.3 Half Life
is emitted. Consider that a radioactive sample contains N0 atoms at time
• The emission of an α-particle by a radioactive atom t = 0. Then, the number of atoms left behind after time t is
result in a daughter atom, whose atomic number is 2 given by N = N0 e−λ t
units less and mass number is 4 units less than that of
the parent atom. From the definition of half-life, it follows that when t = t1/2,

ZX
A α− decay
 → Z−2 Y A −4 N0
N= .
• The emission of a β-particle by a radioactive atom 2
result in a daughter atom, whose atomic number is 1 Setting the above condition in equation, we have
unit more but mass number is same as that of the N0
parent atom. = N 0 e −λt1/2
2
A β− decay
ZX  → Z +1Y A
Or e −λt1/2 = 1 / 2 Or eλt1/2 = 2
• The number of atoms disintegrating per second of a
Or λT = loge 2 = 2.303 log10 2 = 2.303 × 0.3010 = 0.693
radioactive sample at any time is directly proportional
to the number of atoms present at that time. The rate
0.693
of disintegration of the sample cannot be altered by Or t1/2 =
changing the external factors, such as pressure, λ
temperature etc. It is known as radioactive decay
law.
Thus, half life of a radioactive substance is inversely
proportional to its decay constant and is a characteristic
According to radioactive decay law, the rate of property of its nucleus. It cannot be altered by any known
disintegration at any time t is directly proportional to method.
the number of atoms present at time t i.e.
dN dN
∝ N or = − λN.
dt dt 2.4 Mean life or Average Life
Where the constant of proportionally λ is called The average life of a radioactive substance is defined as the
decay constant of the radioactive sample. It is also average time for which the nuclei of the atoms of the
known as disintegration constant or transformation radioactive substance exist. It is defined by tavg.
constant. Its value depends upon the nature of the
radioactive sample. Further, the negative sign 1
indicates that the number of the atoms of the sample t avg =
λ
decreases with the passage of time.
dN
From equation, we have ≡ − λdt.
dt
NUCLEI 243

Solved Examples
Example-1 Example-5
What percentage of a radioactive substance will be Show graphically the variation in the mass of
left after four half-life periods? radioactive substance with time. Mark the values of
Sol. Given, n = 4 time on the X-axis in terms of half-life (T, 2T, 3T etc)
We have, N = N 0 (1 / 2 )
n and the corresponding values of mass on the Y-axis.
4
Sol. Graph showing the variation in mass of a radioactive
N 1 N 1 substance with time is shown alongside M0 shows
=  or × 100 = × 100
N0  2  N0 16 original mass.
N = 6.25% of numbers of radioactive substance.

Example-2
Among alpha, beta and gamma radiations, which are
affected by a magnetic field?
Sol. Among alpha, beta and gamma radiation, Alpha and
beta radiations are affected by the magnetic field, as
they are charged particles. Alpha particles are
positively charged, and beta particles are negatively
charged. Gamma radiations suffer no deflection in the
magnetic field as they are neutral in nature.
Example-6
Example-3
Distinguish between nuclear fission and nuclear
What do you understand by the terms radioactivity
fusion.
and radioactive substances? Name two radioactive
Sol.
elements?
Nuclear fission Nuclear Fusion
Sol. The phenomenon of emission of invisible radiations
(i) It is the process in (i) It is the process in
by certain heavy elements like uranium, radium etc.,
which a heavy nucleus which two lighter
is called radioactivity and substances which emit such
split up into two lighter nuclei combine together
radiations are called radioactive substances. The
nuclei of nearly equal to form a heavy
invisible rays emitted by the radioactive substances
masses. nucleus.
consist of three different types of radiation. These
are: (i) Alpha-particles (ii) Beta-particles (iii) (ii) Comparatively less (ii) Enormous amount
Gamma-rays amount of energy is of energy is released.
Two radioactive elements are: released.
(i) Thorium (ii) Plutonium (iii) Nuclear fission (iii) A very high
may take place at temperature of the order
Example-4 ordinary temperature. of millions of degree is
What is meant by the binding energy of the nucleus? required.
How is it related to mass defect? (iv) The sources of (iv) The sources of
Sol. The binding energy of a nucleus is the energy fissionable materials are fusion reaction i.e.,
required to take its nucleons away from one another. limited. hydrogen is more
Thus, the binding energy of the nucleus is the plentiful (air and
measure of the stability of the nucleus. water).
(v) The products of (v) The products of
We know, ∆= m  Zm p + ( A − Z ) m n  − M
nuclear fission are in fusion are non-
Mass defect, general radioactive and radioactive and pose no
Where A, Z, mp, mn and M are the atomic number, hence pose a radiation radiation hazard.
mass number, mass of the proton, mass of the neutron hazard.
and mass of the nucleus respectively.
From Einstein’s mass energy equivalence, Example-7
The binding energy in terms of mass defect is given (i) Write symbolically the process expressing the β +
by
decay of 11 22
Na . Also write the basic nuclear process
B.E. = ∆mc 2
underlying this decay.
B.E. =∆m × c 2 = Zm p + ( A − Z ) m n − M  c 2 J (ii) Is the nucleus formed in the decay of the nucleus
11 Na , an isotope or isobar?
22
244 NUCLEI

Sol. (i) The β+ decay of 11 N 22 is expressed as: Sol. Radioactivity: it is spontaneous phenomenon of
22 22 0 disintegration of nuclei of unstable atom.
N → 10 Ne + 1e + v
11
Radioactivity is independent of physical and
The neutron-proton ratio is also an important factor chemical changes of the material. It obey the law of
that determines the stability of a nucleus. A proton- probability. It is uncertain that when particular atom
rich nucleus undergoes positron emission ( β+ decay), will decay.
so as to improve the neutron-proton ratio. The The rate of disintegration is directly proportional to
positron emission decreases proton number relative to the number of atoms present in the element.
neutron number and the product nucleus becomes dN dN
∝ − N or = −λN
relatively more stable. In β+ decay, neutrino (v) is dt dt
emitted so as to conserve spin. The number of atoms at any time t of the elements
(ii) The nucleus so formed is an isobar of 11
22
Na having initial number of atoms N0 is given as
because the mass number is same, but the atomic N = N 0 e −λt where λ is decay constant.
numbers are different. The S.I. unit of radioactivity is Becquerel and
practical units are Curie and Rutherford.
Example-8 The number of atoms decaying per second is called
Compare properties of α, β particles and γ - rays activity of the material.
Sol. Comparison of the properties of α − particles, β − The rate of disintegration per second is called decay
constant (λ)
particles and γ - rays
Decay constant is the negative slope of N – t curve.
Property α-particle β-particle γ-rays The decay constant for stable elements is zero.
Nature Helium Fast moving Electro-
nucleus electrons magnetic
2 (He 4
) waves Example-11
Charge + 3.2×10-19 -1.6×10-19 C No A 1 MeV positron collides head on with a 1MeV
C charge electron and they annihilated, giving rise to gamma
Rest 6.6×10 kg 9.1×10 kg Zero
-27 -31 rays. What is the total energy of resulting gamma
mass rays?
Velocity About 99% of the Equal to Sol. Total energy
= 2  m 0 c 2 + E k 
(1/10)th of velocity of the
the velocity light velocity Where m0 is the mass of the electron, m 0 c 2 denotes
of light. of light the rest mass energy and E k is the kinetic energy.
(3×108 or E γ = 2 × 0.000549 × 931MeV + 2MeV
ms-1)
= 1.022 MeV + 2 MeV
= 3.022 MeV
Ionising Higher than (1/100)th of (1/100)th
power that of β- α- particles of that of
Example-12
particle β- A radioactive sample has 6.0 x 1018 active nuclei at a
particles certain instant. How many of these nuclei will still be
Penetrati Smaller 100 times 100 times in the same active state after two half-lives?
ng than that of that of α- that of β- Sol. In one half-life, the number of active nuclei reduces
power β-particles particles particles to half the original number. Thus, in two half-life the
number is reduced to (1/2) of (1/2) of the original
Example-9 number.
Write nuclear reaction equations for Number of remaining active nuclei
(i) α – decay of 88
226
Ra (ii) α – decay of 242
94 Pu 1 1
=6.0 × 1018 ×   ×   =1.5 × 1018
Sol. α is a nucleus of helium ( He 4 ) . In every α-decay, 2 2
2

there is a loss of 2 protons and 4 neutrons.

Example-13
Find out the binding energy per nucleon of an α-
(i) 226
88
222
Ra →86 Rn + 42 He particle in MeV. It is given that the masses of α-
(ii) 242
94
238
Pu →92 U + 42 He particle, proton and neutron are respectively 4.00150
a.m.u., 1.00728 a.m.u. and 1.00867 a.m.u
Sol. Given that,
Example-10
The mass of an α – particle, mα = 4.00150 a.m.u
Explain the phenomenon of radioactivity stating the
The mass of the proton, mp = 1.00728 a. m. u.
laws related to it.
 NUCLEI 245

The mass of the neutron, mn = 1.00867 a.m.u Hence, the mass defect of the nucleus would be,
Mass Defect, ∆m = 2mp + 2mn – ma ∆m = 26 × mH + 30 × mn – m1
= 2 x 1.00728 + 2 x 1.00867 – 4.00150 Where, Mass of a proton, mH = 1.007825u
= 0.0304 a.m.u Mass of a neutron, mn = 1.008665u
Since, 1 a.m.u. = 931.5 MeV Substituting these values into the above equation,
Thus total binding energy will be ∆E = 0.0304 x we get,
931.5 MeV = 28.31 MeV ∆m = 26 × 1.007825 + 30 × 1.008665 – 55.934939
⇒ ∆m = 26.20345 + 30.25995 – 55.934939
Example-14 ∴ ∆m = 0.528461u
A radioactive sample has a half-life of 1.42 x 1017 But we have, 1u = 931.5 MeV/c2
second and a mass number of 238. Calculate the ∆m = 0.528461 × 931.5 MeV/c2
number of disintegrations per second in 1 g of this The binding energy of this nucleus could be given
sample. Avogadro’s number is 6.023 x 1023 mol-1 as, Ebl = ∆mc2
Sol. The number of atoms in 1 g of the sample is, Where, c = Speed of light
6.023 × 1023  MeV 
=N = 2.53 × 1021 ⇒= E bl 0.528461× 931.5  2  × c 2
238  c 
Total half-life T of the radioactive sample is 1.42 x ∴ E b1 = 492.26 MeV
1017 s.
Now, we have the average binding energy per
0.6931 0.6931
∴Decay constant,
= λ = nucleon to be,
T 1.42 × 1017 492.26
= 0.488 × 10−17 s −1 B.E = 8.79 MeV
=
56
The number of disintegrations per seconds in 1 g of
the sample is Also, atomic mass of 83209
Bi, m 2 = 208.980388 u
dN We know that, 83209
Bi nucleus has 83 protons and 209
− = λN
dt – 83 = 126 neutrons
= 0.488 × 10−17 × 2.53 × 1021 Where,
Mass of a proton, mH = 1.007825 u
= 1.23 × 104 s −1 Mass of a neutron, mn = 1.008665u
∆m’ = 83 × 1.007825 + 126 × 1.008665 –208.980388
Example-15 ⇒ ∆m’ = 83.649475 + 127.091790 – 208980388
The atomic mass of 8 O16 is 16.000 amu. Find out its
 MeV 
binding energy per nucleon. The mass of electron = Eb2 = ∆m’c2 = 1.760877 × 931.5  2  × c 2
 c 
0.00055 amu, mass of proton = 1.007593 amu and
mass of neutron = 1.008982 amu and 1 amu = 931.5 ∴ Eb2 = 1640.26 MeV
MeV. Average binding energy per nucleon is found to be
Sol. 8 O16 has 8 protons, 8 neutrons and 8 electrons, 1640.26
= = 7.848MeV
∴ Mass of 8 (electron + protons + neutrons) 209
= 8 [ 0.00055 + 1.007593 + 1.008982] amu Hence, the average binding energy per nucleon is
found to be 7.848 MeV.
= 16.1370 amu
∴Mass defect,
= ∆m 16.1370 amu − 16.0000 amu Example-17
Write nuclear reaction equations for
= 0.1370 amu (i) β− decay of 15
32
P (ii) β− decay of 210
83 Bi
Binding energy =
0.1370 × 931.5 MeV =
127.615 MeV (iii) β+ - decay of 11
6 C (iv) β+-decay of 97
43 Tc
127.615 (v) Electron capture of
∴Binding energy / nucleon = = 7.97 MeV
16 120
54 Xe
Example-16
(NCERT)
Obtain the binding energy of the nuclei Sol. β is an electron (e- for β- and e- for β+). In every β+ -
26 Fe and 83 Bi in units of MeV from the following
56 209
decay, there is a loss of 1 proton and a neutrino is
data: emitted from the nucleus. In every β- decay, there is a
= m(5626 Fe) 55.934939
= 209
u m(83 Bi) 208.980388 u gain of 1 proton and an antineutrino is emitted from
(NCERT) the nucleus.For the given cases, the various nuclear
Sol. We are given the following: relations can be written by:
Atomic mass of 56 26 Fe, m1 = 55.934939 u
246 NUCLEI

(i) 32
15 P → 32 0 −
16 S + −1 e + v
Now, we have the kinetic energy as,
 220 − 4 
(ii) 210
Bi → 210
Po + −01 e − + v K.E
= α   × 6.41
= 6.29 MeV
83 84
 220 
(iii) 11
6 C → 115 B + −01 e + + v The kinetic energy of the alpha particle is found to be
6.29 MeV
(iv) 97
43 Tc → 97
42 Mo + −01 e + + v
Example-19
(v) 120
Xe + −01 e → 120
53 I + v
54 How long can an electric lamp of 100W be kept
glowing by fusion of 2.0 kg of deuterium? Take the
Example-18 fusion reaction as
Find the Q-value and the kinetic energy of the (NCERT)
emitted α-particle in the α-decay of Sol. The fusion reaction is given to be :
2 2 3
1 H +1 H → 2 He + n + 3.27 MeV
226 220
(a) 88 Ra and (b) 86 Ag
226
Given m( 88 Ra) = 226.02540 u, Amount of deuterium, m = 2kg
222
1 mole, i.e., 2 g of deuterium contains 6.023 × 1023
m( 86 Rn) = 222.01750 u, atoms.
222
m( 86 Rn) = 220.01150 u, 2.0 kg of deuterium contains
222 6.023 × 1023
m( 84 Po) = 216.00189 u. × 2000 = 6.023 × 1026 atoms.
2
(NCERT)
It could be inferred from the given reaction that when
Sol. (a) We know that,
two atoms of deuterium fuse, 3.27 MeV energy is
Alpha particle decay of 88 26
Ra emits a helium released.
nucleus. As a result, its mass number reduces to 222 Therefore, the total energy per nucleus released in the
= (226-4) and its atomic number reduces to 86 = (22 fusion reaction would be:
- 2). This is shown in the following nuclear reaction : 3.27
Q – value of emitted α - particle = (Sum of initial E= × 6.023 × 1026 MeV
2
mass – Sum of final mass) c2 It is also given that : 3.27
226
m(88 Ra) = 226.02540 u = × 6.023 × 1026 × 1.6 × 10−19 × 106
2
220
m(88 Rn) = 220.01137 u ∴= E 1.576 × 1014 J
m( 42 He) = 4.002603u Power of the electric lamp is given tobe, P = 100 W =
On substituting these values into the above equation, 100 J/s, that is, the energy consumed by the lamp per
Q value = [226.02540 – (222.01750 + 4.002603)]uc2 second is 100J.
Q value = 0.005297 uc2 Now, the total time for which the electric lamp glows
But we know, lu = 931.5 MeV/c2 could be calculated as,
⇒ Q = 0.005297 × 931.5 ≈ 4.94 MeV 1.576 × 1014 1.576 × 1014
= t =
Kinetic energy of the α particle 100 100 × 60 × 60 × 24 × 365
 mass number after decay  ∴ t ≈ 4.9 ×104 years
= ×Q Hence, the total time for which the electric lamp
 Mass number before decay 
glows is found to be 4.9 × 104 years.
222
∴ K.E α = × 4.94 = 4.85 MeV
226 Example-20
Hence, the Kinetic energy of the alpha particle found A radioactive isotope has a half-life of 5 years. After
to be 4.85 MeV. how much time is its activity reduced to 3.125% of
(b) We know that, Alpha particle decay of 86
220
Rn its original activity ?
n
could be given as, R 1
Sol. We know = 
220 216 4
86 Rn →84 Po + 2 He R0  2 
We are also given, R 3.125
= 3.125%
Given =
Mass of 86
220
Rn =220.01137 u R0 100
Mass of 84
216
Po = 216.00189 u 3.125  1 
n
1 1
n 5 n
1 1
Now, Q value could be given as, ∴ =   or =   or   =  
100  2  32  2  2 2
Q – Value could be given as
Q – value = [220.01137 – (216.00189 + 4.00260)] × ⇒n=5
Given T = 5 years
931.5 ≈ 641 MeV
NUCLEI 247

t Example-24
As n = How does the size of a nucleus depend on its mass
T
number? Hence explain why the density of nuclear
t
∴ =5 matter is independent of the size of nucleus.
T Sol. The radius (size) R of nucleus is related to its mass
or t = 5 × 5 = 25 years number (A) as
1/3 –15
R = R0A where R0 = 1.1 × 10 m
Example-21
9 If m is the average mass of a nucleon, then mass of
The half-life of 92
238
U against α-decay is 4.5 × 10
nucleus = mA, where A is mass number
years. Calculate the activity of 1 g sample of U. 4 4 4
9 9 7
Sol. T1/2 = 4.5 × 10 years = 4.5 × 10 × 3.15 × 10 seconds Volume of nucleus = πR 3 = π(R 0 A1/3 )3 = πR 30 A
3 3 3
Number of atoms in 1 g sample of U is N = 6.023 ×
∴Density of nucleus,
1
23
10 × . mass mA m 3m
238 ρN = = = =
volume 4 4 3

log e 2 πR 30 A πR 30 4πR 0
Activity of sample A = λN = ×N 3 3
T1/ 2 Clearly nuclear density ρN is independent of mass
 0.6931  23 number A.
=  9 7 
× 6.023 × 10 ×
 4.5 ×10 × 3.15 ×10 
4
Example-25
= 1.237 × 10 becquerel. Explain why is the energy distribution of β–rays
continuous.
Example-22 Sol. During β-decay, a neutron is converted into a proton
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon 40
20 Ca 7 with the emission of a β-particle with an
nucleus. antineutrino
20 Ca) ] = 39.962589 u
[Given : m ( 40 1
0n 
→ 1p1 + −1β0 + v
mn (mass of a neutron) = 1.008665 u The energy produced in this decay is shared by β-
mp (mass of a proton) = 1.007825 u particle and antineutrino ; therefore β-particle may
2
1 u = 931 MeV/c ] have varying amount of energy starting from zero to a
Sol. Total Binding energy of 4020 Ca nucleus
certain maximum value.
= 20mp + 20 mn – M ( 40
20 Ca)

= 20 × 1.007825 + 20 × 1.008665 – 39.962589

= 0.367211 u = 0.367211 × 931 MeV = 341.87 MeV
341.87
Binding energy per nucleus = MeV/nucleon
40
= 8.55 MeV/nucleon

Example-23
A heavy nucleus X of mass number 240 and binding
energy per nucleon 7.6 MeV is split into two
fragments Y and Z of mass numbers 110 and 130.
The binding 89/energy per nucleon in Y and Z is 8.5
MeV per nucleon. Calculate the energy Q released
per fission in MeV.
2 2
Sol. Energy released Q = (MY + MZ)C – MX C
= 8.5 (110 + 130) MeV – 7.6 × 240 MeV
= (8.5 – 7.6) × 240 MeV
= 0.9 × 240 MeV = 2.16 MeV
248 NUCLEI

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section-A (1 Mark Questions) 17. Distinguish between nuclear fission and fusion.
1. What will be the ratio of the radii of two nuclei of Explain how the energy is released in both the
mass numbers A1 and A 2 ? processes.
18. Show that the density of nucleus over a wide range of
2. What holds nucleons together in a nucleus?
nuclei is constant- independent of mass number A.
3. Define mass defect of a nucleus. How is it related to
19. Why is the binding energy per nucleon found to be
the binding energy of the nucleus?
constant for nuclei in the range of mass number (A)
4. In the nuclear decay reaction 11 H →10 n + QP X find P, Q
lying between 30 and 170?
and hence identify X.
5. What is the difference between an electron and a β − Section-C (3 Marks Questions)
particle? 20. How long can an electric lamp of 100W be kept
6. Why do lighter nuclei tend to fuse together? glowing by fusion of 2.0 kg of deuterium? Take the
7. State the reason, why heavy water is generally used fusion reaction as
as a moderator in a nuclear reactor.
2 2
1 H + 1 H → 31 H + n + 3.27 MeV .
8. The sun is constantly losing mass due to 21. Write the relation for binding energy (BE) (in MeV)
thermonuclear fusion. Comment. of a nucleus of AZ N , atomic number (Z) and mass
9. Why is nuclear fusion not possible in a laboratory?
number (A) in terms of the masses of its constituents
10. Two nuclei have mass number in the ratio 1:3. What
- neutrons and protons. (b) Draw a plot of BE/A
is the ratio of their nuclear densities?
versus mass number A for 2 ≤ A ≤ 170 . Use this
graph to explain the release of energy in the process
Section-B (2 Marks Questions) of nuclear fusion of two light nuclei.
11. Write any two characteristic properties of nuclear 22. (a) Write three characteristic properties of nuclear
force. force.
12. Calculate the energy released in MeV in the (b) Draw a plot of potential energy of a pair of
following nuclear reaction: nucleons as a function of their separation. Write two
important conclusions that can be drawn from the
238
92
234
U →90 Th + 42 He + Q  Mass of 92
238
238.05079u 
U= graph
238
Mass of 92 U = 238.05079u
Mass of 42 th = 234.043630u
Section-D (4 Marks Questions)
23. (a) 23 He + 23 He 
→ 24 He + 11 H + 11 H + 12.86 MeV,
Mass of 42 He = 4.002600u
Though number of nucleons are conserved on both
1u = 931.5MeV / c 2
side the reaction, yet the energy is released. How?
13. Two nuclei have mass numbers in the ratio 1: 8 what
Explain.
is the ratio of their nuclear radii?
(b) Draw a plot of potential energy between a pair of
14. Give one similarity and one dissimilarity between
nucleons as a function of their separation. Mark the
nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
regions where potential energy is
15. If both the number of protons and neutrons in a
(i) Positive and
nuclear reaction is conserved, in what way is mass
(ii) Negative.
converted into energy (or vice versa)? Explain giving
(c) Using the curve for the binding energy per
one example.
nucleon as a function of mass number A, state clearly
16. Calculate the energy in fusion reaction:
how the release of energy in the processes of nuclear
2 2 3
1 H +1 H → 2 He + n, fission and nuclear fusion can be explained
Where B.E, of 12 H = 2.23MeV and of
3
2 He = 7.73MeV Section-E (5 Marks Questions)
24. Explain the principle and working of a nuclear
reactor with the help of a labelled diagram.
NUCLEI 249

25. The Q value of a nuclear reaction A + b → c + d is m ( 11 H ) = 1.007825u

defined by Q = [ mA + mb − mc − md ] c 2
where the
m ( 12 H ) = 2.014102u
masses refer to the respective nuclei. Determine from
the given data the Q-value of the following reactions m ( 13 H ) = 3.016049u
and state whether the reactions are exothermic or m ( 42 He ) = 4.0026.3u
endothermic.
m ( 12
6 C ) = 12.000000u
(i) 11 H +13 H →12 H +12 H
m ( 10
20
Ne ) = 19.992439u
(ii) 12
6 C +12 20 4
6 C →10 Ne + 2 He

Atomic masses are given to be

250 NUCLEI

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section - A (Single Choice Questions) (a) 138 protons and 88 neutrons
(b) 138 neutrons and 88 protons
1. The mass number of a nucleus is (c) 226 protons and 88 electrons
(a) Always less than its atomic number (d) 226 neutrons and 138 electrons
(b) Always more than its atomic number 10. Radius of 42 He nucleus is 3 Fermi. The radius of
(c) Always equal to its atomic number
(d) Sometimes more than and sometimes equal to its
206
82 Pb nucleus will be
atomic number (a) 5 Fermi (b) 6 Fermi
2. The energy equivalent of 1 kilogram of matter is (c) 11.16 Fermi (d) 8 Fermi
about 11. Isotopes are atoms having
(a) 10−15 J (b) 1 J (a) Same number of protons but different number of
(c) 10−12 J (d) 1017 J neutrons
(b) Same number of neutrons but different number of
3. Nuclear binding energy is equivalent to
protons
(a) Mass of proton (b) Mass of neutron
(c) Same number of protons and neutrons
(c) Mass of nucleus (d) Mass defect of nucleus
(d) None of the above
4. If the binding energy of the deuterium is 2.23 MeV.
12. In a radioactive substance at t = 0 , the number of
The mass defect given in a.m.u. is
atoms is 8 × 104 . Its half life period is 3 years. The
(a) – 0.0024 (b) – 0.0012
(c) 0.0012 (d) 0.0024 number of atoms 1× 104 will remain after interval
5. The masses of neutron and proton are 1.0087 a.m.u. (a) 9 years (b) 8 years
and 1.0073 a.m.u. respectively. If the neutrons and (c) 6 years (d) 24 years
protons combine to form a helium nucleus (alpha 13. During a negative beta decay
particles) of mass 4.0015 a.m.u. The binding energy (a) An atomic electron is ejected
of the helium nucleus will be (1 a.m.u.= 931 MeV) (b) An electron which is already present within the
(a) 28.4 MeV (b) 20.8 MeV nucleus is ejected
(c) 27.3 MeV (d) 14.2 MeV (c) A neutron in the nucleus decays emitting an
6. The mass defect for the nucleus of helium is 0.0303 electron
a.m.u. What is the binding energy per nucleon for (d) A part of the binding energy is converted into
helium in MeV electron
(a) 28 (b) 7 14. The half-life period of radium is 1600 years. Its
(c) 4 (d) 1 average life time will be
7. Atomic power station at Tarapore has a generating (a) 3200 years (b) 4800 years
capacity of 200 MW. The energy generated in a day (c) 2319 years (d) 4217 years
by this station is 15. What percentage of original radioactive atoms is left
(a) 200 MW (b) 200 J after five half lives
(a) 0.3% (b) 1%
(c) 4800 × 106 J (d) 1728 × 1010 J
(c) 31% (d) 3.125%
8. The binding energy of deuteron 12 H is 1.112 MeV per
16. The half life of a radioactive element which has only
nucleon and an α − particle 42 He has a binding 1
of its original mass left after a lapse of 60 days is
energy of 7.047 MeV per nucleon. Then in the fusion 32
reaction 12 H +12 H →24 He + Q , the energy Q released (a) 12 days (b) 32 days
is (c) 60 days (d) 64 days
(a) 1 MeV (b) 11.9 MeV 17. A radioactive nucleus undergoes a series of decay
(c) 23.8 MeV (d) 931 MeV according to the scheme
A 
α
→ A1 
β
→ A 2 
α
→ A 3 
γ
→ A4
9. In 88 Ra 226 nucleus, there are
NUCLEI 251

If the mass number and atomic number of A are 180 (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
and 72 respectively, then what are these number for 23. Assertion: Distance of closest approach of α-particle
A4 to the nucleus is always greater than nucleus size.
(a) 172 and 69 (b) 174 and 70 Reason: Strongest nuclear force has very short range
(c) 176 and 69 (d) 176 and 70 (in Fermi order)
18. Atomic mass number of an element thorium is 232 (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
and its atomic number is 90. The end product of this Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
radioactive element is an isotope of lead (atomic (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
mass 208 and atomic number 82). The number of Reason is not the correct explanation of the
alpha and beta particles emitted is Assertion.
(a) α= 3, β= 3 (b) α= 6, β= 4 (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(c) α= 6, β= 0 (d) α= 4, β= 6 (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
24. Assertion: Radioactivity of 108 undecayed
19. Three α − particles and one β − particle decaying
radioactive nuclei of half-life of 50 days is equal that
takes place in series from an isotope 88 Ra 238 . Finally 1.2 × 108 number of undecayed nuclei of some other
the isotope obtained will be material with half-life of 60 days.
(a) 84 X 220 (b) 86 X 222 Reason: Radioactivity is proportional to half-life
(c) X 224 (d) X 215 (a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is
83 83
the correct explanation of assertion
20. The half-life of a radioactive substance against α-
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
decay is 1.2 × 107 s . What is the decay rate for
not the correct explanation of assertion
4 × 1015 atoms of the substance (c) If assertion is true but reason is false
(a) 4.6 × 1012 atoms / s (b) 2.3 × 1011 atoms / s (d) If both assertion and reason are false
(c) 4.6 × 1010 atoms / s (d) 2.3 × 108 atoms / s 25. Assertion: Fragments produced in the fission of U235
are radioactive.
Reason: The fragments have abnormally high proton
Section-B (Assertion & Reason Type
to neutron ratio.
Questions) (a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is
21. Assertion: Lighter elements are better moderators for the correct explanation of assertion
a nuclear reactor than heavier elements. (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
Reason: The energy transfer in a collision is the not the correct explanation of assertion
maximum when the colliding particles have equal (c) If assertion is true but reason is false
masses. (d) If both assertion and reason are false
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the 26. Assertion: The phenomenon of nuclear fission can
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. be carried out both in controlled and in an
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the uncontrolled way.
Reason is not the correct explanation of the Reason: The energy released per fission as well as
Assertion. the energy released per unit mass of the fuel in
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false. nuclear fission are both greater than the
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false. corresponding quantities for nuclear fusion.
22. Assertion: If in a nuclear fusion process, the masses (a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is
of the fusion nuclei be m1 and m 2 mass of the the correct explanation of assertion
resultant nucleus be m3 then m3 < ( m1 + m 2 ) . (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of assertion
Reason: In fusion some energy is released.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(d) If both assertion and reason are false
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
27. Assertion: Fusion of hydrogen nuclei into helium
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
nuclei is the source of energy of all stars.
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
Reason: In fusion heavier nuclei split to form lighter
Assertion.
nuclei.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
252 NUCLEI

(a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is (c) 11 protons and 13 neutrons
the correct explanation of assertion (d) 11 protons and 13 electrons
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is 31. The same radioactive nucleus may emit
not the correct explanation of assertion (a) all the three α, β and γ one after another
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false (b) all the three α, β and γ radiations simultaneously
(d) If both assertion and reason are false (c) only α and β simultaneously
28. Assertion: It is not possible to use 35 Cl as the fuel (d) only one α, β and γ at a time
for fusion energy 32. Particle which can be added to the nucleus of an atom
Reason: The binding energy of 35 Cl is too small without changing its chemical properties are called
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is (a) neutrons (b) protons
the correct explanation of assertion (c) electrons (d) alpha particles
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of assertion Case Study-2
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false Nature of γ - rays
(d) If both assertion and reason are false These are made up of γ-particles. In these, the γ-rays
photon has zero rest mass. γ-rays travels with the
Section-C (Case Study Questions) speed of light. These are electromagnetic waves. The
Case Study-1 wavelength of γ-ray photon is smaller than the X-
α – rays contain α- particles. The charge on these rays.
particles is double the charge of proton. Their charge γ-rays are not deflected by electric and magnetic
is also equal to the charge present on helium nucleus. fields. These rays does not have any charge. These
The mass of α-particles is approximately four times rays have very large penetrating power. These can
that of hydrogen atom. pass through many centimetres of lead. These rays
The velocity of α-particles is in between 1.4 x 107 have small ionising power. These can affect the
m/sec to 2.1 x 107 m/sec and it also depend upon the photographic fluorescence in willemite. These can
source. Due to large mass and large velocity, α- emit electron from the surface of a metal.
particle have large ionising power. Each α-particles
can create thousands of ions before absorption. α-
particle produce fluorescence in some substances e.g.,
zinc sulphide. α- particles can affect the photographic
plates. These are deflected by electric and magnetic
fields.

33. In a γ-ray emission from a nucleus.

(a) only the proton number changes
(b) both the neutron number and the proton number
change
(c) there is no change in the proton number and the
neutron number
29. In this disintegration series: (d) only the neutron number change
238
U 
−α
→ X 
−β A
→Z Y 34. The γ-radiation are
92
(a) e-m radiation with high energy
The value of Z and A respectively will be
(b) e-m radiation with low energy
(a) 92,236 (b) 88, 230
(c) charged particles emitted
(c) 90, 234 (d) 91, 234
(d) electrons orbiting the nucleus
30. Nucleus of an atom whose atomic mass is 24 consists
35. A nuclei having same number of neutron but different
of
number of protons/atomic number are called
(a) 11 electrons, 11 protons and 13 neutrons
(a) Isobars (b) Isomers
(b) 11 electrons, 13 protons and 11 neutrons
(c) Isotones (d) Isotopes
NUCLEI 253

36. When a nucleus in an atom undergoes a radioactive (b) It is 0.39 MeV

decay, the electronic energy levels of the atom: (c) It is less than or equal to 0.79 MeV; but we cannot
(a) do not change for any type of radioactivity be more precise.
(b) change for α, β radioactivity but not for X- (d) It is less than or equal to 0.40 MeV; but we
radioactivity cannot be more precise.
(c) change for α-radioactivity but not for others 39. Could this reaction occur?
(d) change for β-radioactivity but not for others Proton → neutron + other particles
(a) Yes, if the other particles have much more kinetic
Case Study-3 energy than mass energy.
Mass-Energy: When subatomic particles undergo (b) Yes, but only if the proton has potential energy
reactions, energy is conserved, but mass is not (due to Interactions with other particles)
necessarily conserved. However, a particle's mass (c) No, because a neutron is more massive than a
“contributes” to its total energy, in accordance with proton.
Einstein's famous equation, E = mc 2 . In this (d) No, because a proton is positively charged while a
equation, E denotes the energy carried by a particle neutron is electrically neutral.
because of its mass. The particle can also have 40. How much mass has to be converted into energy to
additional energy due to its motion and its produce electric power of 500 MW for one hour?
interactions with other particles. Consider a neutron (a) 2 × 10−5 kg (c) 1× 10−5 kg
at rest and well separated from other particles. It (c) 3 × 10−5 kg (d) 4 × 10−5 kg
decays into a proton, an electron and an undetected
third particle as given here: Neutron → proton +
electron + ???
The given table summarizes some data from a single
neutron decay. Electron volt is a unit of energy.
Column 2 shows the rest mass of the particle times
the speed of light squared.

Particle Mass × c2 Kinetic Energy

(MeV) (MeV)
Neutron 940.97 0.00
Proton 939.67 0.01
Electron 0.51 0.39
37. From the given table, which properties of the
undetected third particle can be calculated?
(a) Total energy, but not kinetic energy
(b) Kinetic energy, but not total energy
(c) Both total energy and kinetic energy
(d) Neither total energy nor kinetic energy

38. Assuming the table contains no major errors, what

can we conclude about the ( mass × c ) of the
2

undetected third particle?

(a) It is 0.79 MeV
254 NUCLEI

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. Draw a plot of the binding energy per nucleon as a 10. What is the relationship between the half-life and
function of mass number for a large number of mean life of a radioactive nucleus?
nuclei, 2 < A < 240. How do you explain the (AI 2012 & Foreign 2011)
constancy of binding energy per nucleon in the range 11. In a given sample two radioisotopes A and B are
30 < A < 170 using the property that nuclear force is initially present in the ratio of 1 : 4. The half lives of
short-ranged? A and B are respectively 100 years and 50 years.
(AI 2010) Find the time after which the amounts of A and B
2. Write symbolically the β- decay process of 15
32
P. become equal.
(AI 2010) (Foreign 2012)
3. A heavy nucleus X of mass number 240 and binding 12. In β decay, the experimental detection of neutrinos
-

energy per nucleon 7.6 MeV is split into two (or antineutrinos) is found to be extremely difficult.
fragments Y and Z of mass number 110 and 130. The (AI 2012)
binding energy of two nucleons, is 8.5. Calculate the 13. A radioactive isotope has a half life of T years. How
energy Q released per fission in MeV. long will it take the activity to reduce to 3.125% of its
(Delhi 2010) original value?
4. If both the number of protons and the number of
neutrons are conserved in a nuclear reaction like (Delhi 2012)
12 12 20 4 14. How is the radius of a nucleus related to its mass
6 C + 6 C →10 Ne + 2 He
number A?
In what way is mass converted into energy? Explain.
(AI 2013 & 2011)
(Foreign 2010)
15. Define the activity of a given radioactive substance.
5. A nucleus undergoes β- decay. How does its (i) mass Write its S.I. unit
number (ii) atomic number change? (AI 2013)
(Delhi 2011) 16. Derive the expression for the law of radioactive
6. Write any two characteristic properties of nuclear decay of a given sample having initially N0 decaying
force. to the number N present at any subsequent time t.
(AI 2011) Plot a graph showing the variation of the number of
7. State the law of radioactive decay. nuclei versus the time lapsed.
Plot a graph showing the number (N) of undecayed Mark a point on the plot in terms of T1/2 value the
nuclei as a function of time (t) for a given radioactive number present N = N0/16
sample having half life T1/2. (Foreign 2013)
Depict in the plot the number of undecayed nuclei at 17. The number of nuclei of a given radioactive sample
(i) t = 3T1/2 and (ii) t = 5T1/2 at time t = 0 and t = T are N0 and N0/n respectively.
(Delhi 2011) Obtain an expression for the half life (T1/2) of the
8. When four hydrogen nuclei combine to form a nucleus in terms of n and T.
helium nucleus estimate the amount of energy in
MeV released in this process of fusion (Neglect the (Delhi 2013)
mases of electrons and neutrons). Given 18. Write the basic nuclear process of neutron
(i) Mass of
undergoing β-decay. Why is the detection of
(ii) Mass of helium nucleus = 4.0002603 u, 1u = 931
neutrinos found very difficult?
MeV/c2
(AI 2013)
(Foreign 2011)
19. Distinguish between the phenomena of nuclear
9. How is the size or a nucleus experimentally
fission and fusion.
determined? Write the relation between the radius
(AI 2014 & 2012)
and mass number of the nucleus. Show that the
20. In both β- and β+ decay processes, the mass number
density of nucleus is independent of its mass number.
of a nucleus remains same whereas the atomic
(Delhi 2012 & 2011)
NUCLEI 255

number Z increase by one in β- decay and decreases (i) 208

84
204
Po →82 Pb + ...
by one in β+ decay. (ii) 32 32
P →16 S + ...
15
Explain giving reason.
(b) Write the basic process involved in nuclei
(Foreign 2014)
responsible for (i) β- and (ii) β+ decay.
21. (a) Deduce the expression, N = N0e for the law of
-λt,
(c) Why is it found experimentally difficult to detect
radioactive decay.
neutrinos?
(b) (i) Write symbolically the process expressing the
(AI 2015)
β+ decay 11
22
Na. of Also write the basic nuclear
30. Complete the following nuclear reactions.
process underlying this decay. (a) 10 1 4
5 B + 0 n → 2 He + ...
(ii) Is the nucleus formed in the decay of the nucleus
(b) 94
Mo +12 H →95
43 Te + ...
11 Na, an isotope or isobar?
22 42

(Delhi 2015)
(Delhi 2014)
31. (i) Write the basic nuclear process involved in the
22. The half-life of 92 U undergoing α-decay is 4.5 ×
238
emission of β+ in a symbolic form, by a radioactive
109 years. Determine the activity of 10g sample of nucleus.
92 U. Given that 1 g of 92 U contains 25.3 × 10
238 238 20
(ii) In the reactions given below:
(AI 2014) (a) 11
6 C →zy B + x + v
23. (a) Define the terms (i) half-life (T1/2) and (ii) average
(b) 12
6 C +12 20 c
6 C →a Ne + b He
life (τ). Find out their relationship with the decay
(AI 2016)
constant (λ).
32. A nucleus with mass number A = 240 and B.E./A =
(b) A radioactive nucleus has a decay constant λ =
7.6 MeV breaks into two fragments each of A = 120
0.3465 (day)-1. How long would it take the nucleus to
with B.E./A = 8.5 MeV. Calculate the released
decay to 75% of its initial amount?
energy.
(Foreign 2014)
(Delhi 2016)
24. In the study Geiger-Marsden experiment on
33. Calculate the energy in fusion reaction:
scattering of α-particles by a thin foil of gold, draw
1 H +1 H → He + n, Where B.E. of 1 H = 2.23 MeV
2 2 2

of trajectory of α-particles in the coulomb field of

target nucleus. Explain briefly how one gets the and of 32 He = 7.73 MeV.
information on the size of the nucleus from this (Delhi 2016)
study. 34. In a typical nuclear reaction, e.g.
From the relation R = R0A1/3, where R0 is constant 2
1 H +12 H →32 He +10 n + 3.27 MeV,
and A is the mass number of the nucleus, show that Although number nucleons is conserved, yet energy
nuclear matter density is independent of A. is released. How? Explain.
(Delhi 2015) (Delhi 2016 & 2013)
25. If both the number of protons and neutrons in a 35. (i) A radioactive nucleus ‘A’ undergoes a series of
nuclear reaction is conserved in what way is mass decays as given below:
converted into energy (or vice verse)? Explain giving
A  α
→ A1 β
→ A 2 
α
→ A 3 γ
→ A4
one example.
(Delhi 2015) The mass number and atomic number of A2 are 176
and 71 respectively. Determine the mass and atomic
26. Draw a plot of potential energy of a pair of nucleons
numbers of A4 and A.
as a function of their separation. Write two important
conclusion which you can draw regarding the nature (ii) Write the basic nuclear processes underlying β+
of nuclear forces. and β- decays
(AI 2015 & 2010) (Delhi 2017)
27. Write three characteristic properties of nuclear force. 36. Four nuclei of an element undergo fusion to form a
(AI 2015) heavier nucleus, with release of energy. Which of the
28. Why is it found experimentally difficult to detect two-the parent or the daughter nucleus – would have
neutrinos in nuclear β-decay? higher binding energy per nucleon?
(Foreign 2015 & AI 2014) (AI 2018)
29. (a) complete the following nuclear reactions:
256 NUCLEI

37. A radioactive isotope has a half-life of 10 years. How 38. Draw a graph showing the variation of binding
long will it take for the activity to reduce to 3.125% energy per nucleon with mass number of different
(2018) nuclei. Write any two salient features of the curve.
How does this curve explain the release of energy
both in the processes of nuclear fission and fusion?
(AI 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

NUCLEI
 13
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
258 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Chapter at a Glance
1. Semiconductors are the basic materials used in the 10. There are two distinct band of energies (called valence
present solid state electronic devices like diode, band and conduction band) in which the electrons in a
transistor, ICs, etc. material lie. Valence band energies are low as
compared to conduction band energies. All energy
levels in the valence band are filled while energy
2. Lattice structure and the atomic structure of
levels in the conduction band may be fully empty or
constituent elements decide whether a particular
partially filled. The electrons in the conduction band
material will be insulator. Metal or semiconductor.
are free to move in a solid and are responsible for the
conductivity. The extent of conductivity depends upon
3. (
−2 −8
Metals have low resistivity 10 to 10 Ωm , ) the energy gap (Eg ) between the top of valence band
(EV ) and the bottom of the conduction band EC. The
( 8 −1
insulators have very high resistivity > 10 Ωm , ) electrons from valence band can be excited by heat,
light or electrical energy to the conduction band and
while semiconductors have intermediate values of
thus, produce a change in the current flowing in a
resistivity.
semiconductor.

4. Semiconductors are elemental (Si, Ge) as well as

11. For insulators Eg > 3eV, for semiconductors Eg is 0.2
compound (GaAs, CdS, etc.).
eV to 3 eV, while for metals Eg ≈ 0.

5. Pure semiconductors are called ‘intrinsic

12. p-n junction is the ‘key’ to all semiconductor devices.
semiconductors’. The presence of charge carriers
When such a junction is made, a ‘depletion layer’ is
(electrons and holes) is an ‘intrinsic’ property of the
formed consisting of immobile ion-cores devoid of
material and these are obtained as a result of thermal
their electrons or holes. This is responsible for a
excitation. The number of electrons (ne ) is equal to
junction potential barrier.
the number of holes (nh) in intrinsic conductors. Holes
are essentially electron vacancies with an effective
positive charge. 13. By changing the external applied voltage, junction
barriers can be changed. In forward bias (n-side is
connected to negative terminal of the battery and p-
6. The number of charge carriers can be changed by
side is connected to the positive), the barrier is
‘doping’ of a suitable impurity in pure
decreased while the barrier increases in reverse bias.
semiconductors. Such semiconductors are known as
Hence, forward bias current is more (mA) while it is
extrinsic semiconductors. These are of two types (n-
very small (µA) in a p-n junction diode.
type and p-type).

14. Diodes can be used for rectifying an ac voltage

7. In n-type semiconductors, ne >> nh while in p-type
(restricting the ac voltage to one direction). With the
semiconductors nh >> ne.
help of a capacitor or a suitable filter, a dc voltage can
be obtained.
8. n-type semiconducting Si or Ge is obtained by doping
with pentavalent atoms (donors) like As, Sb, P, etc.,
15. p-n junctions have also been used to obtain many
while p-type Si or Ge can be obtained by doping with
photonic or optoelectronic devices where one of the
trivalent atom (acceptors) like B, Al, in etc.
participating entity is ‘photon’:
(a) Photodiodes in which photon excitation results in a
9. n e n h = n 2t in all cases. Further, the material possesses change of reverse saturation current which helps us to
an overall change neutrality measure light intensity:
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 259

(b) Solar cells which convert photon energy into 17. The important digital circuits performing special logic
electricity: operations are called logic gates. These are: OR,
(c) light Emitting Diode and Diode laser in which AND, NOT, NAND, and NOR gates.
electron excitation by a bias voltage result in the
generation of light. 18. In modern day circuit, many logical gates or circuits
are integrated in one single ‘Chip’. These are known
16. There are some special circuits which handle the as integrated circuits (IC).
digital date consisting of 0 and 1 levels. This forms
the subject of Digital Electronics.
260 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Solved Examples
Example–1
State the reason, why GaAs is most commonly used in
making of a solar cell
Sol. GaAs is most commonly used in making of a solar cell
because :
(i) It has high optical absorption (~ 104 cm-1) .
(ii) It has high electrical conductivity.

Example–2
Sol. (i) The semiconductor diode used is a Zener diode.
Why should a photodiode be operated at a reverse
(ii)
bias?
Sol. As fractional change in minority charge carriers is
more than the fractional change in majority charge
carriers, the variation in reverse saturation current is
more prominent.

Example–3
What happens to the width of depletion layer of a p-n
junction when it is
(i) forward biased, (iii) Zener diode as a voltage regulator
(ii) reverse biased? Principle : When a zener diode is operated in the
Sol. (i) In forward biased, the width of depletion layer of a reverse breakdown region, the voltage across it
p-n junction decreases. remains practically constant (equal to the breakdown
(ii) In reverse biased, the width of depletion layer of a voltage Vz) for a large change in the reverse current. If
p-n junction increases. the input voltage increases, the current through RS and
zener diode also increases. This increases the voltage
Example–4 drop across RS without any change in the voltage
What is the difference between an n-type and a p-type across the zener diode. This is because in the
intrinsic semiconductor? breakdown region, zener voltage remains constant
Sol. even though the current through the zener diode
n-type semiconductor p-type semiconductor changes. Similarly, if the input voltage decreases, the
The electron density The hole density (nh) is voltage across RS decreases without any change in the
(ne) is much greater than much greater than the voltage across the zener diode. Thus any
the hole density (nh), electron density (ne), increase/decrease of the input voltage results in
i.e., ne >> nh. i.e., nh >> ne. increase/ decrease of the voltage drop across
RS without any change in voltage across zener diode.
Example–5 Hence the zener diode acts as a voltage regulator
The figure shows the V-I characteristic of a semi
conductor device. Identify this device. Explain briefly, Example–6
using the necessary circuit diagram, how this device is Write the truth table for a NAND gate as shown in the
used as a voltage regulator figure.

Sol. Truth table for NAND gate

SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 261

A A Y
0 0 1
1 1 0

Example–7
Draw the output wave form at X, using the given
inputs A, B for the logic circuit shown below. Also
identify the gate.
Sol.

Example–10
Explain how a depletion region is formed is a junction
diode.
Sol. As soon as a p-n junction is formed, the majority
charge carriers begin to diffuse from the regions of
higher concentration to the regions of lower
concentrations. Thus the electrons from the n-region
diffuse into the p-region and where they combine with
the holes and get neutralized. Similarly, the holes from
the p-region diffuse into the n-region where they
Example–8 combine with the electrons and get neutralized. This
Sol. process is called electron-hole recombination.

A B A.B = Y1 Y1 = X

0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

The p-region near the junction is left with immobile -

ve ions and n-region near the junction is left with +ve
ions as shown in the figure. The small region in the
vicinity of the junction which is depleted of free
charge carriers and has only immobile ions is called
the depletion layer. In the depletion region, a potential
difference VB is created, called potential barrier as it
creates an electric field which opposes the further
diffusion of electrons and holes.
(i) In forward biased, the width of depletion region is
Example–9 decreased.
Draw the circuit diagram of an illuminated photodiode (ii) In reverse biased, the width of depletion region is
in reverse bias. How is photodiode used to measure increased.
light intensity.
Sol. A measurement of the change in the reverse. Example–11
Saturation current on illumination can give the value Mention the important considerations required while
of light intensity because photocurrent is proportional fabricating a p-n junction diode to be used as a Light
to incident light intensity. Emitting Diode (LED). What should be the order of
band gap of an LED if it is required to emit light in the
visible range?
262 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Sol. The important considerations required while Number of arsenic atoms. nAs = 5 × 1022 atoms m-3
fabricating a p-n junction diode to be used as a Light Number of indium atoms, nIn = 5 × 1020 atoms m-3
Emitting Diode (LED) are : Number of thermally-generated electrons, ni = 1.5 ×
(i) The Light Emitting efficiency is maximum. 1016 electrons m-3
(ii) The reverse breakdown voltage of LEDs are very Number of electrons, ne = 5 × 1022 – 1.5 × 1016 ≈ 4.99
low. Care should be taken that high reverse voltages × 1022
do not appear across them. Number of holes = nh
(iii) The semiconductor used for fabrication of visible, In thermal equilibrium, the concentrations of electrons
LEDs must have a band gap of 1.8 eV (spectral range and holes in a semiconductor are related us:
of visible light is from about 0.4 µm to 0.7 µm i.e.
n e n h = n i2
from about 3 eV to 1.8 eV)

⇒ nh
=
(1.5 ×10 )
16 2

≈ 4.51× 109
Example–12 4.99 × 1022
Assuming that the two diodes D1 and D2 used in the Therefore, the number of electron is approximately
electric circuit shown in the figure are ideal, find out
4.99 × 1022 and the number of hole is about 4.51 × 109.
the value of the current flowing through 1Ω resistor.
Since the number of electron (ne) is more than the
Sol. Since the diodes used are ideal, the diode D1 in number of holes (nh), the material is an n-type
forward bias will conduct the current in forward semiconductor
direction, while diode D2 in reverse bias will not allow
any current to flow. Example–15
As such 2Ω with D1 and 1Ω are in series, the net Draw the circuit diagram of a half wave rectifier and
resistance of the circuit will be 2Ω + 1Ω = 3Ω. explain its working.
Sol. A rectifier is a circuit which converts an alternating
current into direct current.
p-n diode as a half wave rectifier: A half wave
rectifier consists of a single diode as shown in the
circuit diagram. The secondary of the transformer
gives the desired a.c. voltage across A and B.
In the positive half cycle of a.c., the voltage at A is
Hence the value of the current flowing through 1Ω positive, the diode is forward biased, and it conducts
resistor = 2A. current.

Example–13
What do you mean by depletion region and potential
barrier in junction diode?
Sol. A layer around the intersection between p and n
sections of a junction diode where charge carriers,
electrons and holes are less in number is called the
depletion region.
The potential difference created due to the diffusion of
charge carriers across the junction is called the
potential barrier.

Example–14
The number of Silicon atom per m3 is 5 × 1028. This is
doped simultaneously with 5 × 1022 atoms per m3 of
Arsenic 5 × 1020 per m3 atoms of indium. Calculate the
number of electrons and holes

Sol. Number of silicon atom, N = 5 × 1028 atoms m-3

SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 263

In the negative half cycle of a.c., the voltage at A is of atoms in the silicon specimen is 5 ×1028 atom/m3,
negative, the diode is reversed biased, and it does not find the number of acceptor atoms in silicon per cubic
conduct current. centimeter.
Thus, we get output across RL during positive half Sol. The doping of one indium atom in silicon
cycles only. The output is unidirectional but varying. semiconductor will produce one acceptor atom in p-
type semiconductor. Since one indium atom has been
Example–16 dopped per 5 × 107 silicon atoms, so number density of
Give reasons for the following : acceptor atoms in silicon
(i) High reverse voltage do not appear across a LED. 5 × 1028
(ii) Sunlight is not always required for the working of = = 1021 atom/m
= 3
1015 atom/cm3
5 × 107
a solar cell.
(iii) The electric field, of the junction of a Zener diode,
Example–20
is very high even for a small reverse bias voltage of
In the given circuit. If P-N junction is ideal, then
about 5V.
calculate current flowing through it.
Sol. (i) It is because reverse breakdown voltage of LED is
very low, i.e., nearly 5V.
(ii) Solar cell can work with any light whose photon
energy is more than the band gap energy.
(iii) The heavy doping of p and n sides of pn junction
Sol. In given condition
makes the depletion region very thin, hence for a small
reverse bias voltage, electric field is very high.

Example–17
Pure Si at 300 K has hole and electron density 1.5 ×
2V
1016 m-3. Doping it by an impurity increase the hole I
⇒= = 0.01A
200
density nh to 4.5 × 1022 m-3. Find the electron density
in the doped silicon.
Ans. (c) Example–21
In the figure below, Circuit symbol of a logic gate and
Sol. n=2
i ne × nh
two input waveform ‘A’ and ‘B’ are shown.
n=
i 1.5 × 1016
n=
h 4.5 × 1022
n i2
ne =
ne
(a) Name the logic gate & write its Boolean expression
n e = 3 × 106 m −3 (b) write its truth table
(c) Give the output wave form
Example–18 Sol. (a) NAND get ; Y = A.B
A p-type semiconductor has acceptor level 57 meV (b) Truth table
above the valence band. What is maximum wavelength
of light required to create a hole? Input A Input B Output Y
hc 0 0 1
Sol. E =
λ 0 1 1
hc 6.62 × 10−34 × 3 × 108 1 0 1
⇒λ
= = = 217700Å
E 57 × 10−3 × 1.6 × 10−19 1 1 0

Example–19 (c) Output waveform

A silicon specimen is made into a p-type
semiconductor by doping on an average one indium
atom per 5 × 107 silicon atoms. If the number density
264 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Example–22 Therefore, the number of electrons is approximately

A p-n photodiode is fabricated from a semiconductor 4.99 × 1022 and the number of holes is about 4.51× 109
with band gap of 2.8 eV. Can it detect a wavelength of . Since the number of electrons is more than the
6000 nm? number of holes. the material is an n-type
[NCERT] semiconductor.
Sol. Energy band gap of the given photodiode, E g = 2.8eV n e n h = n i2
Wavelength,= λ 6000nm = 6000 × 10 m −9
n2
∴ n h =i
The energy of a signal is given by the relation: ne
hc
E=
λ =
(1.5 ×10 ) 16 2

≈ 4.51× 109 m −3
4.99 × 1022
Where, h = Planck's constant
= 6.626 × 10−34 Js
Example–24
c = speed of light
The V-I characteristic of a silicon diode is shown in
= 3 × 108 m / s the Fig. Calculate the resistance of the diode at (a) ID =
6.626 × 10−34 × 3 × 108 15 mA and (b) VD = −10 V .
E=
6000 × 10−9
= 3.313 × 10−20 J
But 1.6 × 10−19 J =
1eV
E 3.313 × 10−20 J
∴=
3.313 × 10−20
= = 0.207eV
1.6 × 10−19
The energy of signal of wavelength 6000 nm is 0.207
eV, which is less than 2.8 eV the energy band gap of a
photodiode. Hence, the photodiode cannot detect the
signal.

Example–23
The number of silicon atoms per m3 is 5 × 1028 . This is [NCERT]
doped simultaneously with 5 × 1022 atoms per m3 of Sol. Considering the diode characteristics as a straight line
between I = 10 mA to I = 20 mA passing through the
Arsenic and 5 × 1020 per m3 atoms of indium. Calculate
origin, we can calculate the resistance using Ohm’s
the number of electrons and holes. Given that
law.
n=
i 1.5 × 1016 m −3 . Is the material n-type or p-type? (a) From the curve, at I = 20 mA, V = 0.8 V, I = 10
[NCERT] mA, V = 0.7 V
∆V 0.1V
rD= = = 10Ω
∆I 10mA
Sol. Number of silicon atoms, N= 5 × 1028 atoms/m3 (b) From the curve at V = –10 V, I = –1 µA,
Number of arsenic atoms, n as = 5 × 1022 atoms/m3 Therefore,
Number of indium atoms, n ln = 5 × 1020 atoms/m3 ∆V 10V
rD = = =× 1 107 Ω
∆I 1µA
Number of thermally-generated electrons,
n=
i 1.5 × 1016 electrons/m3
Example–25
Number of electrons,
In a Zener regulated power supply a Zener diode with
n e =5 × 1022 − 1.5 × 1016 ≈ 4.99 × 1022 VZ = 6.0 V is used for regulation. The load current is
Number of holes = n h to be 4.0 mA and the unregulated input is 10.0 V.
In thermal equilibrium, the concentration of electrons What should be the value of series resistor RS?
and holes in a semiconductor are related as: [NCERT]
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 265

Sol. The value of RS should be such that the current nearest value of carbon resistor is 150 Ω. So, a series
through the Zener diode is much larger than the load resistor of 150 Ω is appropriate. Note that slight
current. This is to have good load regulation. Choose variation in the value of the resistor does not matter,
Zener current as five times the load current, i.e., IZ = what is important is that the current IZ should be
20 mA. The total current through RS is, therefore, 24 sufficiently larger than IL.
mA. The voltage drop across RS is 10.0 – 6.0 = 4.0 V.
This gives RS = 4.0V/(24 × 10–3) A = 167 Ω. The
266 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

EXERCISE – 1: Basic Subjective Questions

Section-A (1 Mark Questions)
1. Name two factors on which electrical conductivity of
a pure semiconductor at a given temperature depends.
2. Why does the conductivity of a semiconductor
increase with rise of temperature?
3. Why does a semiconductor get damaged when a (i)
heavy current flow through it?
4. The conductivity of an intrinsic semi-conductor is
very low. Why?
5. The forbidden energy band of silicon is 1.1eV. What
(ii)
does it mean?
6. What is a hole? Which type of doping creates a hole?
7. Why is germanium preferred over silicon for making
semiconductor devices?
8. Why is the conductivity of n-type semiconductor
(iii)
greater than that of the p-type semiconductor even
18. Give the symbol, and the truth table of each of the
when both of these have same level of doping?
two logic gates, obtained by using the two gate
9. Why does a potential barrier set up across a junction
combinations, shown in figure.
diode?
10. Can we measure the potential difference of a p-n
junction by connecting a sensitive voltmeter across its
terminals? (a)

Section-B (2 Marks Questions)

11. Why is a NOT gate known as an inverter?
(b)
12. C, Si and Ge have same lattice structure. Why is C a
insulator while Si and Ge are intrinsic 19. Draw the output waveform at X, using the given
semiconductors? inputs A and B for the logic circuit shown below.
13. Why are the NAND and NOR gates known as digital Also, identify the logic operation performed by this
building blocks or universal gates? circuit.
14. Draw a circuit diagram for p-n junction diode in
forward bias. Sketch the voltage-current graph for the
same.
15. What is doping in semiconductor? Why is it done?
16. Draw a circuit diagram for the reverse biased p-n
junction diode. Sketch the voltage current graph for
the same. 20. Distinguish between a conductor, a semiconductor
17. In the following diagrams, diagrams, which of the and an insulator on the basis of energy band
diodes are forward biased and which are reverse diagrams.
biased.
Section-C (3 Marks Questions)
21. Draw the output wave form (Y) of the.
(i) OR gate
(ii) NOR gate
(iii) AND gate
(iv) NAND gate
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 267

Section-E (5 Marks Questions)

24. (i) State briefly the processes involved in the
formation of p-n junction, explaining clearly how the
depletion region is formed.
(ii) Using the necessary circuit diagrams, show how
the V-I characteristics of a p-n junction are obtained
in (a) forward biasing (b) reverse biasing. How are
these characteristics made use of in rectification?
25. Describe briefly, with the help of a diagram, the role
22. In the following diagram, is the junction diode
of the two important processes involved in the
forward biased or reverse biased?
formation of a p-n junction.
(ii) Name the device which is used as a voltage
regulator. Draw the necessary circuit diagram and
explain its working.

(b) Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier

and state how it works.

Section-D (4 Marks Questions)

23. A student wants to use two p-n junction diodes to
convert alternating current into direct current. Draw
the labelled circuit diagram she would use and
explain how it works.
268 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

EXERCISE – 2: Basic Objective Questions

Section - A (Single Choice Questions)
1. At absolute zero, Si acts as:
(a) non-metal (b) metal
(c) insulator (d) None of these
2. An n-type and p-type silicon semiconductor can be
obtained by doping pure silicon with :
(a) sodium and magnesium, respectively (a) in forward biasing, the voltage across R is V
(b) phosphorus and boron, respectively (b) In forward biasing, the voltage across R is 2V
(c) boron and phosphorus, respectively (c) In reverse biasing, the voltage across R is V
(d) indium and sodium, respectively (d) In reverse biasing, the voltage across R is 2V
3. In pure form, Ge or Si, a semiconductor is called: 9. In the reverse-biased p-n junction, the current is of
(a) intrinsic semiconductor, ne = nh = ni the order of :
(b) extrinsic semiconductor, ne = nh = ni (a) ampere (b) milliampere
(c) doped semiconductor (c) microampere (d) nanoampere
(d) None of the above 10. Reverse bias applied to a junction diode
4. When two semiconductors p- and n-type are brought (a) raises the potential barrier
into contact they form a p-n junction, which acts like (b) increases the majority carriers of current
a/an: (c) increases the minority carriers of current
(a) rectifier (b)amplifier (d) lowers the potential barrier
(c) conductor (d) oscillator 11. A Zener diode differs from a p-n junction that
5. If ne is number density of electrons in conduction (a) Zener diode is made from very lightly doped p-n
band and nh is number density of holes in valence junction
band, then for an extrinsic semiconductor at room (b) Zener diode is made from a heavily doped p-n
temperature, (ni = number density of intrinsic pairs) junction
ne nh (c) Zener diode is made from a metal piece
(a) = n i2 (b) = n i2 (d) Zener diode is made from a heavily doped p-type
nh ne
semiconductor
(c) n e n h = n i2 (d) n e + n h =
n i2 12. Rectifier is used to convert :
6. In forward biasing of the p-n junction, (a) electrical energy into mechanical energy
(a) the positive terminal of the battery in connected to (b) heat energy into electrical energy
p-side and the depletion region becomes thin. (c) high voltage into low voltage
(b) the positive terminal of the battery is connected to (d) AC into DC
p -side and the depletion region becomes thick. 13. In a full-wave rectifier circuit operating from 50 Hz
(c) the positive terminal of the battery is connected to mains frequency, what is the fundamental frequency
n-side and the depletion region becomes thin. in the ripple:
(d) the positive terminal of the battery is connected to (a) 50 Hz (b) 100 Hz
n-side and the depletion region becomes thick. (c) 70 Hz (d) 25 Hz
7. Symbol of a p-n junction diode is an arrow, its 14. Major parts of a communication system are:
direction indicates: (a) transmitter and receiver
(b) receiver and communication channel
(c) transmitter and communication channel
(a) nothing its just a symbol (d) transmitter, receiver and communication channel
(b) direction of flow of electrons 15. Communication channel consists of :
(c) direction of conventional current when it is (a) transmission line (b) optical fiber
forward biased (c) free space (d) all of these
(d) direction of electric field 16. Basic components of a transmitter are :
8. For the given circuit of ideal p-n junction diode, (a) message signal generator and antenna
which of the following statement is correct? (b) modulator and antenna
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 269

(c) signal generator and modulator (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(d) message signal generator, modulator and antenna Reason is not the correct explanation of the
17. Range of frequencies allotted for commercial FM Assertion.
radio broadcast is : (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(a) 88 to 108 MHz (b) 88 to 108 kHz (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
(c) 8 to 88 MHz (d) 8 to 88 kHz 24. Assertion: An n-type semiconductor has a large
18. A digital signal possesses: number of electrons but still it is electrically neutral.
(a) continuously varying values Reason: An n-type semiconductor is obtained by
(b) only two discrete values doping an intrinsic semiconductor with a pentavalent
(c) only four discrete values impurity
(d) none of the above (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
19. Modern communication systems are : reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(a) analog circuits (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
(b) digital circuits not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) combination of analog and digital (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) none of the above (d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
20. An antenna is of height 500 m. What will be its range 25. Assertion: Semiconductors do not obey Ohm's law.
(Radius of earth is 6400 km)? Reason: Current cannot be determined by the rate of
(a) 800 km (b) 100 km flow of charge carriers.
(c) 50 km (d) 80 km (a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
Section-B (Assertion & Reason Type (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
Questions) (c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
21. Assertion: The resistivity of a semiconductor
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
increases with temperature.
26. Assertion: The energy gap between the valence band
Reason: The atoms of a semiconductor vibrate with
and conduction band is greater in silicon than in
larger amplitude at higher temperature thereby
germanium.
increasing its resistivity.
Reason: Thermal energy produces fewer minority
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
carriers in silicon than in germanium.
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
Assertion.
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
22. Assertion: Two p-n junction diodes placed back-to-
27. Assertion: Zener diode works on principle of
back, will work as a n-p-n transistor.
breakdown voltage.
Reason: The p-region of two p-n junction diodes
Reason: Current increases suddenly after breakdown
back-to-back will form the base of n-p-n transistor.
voltage.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
Reason is not the correct explanation of the
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
Assertion.
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false.
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
23. Assertion: At 0 K Germanium is a superconductor.
28. Assertion: The value of current through p-n junction
Reason: At 0 K Germanium offers zero resistance.
in the given figure will be 10 mA.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
270 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

(c) q-type (d) Both (a) and (b)

Reason: In the above figure, p-side is at higher Case Study -2

potential than n side. A logic gate is a digital circuit that follows certain
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the logical relationship between the input and output
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. voltages. There are only two voltage states 1 (high) is
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is 0 (low). A gate can have one or more inputs.
not the correct explanation of the assertion. Depending on the logical operation, there are three
(c) If the assertion is true but the reason is false. basic gates OR, AND and NOT. OR gate has two
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. inputs and the output is high if any of the input is
high. AND gate has two inputs and the output is high
Section-C (Case Study Questions) only when both the inputs are high. NOT gate has
Case Study-1 only one input and the output is the opposite of the
Light Emitting Diode (LED): LED is the inputs (for high input, low output and for low input, a
photoelectronic device which converts electrical high output)
energy into the light energy. It has heavily doped p-n
junction diode and it gives spontaneous radiation
when it is connected in forward bias. In this the upper
layer is of p-type semiconductor and lower layer is of There are two more gates we commonly use: NAND
n-type. and NOR. NAND gate is the combination of AND
To control the brightness of light emitted by LED, a and NOT. Output of AND will be reversed a new
resistance is connected in the circuit with battery. output is obtained. Similarly, NOR gate is a
The specific materials used for making LED's are combination of OR and NOT gates.
Gallium Arsenide-Phosphide (GaAsP) for yellow or
red light, Gallium-phosphide (GaP) for red or green
light etc.
LED's are used in making calculators digital watches,
burglar alarms, computers, picture phones, remote
control and traffic light etc.
Now answer the following questions:

33. For the following gate, which input combination

gives an output 1?

29. LED is a:
(a) Photo device (a) A = 0, B = 0 (b) A = 1, B = 1
(b) Electrical device (c) A = 1, B = 0 (d) B = 1
(c) Mechanical device 34. The truth table of NOR gate is:
(d) Photo electronic device
30. p-n junction diode used in LED's is:
(a) Lightly doped
(b) Moderately doped
(c) Heavily doped (a)
(d) None of these
31. The brightness of light is controlled by using
____________in the circuit.
(a) Inductor (b) Resistance (b)
(c) Capacitor (d) None of these
32. The lower layer of LED's is of__________
semiconductor.
(a) p-type (b) n-type
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 271

Electron Mobility: The electron mobility

characterises how quickly an electron can move
through a metal of semiconductor when pulled by an
electric field. There is an analogous quality for holes,
(c)
called hole mobility. A block of pure silicon at 300 K
has a length of 10 cm and an area of 1.0 cm2. A
battery of emf 2 V is connected across it. The
mobility of electron is 0.14 m2 V-1 s-1 and their
(d) number density is 1.5 × 1016 m −3 . The mobility of
35. If the input shown in the wave form is fed through a holes is 0.05 m 2 V −1s −1 .
NOT gate, what will be the output wave form? 37. The electron current is
(a) 6.72 × 10−4 A (b) 6.72 × 10−5 A
(c) 6.72 × 10−6 A (d) 6.72 × 10−7 A
38. The hole current is
(a) 2.0 × 10−7 A (b) 2.2 × 10−7 A
(c) 2.4 × 10−7 A (d) 2.6 × 10−7 A
(a)
39. The number density of donor atoms which are to be
added up to pure silicon semiconductor to produce an
n-type semiconductor of conductivity 6.4 Ω −1cm −1 is
(b) approximately (neglect the contribution of holes to
conductivity)
(a) 3 × 1022 m −3 (b) 3 × 1023 m −3
(c) (c) 3 × 1024 m −3 (d) 3 × 1021 m −3
40. When the given silicon semiconductor is doped with
indium, the hole concentration increases to
4.5 × 1023 m −3 . The electron concentration in doped
(d)
silicon is
36. Which gate has the following truth table?
(a) 3 × 109 m −3 (b) 4 × 109 m −3
A B X
0 0 1 (c) 5 × 109 m −3 (d) 6 × 109 m −3

0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
(a) AND gate (b) NAND gate
(c) NOR gate (d) OR gate

Case Study -3
272 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

EXERCISE – 3: Previous Year Questions

1. Why can't we take one slab of p-type semiconductor
and physically it to another slab of n-type
semiconductor to get p-n junction?
(AI 2010)
2. Draw the circuit diagrams of a p-n junction diode in
(i) forward bias, (ii) reverse bias. How are these
circuits used to study the V-I characteristics of a
silicon diode? Draw the typical V-I characteristics.
(AI 2010)
3. What is a light emitting diode (LED)? Mention two
important advantages of LEDs over conventional 9. Describe briefly with the help of a necessary circuit
lamps. diagram, the working principle of a solar cell.
(AI 2010) (b) Why are Si and GaAs preferred materials for solar
4. Draw V-I characteristics of a Zener diode. cells? Explain.
(b) Explain with the help of a circuit diagram, the use (AI 2011)
of a zener diode as a voltage regulator. 10. Describe briefly, with the help of a diagram, the role
(c) A photodiode is operated under reverse bias of the two important processes involved in the
although in the forward bias the current is known to formation of a p-n junction.
be more than the current in the reverse bias. Explain (AI 2012)
giving reason. 11. Explain the formation of depletion region for p-n
(Foreign 2010) junction diode. How does the width of this region
5. Name the important process that occur during the change when the junction is (i) forward biased, (ii)
formation of a p-n junction. Explain briefly, with the reverse biased?
help of a suitable diagram, how a p-n junction is (AI 2012)
formed. Define the term 'barrier potential'. 12. Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier using
(Foreign 2011) p-n junction diode. Explain its working and show the
6. What happens to the width of depletion layer of a p-n output, input waveforms.
junction when it is (i) forward biased, (ii) reverse (AI 2012)
biased? 13. How does a light emitting diode (LED) work? Give
(AI 2011) two advantages of LED's over the conventional
7. Draw the circuit diagrams showing how a p-n incandescent lamps.
junction diode is (i) forward biased and (ii) reverse (Foreign 2012)
biased. How is the width of layer affected in the two 14. (a) Why are Si and GaAS preferred materials for
cases? fabrication in solar cells?
(AI 2011) (b) Draw V-I characteristic of solar cell and mention
8. The given figure below shows the V-I characteristic its significance.
of a semiconductor diode. (AI 2012)
(i) Identify the semiconductor diode used. 15. Name the device which is used as a voltage regulator.
(ii) Draw the circuit diagram to obtain the given Draw the necessary circuit diagram and explain its
characteristic of this device. working.
(iii) Briefly explain how this diode can be used as a (AI 2012)
voltage regulator. 16. (a) Why is a zener diode considered as a special
(AI 2011) purpose semiconductor diode?
(b) Draw the V-I characteristic of a zener diode and
explain briefly how reverse current suddenly
increases at the breakdown voltage. (c) Describe
briefly with the help of a circuit diagram how a zener
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 273

diode works to obtain a constant d.c. voltage from the 26. Distinguish between a metal and an insulator on the
unregulated d.c. output of a rectifier. basis of energy band diagrams.
(Foreign 2012) (Foreign 2014)
17. Distinguish between an intrinsic semiconductor and a
p-type semiconductor. Give reason why a p-type 27. Draw a plot showing the variation of resistivity of a
semiconductor is electrically neutral, although (i) conductor and (ii) semiconductor, with the
n h >> n e . increase in temperature.
(Foreign 2013) (Delhi 2014)
18. Explain, how the heavy doping of both p and n-side 28. Write any two distinguishing features between
of a p-n junction diode results in the electric field of conductors, semiconductors and insulators on the
the junction being extremely high even with a reverse basis of energy band diagrams.
bias voltage of a few volts. (AI 2014)
(Foreign 2013) 29. Draw energy band diagrams of an n-type and p-type
19. Define the terms 'depletion layer' and 'barrier semiconductor at temperature T > 0 K. Mark the
potential' for a p-n junction. How does (i) an increase donor and acceptor energy levels with their energies.
in the doping concentration and (ii) biasing across the (Foreign 2014)
junction, affect the width of the depletion layer? 30. Draw the circuit arrangement for studying the V-I
(AI 2013) characteristics of a p-n junction diode in (i) forward
20. (i) With the help of a labelled circuit diagram, explain and (ii) reverse bias. Briefly explain how the typical
how a junction diode is used as a full wave rectifier. V-I characteristics of a diode are obtained and draw
Draw its input, output wave-forms. these characteristics.
(ii) How do you obtain steady d.c. output from the (AI 2014)
pulsating voltage? 31. (a) Why is zener diode fabricated by heavily doping
(Delhi 2013) both p - and n-sides of the junction?
21. Draw the circuit diagram of a p-n diode used as a (b) Draw the circuit diagram of zener diode as a
half-wave rectifier. Explain its working. voltage regulator and briefly explain its working.
(AI 2013) (Foreign 2014)
22. The graph shown in the figure represents a plot of 32. (a) How is a photodiode fabricated?
current versus voltage for a given semiconductor. (b) Briefly explain its working. Draw its V-I
Identify the region, if any, over which the characteristics for two different intensities of
semiconductor has a negative resistance. illumination.
(2013) (Foreign 2014)
33. Write briefly the important processes that occur
during the formation of p-n junction.
With the help of necessary diagrams, explain the term
barrier potential.
(Foreign 2015)
34. Explain briefly, with the help of circuit diagram, the
working of a full wave rectifier. Draw its input and
23. What is the function of a photodiode? output waveforms.
(AI 2013) (Delhi 2015)
24. Explain, with the help of a circuit diagram, the 35. With what considerations in view, a photodiode is
working of a photodiode. Write briefly how it is used fabricated? State its working with the help of a
to detect the optical signals. suitable diagram.
(Delhi 2013) Even though the current in the forward bias is known
25. (a) Mention the important considerations required to be more than in the reverse bias, yet the
while fabricating a p-n junction diode to be used as a photodiode works in reverse bias. What is the reason?
light emitting diode (LED). (Delhi 2015)
(b) What should be the order of band gap of an LED
if it is required to emit light in the visible range?
(Delhi 2013)
274 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

36. The V-I characteristic of a silicon diode is as shown 44. A zener diode is fabricated by heavily doping both p-
in the figure. Calculate the resistance of the diode at and n-sides of the junction. Explain, why? Briefly
(i) I = 15 mA and (ii) V = −10 V explain the use of zener diode as a d c voltage
(2015) regulator with the help of a circuit diagram.
(Delhi 2017)
45. (a) In the following diagram, which bulb out of B1
and B2 will glow and why?

(b) Draw a diagram of an illuminated p-n junction

solar cell.
(c) Explain briefly the three processes due to which
37. Explain with the help of the diagram the formation of generation of emf takes place in a solar cell.
depletion region and barrier potential in a p-n (AI 2017)
junction. 46. (a) In the following diagram ' S ' is a semiconductor.
(AI 2016) Would you increase or decrease the value of R to
38. Draw the circuit diagram of a half wave rectifier and keep the reading of the ammeter A constant when S is
explain its working. heated? Give reason for your answer.
(AI 2016)
39. (a) Describe the working principle of a solar cell.
Mention three basic processes involved in the
generation of emf.
(b) Why are Si and GaAs preferred materials for solar
cells?
(Foreign 2016)
40. Explain briefly with the help of necessary diagrams,
(b) Draw the circuit diagram of a photodiode and
the forward and the reverse biasing of a p-n junction
explain its working. Draw its I-V characteristics.
diode. Also draw their characteristic curves in the
(AI 2017)
two cases.
47. Draw the energy band diagram of (i) n-type, and (ii)
(Delhi 2017)
p-type semiconductors at temperatures T > 0 K .
41. In the following diagram, is the junction diode
In the case of n-type Si-semiconductor, the donor
forward biased or reverse biased?
energy level is slightly below the bottom of
(2017)
conduction band whereas in p-type semiconductor,
the acceptor energy level is slightly above the top of
42. Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier and valence band. Explain, giving examples, what role do
state how it works. these energy levels play in conduction and valence
(AI 2017) bands.
43. Name the junction diode whose I-V characteristics (AI 2019)
are drawn below : 48. Draw the circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier and
(2017) explain its working. Also, give the input and output
waveforms.
(Delhi 2019)
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 275

49. (a) Three photo diodes D1 , D 2 and D3 are made of 50. With what considerations in view is a photodiode
fabricated? Explain its working with the help of a
semiconductors having band gaps of 2.5eV, 2eV and
suitable diagram. With the help of V-I characteristics,
3eV respectively. Which of them will not be able to state how photodiode is used to detect optical signals.
detect light of wavelength 600 nm ? (AI 2019)
(b) Why photodiodes are required to operate in
reverse bias? Explain.
(Delhi 2019)

Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book.

SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND

COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
276 ANSWER KEY

Answer Key
CHAPTER 1: ELECTRIC CHARGES & FIELDS
Exercise–1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise–2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions

4. 0 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (d)

9. (a) 0° ,(b) 180° . 5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b)

9. (a) 10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (a)
14. 30 Nm 2 C−1 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (d)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (c)
1 q 3
15. (i) , (ii) 30° 21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (c) 24.(a)
4πε0 a 2
25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28.(a)
18. 2.2 × 108 Nm 2 / C 29. (c) 30. (a) 31. (d) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (c) 36. (b)
21. 6 × 10−3 N
37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (b)
22. 2.26 × 105 Nm 2 C−1

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
2Q 1
15. − 16. 17. (i) 3 Nm 2 C−1 , (ii) 1.5 Nm 2 C−1 . 18. 2a 3ε0 25. 25 Nm 2 C−1
ε0 4

−Q Q
29. 0 30. (ii) 30 Nm 2 C−1 . 49. Repulsive 51. (i) , (ii) .
4πR12 4πR 22
ANSWER KEY 277

Answer Key
CHAPTER 2: ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions EXERCISE– 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1. zero 2. zero 3. Zero 1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c)
7. 60 N/C 9. – 2 kJ 10. (i) No (ii) zero 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (d) 8. (c)
9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (d)
11. C/3, 3C 16. 1 : 9 21. (i) 5/14 m (ii) –1.44J
13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (d)
23. 1.39 µF 25. (i) 2 µF (ii) 600 µC 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (a)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (d)
29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (a) 32. (a)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (b) 36. (a)
37. (a) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (d)

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1
17. Zero 18. 10 V A 1.13 × 109 m 2
19.= 21. 9µF and
9
23. 4E 29. ∆U =3 × 10−6 J 34. W = 0.630 J
38. (i) 180V, 2µF (ii) 600µC 45. (i) 17.7 × 10−11 F (ii) 17.7 × 10−9 C (iii) 10.62 × 10−8 C

58. (i) 0.86µF (ii) 21 J = 1.5 × 10−8 J

59. U 60. 7.5 nJ, 30nJ and 1200pC
278 ANSWER KEY

Answer Key
CHAPTER 3: CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions EXERCISE– 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
3. 1Ω 1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (d)
5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (b)
9. 24 × 103 Ω ± 20%
9. (c) 10. (d) 11. (a) 12. (b)
17. 2.25 V 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (d)
19. 5 Ω, − 1 V 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (b)
23. (i) 7/3 (ii) 210 cm 21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (d)
25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (d)
29. (a) 30. (d) 31. (a) 32. (a)
33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (b) 36. (d)
37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (a)
ANSWER KEY 279

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1. 1 : 2 3. 4 : 1 5. 2 : 3
10
10. (a) R AD = 7Ω (b)
= VAB 4V,
= VCD 8V 11. =
r Ω
9
2 7 9
12.=
(b) I1 = A, I 2 A=
and I3 A
13 13 13
5
13. (i) The equivalent resistance of the network is Ω , (ii) The total current in the network is 12 A.
6
4
14. R =
4 Ω and S =
6Ω 24. (i) 1.4 volt (ii) r = 5Ω 27. 1V 28. (i) 1V (ii) A
3
11000 4000 39000
30. R P = 6Ω 42. (i) R= 17Ω (ii) V = 8.5V=
43. I3 = mA, I 2 = mA, I1 mA
172 215 860
46. R = 5Ω VBE = 1V 48. R = 2Ω VAD = 3V 51. v d ≈ 1mm s −1 57. I = 5A
63. (i) shunt resistance is 0.2Ω , (ii) Combined resistance of the ammeter and the shunt,=
R 0.16Ω
3
64. I1 = − A 65. (i) ε =6.5V (ii) r = 1 Ω 66. I = 0.5A
4
69. R 2 =
12 Ω and R1 =
8Ω 79. v d ≈ 1mm s −1 83. P = 9W 85. ε =1.6V
86. ε =2.25V 89. P = 320W 96. VAD = 9 volt 98. I = 2A

109. εeq= 1.7V, req= 0.12Ω

280 ANSWER KEY

Answer Key
CHAPTER 4: MOVING CHARGES & MAGNETISM
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise – 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (b)
3µ0 NIa 2
13. B = 17. 20 cm 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (d)
( )
3/2
2 r2 + a2 9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (c)
13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (b)
18. (i) 0.15Ω , (ii) 0.12Ω 21. 5.3 × 10−7 N 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (c)
22. 10mΩ 21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (d)
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (a)
29. (c) 30. (a) 31. (a) 32. (c)
33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (b) 36. (a)
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (a)
ANSWER KEY 281

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1 evr
2. ĵ 3. 4. M = 10. 1 : 1
2 2
11. 1 : 1 15. ( 2.95 KΩ ) 20. 1 : 2

21. (i) 0.14 T, (ii) θ = 0° 22. 4.44 × 10−7 N 28. (b) 4.69 × 10−4 A 39. 5.33 × 10−7 N
40. 1Nm, θ = 0° 42. 1.77µs 43. 0.65 T

44. (i) 1.28 Am2, (ii) 4.8 × 10−2 Nm .

V V 2V
45. R1 = − G, R 2 = − G, R 3 = − G, G =R1 − 2R 2
Ig 2Ig Ig
R G µ0
46. − 55. 10µ0 56. 58. Electros
2 2 R
d
61. 25.6 × 10−19 N 62. , No 63. (i) 1 : 1 : 2, =
(ii) rP 5cm,
= rd 5 2cm,
= rα 5cm
3
64. b) 0.01Ω 65. b) 40Ω
282 ANSWER KEY

Answer Key
CHAPTER 5: MAGNETISM AND MATTER
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise – 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

DIRECTION FOR USE
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (d)
7. (i) Becomes half, (ii) Becomes half 8.
5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (b)
45°
9. (c) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. 8 × 105 Am −1 14. 4.39 × 10−3 T 15. 4.48 T 18. 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (b)
72.8 Am-1 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (d) 24. (d)
20. (b) 1.05 × 1023 Am 2 21. (b) 0.52 G
25. (d) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (b)
23. (a) 0.388 G, (b) East to West 29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (a)
C 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (b)
25. (a) χ = , (b)
T − TC 37. (b) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (b)

8.65 × 1010 atoms,8.0 × 10−13 Am 2 ,8.0 × 105 Am −1

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1. 1 : 2, 60° 7. 45° 8. 0.8 G 15. (i) 0° , (ii) 90°
19. (i) zero, (ii) 90° 29. 2B 33. (a) (i) 1.32 J, (ii) 3.96 J (b) zero
ANSWER KEY 283

Answer Key
CHAPTER 6: ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions EXERCISE– 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions

20. 5 MH 21. 30 Wb 23. 1.39 × 10−5 V 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b)

5. (d) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a)
9. (a) 10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (d)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (b)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (d)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (d)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a)
29. (c) 30. (b) 31. (c) 32. (d)
33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (c) 36. (d)
37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (c)

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
13. L = 4.0H 28. 3.14 × 10−5 V 30. 1 V and 0.2 A
V1 4 I1 3 E 3 5
40. (i) = (ii) = (iii) 1 = 50. (i) B=
V × 10−4 T (ii) V′ ≅ 5.4 V
V2 3 I2 4 E2 4 3
51. (i) 4 × 10−3 Wb , (ii) 2 × 10−3 V , (iii) 2 × 10−2 A 56. (ii) 30 Wb
58. (ii) 7.5µV 63. 1.5 mV 69. 1.44 V
72. (b) (i) 0.471V (ii) 0.022 W 74. (i) 0.2 V (ii) 0.1 A
284 ANSWER KEY

Answer Key
CHAPTER 7: ALTERNATING CURRENT & ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise – 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
3. 60° 9. 1.5 A 12. 10.4 A 1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (c)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (c)
13. 2000 Watt
9. (c) 10. (c) 11. (a) 12. (d)
14. 4.6V 16. 28.28 A 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (c)
20. (i) 100, (ii) 5A, (iii) 22000 V 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (c)
=
21. (i) 0.67 cm, (ii) ( )
E Z 2400sin 2 × 1011 t + 300πx Vm −1
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (b)
29. (b) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (d)
−1  4 
24. (a) 5Ω , (b) −53.1° or tan  −  , (c) 4800 Watt, (d) 0.6 33. (d) 34. (a) 35. (b) 36. (b)
 3
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (b)
ANSWER KEY 285

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions

1. 0.707 I0 2. (i) Capacitor, (ii) Inductor 4. (a) 250 Hz, (b) 4 2 A

E0
7. (i) 45 kW, (ii) 250 V, (iii) 180 A 8. (i) (ii) Zero
2
10. (i) 26.5Ω , (ii) 48Ω , (iii) 2.95 A 14. (c) 10 16. 400
V
20. (i) 50Hz, (ii) , (iii) 2A 22. 100 24. (i) 484Ω , (ii) 0.45A 30. (i) 700V, (ii) 5A
2
35. (b) 484Ω 37. 2A 51. (i) 30.15, (ii) Zero 53. 60°
1
55. (i) 39.80 Hz, (ii) 2A 56. 57. (iv) 2.5 A
2
1
58. (ii) a) 10000, b) 5A, c) 22000N, d) A , e) 1100 W 60. b) 300
20
63. (b) 39.80 Hz i) 2A, ii) 2000Ω , 2000Ω 64. (b) 18000 kW 89. (a) x-rays, (b) Microwaves
286 ANSWER KEY

Answer Key
CHAPTER 8: RAY OPTICS & OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
Exercise–1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise–2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
2. 2v cos θ 3. 3 feet 4. µ1 =µ 4 5. 1.5 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c)
5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (d)
6. 62° 7. 60° 8. 98° 9. f
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (c)
12. −63.75cm 13. 1.5 14. 30° 15. 7.5cm 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (a)
17. -30 18. (i) 5D, (ii) -10 cm 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (d)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24.(d)
19. Diverging lens 20.5 cm
25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28.(a)
22. 45° 25. (a) 150, (b) 20cm 29. (b) 30. (a) 31. (b) 32. (d)
33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (d)
37. (d) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (b)
Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
4. (a) (i) Diverging lens, (ii) Converging lens, (b) (i) f A = −5.5f air (ii) f B = 3.91f air 5. (i) 1500, (ii) 13.74 cm
f1f 2
8. Medium A 9. 50 cm 10. L1 & L 2 = 60cm , L 2 & L3 = Any value 16.
f 2 − f1
17. (a) (i) -28, (ii) -33.6, (b) 145 cm 20. 30 cm from convex mirror 21. -15cm
22. 16.67 cm to right of convex mirror 29. 11.67 cm 30. -5cm 32. (b) 100 cm
36. 5.093 × 1014 Hz, 4.43 × 10−7 m, 2 × 108 m / s 38. 22cm 39. 2.12 × 108 m / s 46. 6cm
47. 10 cm 48. (b) ∞
ANSWER KEY 287

Answer Key
CHAPTER 9: WAVE OPTICS
Exercise–1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise–2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c)
5. 6.1× 10−6 rad 6. 0.192 mm 7. 6β 8. 9 : 4
5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (d) 8. (c)
9. 6 cm 10. 12.5% 11. 2β 9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (c)
D ( µ − 1) t K 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c)
13. 80µm 15. 16. 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (c)
d 2
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (a)
3 25. (d) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (a)
17. 0.16° 18. 2.4 mm 19. 99 20.
4 29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (d) 32. (b)
3 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (d) 36. (b)
21. 1.5 22. 23. (c) 4.5 mm 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (d)
8
Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
3I0
3. 708.75 nm 5. 18 mm 6. (a) sin −1 ( 0.75 ) , (b) tan −1 (1.33) . 7. ( b )
16
8. 720 nm, 9 9. (b) 12 mm 11. (i) 18 mm, (ii) 6 mm 16. (b) 45° 19. 2 × 10−4 m
3 3
22. (b) 16 :1 23. (b) P1 = I0=
/ 2 , P2
= I0 , P3 I0 36. tan −1 (1.5 )
32 8
38. (a) 34, 43. (b) Two maxima & 1 minim
288 ANSWER KEY

ANSWER KEY
CHAPTER 10: DUAL NATURE OF MATTER AND RADIATION
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise– 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b)
7. 24 × 10−19 J or 1.5eV 10. 2 2 :1
5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (d)
15. 6 : 5 16. 0.123 nm 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (b)
18. 6.6 × 10−34 Js 19. 0.67 nm 20. 5.2 eV 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (c)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (c)
23. (a) 4.31 µeV (b) 2.36 neV
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (c)
25. (d) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (b)
29. (c) 30. (a) 31. (a) 32. (b)
33. (a) 34. (b) 35. (c) 36. (b)
37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (b)

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
8. 1.67 × 10−27 kg 9. (i) 6.6 × 10−25 kg ms −1 , (ii) 1.98 × 10−16 J , (iii) 2.39 × 10−19 J

24. 5.49 × 10−12 m 28. 6.56 × 10−34 Js 30. (i) 8 : 1 (ii) 4 : 1 32. 1 : 2
1
35. (i) Metal Q (ii) 2.47 eV (iii) 0.825 eV 43.
2 2
ANSWER KEY 289

ANSWER KEY
CHAPTER 11: ATOMS
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise– 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
8. Zero 11. 3 : 4 12. 1 : 2 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (b)
5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (b)
13. 4.77 × 10−10 m 18. 5.6 × 1014 Hz 9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (d)
19. 2.55eV 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (c)
20. (i) 3.32 × 10−25 kgms −1 (ii) 621.5 eV (iii) 1.52 eV 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (b)
21. 8.48 × 10−10 m, 1.36 × 10−9 m 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (d)
29. (a) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (d)
22. 2.6 × 1074 23. (a) +3.4 eV (b) -6.8 eV
33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (d) 36. (a)
37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (c)

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
2. 4 : 1 5. 32:5 7. (i) 1.5 eV (ii) -3.0 eV (iii) 1025Å 13. 4875Å 25. 656 nm
27. 3.3 × 10−12 m 33. 0.67 nm 40. 912.6Å 42. 3653.6Å 44. 3 × 1015 Hz 48. 3.03 × 10−16 s
50. 3 : 4
290 ANSWER KEY

ANSWER KEY
CHAPTER 12: NUCLEI
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise– 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
12. 425 MeV 13. 1 : 2 16. 3.27 MeV 1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (d)
5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (c)
20. 4.9 × 104 years
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (a) 12. (a)
25. (i) −4.0334MeV (ii) 4.618377MeV 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (a)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (d)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (c)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (d) 32. (a)
33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (c) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (a

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
3. 216 MeV 8. 26.72 MeV 11. 200 years 22. 1.237 × 105 bequerel
23. (b) 0.823 days 32. 216 MeV 33. 3.27 MeV 37. 50 years
ANSWER KEY 291

ANSWER KEY
CHAPTER 13: SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Exercise – 1: Basic Subjective Questions Exercise– 2: Basic Objective Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
17. (i) Forward biased, (ii) Reverse biased, 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (a)
5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a)
(iii) Reverse biased, (iv) Forward biased
9. (c) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. (a)NAND (b) NOR 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (d)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (d)
21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (d) 24. (b)
25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (b)
29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (d) 36. (b)
37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (a) 40. (c)

Exercise – 3: Previous Year Questions

DIRECTION FOR USE

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions
36. (i) 10Ω (ii) 1.0 × 107 Ω
 Creating Impact at Scale

65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views

49 Million+ 40+ Countries

Monthly Where Students
Web + App Visitors Take Live Classes

25 Million+ 26 Million+
Monthly Active Hours of
Users Live Learning

25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
 Our Results Speak for Us

JEE Main 2023

170
Vedantu Students
JEE Scored Above 99%ile

1000+ Vedantu Students Scored

Above 90%ile

JEE Advanced 2022 JEE Advanced 2021

2700+ Vedantu Students Cleared JEE Main in 2022

1500+ Vedantu Students Cleared JEE Adv. 2022 1500+ Vedantu Students Cleared JEE Adv. 2021

NEET (UG) 2022 NEET (UG) 2021

1000+ Vedantu Students Qualified NEET 2022 1172+ Vedantu Students Qualified NEET 2021

CBSE Class 12 ISC Class 12 CBSE Class 10

Annmary
Aatman Upreti Shreya Roshan Aastha N Raj Gitanjali Rajulal Shreya Nigam Khushi Arora Anshika Singha
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%

ICSE Class 10

M.D.Sriya Varshil J Patel Mohammad Y Devika Sajeev Sakshi Semwal Aloki Upadhyay Ishita Surana Saumya Gupta

99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%

#HereForRealAchievers